all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals | photos |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 4 |
|
Install Guide | Users Manual | 152.86 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Manual 1 | Users Manual | 2.87 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Manual 2 | Users Manual | 1.29 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 |
|
User manual | Users Manual | 698.85 KiB | June 06 2012 / June 09 2012 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
User manual II | Users Manual | 2.47 MiB | June 06 2012 / June 09 2012 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
User manual III | Users Manual | 3.10 MiB | June 06 2012 / June 09 2012 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
User manual IV | Users Manual | 1.45 MiB | June 06 2012 / June 09 2012 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Users Manual 1 | Users Manual | 526.24 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Users Manual 2 | Users Manual | 2.85 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Int. photo | Internal Photos | 1.03 MiB | June 06 2012 / June 09 2012 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Int. photo II | Internal Photos | 1.80 MiB | June 06 2012 / June 09 2012 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Ext. photo | External Photos | 1.48 MiB | June 06 2012 / June 09 2012 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
label loc. | ID Label/Location Info | 604.15 KiB | June 06 2012 / July 06 2012 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Class II permisive chage req. | Cover Letter(s) | 34.49 KiB | June 06 2012 / July 06 2012 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Confid. | Cover Letter(s) | 62.24 KiB | June 06 2012 / July 06 2012 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Decl. of Auth | Cover Letter(s) | 21.08 KiB | June 06 2012 / July 06 2012 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Model Dec. | Cover Letter(s) | 12.97 KiB | June 06 2012 / July 06 2012 | |||
1 2 3 4 | Test Setup Photos | June 06 2012 / June 09 2012 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 | Test Report | June 06 2012 / July 06 2012 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | External Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Internal Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Attestation Statements | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Cover Letter(s) | June 09 2011 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 | Internal Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Internal Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Attestation Statements | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 | RF Exposure Info |
1 2 3 4 | Install Guide | Users Manual | 152.86 KiB |
Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. Notice The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied. Table of Contents Getting to Know the EM820W .................................................................. 3 Requirements for the PC ......................................................................... 4 Preparing the EM820W ........................................................................... 4 Installation Guide .................................................................................. 5 i Thank you for purchasing Huawei EM820W HSPA+
Embedded PC Module. Note:
This manual briefly describes the preparation, the process for installing/uninstalling, and safety precautions for using Huawei EM820W HSPA+ Embedded PC Module (hereinafter referred to as the EM820W).
You are recommended to read the manual before using the EM820W.
The signal strength and the transmission rate are affected by the actual environment. 2 Getting to Know the EM820W The following figure shows the appearance of the EM820W. The actual product may differ.
Mini PCI Express connector It is used to connect the EM820W to the WWAN Mini PCI Express interface of the PC.
Screw holes They are used to fix the EM820W on the main board of the PC with screws. 3
Antenna interfaces They are used to connect antennas. Requirements for the PC To use the EM820W, the PC must meet the following requirements:
WWAN Mini PCI Express interface.
Windows 2000 SP4, Windows XP SP2, and Windows Vista
The hardware of your PC must meet or exceed the recommended system requirements for the installed version of OS.
Display resolution: 800 600 or above.
The antenna gain850M<4.28dBi1900M<3.0 dBi Preparing the EM820W Locate the WWAN Mini PCI Express interface on the main board of the PC. Find the main antenna and the auxiliary antenna. If a USIM/SIM card is provided by your service provider, insert the USIM/SIM card into the USIM/SIM card slot on the main board of the PC. Note:
In certain cases, your PC may be disassembled only by the professionals.
Before you install the EM820W onto the main board of the PC, consult the PC manufacturer or read the user manual of the PC. 4 Installation Guide Installing the EM820W onto the Main Board of the PC 1. Insert the Mini PCI Express connector of the EM820W into the WWAN Mini PCI Express interface on the main board of the PC. 2. Press downwards to fix the EM820W in the module slot. 5 3. Use a screwdriver to fix the EM820W onto the main board of the PC with two screws provided in the EM820W packing box. 6 4. Insert the connector of the main antenna into the MAIN antenna interface (M) of the EM820W according to the indication on the label of the EM820W. Insert the connector of the auxiliary antenna into the AUX antenna interface (A) of the EM820W in the same way. Note:
Insert the antenna connectors vertically into the antenna interfaces of the EM820W.
Do not pinch the antenna cable or damage the connectors. Otherwise, the wireless performance of the EM820W may be reduced or the EM820W cannot work normally.
Ensure that the antenna cables are routed through the channel in the frame of the PC and do not lay across the raised edges of the frame. 7 Removing the EM820W from the Main Board of the PC 1. Disconnect the antenna cables from the EM820W. You can lift the connectors with a small screwdriver. 2. Remove the two screws with the screwdriver. 8 3. Slide backwards the two clips to release the EM820W from the slot. Then, lift up the EM820W. Installing the EM820W Software A disk is provided in the EM820W packing box. The disk contains the management program and the driver of the EM820W. 1. Insert the disk into the disk drive of the PC. 2. The OS automatically starts the installation wizard. Note:
If the auto-run program does not respond, find the AutoRun.exe file under the disk path. Then double-click AutoRun.exe to run the program. 3. Follow the prompts of the installation wizard. 4. After the program is installed, the shortcut icon of the management program is displayed on the desktop. 9 Uninstalling the Management Program 1. Choose Start > Control Panel. 2. Find the management program, and click Add/Remove Program to uninstall the management program. Note:
It is recommended to restart the PC after the uninstallation to ensure that the management program is completely uninstalled.
10
1 2 3 4 | Manual 1 | Users Manual | 2.87 MiB |
Dell Streak 7 User's Manual COMMENT Notes, Cautions, and Warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your device. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates potential damage to hardware or loss of data if instructions are not followed. WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. ____________________ Information in this document is subject to change without notice. 2010 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell and the DELL logo are trademarks of Dell Inc. Adobe Acrobat is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated which may be registered in certain jurisdictions; Microsoft, Windows, Microsoft Office Word, Microsoft Office Excel, and Microsoft Office PowerPoint, are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. November 2010 A00 Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1) this device may not cause harmful interference and 2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Contents 1 Dell Streak 7 Tablet Features . . . . . . . 7 2 Setting Up Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Getting Your Device Ready for Use . . . . . . . . 11 Turning On Your Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Turning Off Your Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Turning Off the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 3 Understanding Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet 14
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Out-Of-Box Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Touch Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Screen Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Applications, Widgets, and Shortcuts . . . . . . 17 The Dell Stage Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Dell Stage Widgets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Quick Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Navigating the Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Contents 3 4 Using Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet . . . . 36 Managing Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Pop-up Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Android Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Google Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Power Control Widget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Managing Your Device Settings . . . . . . . . . . 51 5 Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Connecting to the Internet. . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Browsing the Internet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 E-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Web Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Synchronizing Your Google Data . . . . . . . . 106 6 Customizing Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Sound and Ringtone Settings . . . . . . . . . . 108 Date, Time, and Time Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Language Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 4 Contents 7 Protecting Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Protect Your Device Data With a Screen Unlock Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Protect Your Device Data With a PIN . . . . . . 114 Protect Your Device Data With a Password . . 115 Protect Your SIM Card With the SIM Lock Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 8 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Copying Files to and From the Device . . . . . 119 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Sound Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 9 Synchronizing Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet and Computer Using Dell Mobile Sync
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Contents 5 10 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Starting Your Device in the Safe Mode . . . . . 139 6 Contents Dell Streak 7 Tablet Features This section provides information about the features available on your device. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 1 Buttons/Connectors/Parts Functionality 1 Headphone connector Connects to headphones. 2 Speaker Provides audio output for video and music playback. 3 Volume up button Press to increase the media volume 4 Volume down button by one level. Press and hold to continuously increase the media volume. Press to decrease the media volume by one level. Press and hold to continuously decrease the media volume. Dell Streak 7 Tablet Features 7 Buttons/Connectors/Parts Functionality 5 Power and Sleep/Wake button Press and hold to turn on the device. Press to turn the screen on or off. While the device is on, press and hold to select one of these options:
Silent mode: The device is set to vibrate mode; all sounds are disabled except for alarms. Airplane mode: Disable all wireless connections. Power off: Turn off the device. Indicates the battery charge status and pending notifications. The different lights indicate the following:
Solid green Battery is fully charged when connected to power. Solid amber Battery is charging. Solid red Battery charge is low and the battery is charging. Blinking red Battery charge is low. Blinking green Indicates pending notifications. Touch to return to the previous screen, close a dialog box, menu, or pop-up message, and to dismiss the keyboard. Touch to open or close options menus that display available tools for the current application or actions that you can perform on the current screen. 6 Battery status light 7 Back button 8 Menu button 8 Dell Streak 7 Tablet Features Buttons/Connectors/Parts Functionality 9 Home button 1 2 1 30-pin connector 2 Touch screen 3 Reset button 4 SD card slot 5 SIM card slot
(available on select models only) 6 Slot door Touch to open the central Home screen. Touch and hold for quick access to the most recently used applications. 9 8 7 3 4 5 6 Connects to the supplied USB cable for transferring files to and from a computer. Connects to the supplied USB cable and USB wall charger adapter to charge the device. Touch the screen to use on-screen controls including buttons, menu items, and the keyboard. Push the button to reset the device to the default state. Holds the SD card in place. Holds the SIM card in place. Provides access to the SIM card and SD card slots. Dell Streak 7 Tablet Features 9 Provides audio output for video and music playback. Used for making video calls with supportive web applications, such as Skype. Use for taking a front view picture, for example, a self-portrait. Used for making video calls with supportive web applications, such as Skype. 7 Speaker 8 Microphone 9 Front-facing camera 1 2 1 Camera lens 2 Camera flash Captures pictures and videos. Use for capturing pictures and videos in dimly lit environments. 10 Dell Streak 7 Tablet Features Setting Up Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet Getting Your Device Ready for Use Insert the SIM card 1 2 Pull out the slot door. 1 2 Hold the SIM card with the metal contacts facing down, and follow the SIM card illustration on the slot door label to insert the SIM card into the SIM card slot. Insert the SD card 1 2 1 Pull out the slot door. Setting Up Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet 11 2 Hold the SD card with the metal contacts facing down, and follow the SD card illustration on the slot door label to insert the SD card into the SD card slot. Charge the battery NOTE: Charge the battery in an environmental temperature between 0C and 45C. NOTE: The battery is not fully charged when first unpacked. 1 Connect the supplied USB cable's 30-pin connector into the 30-
pin connector on the device. 2 Connect the cable's USB connector into the supplied USB wall charger adapter. 3 Connect the USB wall charger adapter into a power outlet and charge the device until the battery is fully charged. NOTE: When charging the battery by connecting the device to an electrical outlet, the battery requires about 4 hours to be fully charged. 12 Setting Up Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet Turning On Your Device NOTE: Use this device in an environmental temperature between -10C and 55C. 1 Press and hold the Power and Sleep/Wake button to turn on your device. The operating system starts up. 2 If the screen is locked automatically, flick the icon up to unlock the screen. 3 If your SIM card is locked by a Personal Identification Number
(PIN), type the PIN by touching the corresponding number keys using the on-screen keypad. Touch the OK button to confirm your input. The device is ready for use when the Home screen is displayed. Turning Off Your Device 1 Press and hold the Power and Sleep/Wake button 2 Touch the Power off option on the screen. Turning Off the Screen If both the device and the screen are on, press the Power and Sleep/Wake button once to turn off the screen. NOTE: If the device is on, but the screen is off, press the Power and Sleep/Wake button unlocking the screen, see "The Screen Lock Wallpaper" on page 35. once to turn on the screen. For information on Setting Up Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet 13 Understanding Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet Out-Of-Box Wizard To view the on-screen Out-Of-Box Wizard for basic controls of your device, touch the Home button the Launcher button welcome, and follow the instructions to proceed. You can play the wizard videos to get a quick overview of the device. At any point during the video, you can touch CONTINUE and PREVIOUS to go to next or previous page. After viewing the last page, touch DONE to return to the Home screen. Touch Screen Your device has a multi-touch sensitive screen. You can touch the surface of the screen to operate the device. Finger Gestures Touch Tap gently on the screen with your fingertip. Allows you to:
Select the items on the screen including options, entries, images, and icons. Start applications. Press the buttons on the screen. Input text using the on-screen keyboard. 14 Understanding Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet Finger Gestures Touch and hold Allows you to:
Touch and hold your finger on the screen. Enable the moving mode of an item on the Home screen. Open the context menu. Drag 1 Touch and hold your finger on an Move items such as images and item on the screen. icons on the screen. 2 Keeping your finger in contact with the screen, move your fingertip to the desired location. 3 Take your finger off the screen to drop the item in the desired location. Scroll through Home screens, web pages, lists, entries, photo thumbnails, contacts, and so on. Understanding Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet 15 Finger Gestures Flick or swipe Allows you to:
Move your finger in a vertical or horizontal direction on the screen. Quickly scroll through Home screens, web pages, lists, entries, photo thumbnails, contacts, and so on. Zoom out Move two fingers close together on the screen. Reduce the view of an image or web page
(zoom out). 16 Understanding Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet Finger Gestures Zoom in Allows you to:
Move two fingers apart on the screen. Enlarge the view of an image or web page
(zoom in). Screen Orientation For optimal viewing experience, the screen orientation changes automatically to portrait or landscape format depending on how you hold the device. NOTE: Applications downloaded from the Android Market may not support automatic screen rotation to portrait or landscape format. NOTE: To modify the default rotating behavior, open the rotation settings by touching the Home button Menu button Settings Display Auto-rotate screen. Applications, Widgets, and Shortcuts Application Software which allows you to perform a specific task. Your device is preloaded with a variety of applications, and additional applications can be downloaded from the Android Market. Widget A small application which resides on the Home screen and provides quick and easy access to information. For example, the Facebook widget allows you to read posts on your wall and update your status. Understanding Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet 17 Shortcut A link that you can create on your Home Screen to provide quicker access to an application or a folder containing contacts or bookmarks. The Dell Stage Desktop The Dell Stage desktop is composed of multiple screens including the Home screen. The desktop displays predefined Stage widgets, shortcuts, and widgets to give you quick and easy access to frequently-used applications, Twitter or Facebook postings, music, pictures, and more. Home screen You can personalize the Stage desktop by adding your own shortcuts or widgets, or by displaying your favorite picture as the desktop wallpaper. NOTE: The desktop screens are fixed, and cannot be added or deleted. NOTE: For more information on using Dell Stage widgets, see "Dell Stage Widgets" on page 21. NOTE: To return to the Home screen from anywhere, touch the Home screen button
. 18 Understanding Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet To navigate across the desktop Flick the desktop horizontally until the desired Home screen is displayed. To navigate the Home screens using Home screen thumbnails The Home screen thumbnails act as shortcuts to their individual Home screens. The icon of the thumbnail represents the Stage widget. To view the Home screen thumbnails:
2 1 1 2 Touch the bottom area on either side of the quick buttons, as illustrated in red. Touch and hold the Launcher button to display the thumbnails. To control the Home screens using the thumbnails, either:
Understanding Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet 19 Touch the corresponding thumbnail to go to the desired screen. To quickly pan through the Home screens, drag your finger horizontally across the thumbnails, until the desired Home screen appears. Home screen thumbnails 20 Understanding Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet Dell Stage Widgets Dell Stage widgets gives you direct access to your most recently used applications, e-mails, photos, music, videos, contacts, Facebook
& Twitter updates, and frequently viewed websites. You can create your own Stage widgets on free Home screens to access the desired items. Adding a Stage Widget 1 Flick to the desktop screen where you want to add a Stage widget. 2 To reserve enough space for the widget, remove unwanted items from the screen (see "To remove a Home screen item" on page 28). 3 To access the Add to Home screen menu, either:
Touch and hold an empty area on the home screen. Touch the Menu button and then touch the Add option. 4 Touch Stage Widgets. 5 From the Select Stage Widget menu, touch to select the Stage widget you want to add to the screen. Deleting a Stage Widget 1 Touch and hold the Stage widget. 2 Drag the widget over the 3 When the widget turns red, release your finger from the screen to icon. delete the widget. Understanding Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet 21 Using Stage Widgets Touching the label of any Stage Widget opens the supporting application in its default screen. For example, touching the label of the MUSIC widget opens the Music player in the same manner as it would by touching the Music icon in the application drawer. To use the HOME Stage Widget From the HOME Stage widget, you can touch application shortcuts to access your most recently-used applications. To use the CONTACTS Stage Widget From the CONTACTS Stage widget, you can view your existing contacts or add a new contact quickly. Touch the tile of an existing contact and select the action to proceed with the contact. Touch the ADD tile to add a new contact. To use the EMAIL Stage Widget From the EMAIL Stage widget, you can read your e-mails in your e-
mail account or compose a new e-mail. If you have not set up an e-
mail account, touch Add an Account and follow the instructions on the screen to complete your e-mail configuration. To use the GALLERY Stage Widget From the GALLERY Stage widget, you can view thumbnails of your recent pictures and videos from the Gallery application. Touch the thumbnail of a picture or video to view or play it. To use the MUSIC Stage Widget From the MUSIC Stage widget, you can view the music albums or playlists created on your device. Touch a music album to browse for its songs. Touch a song to start playback. Touch a playlist to view the playlist you created. Touch a song to start playback. 22 Understanding Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet To use the SOCIAL Stage Widget The SOCIAL Stage widget provides widgets to display the latest postings from your Twitter or Facebook account. To use the Twitter and Facebook widgets, you need to sign in to your Twitter or Facebook account with your e-mail address and password. NOTE: The SOCIAL Stage Widget displays either Facebook or Twitter. If you want to display both applications on the Home screen, add another SOCIAL widget to a different screen and sign in to the appropriate service there. To use the Twitter widget 1 Flick through the tweets (Twitter messages) posted by all the authors you follow. 2 Touch a tweet to view the other tweets posted by the same author. 3 To post your tweet, touch the text box, type your tweet, and then touch the Update button. You can also touch the Update button to compose and post your tweet. NOTE: For more information on using Facebook and Twitter, see
"Facebook" on page 68 and "Twitter" on page 72. To use the WEB Stage Widget The WEB Stage widget shows your recently-visited websites and bookmarks. Touch the website you want to visit, or touch MORE BOOKMARKS to select a website to visit. To find information on the Internet, you can also:
Touch the Google search text box on the top of the widget, enter the name or keyword of the topic you are looking for, and touch key on the keyboard or the search icon on the search the box. Touch that appears beside the search box, and say the name or keyword of the topic you are looking for. Understanding Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet 23 Customizing Your Home screen To add an item to a Home screen 1 Touch the Home button 2 Flick to the screen where you want to add the item. 3 To access the Add to Home screen menu, either:
. Touch and hold an empty area on the home screen. Touch the Menu button and then touch the Add option. 4 Touch the item you want to add on the Home screen:
Items Shortcuts Add shortcuts for items that you want to access directly from the Home screen. Steps Applications:
1 Scroll through the application menu to locate the desired application. 2 Touch the desired application to create the shortcut on the current Home screen. Bookmark:
1 Flick through the Bookmarks list to locate the desired bookmark. 2 Touch the desired bookmark to create the shortcut on the current Home screen. Contact:
1 Flick through the Contacts entries to locate the desired contact. 2 Touch the desired contact entry to create the shortcut on the current Home screen. Direct message: Touch the desired phone number to create the shortcut on the Home screen. You can touch the shortcut to compose and send a message to the number. 24 Understanding Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet Items Shortcuts Steps Directions & Navigation: Create a shortcut that you can touch to open Google Maps and view directions to a location. 1 Type your destination in the text box. 2 Choose how you want to get to your destination by touching the driving, public transportation, or walking icon (from left to right). 3 Enter a name for the shortcut. 4 Touch the shortcut icon that you want to use for the shortcut. 5 Touch the Save button. NOTE: For more information on getting directions using Google Maps, see "To get directions" on page 88. Gmail label: Touch to create a desired Gmail label shortcut so that you can access your e-mails with that label from the desktop. Latitude: Create a shortcut that you can touch to open Google Latitude to share locations with your friends and family who have signed in to the service with their Google accounts. Music playlist: Create a Play all or a Recently added shortcut that you can touch to play all songs or recently added songs. Settings:
1 Scroll through the settings to locate the desired setting. 2 Touch the desired setting to create the shortcut on the current Home screen, where you can touch the shortcut to access the setting. Understanding Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet 25 Items Widgets Steps 1 Touch and hold an empty area on a Home screen. 2 Touch Widgets in the Add to Home screen menu that appears. 3 Flick through the available applications or services to locate the desired application or service. 4 Touch the desired widget to add it on the Home screen. Touch the desired folder to create one on the Home screen. Once the folder is on your Home screen, you can drag and drop an item on top of the folder in order to add it to the folder. Add widgets to display active Home screen windows or controls for your favorite applications or web-based services, such as an analog clock, the music player, the Google Quick Search Box, or a calendar showing upcoming events. Folders You can create the following folders:
New folder: Add a folder where you can store your Home screen shortcuts. All contacts: Add a shortcut to all your contacts stored in the Contacts application. Bluetooth received: Add a shortcut to access files received through Bluetooth. Contacts with phone numbers: Add a shortcut to the contacts with phone numbers. Starred contacts: Add a shortcut to the contacts marked with a star. 26 Understanding Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet Items Wallpapers Change the wallpaper of your Home screen. Steps Gallery: Open the Gallery application and select a saved picture as a wallpaper, or touch to open the camera application and capture a picture that you can set as a wallpaper. 1 Touch a picture category from your collection, such as Camera, downloaded, and so on. 2 Flick the picture thumbnails horizontally to locate the desired picture. 3 Touch the picture to display it. 4 To cut a portion of the picture as the wallpaper, move the crop frame and drag the angles to locate the desired part. 5 Touch the Save button to set the wallpaper. Live wallpapers: Select an animated and interactive wallpaper. Wallpapers: Flick to or touch a picture thumbnail to display a picture, then touch Set wallpaper to set it as a wallpaper. NOTE: You can also touch the Home button the Menu button Wallpaper to change your Home screen wallpaper. Understanding Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet 27 To add an application shortcut from the main applications view 1 Touch the Launcher button at the bottom of the screen to enter the main applications view. 2 On the main applications view, touch and hold a desired application and drag it onto the current Home screen. The applications icon appears on the Home screen. To move a Home screen item 1 Touch and hold the item you want to reposition until it magnifies and becomes movable. The device vibrates to indicate that the items moving mode is activated. NOTE: To disable the items moving mode, release the item. 2 With your finger remaining in contact with the item on the screen, drag the item to another location on the screen. 3 Release the item in the desired location. To remove a Home screen item 1 Touch and hold an item such as a widget, shortcut, or folder that you want to remove, until it magnifies and becomes movable. 2 Drag the item onto the top of the Trash icon
, and when the item turns red release it. To open a Home screen folder 1 Touch the folder to open a panel displaying the contents of the folder. 2 Touch the desired application shortcut to run the application. To close a Home screen folder Touch the Close icon to close the panel. To move a Home screen shortcut into a folder 1 Touch and hold a shortcut to make it movable. 2 Drag and drop the shortcut into a folder on the Home screen. 28 Understanding Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet NOTE: Widgets and folders cannot be moved inside a folder. To remove a Home screen shortcut from a folder 1 Touch a folder on the Home screen to view the contents. 2 Touch and hold a shortcut to make it movable. The shortcut pops out and the folder closes automatically. 3 Drag the shortcut to another location on the Home screen. To rename a Home screen folder 1 Touch a folder to open the folder panel. 2 Touch and hold the top area of the folder panel folder menu opens. 3 Touch the Folder name text box to type the name using the on-
, until the Rename screen keyboard. 4 Touch OK to confirm. Status Bar The status bar at the top of the Home screen displays the notification, status, and time areas. 1 2 3 1 Notification area The notification area displays notification icons to inform you of new e-mail, messages, and so on. Touch and drag down the status bar to view the notifications listed in the order of arrival time, and then touch a notification to view the desired message, and e-mail. Understanding Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet 29 2 Status area Displays status icons to show the current state of your device, such as battery power, charging progress, alarms set, network connections, and so on. Touch and drag down the status bar to view the information regarding the carrier currently in use, remaining battery charge, and so on. 3 Time area Displays the current time. The status area may also display some of the following icons:
Alarm is set 3G data network is connected Battery status 100% full 3G data network is in use Battery is low and needs to be charged GPRS data network is connected Battery is extremely low and needs to be charged immediately Battery is charging GPRS data network is in use EDGE data network is connected Vibrate mode is enabled EDGE data network is in use Silent mode is enabled Signal strength strong No signal HSPA data network is connected (only available for carrier-specific versions) HSPA data network is in use
(only available for carrier-
specific versions) Roaming signal strength strong Airplane mode is enabled Connected to a Wi-Fi network Bluetooth is enabled No SIM card is inserted 30 Understanding Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet Connected to a new Bluetooth device GPS satellites function is enabled Ongoing data synchronization Receiving location data from GPS satellites The notification area may also display some of the following icons:
Problem with sign-in or sync New e-mail message SD card is full Download in progress A Wi-Fi network is found Download complete USB cable is connected Application update available Some notifications not displayed The SD card is safe to remove New Gmail message Song is playing New SMS/MMS New e-mail message Problem with SMS/MMS delivery New Google Talk message New voicemail Upcoming calendar event Understanding Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet 31 Quick Buttons The quick buttons at the bottom of the Home screen allow you to quickly access the application drawer and some main functions. 1 5 2 3 4 1 Home screen dots Touch the dots at the bottom left of the screen to display the Home screen thumbnails. Double-tap the dots at the bottom left of the screen to move to the first the Home screen. 2 Gmail button Touch the Gmail button to open the Gmail application. For more information on using Gmail, see "Gmail" on page 76. 3 Launcher button Touch the Launcher button to display the application drawer. Touch and hold the Launcher button to display the Home screen thumbnails. 4 Browser button Touch the Browser button to open the 5 Home screen dots Touch the dots at the bottom right of the Browser application. screen to display the Home screen thumbnails. Double-tap the dots at the bottom right of the screen to move to the last the Home screen. 32 Understanding Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet Navigating the Applications You can find applications available on your device in these screen elements:
Application Drawer The application drawer can be accessed from any home screen and contains all of the applications installed on the device, including those you have downloaded from the Android Market. To open the application drawer 1 Touch the Home button to display the default Home screen on the desktop. 2 From any of the desktop Home screens, you can:
Drag up in the lower area of the screen. Touch the Launcher button
. To navigate pages of applications Flick the applications drawer horizontally and touch an application to run it. To close the application drawer Drag down anywhere within the application drawer. To return to the default Home screen, touch
. To return to the current Home screen, touch
. Understanding Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet 33 Application Shortcuts To quickly launch applications on the Home screen, you can add shortcuts for frequently-used applications to the Home screen or to the folder that you created on the Home screen. For more information, see "Customizing Your Home screen" on page 24. To open an application using the application shortcuts 1 Touch the Home button 2 If the desired application shortcut displays on the Home screen,
. touch the shortcut to run the application. If the desired application is stored in a folder on the Home screen, touch the folder to display the contents of the folder, and then touch the desired application shortcut. Recent Applications To open a recently used application 1 Touch and hold the Home button to view the recently used applications, or create the HOME Stage Widget on the Home screen which contains the most recently used applications (see
"Adding a Stage Widget" on page 21). 2 Touch the desired application shortcut to run the application. 34 Understanding Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet The Screen Lock Wallpaper You can set the display to turn off automatically after a timeout period of inactivity, or turn it off manually by pressing the power button
. When you press the power button screen lock wallpaper appears to help prevent unintentional touch of the screen. to wake up the display, the 1 2 1 Drag or flick this button downward to enable or disable the vibration mode. 2 Drag or flick this button upward to unlock the screen. NOTE: To set the duration the screen remains on before turning off after the last operation, touch the Home button Menu button Settings Display Screen timeout. Understanding Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet 35 Using Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet Managing Contacts To view and manage your contacts:
Touch Contacts Touch Contacts. To add a new contact 1 Touch the Menu button New contact. 2 Select the account where you want to add this contact, such as your Gmail account. 1 2 3 4 9 8 7 5 6 1 2 3 This area shows the account in which the new contact is stored. Touch to take a photo or select a photo from the Gallery application to use as the contacts visual caller ID. Enter the contact information using the on-screen keyboard. Scroll the screen to find more items to fill. 36 Using Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet 4 5 6 7 8 9 Touch to replace a default information label with another label that you can choose from the Select label list. For example, you can change the label from Mobile phone number to Home phone number. Touch Done to save the new contact to your Contacts list. Touch to return to your Contacts list. Touch to remove an item from the current information category. Touch to add a new item to the current information category. For example, you can add a second phone number. Touch to fill more information about the contact. To find a contact 1 To locate a contact, you can either:
Flick the contact list until you find the contact. Touch the Menu button Search, and then type either the contacts full name or only the first letters of it into the Search contacts text box. The screen displays the matching contacts. 2 Once the contact is located, touch the contacts entry to view the contacts details. To e-mail or send a message to a contact 1 On the Contacts list, find a desired contact. 2 Do one of the following:
Touch the photo icon of the contact. The icons that represent the actions you can do such as e-mail on Maps or address search appear. Touch the action you want to perform. Touch the contact entry to view the contact details, and then touch E-mail to send e-mail using the e-mail accounts you have set up on your device, or touch to send a message. To edit or share a contact 1 On the Contacts list, find the desired contact. 2 Touch the contact entry to view the contact details. Using Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet 37 3 Touch the Menu button
, and then touch Edit contact to edit the contact details, or touch Share to share the contact information with your friends through e-mail or Bluetooth. NOTE: For information about composing and sending messages, see Messaging. For information about using the e-mail applications, see
"Gmail" on page 76 and "E-mail" on page 65. Contacts settings In Contacts
, touch the Menu button
. Display options Accounts NOTE: If you want to synchronize individual data manually, clear Auto-sync, and then from your account, touch a data item to start synchronization of that data. While data is syncing, the sync icon appears on the status bar, and the sync appears on the icon option of the data being synced. Import/Export Choose from which accounts you want to display the contacts, or set your device to only display the contacts who have phone numbers. Contacts stored on your device can be synchronized with a computer using Nero PC Suite; contacts stored on your personal e-mail account such as Gmail can be synchronized through an Internet connection. To select the data to synchronize:
1 Select Background data to make all the sync options available. 2 Select Auto-sync to let the device automatically synchronize the selected data in your e-mail account, which may include Contacts, Gmail, Calendar, Picasa Web Albums, or Twitter data. To select the data to sync from your e-mail account:
1 Touch your e-mail account to open the Data
& synchronization list. 2 Select the data that you want the device to synchronize automatically, such as Sync Contacts, Sync Gmail, Sync Calendar, Sync Picasa Web Albums, and Sync Twitter data. You can import contacts from your SIM/SD card to your device, export contacts from your device to your SD card, and share visible contacts using Bluetooth or Gmail. 38 Using Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet Messaging To compose, send, and read text (SMS) or multimedia (MMS) messages, touch opens with a list of messages or message threads representing all the received, sent, and draft messages. The Messaging screen Messaging NOTE: For information about the message thread, see "Receiving text and multimedia messages" on page 43. To compose and send a text message 1 On the Messaging screen, touch the New message thread. The composer screen opens. 2 In the To field, type the mobile phone number or the contact name of the recipient. As you type a phone number or contact name, matching contacts with their mobile numbers appear below the To field. Touch a matched contact to enter the contacts mobile number, or continue typing the desired phone number. You can also touch to select the recipient from the previous message recipients, or touch contacts. to select from your 3 Repeat step 2 to enter more mobile numbers if you want to send the message to multiple mobile phone users. 4 If you want to add a subject line to the message, touch the Menu button Add subject. 5 Touch the Type to compose text field to start composing your message. 6 Touch the Send button to send the text message. 7 To start a text conversation similar to online instant messaging, you can continue to compose and send messages to the same recipient(s). All of the sent and received messages between you and recipient(s) appear in the form of chat logs. Using Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet 39 To compose and send a multimedia message 1 In the To field, type the recipients mobile phone number, e-mail address, or contact name. Matching contacts with their mobile numbers or e-mail addresses appear below the To field. Touch a matched contact, or continue typing the desired phone number or e-mail address. You can also touch to select the recipient from the previous message recipients, or touch your contacts. to select from 2 Touch the Type to compose text field to start composing your message. 3 While editing your message, you can touch the Menu button Attach to insert media items into the message. See the following table for more information. 4 When you have completed editing the multimedia message, touch the Send button to send the message. You can attach any of the following items to a multimedia message:
Picture Capture picture Videos Capture video Open the Gallery application and touch a picture file to attach it to your message. Open the Camera application to capture a picture, and then attach it to your message. For more information about the Camera application, see "Camera" on page 117. Open the Gallery application and touch a video clip to attach it to your message. Open the Camcorder application to capture a video clip, and then attach it to your message. For more information about the Camcorder application, see "Camera" on page 117. 40 Using Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet Audio Record audio Open the Select music track menu. Touch a desired audio file, and then touch OK to attach the file to your message. To attach an audio file stored on the SD card to your MMS:
1 Create a folder named Ringtones in the SD card. 2 Open the Ringtones folder. 3 Copy the audio file you want to attach to your MMS into the Ringtones folder. 4 On the MMS composer screen, touch the Menu button Attach Audio. 5 Select the audio file to attach it to your MMS. Open the Music application and select a music file from the list. Open the Sound Recorder application to record an audio clip:
Touch Touch Touch Touch Use this recording to attach the to start recording. to stop recording. to listen to the recording. recording to your message. Using Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet 41 Slideshow Open the Edit slideshow screen to create a slide show and attach it to your message. 1 Touch Add slide to create new slides. 2 Touch a created slide such as Slide 1 to open the slideshow editor screen. 3 Touch Add picture, and then select the picture you want to add to the slide. 4 You can touch the text field at the bottom of the screen to compose a caption for the displayed slide. 5 Touch the Menu button to preview the slide, remove the picture, add a music to the current slide, add a new slide, or change the slide duration or the text and picture layout. 6 When editing multiple slides, touch to edit the next slide; touch previous slide. NOTE: You can create a slideshow of up to to return to the ten slides. 7 To replace a picture, on the slideshow editor screen, touch the Replace picture button and select a new picture to replace. To remove the current slide, touch the Remove Slide button. To preview the slideshow, touch the Preview button. 8 When complete, touch the Done button to attach the slideshow to your message. 9 On the message composer screen, touch the slideshow attachment icon the slide show; touch Edit to modify the slideshow. to play back 10 To remove the slideshow attachment from your message, touch Edit Menu button Discard slideshow. 42 Using Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet Receiving text and multimedia messages Depending on your notification settings, the device rings, vibrates, or displays a message briefly in the status bar as a new text or multimedia message is received. A new message icon the status bar to remind you of a new message. appears and stays in the notifications area of NOTE: To alter the notification settings for new messages, in the Messaging application, touch the Menu button Settings Notification settings. You can then decide whether to display a text notification in the status bar when a new message arrives, select a ringtone that rings on the arrival of a new message, or let the device vibrate to notify a new message. Text and multimedia messages that are sent to and received from the same contact or a number are grouped into message threads similar to text conversations of an online chat. You can see all of the messages exchanged between you and the contact. Message threads are listed according to when they are sent or received, with the latest message at the top. To read a text message Touch and drag down the status bar where the new message icon is displayed. A list of notifications is displayed. Touch a new message notification to open and read the message. Touch Messaging to open the message list, and then touch a text message or message thread to open and read it. If the message includes a:
Website link touch the link to open the Browser application and visit the website. E-mail address touch the e-mail address to open the Email/Gmail application and compose an e-mail to send to the address. Using Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet 43 To forward the message 1 Touch and hold the message. The Message options menu pops up. 2 Select Forward to forward the message. To view a multimedia message 1 Touch and drag down the status bar where the new message icon is displayed. A list of notifications opens. Touch a new message notification to open the message. Or Messaging Touch then touch a multimedia message or message thread to open the message. to open the message list, and 2 Touch the thumbnail of the attached picture to display the picture; touch the Play button to play the attached video. NOTE: Touch the Download button, to manually download the media file in the message. NOTE: To save the attached media item to your SD card, touch and hold the message until the Message options menu opens. Touch Copy attached to SD card. To reply to a text or multimedia message 1 Touch a message or message thread to open it. 2 Type your reply message into the Type to compose text field. 3 Touch Send to send your message to the sender. 44 Using Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet To delete a message or a message thread 1 In the Messaging list, touch and hold the message thread that you want to delete. 2 To delete the entire thread, touch Delete thread and then touch Delete to confirm deletion. To delete a message within a thread, touch and hold the message to delete, and then touch Delete message on the Message options menu. Touch Delete to confirm deletion. NOTE: To delete all messages in the Messaging list, touch the Menu button Delete threads. To edit message settings In the Message application, touch the Menu button Settings. Follow the instructions on the screen to change the text or multimedia message settings. Pop-up Menu Touch the Menu button available options for the current application, or actions that you can perform on the current screen. to open or close the pop-up menu that lists To select an option or item on the pop-up menu 1 Touch the Menu button to open the pop-up menu. 2 Touch the desired item on the pop-up menu. 3 Touch the Menu button again to close the pop-up menu. Using Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet 45 Android Keyboard You can type text using the Android on-screen keyboard. The keyboard automatically rotates to either the portrait or landscape mode based on the device orientation. To open the Android keyboard Touch a text box, or touch and hold the Menu button
. To close the keyboard Touch the Back button or touch and hold the Menu button
. Keyboard controls for composing an e-mail 1 2 3 4 1 2 8 7 5 6 Touch to type letters into the text box where the cursor appears. Touch and hold to type accented letters for applicable languages. Based on the letters being typed, the keyboard shows suggested words along the top of the keyboard with the most probable word highlighted in color. You can touch a suggested word to enter it into the text box. 46 Using Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet 3 Touch once to show the uppercase keyboard for typing a capital letter. Touch twice to enable the Caps Lock mode. Touch to change back to the lowercase keyboard. 4 Touch to show the keyboard for typing numbers, punctuation marks, and symbols other than the period. Touch to switch back to the alphabet keyboard. Touch and hold to select the following option:
Android keyboard settings: Configure the keyboard settings. Touch to use voice input. Say the words you want to enter in the microphone. The device enters the words that it can recognize from your voice. Touch to enter a line feed. Touch to delete a typed character, symbol, or a space. Touch and hold to quickly delete typed text. Touch to see more suggested words. 5 6 7 8 To configure the keyboard settings 1 Touch the Home button Menu button Settings Language & keyboard Android keyboard. Or from the Android to open the Android keyboard keyboard, touch and hold context menu Android keyboard settings. 2 To enable a setting, touch the setting option to select the check box
; to disable a setting, touch the setting option to clear the check box
. Available keyboard settings Vibrate on keypress Sound on keypress The device vibrates when you touch a key. The device beeps when you touch a key. NOTE: To activate this item, you also need to select Settings Sound Audible selection. Using Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet 47 Auto-capitalization Voice input The first letter of the word in a new sentence is capitalized. Turn on the microphone to enable voice input for the main keyboard or symbols keyboard. Word suggestion settings Quick fixes Show suggestions Auto-complete Mark and correct wrong spellings and typos. Show suggested words as you type. Touching the space bar or a punctuation key automatically inserts a highlighted word suggestion. Create your personal dictionary The keyboard displays suggested words as you type using the default dictionary. You can create a personal dictionary to include words not found in the main dictionary. Word suggestions also appear from your personal dictionary, if you have created it. To add a word to the dictionary 1 Touch the Home button Menu button Settings Language & keyboard User dictionary. 2 Touch the Menu button Add. 3 Type a desired word into the Add to dictionary text box. 4 Touch OK. To edit a word in the dictionary 1 Touch the Home button Menu button Settings Language & keyboard User dictionary. 2 Touch a desired word. 3 Touch Edit. 4 Edit the spelling of the word in the Edit word text box. 5 Touch OK. 48 Using Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet To delete a word from the dictionary 1 Touch the Home button Menu button Settings Language & keyboard User dictionary. 2 Touch the word to delete. 3 Touch Delete. Google Search You can use the Google Quick Search Box to find websites and information on Google, applications installed on your device or available from Android Market, and contacts stored in your Contacts list. To search by typing 1 From the Google Search widget you created on the Home screen, touch Contacts. to select the type of your search: All, Web, Apps or 2 Touch the Google Quick Search Box. The on-screen keyboard opens. 3 Type a keyword or text into the box using the keyboard. As you type, the search results that fully or partially match the text being typed appear below the search box. 4 Scroll the listed search results and touch the desired result. If you only want to view matching web links on Google, either touch the key on the keyboard or the search icon on the search box. 5 The matching application or the browser with matching web links opens. Using Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet 49 6 Touch the desired link if you want to view a web page. To search by voice 1 Touch that appears beside the search box. 2 Say the name or keyword of the item you want to search. 3 The browser with matching web links opens. NOTE: You can also access the Voice Search function by touching the Launcher button Voice Search
. Power Control Widget NOTE: To use the Power Control widget, you need to add it on the Home screen of your device. For information on adding widgets to the Home screen, see "Customizing Your Home screen" on page 24. NOTE: To conserve battery charge, you may choose to disable one or more of these modes when not in use. 2 3 4 5 6 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 Indicates if the appropriate mode is enabled or disabled. Touch to enable or disable Wi-Fi connection. Touch to enable or disable Bluetooth. Touch to enable or disable the Use GPS satellites mode, which allows you to pinpoint locations down to the street-level. This mode requires a clear view of the sky and consumes more battery power. Touch to enable or disable the Auto-sync mode, which lets your device automatically sync your Gmail, Twitter, Facebook, Outlook data, or the data from other accounts you set up on the device. Touch repeatedly to adjust the brightness of your display backlight. 50 Using Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet Managing Your Device Settings To check storage spaces Touch the Home button Menu button Settings SD card &
Device storage. The screen displays the total and available space on the device and on the SD card. To erase unwanted application data to free storage space 1 Touch the Home button Menu button Settings Applications Manage applications. 2 From the Manage applications list, touch the application whose cache or data you want to remove. 3 In the Application info screen, touch Clear data under Storage to erase unwanted application data; touch Clear cache under Cache to erase unwanted cache. To format the SD card 1 Touch the Home button Menu button Settings SD card & Device storage. 2 Touch Unmount External SD card to enable the Format SD card option. CAUTION: Formatting a SD card erases all data and downloaded applications stored on it. Ensure that you back up the data that you require before formatting your SD card. 3 Touch Format External SD card Format SD card button. To remove the SD card safely CAUTION: Removing the SD card while the device is working may cause data loss or result in application errors. CAUTION: It is strongly recommended that you unmount the SD card before removing it. Using Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet 51 1 Touch the Home button Menu button Settings SD card & Device storage. 2 Touch Unmount External SD card. 3 Press and hold the Power button off option to turn off the device. and then touch the Power 4 Pull out the slot door and then remove the SD card from your device as illustrated. To erase all data from your device CAUTION: The following steps will erase all the data including your Google account and downloaded applications from your device. Ensure that you back up all the required data before you proceed. 1 Touch the Home button Menu button Settings Privacy Factory data reset. 2 Touch Reset phone. NOTE: You must draw your screen unlock pattern if it is enabled. 3 Touch Erase everything after you read the warning. 52 Using Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet To reset your device to the default state CAUTION: The following steps will restore your device to the default state and erase all data and downloaded applications stored on it. Ensure that you back up all the required data before you reset the device. Reset button 1 Pull out the slot door. 2 Push the reset button using a paper clip or other similar pointed objects. 3 Press and hold the Power and Sleep/Wake button to turn on your device. Using Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet 53 Internet Connecting to the Internet To browse the web and access web-based utilities such as instant messaging, one of the following data networking connections must be available:
GPRS EDGE 3G HSPA Wi-Fi GPRS/EDGE/3G/HSPA To connect to the web using GPRS, EDGE, 3G, or HSPA Your device is configured with the GPRS, EDGE, 3G, or HSPA network available with the service provider of the SIM card installed in your device. However, this is only limited to text messaging. If a Wi-Fi connection is currently available, the device automatically uses the Wi-
Fi connection to access the Internet. The Internet connection through GPRS, EDGE, 3G, or HSPA becomes temporarily inactive, until the Wi-
Fi connection ends. If you want to connect to the Internet using a GPRS, EDGE, 3G, or HSPA data network:
1 Touch the Home button Menu button Settings Wireless & networks, then touch Wi-Fi to disable it. 2 Touch the Home button Menu button Settings Wireless & networks Mobile networks, then touch Data enabled to enable it. NOTE: Depending on whether a GPRS, EDGE, 3G, or HSPA network is currently in use, a corresponding data network icon appears on the status bar after a data connection is established. For information about the data network icons, see "Status Bar" on page 29. 54 Internet You can set the device to search for available networks if you are outside your home network or want to register to a different network. To manually select a new network 1 Touch the Home button Menu button Settings Wireless & networks Mobile networks Network operators Search networks. The list of networks currently available is displayed. 2 Touch to select a network from the network list. To automatically select a new network Touch the Home button Menu button Settings Wireless &
networks Mobile networks Network operators Select automatically. To schedule mobile data connection You can schedule your data connection to minimize the amount of time that you use your data connection to save battery charge. 1 To enable this feature, touch the Home button Menu button Settings Wireless & networks Mobile networks Schedule data connection Enable. 2 In the off-peak hours section, set a time range as off-peak hours. Touch Start Time. Adjust the time by touching
, or touch the hour and minute fields to enter a time. Touch Set when done. Touch End Time and set the end time. or 3 Touch Cellular Data Timeout to set the timeout value. For example, if you select 15 minutes, the data connection will be turned off after 15 minutes of inactivity. To resume the data connection, turn on the display of your device. NOTE: You can also touch Cellular Data Timeout in the peak hours section to set the timeout value for peak hours. Internet 55 Wi-Fi You can connect your device to the Internet using Wi-Fi. To connect to a Wi-Fi network, you need access to a wireless point or hotspot within a distance of up to 300 feet (100 meters). NOTE: The range and quality of the Wi-Fi signal is affected by the number of connected devices, infrastructure, and objects through which the signal is transmitted. To turn on Wi-Fi and connect to a network 1 Touch the Home button Menu button Settings Wireless & networks Wi-Fi to select the Wi-Fi check box. The device scans for available wireless networks. 2 Touch Wi-Fi settings. The network names and security settings
(Open network or Secured with WEP/WPA/WPA2/WPS) of discovered Wi-Fi networks display in the Wi-Fi networks list. 3 Flick the list and touch to select a Wi-Fi network you want to connect to. 4 Enter a password (if necessary), then touch Connect to connect to the Wi-Fi network. NOTE: To connect to a network protected by Wired Equivalent Privacy
(WEP), Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA), WPA2, or Wireless Protected Setup
(WPS), you must enter the WEP/WPA/WPA2/WPS security key to obtain authorized access to the network. The next time your device connects to a previously accessed secured wireless network, you will not be asked to enter the WEP/WPA/WPA2/WPS key again, unless you reset your device to its factory default settings. NOTE: Your device has the ability to maintain a constant Internet connection through Wi-Fi or data networks (GPRS, EDGE, 3G, or HSPA). However, Wi-Fi connection has priority over mobile network connection if both are available. 56 Internet To check the current Wi-Fi network connection From the status bar:
When your device is connected to a wireless network, the Wi-Fi icon in the status bar indicates the signal strength (number of bands that light up). If Wireless & networks Wi-Fi settings Network notification is enabled, the device discovers an accessible Wi-Fi network within range. From the Wi-Fi network:
icon appears in the status bar as the 1 Touch the Home button Menu button Settings Wireless & networks Wi-Fi settings. 2 Touch the Wi-Fi network that the device is currently connected to
(labeled Connected). A window opens displaying the Wi-Fi networks name, status, security info, signal strength, link speed, and IP address. NOTE: If you want to disconnect the Wi-Fi network from your device, touch Forget on this window. You will need to configure the Wi-Fi settings again if you want to restore connection to this wireless network. To connect to another Wi-Fi network 1 Touch the Home button Menu button Settings Wireless & networks Wi-Fi settings. The detected Wi-Fi networks are displayed in the Wi-Fi networks list. NOTE: To start a new search for available Wi-Fi networks, on the Wi-Fi settings screen, touch the Menu button Scan. 2 Flick through the Wi-Fi networks list and touch the name of the network you want to connect to. NOTE: If the wireless network you want to connect to is not in the list of detected networks, flick to the bottom of the list to touch Add Wi-Fi network. Enter the Wi-Fi network settings, and then touch Save. Internet 57 Disable all Connections Using the Airplane Mode Selecting the Airplane mode disables all mobile and Wi-Fi connections. This feature is useful when wireless connectivity is strictly prohibited, such as on an airplane. Touch the Home button Menu button Settings Wireless &
networks Airplane mode to enable or disable the Airplane mode. Browsing the Internet To open the browser Touch the Launcher button Browser
. To use the browser controls bar 1 2 1 2 Touch the web page address field and type the address of the web page you want to go to. Touch to view bookmarks, most visited web pages, and browsing history. To go to a web page 1 On the browser screen, touch the web page address field on the screen. 2 Type the web page address using the on-screen keyboard. As you type the address, matching web page addresses appear. 3 Touch an address displayed on the screen to go directly to that web page, or complete typing the web page address and then touch Go. 58 Internet To set up your home page To manually enter a home page:
1 Touch the Menu button More Settings Set home page. 2 Enter the address of the website you want to use as your home page and then touch OK. To set the current page as the home page:
1 Go to the web page that you want to set as the home page. 2 Touch the Menu button More Settings Set home page. 3 Touch Use current page OK. To select a home page from bookmarks:
1 Touch from the browser control bar to call up the lists of bookmarks, most visited sites, and browsing history. 2 Touch and hold a desired bookmark to call up the commands menu Set as homepage. Viewing Web Pages To navigate on a web page Flick your finger horizontally or vertically on the screen to scroll and view desired areas of a web page. To zoom in on a web page Pinch-out a desired area of a web page by moving two fingers apart on the screen. To zoom out on a web page Pinch-in a desired area of a web page by bringing two fingers closer together on the screen. NOTE: You can also double-tap the desired area of a web page to switch between the zoom-in and zoom-out views of the area. Internet 59 To view the next or previous page Touch the back button button More Forward to view the next page. to view the previous page; touch Menu To open a new window Touch the Menu button New window. A new browser window opens and displays the home page. To switch between browser windows You can open multiple browser windows to easily switch from one web page to another. 1 On a browser window, touch the Menu button Windows. 2 Touch the web address of a desired web page. The window opens displaying the page in full screen. 3 To close a browser window, touch on the browser window. To find text within a web page 1 When viewing a web page, touch the Menu button More Find on page. 2 Type the search item in the search bar. 3 Touch or to go to the previous or next matching item. NOTE: Touch to close the search bar. To copy text on a web page You can copy and paste text from a web page to your e-mail or text messages. 1 Go to the web page from where you want copy the text. 2 Locate the text you want to copy and then touch the Menu button More Select text. 60 Internet 3 Position your finger at the start of the text you want to copy and then drag to the end of the text you want to copy. The copied text is highlighted in pink. 4 Release your finger from the screen. 5 To paste text on an e-mail or text message, touch and hold the text field on a message or e-mail screen and then touch Paste on the context menu. Using Web Links, History, and Downloads To select a link on a web page Move to a link you want on a web page. The link is framed by an orange box when you touch it. Link type Web page address Functionality Touch the link to open the web page. Touch and hold the link to open a context menu that allows you to open, bookmark, and save the link, copy the link of the web page to the clipboard, or share the link through Bluetooth, e-mail, Facebook, text messaging, or Twitter. E-mail address Touch to send an e-mail to the e-mail address. Touch and hold till a context menu appears. Touch Send email to send an e-mail to the e-mail address. Touch Copy to copy the e-mail address to the clipboard. You can paste the e-mail address later to a new contact or while composing a new e-mail. To check the history of visited web pages 1 On the browser screen, touch
, or touch the Menu button Bookmarks. 2 Touch the History tab. 3 Touch the day when your desired web page was last visited. Internet 61 4 Touch a web address to open the web page. NOTE: To check your most visited web pages, touch the Most visited tab. To allow download of web applications CAUTION: Applications downloaded from the web can be from unknown sources. To protect your device and personal data, download applications only from trusted sources such as Android Market. To download web applications, enable your devices downloading feature. 1 Touch the Home button Menu button Settings Applications. 2 Touch Unknown sources to select the check box. 3 When the Attention dialog box opens, touch OK. To install an application 1 On the browser screen, touch the application you want to download. 2 The application details screen opens. Read details about the application, such as its cost, overall rating, comments by users, the developer contact info, and more. 3 To install the application, select either Install if the item is free or Buy if it requires purchase. To check downloads On the browser screen, touch the Menu button More Downloads. 62 Internet Manage Bookmarks You can store as many bookmarks as you want on your device. To bookmark a web page 1 On the browser screen, go to the web page you want to bookmark. 2 Touch or touch the Menu button Bookmarks. The Bookmarks window opens. 3 On the Bookmarks tab, touch the Add thumbnail
. 4 Type the bookmark name or edit the web address as needed. 5 Touch OK to save the web page as a bookmark. To open a bookmark 1 On the browser screen, touch or touch the Menu button Bookmarks. The Bookmarks window opens. 2 On the Bookmarks window, you can either:
Touch the bookmark you want to open in the same browser window. Touch and hold the bookmark you want to open, then on the context menu touch Open to open the bookmark in the same browser window, or touch Open in new window to open the bookmark in a new window. To manage your bookmarks 1 On the browser window, touch or touch the Menu button Bookmarks. 2 On the Bookmarks window, touch and hold a desired bookmark to open the context menu that provides the following options:
Open Open the bookmarked website in the same browser window. Open in new window Open the bookmarked website in a new window. Internet 63 Edit bookmark Touch to open the Edit bookmark window. Enter the bookmarks name and address and touch OK. Add shortcut to Home Touch to create the bookmarks shortcut on the Share link Copy link URL Delete bookmark Set as homepage current Home screen. You can touch the shortcut on the Home screen to start the browser and go directly to the bookmarked page. Touch to share the bookmarks address through Bluetooth, e-mail, Facebook, Gmail, text messaging, or Twitter. Bluetooth: Turn on Bluetooth. If your device is not listed under Bluetooth devices, touch Scan for devices. Touch the device you want to share the link with. Gmail, Email: Touch to open the composing window with the bookmarks address automatically pasted on the text field. Send the bookmarks address to others with an e-mail. Messaging: Touch to open the message composer with the bookmarks address automatically pasted on the text field. Send the bookmarks address to others with a text message. Facebook, Twitter: Touch to open the message composing window with the bookmark address pasted. Post the bookmark onto Facebook or Twitter where your online friends can see it. Copy the web address of the bookmarked website to the clipboard. Touch to delete the selected bookmark. Set the bookmarked website as your browser homepage. To configure browser settings On the browser screen, touch the Menu button More Settings to adjust the browser settings. 64 Internet E-mail You can create POP3, IMAP, and exchange e-mail accounts from web-
based e-mail services on your device. To open the e-mail application Touch the Launcher button Email
. To set up an e-mail account 1 On the Set up email screen, type the e-mail address and password of the e-mail account you want to add and then touch Next. NOTE: If the e-mail account you want to set up is not in the device's e-
mail database, you will be asked to manually enter the e-mail account settings, including the e-mail server, protocol, and so on after touching Next. NOTE: Touch Manual setup rather than Next to directly enter incoming and outgoing settings for the account being set up. 2 Enter the name for the account and the name you want displayed in outgoing e-mails and then touch Done. After creating an e-mail account, touch the Menu button Add account if you need to create another e-mail account. Internet 65 To view your e-mails Carrier 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 6 5 4 The Combined Inbox contains all e-mails received in all your accounts. E-mail not sent and saved as drafts are stored in the Drafts folder. Select an account to view e-mails received in the inbox of the account. The number of new e-mails received in this account. The check symbol indicates that this account is the default account for sending e-mail. Touch to view e-mails in the other folders of this account. To select an account as default for sending e-mail 1 Touch an account Menu button Account settings, or touch and hold the account, then touch Account settings from the context menu. 2 Touch Default account to select the check box. To compose and send e-mail 1 Touch the Launcher button Email
. 2 Select an email account to use if you have set up more than one account on your device. 66 Internet NOTE: If you do not select an account, the account marked as default by a check symbol will be the one used for sending e-mail. 3 In an e-mail account inbox, touch the Menu button Compose. 4 Type the recipients e-mail address in the To field. As you type information, matching contacts appear on the screen. Touch the recipient to automatically add the e-mail address, or continue typing the e-mail address manually. If you are sending the e-mail to multiple recipients, separate their e-mail addresses with a comma. You can add as many recipients as you need. 5 Type the subject. 6 Compose your message. 7 Touch the Menu button Send. NOTE: If you want to save the message as a draft and modify it later, touch or touch Save as draft. To delete an e-mail 1 On the e-mail account inbox, touch and hold the e-mail you want to delete. 2 On the context menu, touch Delete. To delete or edit an e-mail account on your device 1 Touch the Launcher button Email
. 2 Touch the Menu button Accounts. To delete an e-mail account, touch and hold the account you want to remove under the Accounts bar and then touch Remove account on the context menu. When asked to confirm deletion, touch OK. To edit an e-mail account, touch an account Menu button Account settings, or touch and hold the account and then touch Account settings on the context menu. Internet 67 Web Applications NOTE: To use the following applications, you require an active Wi-Fi or mobile data network connection (GPRS, EDGE, 3G, or HSPA). For more information about configuring your device for Internet connectivity, see
"Connecting to the Internet" on page 54. NOTE: Not all applications are available in all versions of this product. Facebook Touch the Launcher button Facebook
. Facebook is a social networking website where you can post your personal profile and pictures, find and contact your friends, classmates or work associates, and exchange messages with them. To log in to Facebook 1 Type your e-mail address and password with which you registered your Facebook account. 2 Touch the Login button If you do not have a Facebook account, touch the Sign up button and follow the instructions on the screen to create an account. 68 Internet To use Facebook on your device Once logged in, you can touch the Back button Facebook main page. to go to your 4 5 6 3 2 1 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 2 Touch Events to view the events associated with your friends, such as their birthdays. Touch Messages to view messages sent between you and your friends. Touch the desired message to read it. To delete a message, touch the check box next to the message and then touch the Delete button. To reply to the message, type your reply into the text box at the bottom and then touch the Send button. To compose a new message, touch the button, or touch the Menu button Compose. Internet 69 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Touch News Feed to view the messages and pictures you and your friends have posted. From here you can also:
Type the message you want your friends to know into the Whats on your mind? text box and then touch the Share button to post the message on the Wall of your Facebook Profile page. Touch to capture a picture and then touch the Upload button to post it to your Facebook account for your friends to see. Touch Profile to view your Facebook Profile page. Touch the Wall tab to view your Facebook wall, where you can see the messages and pictures you and your friends have posted. Touch the Info tab to view your account details. Touch the Photos tab to view the pictures you have posted. Touch to compose and post your messages or pictures. Touch to search for your friends on Facebook. Touch Friends, type the name of a friend you are looking for on Facebook, and touch the name of the friend you found to:
View the friends wall, info, and pictures on their profile page. Type a message into the Write something... text box on your friend's wall screen. Touch Share to post your message on their wall. Touch Places to share your location by checking in to a place and letting friends know where you are. NOTE: This feature is only available currently in the U.S. Touch Groups to view the groups you created and share posts with small groups of friends. 10 Touch Requests to view invitations or requests from your friends. 11 Touch Photos to view the pictures you posted. 12 Touch the reel to view your friends' pictures and videos easily. 13 Touch or drag Notifications to view notifications of your friends wall postings. 70 Internet The Facebook widget From the Facebook widget you created on the Home screen, you can view your friends wall postings. 2 3 1 4 1 2 3 4 Touch to view a Facebook friend's wall postings. To respond to this friends postings, touch the text box then type the message you want to post on this friends wall. Touch Share to post your message on this friends wall. Touch the arrow buttons to scroll and view other friends postings. NOTE: For more information on using Facebook, visit facebook.com/help. Internet 71 Twitter Touch the Launcher button Twitter
. Twitter is a social networking service application that allows you to view short messages called Tweets posted by Twitter users. You can also post your own Tweets for others to read. To sign in to Twitter You must have a Twitter account to use Twitter. To set up a Twitter account, touch Sign up now and follow the instructions on the screen. 1 To sign in to Twitter, type your user name or e-mail address and your password, and then touch Sign in. 2 Choose whether to sync the people you follow in your Twitter account to your Contacts list, then touch the Done button. NOTE: See "To use the Twitter widget" on page 23 as an alternative way of using Twitter. 72 Internet To use Twitter on your device 1 6 2 3 4 5 9 8 7 6 1 2 3 4 Touch to compose and post your tweet. See "To create a tweet" on page 75. Touch to read the tweets from authors you choose to follow. Touch an authors picture to view the profile of the author and the tweets from the author. Touch on a tweet and choose to reply to the author, forward
(Retweet) the tweet to your followers on Twitter, add the author to your favorites list, or share the tweet through Facebook, e-mail, Messaging, or Twitter. Tweets that contain @username in the body of the tweet are collected in here as Mentions. Touch to send private tweets, called direct messages, to people you follow. From the Direct messages screen, touch send your message. Touch your message. and choose the person you want to send to compose and Internet 73 5 View the most popular trending topics at the moment. Touch the Current, Daily, and Weekly tabs to view the lists of current, daily and weekly trending topics. Touch a trending topic to view the tweets related to that topic. 6 Touch to search for tweets about a desired topic, or tweets sent by authors around your location. To search for tweets about a topic, type the topic or keyword into the Search Tweets text box and then touch
. To search for tweets around your location, touch or drag to turn Location on and then touch around. Touch to find people who use Twitter. to display available tweets Touch
. From the pop-up menu, touch
. Type a name in the Search people text box, and then touch
. 7 Touch to view your profile and the tweets you posted. To post your profile picture onto Twitter, touch the Menu button Change profile photo, then select a desired picture from Gallery. Touch to read the tweets forwarded by you or by the people you follow. 8 9 Organize users you follow into listed groups. To create a list:
1 Touch or the Menu button Create list. 2 Give the list a name and description. 3 Choose to make the list public (everyone can see it) or private (only you can see it). 4 Touch the Create list button to create the list. 74 Internet To create a tweet 7 6 5 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Type your tweet message here. Touch the Update button to post your tweet. Touch the Cancel button to quit composing your tweet. Touch to view the people you follow, then select who you want to talk to in your tweet. Their names will appear in your tweet as @name. Touch to launch the camera and capture a picture to post along with your tweet. Touch to open Gallery and select a picture to post along with your tweet. Shows the number of remaining characters allowed in your tweet. NOTE: For more information on using Twitter, visit Twitter.com/Help. Internet 75 Gmail Gmail is a web-based e-mail service provided by Google. To open Gmail Touch the Gmail button
, or touch the Launcher button Gmail
. To set up your Google account You need to sign in to a Google account to use Google applications and services such as Gmail, Google Talk, and Android Market. Signing in to your Google account also synchronizes all e-mails and contacts on your Google account with your device. NOTE: You will not be required to sign in with your Google account if you have already signed in when previously using an application that requires signing in to your Google account. 1 On the Add a Google account screen, touch the Next button to proceed. 2 Touch the Sign in button. Enter your Google user name and password, then touch the Sign in button. NOTE: If you need to use another Google account with a different user name and password on your device, touch the Menu button Accounts Add account Next Sign in. Enter your Google user name and password and then touch the Sign in button. NOTE: Signing in to your Google Account requires an Internet connection. Ensure that your device has an active Wi-Fi or mobile data connection (GPRS, EDGE, 3G, or HSPA) before you sign in. For more information on setting up a data connection, see "Connecting to the Internet" on page 54. NOTE: Touch the Create button if you do not have a Google Account. 76 Internet Your Gmail inbox opens as the default Gmail view. All your received e-
mails are delivered to your inbox. 7 1 2 6 3 4 5 Folder (or Label) and number of unread e-mails. to select the e-mail thread. To use this feature, Touch the check box touch the Menu button More Settings, then enable Batch operations. Touch Archive to store the selected e-mail thread in the All Mail folder. Touch Delete to delete the selected e-mail thread. Touch Labels to label the selected e-mail thread. Starred e-mail. Touch the star to add or remove the star. The number of e-mails grouped under the same subject. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 To refresh Gmail Touch the Menu button Refresh to send or receive e-mails and to synchronize your e-mails with your Gmail account on the Internet. To view e-mails in different folders or with labels To view e-mails stored in the folders other than the inbox, such as in the Sent or All Mail folders, or to view labeled or starred e-mails:
1 Touch the Menu button Go to labels. 2 Touch the folder that stores the e-mails you want to view, or touch the label with which the e-mails are marked. Internet 77 To read e-mails When you receive a new e-mail, the e-mail icon appears on the status bar to alert you of a new e-mail. Drag down the status bar to open the Notifications panel and touch the new e-mail to view it. While in the inbox or in any other folder, scroll the e-mail threads on the screen, and then touch an e-mail thread to view the e-
mails inside. 5 4 1 3 2 1 2 3 4 5 Touch to view previous e-mails with the same subject. Touch to read the next or previous e-mail thread. Touch to open or close the Reply all and Forward buttons. Touch Reply to reply to the contact. Touch Reply all to reply to all contacts in the mail loop. Touch Forward to forward the e-mail to another contact. to star an e-mail. To check the starred e-mails, in the Inbox, Touch touch the Menu button Go to labels Starred. 78 Internet To create and send an e-mail 1 Touch the Menu button Compose. 2 Type the contacts e-mail address in the To field. To send e-mail to multiple contacts, separate their e-mail addresses with a comma. To send a carbon copy (Cc) or a blind carbon copy (Bcc), touch the Menu button Add Cc/Bcc. 3 Type the e-mail subject. 4 Compose your e-mail. To attach a picture, touch the Menu button Attach. Select the picture you want to attach from the Gallery application. NOTE: Touch to remove an attachment. 5 Touch Send to send the e-mail. Google Talk Google Talk is an instant messaging program provided by Google. To activate Google Talk 1 Touch the Launcher button Talk
. 2 Sign in to Google Talk with your Google account. If you do not have a Google account, follow the instructions on the screen to create an account (see "To set up your Google account" on page 76). 3 The Google Talk window opens with your friends list. To sign in automatically You can sign in to your Google Talk account automatically whenever you turn on the device. 1 In the friends list, touch the Menu button Settings. 2 Select Automatically sign in. Internet 79 To add a new friend to your friends list NOTE: You can only add users who have a Google Account. 1 In the friends list, touch the Menu button Add friend. 2 Enter the Google Talk instant messaging ID or Gmail address of the friend you want to add to your friends list. NOTE: When you type the instant messaging ID of a friend who is already a contact saved in Contacts with the same ID, this matching contact will display on the screen before you finish typing. You can touch the contact whose ID is then entered automatically. 3 Touch Send invitation. To view and accept an invitation 1 In the friends list, touch the Menu button More Invites. All chat invitations you have sent or received but have not been answered are listed on the pending invitations screen. 2 Touch a pending invitation. 3 Touch Accept or Cancel. When a friend accepts your chat invitation, the pending invitation disappears from the list. To change your online status and message 1 Touch the online status icon next to your name. 2 Select the status you want from the Set Status menu. 3 To enter your status message, touch the text box and enter your message. 4 To change your ID photo, touch the photo icon to open Gallery, then select the photo to use. 5 Touch Done. To start a conversation 1 Touch to select a friend in the friends list. 2 Type your message in the text box. 80 Internet 3 Touch the Send button to send the message. To add a friend to an active conversation 1 On the chat screen, touch the Menu button Add to chat. 2 Select the friend you want to invite to the current conversation. To disable the chat log On the chat screen, touch the Menu button Chat off record. The subsequent chat conversations will not be recorded. To resume the chat log, touch Chat on record. To switch between active conversations 1 While on a chat screen or in the friends list, touch the Menu button Switch chats. 2 In the panel that opens, touch the name of the friend you want to chat with. To close a conversation In your friends list, touch and hold the name of a friend with an active chat. Touch End chat on the menu that pops up. On a chat screen, touch the Menu button End chat. To display all friends in your friends list Only the friends that you chat with most frequently are listed as the most popular ones. If you want to display all your friends, touch the Menu button All friends. To display a friend in the most popular list 1 In the friends list, touch and hold the friends name to open the options menu. 2 Touch Show friend. Internet 81 To always show a friend in most popular list You can let a friend always appear in your most popular friends list. 1 In the friends list, touch and hold the friends name to open the options menu. 2 Touch Always show friend. NOTE: To remove a friend from the most popular list, in the friends list, touch and hold the friend you want to remove from the list, and then touch Auto show friend in the options menu. NOTE: To keep a friend from appearing in the most popular list, touch and hold the friends name, and then touch Hide friend in the menu. To block a friend from sending you messages 1 In the friends list, find the friend to block. 2 Touch and hold the friends name, and then touch Block friend. Your friend is removed from your friends list and is added to the blocked friends list. NOTE: To unblock a friend, in the friends list, touch the Menu button More Blocked. In the blocked friends list, touch the name of the friend to unblock, then touch OK. To permanently remove a friend 1 In the friends list, find the friend to remove. 2 Touch and hold the friends name, and then touch Remove friend. To find out what device your friend uses to chat on Google talk 1 In the friends list, ensure that the Menu button Settings Mobile indicator is selected. 2 In the friends list, check the image that appears to the right of your friends name. For example, if your friend is using an Android phone, the Android image will appear. If no image is displayed, it indicates that your friend has signed in to Google using a computer. 82 Internet To sign out from Google Talk In the friends list, touch the Menu button Sign out. Maps Google Maps helps you find your current location, view real-time traffic situations, and get directions to your destination. You can also use the search tool to locate addresses or places of interest on a map or in a street view. NOTE: The Google Maps application does not completely cover every location. To enable location source To search for desired places or find your current location using Google Maps, you need to enable My location sources:
1 Touch Home button Menu button Settings Location
& security. 2 Select Use wireless networks, Use GPS satellites, or both. NOTE: Selecting Use GPS satellites allows you to pinpoint locations down to the street-level. However, this mode requires a clear view of the sky and consumes battery power. To open Google Maps Touch the Launcher button Maps
. To see your location on a map On the Maps screen, touch with a blinking blue dot. Your location is marked on the map NOTE: Enabling GPS satellites allows you to pinpoint your current location down to the street-level. However, this mode requires a clear view of the sky and consumes more battery power. Internet 83 To find a location on the map 1 On the Maps screen, touch the Menu button Search. 2 To search by typing:
a Type the place you want to find in the search box. You can enter an address, a city or country, or a type of business or organization such restaurant or school. b Touch the search key on the keyboard or the search icon on the search box. To search by voice:
a b Touch Say your destination. NOTE: As you enter information, previous searches or matching locations appear below the search box. You can touch a place name or address to show the location on the map. 3 The search results are marked on the map by lettered balloons. 1 2 84 Internet 4 3 1 2 3 4 Touch the place name to view the address, details, and reviews for the place if the information is available (For more information, see "To view the details of a place" on page 85). Touch to show the list of search results. Touch to zoom in or out on the map. The search result is marked by a lettered marker. Touch the marker to display the name of the place. To view the details of a place 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 Touch to display the map view. Touch to obtain directions. (For more information, see "To get directions" on page 88). Touch to switch to street view for the location. (For more information, see "To view a map in street view" on page 87). Touch the photo thumbnail to open the browser and find more information about the location on Google. Touch to view the address, details, and reviews for the place if the information is available. Select the action you can do with the location. You can select Buzz about this place to post your opinions about the place, or select Share this place to share the address and contact information about the place using e-mail, Twitter, Facebook, Bluetooth, and more. Scroll down the list to find more actions you can do. Internet 85 To move around a map 1 Flick or drag the map in any direction on the screen to view desired areas. 2 If you spot a place of interest while navigating the map, touch and hold the place to display the address (a picture thumbnail is also displayed if the street view for the location is available). To zoom in or out on a map Touch Move two fingers close together on the screen to zoom out;
to zoom out and touch to zoom in. move two fingers further apart to zoom in. To change map layers Google Maps opens with the default map layer. You can apply different types of layers to view additional information or images on the map. 1 Touch
. 2 From the Layers menu, touch the desired layer to display it on the map. 86 Internet Map layer The map layer displays streets, highways, buildings, main establishments, mass transit stations, parks, rivers, lakes, mountains, boundaries, and so on. Traffic layer The traffic layer displays colored lines along the roads where real-time traffic data can be collected. Green lines indicate good traffic speeds, yellow lines indicate slower speeds, and brown lines indicate congested traffic. indicates where construction work is taking place;
indicates where the road is blocked. Satellite layer The satellite layer displays the map in non-real-time satellite view. Terrain layer The terrain layer combines street maps with visual information about terrains. Transit Lines layer The transit lines layer displays mass-transit routes around the area. NOTE: Touch More Layers to find more layers that you can apply to the map. For information about the other layers, visit maps.google.com. NOTE: To remove all of the layers other than the map layer, touch Clear Map. To view a map in street view You can switch to street view for the location that you found on the map. The street view is composed of imagery captured from the streets. 1 Locate a place of interest on the map. For more information, see
"To find a location on the map" on page 84 and "To move around a map" on page 86. 2 On the map, touch the name or address of the place. 3 On the location details screen, touch
. 4 To view the 360-degree panorama of the area around the place, turn the view on the screen with your finger. 5 To move the view along the street, touch the arrows displayed on the screen, or touch the Menu button Step forward or Step backward. Internet 87 NOTE: While viewing a street view of a location, touch the Menu button Compass mode to enable the compass mode, which allows you to view the area around the selected location by tilting or turning your device, rather than by moving the view on the screen with your finger. To get directions Use Google Maps to obtain directions to your destination. 1 When viewing a map:
touch the Menu button Directions. Or When a place is found:
a Touch the places name or address displayed on the map. b On the location details screen, touch
. 2 Enter the starting point in the first text box and your destination in the second text box. NOTE: By default, your current location is the starting point, and the place you found on the map is your destination. 1 2 5 3 4 Starting point 1 2 Destination 3 Choose how you want to get to your destination: driving, public transportation, or walking. 4 5 Touch to render directions. Touch to set your current location, a contact address, or a place on the map as the starting point or destination. 3 Touch Go. The directions to your destination are listed. 88 Internet 4 Touch Show on map, or touch a direction instruction on the list to show the directions or routes on the map. NOTE: To obtain driving directions using the Google GPS navigation services, touch Navigate. For more information, see "Navigation" on page 94. To clear a map Touch the Menu button Clear Map. All the search results, directions and traffic indicators are deleted from the map. Using Google Latitude NOTE: To use Google Latitude, you will be required to sign in to a Google account. The Google Latitude location service allows you to share locations with your friends and family who have signed in to the service with their Google accounts. You can also send instant messages and e-
mails, and get directions to your friends locations. To let your friends view your location and accept their invitations, you need to enable Latitude. 1 While viewing a map in any mode, touch the Menu button Join Latitude. 2 Sign in to Google Latitude with your Google account. If you do not have a Google account, follow the instructions on the screen to create an account (see "To set up your Google account" on page 76). NOTE: If you have set up two or more Google accounts on your device, and want to use Latitude with another account, touch the Menu button More Switch Account. 3 Read the privacy policy. If you accept, touch Agree & Share. To launch Latitude While viewing a map, touch the Menu button Latitude. Internet 89 To invite friends to share locations 1 On the Latitude screen, touch the Menu button Add friends. 2 Choose the friends you want to share locations with:
Select from Contacts: Select friends from your contacts. Friends already using Latitude have an icon next to their names. Add via email address: Enter an e-mail address. 3 Touch Add friends and then touch Yes. 4 Your friends already using Latitude receive an e-mail request and a notification on Latitude requesting them to share locations. If they have not yet joined Latitude, they receive an e-mail that requests them to sign in to Latitude with their Google accounts. To accept an invitation When you receive a request to share your location with a friend on Latitude, touch the request and choose how you want to respond:
Accept and share back: You can see your friends location, and your friend can see yours. Accept, but hide my location: You can see your friends location, but they cannot see yours. Dont accept: Reject the sharing request. No location information is shared. To show your friends You can show your friends on the map or in the list view. Map view When you open Google Maps, it displays the locations of your friends. Each friend is marked by a photo icon with an arrow that indicates their location. To see a friends profile and communicate with them, touch the photo, then touch their location callout right above their photo. To see other friends, touch either one of the arrow buttons next to the callout. 90 Internet List view To show a list of your friends, touch the Menu button Latitude. To see a friends profile and communicate with them, touch the friends name from the list. To connect with your friends Touch a friends name in map view or list view to open the friends profile. In the profile screen, you can send messages to your friend and configure privacy options. 3 2 1 6 4 5 Switch to street view of the friends location. 1 2 Get directions to the friends location. 3 4 See a friends location on the map. Sharing options:
Share best available location: Share street-level location with your friend. Share only city level location: Share only the city or the approximate area you are in, not the street-level location. Your friend can see your photo icon in the middle of the city you are in. Hide from this friend: Stop location sharing with this friend. Your friend cannot see your photo icon on the map. 5 6 Remove this friend: Remove this friend from your list and end all location sharing. Touch the thumbnail to open the pop-up menu. Depending on available settings, you may use Messaging and Gmail services to send a message to your friend. Internet 91 To control what to share and change your public profile 1 In Maps, touch the Menu button Latitude. 2 Touch your name on the list of friends to open your public profile window. 3 Set the following options to your preferences. Change your photo Send location to others Edit privacy settings Change the picture that your friends see on the map or in their list of friends. You can take a picture using the Camera application, or select a picture stored in Gallery. Send the address of your current location using Twitter, Facebook, Bluetooth, text messaging, or e-mail. Manage how your location is shared with your friends:
Turn off Latitude: Disable Latitude and end location sharing. Detect your location: Latitude automatically detects and updates your current location. NOTE: To let Latitude report your location, you must enable My location sources. For more information, see "To enable location source" on page 83. Set your location: Select a location from the map, contact addresses or nearby places, or type an address. Hide your location. All of your friends will not be able to see your location on their maps. 92 Internet Places Touch the Launcher button Places
. Places automatically detects your current location and offers guide to nearby restaurants, coffee shops, bars, hotels, attractions, ATMs, gas stations, and more. 1 Touch to select a category. 2 From the list of places, touch the desired place to view more details. For more information on using the controls on this screen, see "To view the details of a place" on page 85. Internet 93 Navigation NOTE: Google Maps Navigation is only available for use in the United States at this time. WARNING: It is your sole responsibility to use this application in a safe and responsible manner. You must obey local traffic laws, posted road signs, and safety regulations. Do not operate the device while driving. Touch the Launcher button Navigation
. Google Maps Navigation is an Internet-connected GPS satellite navigation system with voice guidance. Navigation provides the following features:
Feature Description Searching in plain language Type the name or address of the place, the business, or the organization you want to find. Searching by voice Name your destination using Google Search by voice (English only). 94 Internet Feature Traffic view Description Traffic view provides live traffic data and displays up-to-date traffic conditions on the screen. Press the Menu button Layers Traffic to turn on Traffic view. Searching along route Search for any kind of business along your route. Press the Menu button Layers to access popular types of places. Internet 95 Feature Satellite View Street View Car dock mode Navigation shortcut Description Satellite view allows you to view your route overlaid on 3D satellite views with Google's high-resolution aerial imagery. Press the Menu button Layers Satellite to turn on Satellite view. Street view helps visualize turns with Street View imagery. Navigation automatically switches to Street View as you approach your destination. Place your device in a car dock to access Navigation and Voice Search easily. Speak Destination: Say your destination using Google voice search. Type Destination: Type your destination. Contacts: Select a destination from the location of your contacts. Starred Places: Select a desalination from the list of Starred Places. 96 Internet Feature Walking navigation Description Get voice-guided navigation for walking directions. Your device vibrates for turn notifications. Internet 97 News and Weather Touch the Launcher button News and Weather
. Weather The Weather service automatically detects your current location and shows the local weather information. 1 2 3 1 Current weather. Touch this area to view temperatures, wind speed, and humidity data within the next 24 hours. 2 Weather forecast for the next 6 days. 3 Touch the The Weather Channel icon to start the browser and visit The Weather Channel website to find more weather information. If your current location is temporarily unavailable, you need to set your location manually as follows. 1 Touch the Menu button Settings Weather settings. 2 Clear the Use my location check box. 3 Touch Set location. 4 Enter a city or postal code. 5 Touch
. The weather location will be updated to the location you manually set. 98 Internet News Flick pages horizontally to view news topics, such as Top Stories, U.S., Sports, and Entertainment. Touch the news headline you are interested in to view the full content. To add/remove news topics You can manage the news topics to be displayed on your device as follows. 1 Touch the Menu button Settings News settings. 2 Touch Select news topics. Select the check boxes next to the news topics you want to display on the device. Clear the check boxes next to the unwanted news topics. To configure news and weather refresh settings 1 Touch the Menu button Settings Refresh settings. 2 To refresh news and weather automatically, select the Auto-
refresh check box. 3 Touch Refresh interval to adjust the refresh interval. Faster refresh intervals increase data usage and consume more battery power. NOTE: To refresh news and weather manually, touch the Menu button Refresh. Internet 99 YouTube YouTube is an Internet video streaming service that allows you to view videos uploaded by YouTube members. NOTE: Browsing and viewing videos does not require you to sign in to a YouTube account. However, to use all of the YouTube features, such as rating or commenting on a video or viewing My account, you must create and sign in to a YouTube account. To open YouTube Touch the Launcher button YouTube
. The YouTube screen opens with the videos grouped into categories such as Most viewed, Most discussed, Top rated, and so on. To search for a video by typing 1 Touch the icon on the top right of the YouTube screen, or touch the Menu button Search to open the search bar. 2 Type the video name or keyword into the search box using the on-screen keyboard. The search results that fully or partially match the text being typed appear below the search box. You can:
a b Scroll the search results and touch the desired result. on the keyboard or the search icon Touch on the search box to search for results that match the entered text, and then touch a desired search result. 3 The videos that match the selected result are listed. 4 Touch the video to start playing the video. To search for a video by voice command 1 Touch the icon on the top right corner of the YouTube screen, or touch the Menu button Search to open the search bar. 2 Touch
. 100 Internet 3 Say the video name or a keyword. 4 The videos that match the words you said are listed. 5 Touch the video to start playing the video. To search for a video by category 1 Touch the Menu button Categories. 2 Scroll the listed categories and touch the category under which the video appears. 3 Touch to start playing the video. To filter videos by different time frames 1 From a category screen, touch the Menu button Time filter. 2 Select a time frame such as Today or This week. 3 The videos that match the selected time frame are listed. To watch videos 1 Select a video listed on the YouTube screen. The video starts playing automatically. 2 To control video playback, touch anywhere on the screen to display and use the playback controls. 3 To end playback, touch the Back button or the Home button
. To manage a video 1 When browsing videos in a list, touch and hold a video to open the options menu. When playing a video, touch the Menu button
. 2 You can manage the video using the following options, some of which may require signing in to your YouTube account. Captions Details Rate Display captions during the video playback. View the details about the video. Rate the video with stars. Internet 101 Comments Favorite Share Flag Write and send your comments about the video. Add the videos web link to your browser bookmarks. Send the videos web link to others using Bluetooth, e-mail, Facebook, Twitter, text messaging, and so on. If you find the video inappropriate to get posted and want to have it removed, you can flag the video to notify the service provider. Home Return to the YouTube main screen Android Market You can use Android Market to download and install applications and games on your device. NOTE: Applications downloaded from Android Market may not support automatic screen rotation to portrait or landscape. To open Android Market 1 Touch the Launcher button Market
. 2 Sign in to Android Market with your Google account. If you do not have a Google account, follow the instructions on the screen to create an account (see "To set up your Google account" on page 76). 3 Touch the Accept button after you read and agree with the Android Market Terms of Service. 102 Internet 4 The Android Market screen opens. 1 2 3 6 5 4 1 Touch Apps to view the application categories. All applications available for download are sorted by these categories. Touch Games to view the game categories. All games available for download are sorted by these categories. The Market screen displays popular application categories here for direct access. The Market screen opens with featured applications for direct access. Shows user rating about the item and whether it is free or requires a purchase. Touch Downloads to view your downloads. Touch to search Android Market for applications or games. 2 3 4 5 6 Internet 103 When a category is selected, for example, touch the Games tab Brain & Puzzle:
2 1 3 4 1 2 3 4 Touch Top paid to view the paid games downloaded most often. Touch Top free to view the free games downloaded most often. Touch Just in to view new games available for download. Touch the game to download and install on your device. To download and install an application or game 1 Scroll and browse listed applications or games to locate the desired application or games. 2 Touch the application or game you want to download and install. 3 On the application details screen, you can read the introduction to the application or game, user ratings and comments, and developer information. NOTE: Touch the Menu button and select Security to view the functions or data that the application or game can access on your device. 4 On the application details screen, touch Install to start the download and installation. The applications downloading screen will show the download progress. NOTE: If the application requires access to any of your data or functions on your device, Market tells you what the application can access. Touch the OK button to start the download and installation. 104 Internet NOTE: During installation, the icon appears in the notification area of the status bar. Touch the notification area of the status bar to open the Notifications panel and check the status of the download. NOTE: To stop downloading an application, touch Cancel download on the applications downloading screen. 5 After the application is downloaded and installed on your device, the icon appears in the notification area of the status bar. To open an application or game From the Market screen:
1 Touch the Downloads tab on the Market screen, or touch the Menu button Downloads. 2 Touch the installed application in the list. 3 Touch Open. The selected application starts running. From the main application menu:
1 Touch the Launcher button
. 2 Touch the applications icon. From the status bar:
1 Drag down the status bar to view the Notifications panel where icon appears to indicate a recently downloaded the application. 2 Touch the name of the application you want to open. To uninstall an application or game 1 On the downloads screen, touch the application you want to uninstall. 2 Touch Uninstall. 3 After the uninstall is completed, you can select the reason for removing the application. Internet 105 Synchronizing Your Google Data Through a web connection, your device can synchronize your Google data including Gmail, calendar, and contacts with your computer or any other device that you use to access your Google account. To select the applications to synchronize 1 Touch Home button Menu button Settings Accounts & sync. 2 Under the General sync settings bar, touch to select Background data to make all the sync options available. 3 Under the General sync settings bar, touch to select Auto-sync to allow the device to automatically synchronize the selected data. 4 Under the Manage accounts bar, touch your account to select the data that you want the device to synchronize automatically, such as Sync Contacts, Sync Gmail, Sync Picasa Web Albums, and Sync Calendar. NOTE: If you want to synchronize individual applications manually, touch to clear the Auto-sync check box, then touch a data option to start synchronization of the selected data. To sync all of the data manually, touch the Menu button Sync now. NOTE: While data is syncing, the sync icon appears on the status bar, and the sync icon appears on the option of the data being synced. 106 Internet Customizing Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet You can customize your device, using the options available in the Settings menu. Display Settings To change the display settings:
1 Touch the Home button Menu button Settings Display, or touch the Launcher button Settings icon Display. 2 Touch the desired item under Display settings. 3 To enable a setting, touch the setting option to select the check box
; to disable a setting, touch the setting option to clear the check box
. Brightness Auto-rotate screen Manually adjust screen brightness. 1 Drag the brightness slider horizontally or touch the desired portion on the slider. The length of the highlighted bar on the slider determines the brightness of the screen. 2 Touch OK to confirm the adjustment. NOTE: If Automatic brightness is enabled, the device will adjust the screen brightness automatically based on the surrounding light conditions. If enabled, the screen will switch the orientation to landscape or portrait as you rotate the device. Customizing Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet 107 Animation Screen timeout Set the device to play an animation for opening and closing windows. Set the duration the screen remains on after the last operation. Scroll the options and touch a preferred timeout period; to disable this feature select Never timeout. The screen automatically turns off and locks itself based on the preset timeout duration. To turn on and unlock the screen, press the Power button and then flick the to unlock the screen if it is automatically locked. icon up NOTE: If you select Never timeout, the screen does not turn off, and depletes the battery charge soon. NOTE: You must draw the unlock pattern if you have set up and enabled the screen lock pattern. For more information, see
"Protect Your Device Data With a Screen Unlock Pattern" on page 112. Sound and Ringtone Settings To change the sound and ringtone settings:
1 Touch the Home button Menu button Settings Sound, or touch Settings icon Sound. Use the options under Sound settings, and then touch a desired option. 2 Flick the list to locate and touch a desired option. 108 Customizing Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet 3 To enable a setting, touch the setting option to select the check box
; to disable a setting, touch the setting option to clear the check box
. General settings Silent mode Vibrate Volume Notifications settings Notification ringtone Notification sound Feedback settings Audible selection Screen lock sounds Haptic feedback Silence all sounds except media and alarms. Set the device to vibrate based on the available settings. Ringtone: Adjust the ringer volume for notifications. Media: Adjust the volume for music and video playback. Alarm: Adjust the volume for alarm ringtone. 1 To adjust the volume, drag the sliders horizontally or touch the desired portion of the slider to increase or decrease volume. 2 Touch OK to confirm the adjustment. Select a desired ringtone for notifications. Select this item to enable notification sound. Plays a tone as you touch the screen to select items. Plays a tone when the screen is locked and unlocked. The device vibrates when you touch the buttons or when specific interactions with the device occur. Customizing Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet 109 Date, Time, and Time Zone To manually set the date, time, and time zone:
1 Touch the Home button Menu button Settings Date
& time, or touch Settings icon Date & time. 2 Flick the list to locate and touch the desired item. 3 To enable a setting, touch the setting option to select the check box
; to disable a setting, touch the setting option to clear the check box
. Select time source Set date Choose to set the device time manually or automatically from your mobile network or from the Internet. 1 Touch or touch and hold or to adjust the day, month, and year; you can also touch the day, month, or year to type a date using the on-screen keyboard. 2 Touch Set to confirm the date. Set time zone Select a city or region that represents the time Set time zone for your device. Touch the Menu button to sort the time zone list alphabetically or by time zone. 1 Touch or touch and hold or to adjust the hour and minute; you can also touch the hour or minute to type a time using the on-screen keyboard. 2 Touch the AM/PM button if the 12-hour format is in use. 3 Touch Set to confirm the time. 110 Customizing Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet Use 24-hour format Select date format Clear this check box to display the time in 12-
hour format. Select the format to be used for displaying the date. Language Settings To set the language of the display text:
1 Touch the Home button Menu button Settings Language & keyboard Select language, or touch Settings icon Language & keyboard Select language. 2 Select a language of your choice from the Locale list that appears. Customizing Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet 111 Protecting Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet Protect Your Device Data With a Screen Unlock Pattern You can protect your device data against unauthorized access by locking the touch screen with a screen unlock pattern. Once the unlock pattern is enabled and the screen is locked, you need to draw the correct unlock pattern to unlock the screen. After you fail to draw the correct unlock pattern on the screen for five consecutive times, you will be asked to wait for 30 seconds before you can try again. If you no longer remember your screen unlock pattern, follow these steps to unlock your screen:
1 Touch Forgot pattern. 2 When prompted, sign in to the Google website using your Google account name and password. 3 Draw a new screen unlock pattern as described in "To create a screen unlock pattern" on page 112. NOTE: If you are unable to obtain a new unlock pattern following the above steps, visit support.dell.com. To create a screen unlock pattern 1 Touch the Home button Menu button Settings Location & security Set up screen lock Pattern, or touch the Launcher button Location & security Set up screen lock Pattern. Settings icon 2 Read the instructions on the screen and then touch Next. 112 Protecting Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet 3 Study the animated example of how to draw a pattern. Then touch Next when you are ready to draw your own pattern. 4 Drag your finger to draw the unlock pattern by connecting at least four dots in a vertical, horizontal and/or diagonal direction. Take your finger off the screen when a pattern is drawn. NOTE: You must touch and drag your finger on the screen to create the pattern. 5 The device records the pattern if it is correctly drawn. Touch Continue. 6 Draw the pattern again as prompted, and then touch Confirm. NOTE: To change your unlock screen pattern, you need to draw the old pattern and perform steps 4 to 6 to create a new pattern. To disable or change the screen unlock pattern 1 Touch the Home button Menu button Settings Location & security Change screen lock, or touch the Launcher button Location & security Change screen lock. Settings icon 2 Draw the pattern you created. 3 Select None to disable screen unlock security; select Pattern to draw a new unlock pattern. Protecting Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet 113 To change unlock pattern settings 1 Touch the Home button Menu button Settings Location & security, or touch the Launcher button Settings icon Location & security. 2 To enable a setting, touch the setting option to select the check box
; to disable a setting, touch the setting option to clear the check box
. Use visible pattern Use tactile feedback Clear this option if you do not want the lines of the unlock pattern to display on the screen when you draw it. Clear this option if you do not want the device to give you tactile feedback when drawing the unlock pattern. Protect Your Device Data With a PIN 1 Touch the Home button Menu button Settings Location & security Set up screen lock PIN, or touch the Launcher button Location & security Set up screen lock PIN. Settings icon 2 On the Choose your PIN page that appears, enter a PIN in the text box. Your PIN must be 4 characters at least. 3 Touch OK to proceed. 4 Enter the PIN again to confirm. 5 Touch OK. 114 Protecting Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet To disable or change PIN 1 Touch the Home button Menu button Settings Location & security Change screen lock, or touch the Launcher button Location & security Change screen lock. Settings icon 2 Enter the PIN you have enabled. 3 Select None to disable the PIN; select PIN to change PIN. Protect Your Device Data With a Password 1 Touch the Home button Menu button Settings Location & security Set up screen lock Password, or touch the Launcher button Location & security Set up screen lock Password. Settings icon 2 On the Choose your password page that appears, enter a password in the text box. A valid password consists of at least 4 characters and contains at least one letter. 3 Touch OK to proceed. 4 Enter the password again to confirm. 5 Touch OK. To disable or change the password 1 Touch the Home button Menu button Settings Location & security Change screen lock, or touch the Launcher button Location & security Change screen lock. Settings icon 2 Enter the password you have enabled. 3 Select None to disable the PIN; select Password to change the password. Protecting Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet 115 Protect Your SIM Card With the SIM Lock Password You can protect your SIM card against unauthorized use with a personal identification number (PIN). After a PIN is enabled to lock your SIM, you will need to enter the PIN each time you turn on the device in order to unlock your SIM. NOTE: The SIM card will be permanently locked if you enter the incorrect PIN for three consecutive times. You must then enter the Personal Unblocking Key (PUK) to unlock the SIM card. Contact your service provider to obtain the PUK. To enable the SIM card PIN 1 Touch the Home button Menu button Settings Location & security Set up SIM card lock Lock SIM Card, or touch the Launcher button Location & security Set up SIM card lock Lock SIM Card. Settings icon 2 Type your SIM card PIN, and then touch OK. To change the SIM card PIN 1 Touch the Home button Menu button Settings Location & security Set up SIM card lock Change SIM PIN, or touch the Launcher button Location & security Set up SIM card lock Change SIM PIN. Settings icon 2 Type the old SIM card PIN, and then touch OK. 3 Type the new SIM card PIN, and then touch OK. 4 Type the new SIM card PIN again, and then touch OK. 116 Protecting Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet Applications Camera Your device has a camera with auto-focus feature that allows you to capture and share high-quality pictures and videos. To start the camera in picture mode Touch the Launcher button Camera
. Camera controls 1 5 4 3 2 1 2 3 Viewfinder screen. Camera setting indicator. Touch each indicator to open the camera settings, and touch to select the desired setting. On-screen shutter button. To capture a picture:
1 Focus on the object in the viewfinder screen. 2 To start the auto focus mode, touch and hold the on-screen shutter button. 3 Touch the on-screen shutter button and release to capture the picture. Applications 117 4 Drag this on-screen switch to toggle between the camera mode for capturing pictures, and the camcorder mode for capturing videos. 5 Touch the thumbnail view of the last taken picture to view and manage the picture using the Gallery application. Additional camera settings Touch the Menu button
. Front-Facing/Rear-Facing Camera Gallery Switch to video/camera Use the front-facing or rear-facing camera to capture pictures. Open the Gallery application to view and manage pictures. Toggle between the camera mode for capturing pictures, and the camcorder mode for capturing videos. To start the camcorder mode Touch the Menu button Switch to video, or touch the camcorder screen. to switch to Camcorder controls 5 4 3 1 1 Viewfinder screen. 118 Applications 2 2 Camcorder setting indicator. Touch each indicator to open the camcorder settings. To start or stop recording, touch this on-screen video recording button. 3 4 Drag this on-screen switch to toggle between the camera mode for capturing pictures, and the camcorder mode for shooting videos. 5 Touch the thumbnail view of the last captured video to play and manage the video using the Gallery application. Copying Files to and From the Device To exchange pictures, videos, music, and other files between your device and a computer, you can use the internal device storage or the SD card as a USB drive, by connecting the device to a computer with the included USB cable. NOTE: To copy files to and from your SD card, you need to install the SD card in your device. For more information on how to install a SD card on your device, see "Insert the SD card" on page 11. To set the SD card or the internal device storage as a USB drive 1 Connect the device to the computer by connecting the 30-pin connector into the device and the USB connector into the USB port on the computer. 2 The USB connected screen appears and the USB connected banner flashes on the status bar. The USB notification icon appears on the status bars notification area when the device is connected to the computer. NOTE: If the USB connected screen does not appear, drag down the status bar to open the Notifications panel, and then touch USB connected to open the USB connected screen. 3 Touch Turn on USB storage, if you want to copy files between your computer and the SD card or the internal device storage. 4 Open the My Computer window on your computer to locate two removable drives, which represent respectively the SD card installed in your device, and the internal device storage. Applications 119 5 Copy the desired files such as music or pictures from another drive/folder to one of the removable drives, or vice versa. To turn off USB storage The device will not recognize the SD card and the internal device storage when they are being used as a USB drive. You will not be able to use the devices applications that involve saving or retrieving files on the SD card and on the internal device storage, such as camera or music playback. You need to turn off USB storage for the device to recognize the SD card and the internal device storage, when the device is connected to a computer. To turn off the USB storage function:
1 Drag down the status bar to open the Notifications panel. 2 Touch Turn off USB storage. Bluetooth Bluetooth is a short-range wireless communications technology that lets your device connect over a wireless network to other Bluetooth-
enabled devices for data exchange. Bluetooth on your device operates in three different modes:
On Bluetooth is turned on. Your device is enabled to detect Bluetooth devices within range, but will not be found by them. Discoverable Bluetooth is turned on, and other Bluetooth devices can detect your device. Off Bluetooth is turned off. Your device cannot send and receive data using Bluetooth. To turn on Bluetooth and make the device discoverable 1 Touch the Home button Menu button Settings Wireless & networks. 2 Select the Bluetooth check box to turn on Bluetooth. The Bluetooth icon appears in the status bar. 120 Applications 3 Touch Bluetooth settings, then select the Discoverable check box to make the device recognizable by other nearby Bluetooth devices. To pair and connect a Bluetooth device 1 Touch the Home button Menu button Settings Wireless & networks Bluetooth settings. 2 Touch and select the Bluetooth check box. Your device starts to scan for Bluetooth devices within range and then displays all detected devices below the Bluetooth devices banner. NOTE: To detect more devices, touch Scan for devices. 3 To initiate a connection with a device, touch the name of the device. 4 You may be prompted to enter a password to authenticate. Enter the same password on both devices, or enter the password provided by the device manufacturer. Ensure that you read the documentation of the pairing device to check if it requires a default password. 5 When the pairing is successful, Paired but not connected is displayed under the paired device. 6 Touch the paired device to start connection. When the paired device is successfully connected to your device, the Bluetooth connected icon appears in the status bar. NOTE: To listen to the music using a Bluetooth headset, pair it first with your device. NOTE: Pairing is a one-time process. Once your device successfully pairs with another device, your device recognizes that device without re-
entering your password. To end a Bluetooth connection 1 Touch the Home button Menu button Settings Wireless & networks Bluetooth settings. 2 Touch and hold the name of a connected device. Applications 121 3 Touch Disconnect on the pop-up menu that appears. To terminate a pairing partnership 1 Touch the Home button Menu button Settings Wireless & networks Bluetooth settings. 2 Touch and hold the name of a paired device. 3 Touch Unpair on the pop-up menu that appears to erase all pairing information with that device. You need to re-enter the password if you want to restore a Bluetooth connection to that device. To change your devices Bluetooth name 1 Ensure that you have turned on Bluetooth on your device
icon in the status bar indicates that Bluetooth is enabled). 2 Touch the Home button Menu button Settings Wireless & networks Bluetooth settings Device name. 3 Enter a name to identify the device when you connect using Bluetooth. 4 Touch OK. 122 Applications Gallery To view and manage the pictures and videos stored on your device, touch the Launcher button Gallery
. The Gallery application displays not only the pictures and videos stored on your SD card, but also those uploaded to the Picasa web album of your Gmail account which you signed in with on your device. To share or delete albums All pictures and videos are grouped in separate albums as overlapping thumbnails, according to their dates, sources, or folders in which they are stored. For example, pictures taken using the device camera are grouped as Camera, and downloaded pictures are grouped as download. 1 Touch and hold an album until the check box appears. Overlapping thumbnails as one album. 2 Touch more albums to select them if you want to do the same task for those albums. To post the selected album to Picasa or video album to YouTube, or to send the album using Bluetooth, messaging, or e-mail, touch Share. To delete the album, touch Delete. To browse picture and video thumbnails 1 Touch an album to display the thumbnails of all pictures and videos inside. 2 To browse the thumbnails:
Touch or drag to display all the thumbnails in grid view, or group them by date as overlapping thumbnails. When the thumbnails are displayed in grid view, drag or touch the arrows on it to move thumbnails horizontally, until the desired thumbnail is located. Applications 123 3 To select a thumbnail, touch and hold it until appears; touch more thumbnails as you need. To post a selected picture or video to Facebook, Twitter, Picasa, YouTube, or to send it using Bluetooth, messaging, or email, touch Share. To delete a selected picture or video, touch Delete. To set a picture as the Home screen wallpaper, touch More Set as Wallpaper. To set a picture as a contacts picture ID, touch More Set as Contact icon. To display a full picture Touch a desired picture thumbnail to display the picture in full screen. Flick the picture to view the next or previous one. To bring up the picture viewing controls, touch anywhere on the screen, or touch twice. To zoom the picture in or out, you can:
. Touch Pinch the picture with two fingers, then move the fingers away from each other to enlarge the view of the picture, or bring them closer together to reduce the view of the picture. To zoom in or out on a particular area of the picture, tap that area twice. When a picture view is being enlarged, flick or drag the enlarged picture across the screen until the required area appears. To play a video 1 Touch a video thumbnail to start playback of the video. 2 To control playback, use these controls below the viewing screen:
Touch the resume playback. button to pause and the button to 124 Applications Touch or drag the playback progress bar at the bottom to rewind or fast-forward the video. Music To open Music Touch the Launcher button Music
. The Music library screen opens, which is organized by Artists, Albums, Songs, and Playlists tabs. You can touch a tab to display your desired category. To select a song 1 2 5 4 3 1 2 3 All the music files available on your device are grouped into these categories: Artists, Albums, Songs, and Playlists. Touch a category to view the list within it. NOTE: If you rotate your device to landscape mode, an additional Now playing category appears. Flick the list until you find the music you want to play. For instance, to select music by artist:
a Flick the list of artists in alphabetical order. b Touch the name of an artist. A list of albums by the artist appears. c Touch an album to find the songs inside. d Touch a song to open the music playback screen and play the music. indicates the current album or song being played. Applications 125 4 5 You can flick or drag a long list, and then drag the icon to quickly scroll the list by alphabet. that appears The letter icon indicates the alphabet of the list you scroll to. To control music playback 12 11 10 1 2 9 8 1 2 3 3 4 5 6 7 The albums cover image if present. The passing playback time. Touch the playback control bar to jump to any part of the song. Drag and scroll the playback control bar forward to fast-forward the song. Drag and scroll the playback control bar backward to rewind the song. 4 If the song is playing for more than five seconds, touch to jump to the beginning of the song. If the song is playing for less than five seconds, touch to play the previous song. 5 6 7 8 Touch to pause playback; touch to resume playback. Touch to play the next song. Touch and hold to fast-forward the song. Touch to turn the HDMI mode on and off when connecting to an HDMI output device. The duration of the song. 126 Applications 9 The name of the artist, album, and the song being played. Touch and hold the artist, album, or song to search for relevant information or videos from the Internet using the Browser or Youtube application, or do the search inside the Music application. 10 Touch to cycle through the repeat modes. 11 Touch to turn the shuffle mode on and off. 12 Go to the Now playing list. NOTE: Press the volume up button or volume down button to adjust the playback volume. NOTE: On the Music library screen, touch Shuffle all to play all songs in your library in random order. The first randomly selected song starts to play. To create a playlist 1 On the Music screen, touch the Artists, Albums, Songs tabs as needed. 2 Flick the screen until you reach the artist, album, or song that you want to add to the playlist. 3 Touch and hold the artist, album, or song that you want to add in the playlist. A pop-up menu opens. 4 Touch Add to playlist. 5 In the Add to playlist window, touch New. NOTE: If you want to add the artist, album, or song to the current playlist, touch Current playlist in the Add to playlist options menu. 6 Enter the name for your new playlist in the text field and then touch Save. Applications 127 Calendar Use the calendar to schedule and manage your events, meetings, and appointments. To open the calendar Touch the Launcher button Calendar
. To set up an event 1 On any calendar view, touch the Menu button More New event to open the Event details screen. 2 Type the event name using the on-screen keyboard. 3 If there is a time period for the event, touch and type the From and To date and time. If the event is a special occasion such as a birthday or takes a whole day, set the From and To date, and then select the All day check box. 4 Type the event location and description. 5 If you have set up more than one account on your device, under the Calendar option, choose the account calendar to which to add the event. 6 To invite your friends to join this event, type their e-mail addresses into the Guests text box. The invitation will be e-mailed to them when this event is set up. 7 Decide whether it is a recurring event in Repetition and choose how often it occurs. 8 In Reminders, set when the reminder appears before the event. 9 Touch Done and the event is created. NOTE: To quickly set up an event in day, week, or month view, touch and hold an empty time slot New event. A new Event details screen opens with the selected time slot and date in the From and To fields. 128 Applications To view the calendar You can display the calendar in daily, weekly, monthly, or agenda view. To change the calendar view, touch the Menu button Day/Week/Month/Agenda/Today. While viewing the calendar you can:
In day or week views, touch an event to open a quick view window of the event on the lower part of the screen. Touch the event or the quick view window to view details about the event. Touch and hold an event to open a menu with options for viewing, editing, or deleting the event, or creating a new event. To view and synchronize multiple calendars If you have set up more than one account on your device, you can view multiple calendars from the accounts on your device. You can configure which calendars to synchronize to the device, and which of those to show or hide on the device in Calendar. To set whether calendars are synchronized to the device or visible, follow the steps below. 1 In Calendar, touch the Menu button More Calendars. The Calendars screen displays all the calendars you have added or subscribed to for each account on your device, organized by account. Touch the name of an account to show or hide its calendars on your device. The icon to the right of each calendar indicates whether the events on that calendar are synchronized to the device and whether they are visible in Calendar. 2 Touch the icon next to a calendar to change whether it is synchronized to the device and visible in Calendar. Calendar events are synchronized to the device and visible in Calendar. Calendar events are synchronized to the device but not visible in Calendar. Calendar events are not synchronized to the device. Applications 129 3 Touch OK. Event reminders If you set a reminder for an event, the upcoming event icon appears in the notifications area of the status bar when the reminder time arrives. To view, dismiss, or snooze a reminder 1 Drag the notification area of the status bar to open the Notification menu. 2 Touch the upcoming event name to display the event. NOTE: If you have other pending event reminders, these events will also appear on the screen. 3 Touch Snooze all to put off all event reminders for five minutes. Touch Dismiss all to turn off all event reminders. Press the status bar. to keep the reminders pending in the notification area of 130 Applications Clock Your device can work as a desk alarm clock to display current time and date, local weather, and play picture slideshow and music. Touch the Launcher button Clock
. 1 2 8 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 4 5 6 Displays the first active alarm time. The current time and date. Touch to set the alarm. Touch to play the slideshow of the pictures stored on your device. Touch to start the Music application and choose the music to play. Touch to return to the Home screen. Displays the local weather. Touch to start the News and Weather application to find more weather updates. Touch to turn the backlight down to the minimum level. Touch and hold to turn off the backlight and only display the current time, date, and alarm time. NOTE: To turn on the backlight, touch anywhere on the screen. Applications 131 To set an alarm You can set multiple alarms. 1 On the Clock main screen, touch
. 2 On the Alarms screen, touch Add alarm. 3 The Set alarm menu opens with these settings:
Turn on alarm Time Repeat Ringtone Vibrate Label Turn on the alarm that you have set on the device. Set the alarm time. Adjust the time by touching or
, or touch the hour and minute fields to enter a time. Touch AM to change to PM or vice versa, then touch Set when done. Select the days you want the alarm to ring, then touch OK. NOTE: If you did not select any days for the alarm, Never appears to hint that your alarm will only go off once. Select the alarm ringtone. Select the check box if you want the device to vibrate when the alarm goes off. Give the alarm a name for a special event. 4 Touch Done to set the alarm. NOTE: On the Alarms screen you can also add a new alarm by touching the Menu button Add alarm. 132 Applications To temporarily disable an alarm On the Alarms screen, clear the green bar of the alarm time you want to disable. Green bar To delete an alarm 1 On the Alarms screen, touch the alarm time you want to delete. 2 On the Set alarm screen, touch Delete. To enable the alarm in silent mode You can choose if the alarm should ring when the device is in silent mode. 1 On the Alarms screen, touch the Menu button Settings. 2 Touch Alarm in silent mode to set if the alarm should ring when the device is in silent mode. Calculator 1 Touch the Launcher button Calculator. The basic calculator panel opens. 2 Perform calculations by touching the corresponding buttons on the calculator panel; touch the CLEAR button to clear the displayed numbers or symbols. 3 To perform advanced calculations, flick the basic calculator panel away to the left and reveal the advanced panel, or touch the Menu button Advanced panel. Applications 133 Sound Recorder Open this application to record voice and sounds and then play them back. You can also set the recording as a ringtone for your device. NOTE: The sound recorder only supports recording in the amr format. 1 Touch the Launcher button Sound Recorder
. 2 Touch to start recording. 3 Touch to end recording. 4 Touch to start playback of the recording; touch to stop playback. 5 Touch Save this recording to save the recording on the SD card. 6 To play back a sound recording again, touch the Launcher button Music Songs, then select a recording to play. For information about Music, see "Music" on page 125. 134 Applications Synchronizing Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet and Computer Using Dell Mobile Sync The Dell Mobile Sync (powered by Nero) software allows you to copy or sync music, photos, videos, and Outlook contacts between your device and a computer. To install the Dell Mobile Sync software on your computer 1 Connect the supplied USB cable to your device and a computer. Wait for your computer to automatically install the device driver. After the driver installation is complete, the Dell Mobile Sync installer may start automatically on computers running the Microsoft Windows XP (SP3) and Windows Vista operating systems. 2 If the Dell Mobile Sync installer does not start automatically:
a Double-click the new Removable Disk that appears on your computer. b Navigate to the Dell Mobile Sync folder on the removable disk. c Double-click the InstallDellMSync.exe file to start the installation. Synchronizing Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet and Computer Using Dell Mobile Sync 135 NOTE: You can also download and install the Dell Mobile Sync software from support.dell.com/support/downloads. To sync music, photos, videos, and Outlook contacts:
1 Ensure that the supplied USB cable is connected to your device and a computer. 2 Double-click the Dell Mobile Sync icon on the Windows desktop. Your device appears under the Devices section in the Dell Mobile Sync software. 3 After the copy or sync is complete, disconnect the USB cable. NOTE: For information about the Dell Mobile Sync software and to learn how to sync your device to a computer using Wi-Fi, see the documentation included in the Dell Mobile Sync software. 136 Synchronizing Your Dell Streak 7 Tablet and Computer Using Dell Mobile Sync Troubleshooting Problem Possible causes Possible solutions PIN Code is blocked You have entered an incorrect PIN code three consecutive times. Contact your service provider. If the service provider provides the SIM card's PUK code, use the PUK code to unlock the SIM card. System problems Battery does not charge The battery or battery Contact the dealer. charger is damaged. The devices temperature is below 0C or higher than 45C. Adjust the battery charging environment to avoid extreme temperatures. Poor contact between the battery and charger. Check all connectors to ensure that all connections have been properly made. The battery is empty. Charge the device. Battery contacts are not clean. Seek your dealer's help to clean the contacts. Unable to turn the device on. Troubleshooting 137 Problem Possible causes Possible solutions Shortened standby time The duration of standby time is affected by your service providers system configuration. The same device used with different service providers' systems does not have the same duration of standby time. If you are located in an area where the network signal is weak, temporarily turn off your device. The battery is depleted. In high-temperature environments, battery life will be shortened. If you are not able to connect to the network, the device will continue to send out signals as it attempts to locate a base station. Doing this consumes battery charge and consequently shortens standby time. Your device is in Airplane mode with no wireless connectivity. The signal strength is not strong enough. Messaging problems Unable to send or receive text messages. Unable to send or receive e-mail. The Internet connection or the e-mail setting is not configured properly. Use a new battery. Change your location to one where the network is accessible, or temporarily turn off your device. Touch the Home button Menu button Settings Wireless &
networks Clear the Airplane mode check box. Try moving to a different location for better signal reception. Check your network connection, and confirm with your e-mail service provider if your e-mail setting has been configured correctly. 138 Troubleshooting Problem Possible causes Possible solutions Internet problems Unable to connect to the network. Invalid SIM card. Contact your service provider. You are not within the networks service area. Check the service area with your service provider. Poor signal. Your device is in Airplane mode with no wireless connectivity. Move to an open space or if you are inside a building, move closer to a window. Touch the Home button Menu button Settings Wireless &
networks Clear the Airplane mode check box. The device records video sounds in amr format, but Windows Media Player does not support amr decoding. Play the video using a video player with the amr decoder, such as QuickTime. Media problems Windows Media Player on my computer cannot play the sounds of the video captured using the device. Starting Your Device in the Safe Mode If you find your device unusable because of an application you installed, try to start your device in the Safe mode. In the Safe mode, all 3rd-party applications are disabled and you can remove any problematic applications to continue using your device normally. To enter the Safe mode, follow the steps below. 1 Make sure your device is off. 2 Press and hold the Power and Sleep/Wake button to turn on your device. 3 While the operating system is starting up, the white DELL logo appears twice. When you see the white DELL logo at the second time, touch and hold the Menu button until "Safe mode" appears at the bottom of the screen. Troubleshooting 139 NOTE: To exit the Safe mode, turn off your device and turn it on normally again. 140 Troubleshooting Index A Airplane Mode, 58 Alarm Clock, 131 Android Market, 102 Applications Definition, 17 Erase data, 51 Navigate, 33 Recently used, 34 Shortcuts, 34 B Battery Charge, 12 Bluetooth, 120 Button Back, 8 Home, 9 Menu, 8 Power and Sleep/Wake, 8 Volume up/down, 7 C Calculator, 133 Calendar, 128 Camcorder, 118 Camera, 117 Camcorder, 118 Shoot videos, 118 Take pictures, 117 Charging, 12 Connection Mobile networks, 54 To a computer, 119 Wi-Fi, 56 Contacts, 36 Add, 36 Sync, 38 View, 37 Controls, 7 Touch screen, 14 Customize, 107 D Data connection, 54 Date, 110 Dell Mobile Sync, 135 Dell Stage Desktop, 18 widgets, 21 Device Customize, 107 Overview, 7 Protect, 112 Index 141 Reset, 53 Settings, 51 Setup, 11 Turn off, 13 Turn on, 13 Disable all connections, 58 Display settings, 107 E E-mail, 65 Erase all data, 52 F Facebook, 68 Factory reset, 53 G Gallery, 123 Gmail, 76 Google Account Setup, 76 Google Maps, 83 Google Maps Navigation, 94 Google Search, 49 Google Talk, 79 142 Index H Home screen, 18 Customize, 24 I Internet Browse, 58 Connection, 54 K Keyboard, 46 L Language, 111 M Maps, 83 Messaging, 39 Compose, 39 Receive, 43 Mobile networks, 54 Music, 125 Create a playlist, 127 Playback, 126 N Navigation, 94 News and Weather, 98 O On-Screen Keyboard, 46 P Pictures and videos, 123 PIN Change, 116 Device, 114 Enable, 116 Places, 93 Pop-Up menu, 45 R Recorder, 134 Ringtone, 108 S Screen Orientation, 17 Turn off/on, 13 Screen Unlock Pattern, 112 Create, 112 Disable/change, 113 Settings, 114 SD card, 119 Format, 51 Insert, 11 Remove, 51 Set as USB drive, 119 Turn off USB storage, 120 Unmount, 51 Search, 49 Settings Date and time, 110 Display, 107 Language, 111 Sound and ringtone, 108 Shortcuts, 34 Add, 24 Definition, 18 SIM card Insert, 11 Sound, 108 Stage widgets, 21 Status bar, 29 Icons, 30 Synchronize Google Data, 106 Synchronize with Computer Use Dell Mobile Sync, 135 T Text message, 39 Time, 110 Time zone, 110 Touch screen, 14 Troubleshooting, 137 Twitter, 72 Index 143 V Voice Search, 50 W Web Applications, 68 Bookmarks, 63 Widgets Add, 26 Definition, 17 Google Search, 49 Wi-Fi, 56 Y YouTube, 100 144 Index
1 2 3 4 | Manual 2 | Users Manual | 1.29 MiB |
book.book Page 1 Friday, December 10, 2010 6:21 PM Dell Streak 7 Safety, Environmental, and Regulatory Information book.book Page 2 Friday, December 10, 2010 6:21 PM book.book Page 1 Friday, December 10, 2010 6:21 PM Dell Streak 7 Safety, Environmental, and Regulatory Information For information about product use, devices, and technologies, refer to your printed documentation, information on the device, and support.dell.com. Model M02M book.book Page 2 Friday, December 10, 2010 6:21 PM Notes and Warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your Mini device. WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. __________________ Information in this document is subject to change without notice. 2010 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden Trademarks used in this text: Dell and the DELL logo are trademarks of Dell Inc. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. December 2010 P/N 71HK7 Rev. A00 book.book Page 3 Friday, December 10, 2010 6:21 PM Before Using Your Dell device Read all safety and operating instructions before using your Dell device to avoid injury. For detailed operating instructions, the latest User's Manual, and updates to the safety and regulatory information, see support.dell.com/manuals. Product Safety Information Distraction While Driving It is recommended not to use your Dell device (even with a hands free kit) while driving as it may cause distractions and may lead to an accident. You must comply with local laws and regulations restricting the use of wireless devices while driving. Product Handling General Statement on Handling and Use You must always switch off your Dell device wherever the use of a cell phone or other wireless device is prohibited. Always treat your Dell device and its accessories with care and keep it in a clean and dust-free place. Please check local regulations for disposal of electronic products. Do not expose your Dell device or its accessories to open flames or lit tobacco products. Do not expose your Dell device or its accessories to liquid, moisture, or high humidity. Do not drop, throw, or try to bend your Dell device or its accessories. 3 book.book Page 4 Friday, December 10, 2010 6:21 PM Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or aerosols to clean the device or its accessories. Do not paint your Dell device or its accessories. Do not attempt to disassemble your Dell device or its accessories. Only qualified personnel must service or repair the Dell device or its accessories. Do not expose your Dell device or its accessories to extreme temperatures. The recommended operating temperature is minimum: 10C and maximum: +55C. Do not carry your Dell device in your back pocket as it could break when you sit. Choking Hazard for Small Children WARNING: If this device is broken or dissassembled, small parts may pose a choking hazard to small children. Do not leave your Dell device and its accessories within the reach of small children or allow them to play with it. Demagnetization To avoid the risk of demagnetization, do not allow electronic devices or magnetic media close to your Dell device for a long time. Eye Strain, Seizures, and Blackouts Certain games and videos may be designed to produce flashing lights or light patterns. If you have a history of blackouts or seizures with exposure to flashing lights or light patterns, it is recommended that you consult a physician before you play games or watch videos on your Dell device. To prevent eye strain, avoid viewing the screen for prolonged duration. 4 book.book Page 5 Friday, December 10, 2010 6:21 PM Repetitive Strain To minimize the risk of Repetitive Strain Injury (RSI), when texting or playing games with your Dell device:
Do not grip the Dell device too tightly Press the buttons lightly Take breaks to stretch and relax Emergency Communication You may not be able to use your device for emergency communication in conditions where radio signals are low or unavailable. Loud Noise WARNING: Your Dell device is capable of producing loud noises which may damage your hearing permanently. Set the volume to a safe level. Electrical Safety Accessories Use only Dell approved accessories and battery pack with your Dell device. Your Dell device and the charger may become warm during charging. Ensure that the devices are properly ventilated while charging. Take care not to touch or allow metal objects, such as coins or key rings, to contact or short-circuit the battery terminals. 5 book.book Page 6 Friday, December 10, 2010 6:21 PM Device Battery Safety WARNING: Using an incompatible battery may increase the risk of fire or explosion. Replace the battery only with a compatible battery purchased from Dell that is designed to work with your Dell device. Do not disassemble the battery. Faulty and Damaged Products Do not use the Dell device, charger, and accessories if they are damaged. Do not attempt to disassemble your Dell device or its accessories. Only qualified personnel must service or repair the Dell device or its accessories. Pacemakers WARNING: To avoid potential interference with the pacemaker it is recommended that you maintain a minimum separation of 15 - 20 cm between your Dell device and a pacemaker. Ensure that you use your device on the opposite side to your pacemaker and do not carry it in a breast pocket. Hospitals Switch off your Dell device when requested to do so in hospitals, clinics, or health care facilities. These requests are designed to prevent possible interference with sensitive medical equipment. 6 book.book Page 7 Friday, December 10, 2010 6:21 PM Explosive Environments Petrol Stations and Explosive Atmospheres In locations with potentially explosive atmospheres, obey all posted signs to turn off wireless devices such as your Dell device or other radio equipment. 15.21 You are cautioned that changes or modifications not expressly approved by the part responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. 15.105(b) This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. 7 book.book Page 8 Friday, December 10, 2010 6:21 PM This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
this device may not cause harmful interference and this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Dell Streak 7 is designed and manufactured to comply with the limits for exposure to RF energy set by the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) of the United States. The exposure standard employs a unit of measurement known as the specific absorption rate, or SAR. The SAR limit applicable to Dell Streak 7 set by the FCC is 1.6 watts per kilogram (W/kg), Although SAR is determined at the highest certified power level in each frequency band, the actual SAR level of Dell Streak 7 in operation can be well below the maximum value because Dell Streak 7 adjusts its cellular transmitting power based in part on proximity to the human body and orientation. In general, the closer you are to Dell Streak 7, the lower the cellular transmitting power level. Dell Streak 7 has been tested and meets the FCC RF exposure guidelines. Limiting Exposure to Radio Frequency Fields For individuals concerned about limiting their exposure to RF fields, the World Health Organization (WHO) provides the following advice:
Precautionary measures Present scientific information does not indicate the need for any special precautions for the use of your mobile device. If individuals are concerned, they might choose to 8 book.book Page 9 Friday, December 10, 2010 6:21 PM limit their own or their children's RF exposure by limiting the length of connections, or using 'hands-free' devices to keep your mobile device away from the head and body. Further information on this subject can be obtained from the WHO home page www.who.int/peh-emf (WHO Fact sheet 193: June 2000). Environmental Considerations Recycling Information Dell recommends that customers dispose of their used computer hardware, monitors, printers, and other peripherals in an environmentally sound manner. Potential methods include reuse of parts or whole products and recycling of products, components, and/
or materials. For specific information on Dells worldwide recycling programs, see www.dell.com/recyclingworldwide. Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Directive In the European Union, this label indicates that this product should not be disposed of with household waste. It should be deposited at an appropriate facility to enable recovery and recycling. For information on how to recycle this product in your country, please visit: www.euro.dell.com/recycling. 9 book.book Page 10 Friday, December 10, 2010 6:21 PM Battery Disposal WARNING: Do not dispose of the battery in a fire or with household waste. Contact your local waste disposal agency for the address of the nearest battery deposit site. Batteries Directive In the European Union, this label indicates that the batteries in this product should be collected separately and not be disposed of with household waste. Substances in batteries can have a potential negative impact on health and environment and you have a role in recycling waste batteries, thus contributing to the protection, preservation, and improvement of the quality of the environment. You should contact your local authority or retailer for details of the collection and recycling schemes available. Alternatively, visit: www.euro.dell.com/recycling. Registration, Evaluation, Authorization, and Restriction of Chemicals (REACH) REACH is the European Union (EU) chemical substances regulatory framework. Information on substances of very high concern contained in Dell products in a concentration above 0.1% weight by weight (w/w) can be found at www.dell.com/reach. Perchlorate Material This products battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. 10 book.book Page 11 Friday, December 10, 2010 6:21 PM Regulatory Notices For Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC), additional regulatory information, and safety best practices, see the Regulatory Compliance homepage on www.dell.com at the following location:
www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Export Regulations Customer acknowledges that these Products, which may include technology and software, are subject to the customs and export control laws and regulations of the United States (U.S.) and may also be subject to the customs and export laws and regulations of the country in which the Products are manufactured and/or received. Customer agrees to abide by those laws and regulations. Further, under U.S. law, the Products may not be sold, leased or otherwise transferred to restricted end-users or to restricted countries. In addition, the Products may not be sold, leased or otherwise transferred to, or utilized by an end-user engaged in activities related to weapons of mass destruction, including without limitation, activities related to the design, development, production or use of nuclear weapons, materials, or facilities, missiles or the support of missile projects, and chemical or biological weapons. 11 book.book Page 12 Friday, December 10, 2010 6:21 PM Additional Country-Specific Safety, Regulatory, and Environmental Information Restrictions of Usage Information For Products With Wireless LAN/802.11 Interfaces Products that fall into this category are denoted by inclusion of the Class 2 identifier symbol (exclamation mark in a circle) accompanying the CE Mark on the products regulatory label, or on the 802.11 plug-in card, example below:
NOTE: The Notified Body number denoted by 'NBnr' will only be present when required and has no bearing on the usage restriction whether present or not. France For Mainland France 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz (Channels 1-13) authorized for indoor use 2.400 -2.454 GHz (Channels 1-7) authorized for outdoor use For Guiana and Reunion 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz (Channels 1-13) authorized for indoor use 2.420 - 2.4835 GHz (Channels 5-13) authorized for outdoor use For all French Territories Only 5.15 - 5.35 GHz authorized for 802.11a 12 book.book Page 13 Friday, December 10, 2010 6:21 PM Italy A general authorization is requested for outdoor use in Italy. The use of this equipment is regulated by:
D.L.gs 1.8.2003, n. 259, article 104 (activity subject to general authorization) for outdoor use and article 105 (free use) for indoor use, in both cases for private use. D.M. 28.5.03, for supply to public of RLAN access to networks and telecom services. Other Country Specific Information European Union Abbreviated R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC Compliance Statement Hereby, Dell Inc. declares that all CE Marked Dell products incorporating Radio and Telecoms Terminal Equipment functionality are in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. Turkey ROHS EEE complies with Directive Regulation on the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment. 13 book.book Page 14 Friday, December 10, 2010 6:21 PM 14 book.book Page 15 Friday, December 10, 2010 6:21 PM book.book Page 16 Friday, December 10, 2010 6:21 PM Printed in China. www.dell.com | support.dell.com
1 2 3 4 | User manual | Users Manual | 698.85 KiB | June 06 2012 / June 09 2012 |
Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Compliance and Safety Manual Issue Date 03 2012-4-27 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied. Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address:
Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China Website:
http://www.huawei.com Email:
support@huawei.com Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary i Compliance and Safety Manual Contents About This Document Intended Audience This document describes Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) and other safety standards compliance and information about the AR G3 series enterprise routers. This document provides the general safety guidelines for handling, installing or operating the AR G3 series enterprise routers. This document is intended for:
Maintenance engineers Technical support engineers Installation engineers Network planning engineers Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text. Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary iii Contents Change History Compliance and Safety Manual Changes between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains all the changes in previous issues. Changes in Issue 01 (2011-06-25) Initial commercial release. Changes in Issue 02 (2011-10-15) Two warning messages are added in the document for the wireless products. Changes in Issue 03 (2011-12-30) The CE certificates of AR1200, AR2200, and AR3200 are updated. iv Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2012-4-27) Compliance and Safety Manual Contents Contents 1 Regulatory Compliance Statement ......................................................................................... 1-1 1.1 European Community CE Certification ........................................................................................................ 1-2 2 Regulatory Compliance Information ..................................................................................... 2-5 2.1 Regulatory Compliance Standards ................................................................................................................ 2-6 2.2 European Directives Compliance .................................................................................................................. 2-8 2.3 USA Regulatory Compliance ........................................................................................................................ 2-8 2.3.1 FCC Part 15.......................................................................................................................................... 2-8 2.4 Canada Regulatory Compliance .................................................................................................................... 2-9 2.4.1 RSS-Gen & RSS-210 statement ........................................................................................................... 2-9 2.4.2 RSS-102 statement ............................................................................................................................... 2-9 2.5 Japanese Compliance .................................................................................................................................. 2-10 2.5.1 VCCI .................................................................................................................................................. 2-10 2.6 CISPR 22 Compliance ................................................................................................................................ 2-10 3 Safety Information ..................................................................................................................... 3-1 3.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-2 3.1.1 Safety Precautions ................................................................................................................................ 3-2 3.1.2 General Requirements .......................................................................................................................... 3-2 3.2 Electricity Safety ........................................................................................................................................... 3-3 3.2.1 High Voltage ........................................................................................................................................ 3-3 3.2.2 Thunderstorm ....................................................................................................................................... 3-4 3.2.3 Tools ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-4 3.2.4 High Electrical Leakage ....................................................................................................................... 3-5 3.2.5 Power Cable ......................................................................................................................................... 3-5 3.2.6 Fuse ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-5 3.2.7 Electrostatic Discharge......................................................................................................................... 3-6 3.3 Inflammable Environment ............................................................................................................................. 3-7 3.4 Battery ........................................................................................................................................................... 3-7 3.4.1 Storage Battery ..................................................................................................................................... 3-7 3.4.2 Lithium Battery .................................................................................................................................... 3-9 3.5 Laser .............................................................................................................................................................. 3-9 3.5.1 General Laser Information ................................................................................................................... 3-9 3.5.2 Laser Safety Guidelines ..................................................................................................................... 3-10 Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary v Contents Compliance and Safety Manual 3.5.3 Handling Fibers .................................................................................................................................. 3-10 3.6 Working at Heights ...................................................................................................................................... 3-10 3.6.1 Weight Lifting .................................................................................................................................... 3-11 3.6.2 Safety Guide on Ladder Use .............................................................................................................. 3-12 3.7 Mechanical Safety ....................................................................................................................................... 3-13 3.7.1 Drilling ............................................................................................................................................... 3-13 3.7.2 Sharp Objects ..................................................................................................................................... 3-13 3.7.3 Handling Fans .................................................................................................................................... 3-13 3.7.4 Lifting Heavy Objects ........................................................................................................................ 3-14 3.8 Miscellaneous .............................................................................................................................................. 3-14 3.8.1 Inserting and Removing a Board ........................................................................................................ 3-14 3.8.2 Bundling Signal Cables ...................................................................................................................... 3-14 3.8.3 Cabling Requirements ........................................................................................................................ 3-14 3.9 3G antenna .................................................................................................................................................. 3-15 4 Sicherheitsinformationen ....................................................................................................... 4-16 4.1 berblick ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-17 4.1.1 Sicherheitsmanahmen ...................................................................................................................... 4-17 4.1.2 Allgemeine Anforderungen ................................................................................................................ 4-17 4.2 Elektrische Sicherheit .................................................................................................................................. 4-19 4.2.1 Hochspannung .................................................................................................................................... 4-19 4.2.2 Gewitter ............................................................................................................................................. 4-19 4.2.3 Werkzeuge .......................................................................................................................................... 4-20 4.2.4 Hoher Kriechstrom ............................................................................................................................. 4-20 4.2.5 Zuleitung ............................................................................................................................................ 4-20 4.2.6 Sicherung ........................................................................................................................................... 4-21 4.2.7 Elektrostatische Entladung ................................................................................................................. 4-21 4.3 Feuergefhrliche Umgebung ....................................................................................................................... 4-22 4.4 Batterie ........................................................................................................................................................ 4-23 4.4.1 Speicherbatterie .................................................................................................................................. 4-23 4.4.2 Lithium-Batterie ................................................................................................................................. 4-25 4.5 Laser ............................................................................................................................................................ 4-25 4.5.1 Allgemeine Informationen zum Laser ................................................................................................ 4-25 4.5.2 Sicherheitsrichtlinien fr Laser .......................................................................................................... 4-26 4.5.3 Umgang mit Fasern ............................................................................................................................ 4-26 4.6 Arbeiten in groen Hhen ........................................................................................................................... 4-27 4.6.1 Heben von groen Gewichten ............................................................................................................ 4-27 4.6.2 Sicherheitsleitfaden zur Verwendung von Leitern ............................................................................. 4-28 4.7 Mechanische Sicherheit ............................................................................................................................... 4-29 4.7.1 Bohren ................................................................................................................................................ 4-29 4.7.2 Scharfkantige Gegenstnde ................................................................................................................ 4-29 4.7.3 Umgang mit Ventilatoren ................................................................................................................... 4-29 vi Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2012-4-27) Compliance and Safety Manual Contents 4.7.4 Heben schwerer Gegenstnde ............................................................................................................ 4-30 4.8 Verschiedenes .............................................................................................................................................. 4-30 4.8.1 Einsetzen und Entfernen von Leiterplatten ........................................................................................ 4-30 4.8.2 Bndeln von Signalleitungen ............................................................................................................. 4-30 4.8.3 Verkabelungsanforderungen ............................................................................................................... 4-31 4.9 3G Antenne.................................................................................................................................................. 4-31 Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary vii Compliance and Safety Manual Figures Figures Figure 1-1 European community CE certification DoC ..................................................................................... 1-2 Figure 3-1 Wearing an ESD wrist strap .............................................................................................................. 3-6 Figure 3-2 Weight lifting .................................................................................................................................. 3-12 Figure 4-1 Tragen eines ESD-Armbandes ........................................................................................................ 4-22 Figure 4-2 Heben von groen Gewichten ......................................................................................................... 4-28 Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary ix Compliance and Safety Manual Tables Tables Table 2-1 Regulatory compliance standards ....................................................................................................... 2-6 Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary xi Compliance and Safety Manual 1 Regulatory Compliance Statement 1 Regulatory Compliance Statement About This Chapter This chapter provides the certification details for AR1200/AR2200/AR3200 Series Products. European Community CE Certification Declaration of Conformity (DoC) Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-1 1 Regulatory Compliance Statement Compliance and Safety Manual 1.1 European Community CE Certification Figure 1-1 European community CE certification of AR1200 1-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2012-4-27) Compliance and Safety Manual 1 Regulatory Compliance Statement Figure 1-2 European community CE certification of AR2200 Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-3 1 Regulatory Compliance Statement Figure 1-3 European community CE certification of AR3260 Compliance and Safety Manual 1-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2012-4-27) Compliance and Safety Manual 2 Regulatory Compliance Information 2 Regulatory Compliance Information About This Chapter The following table lists the contents of this chapter. Title Description 2.1 Regulatory Compliance Standards The regulatory compliance standards on EMC, safety, NEBS, telecom, Laser Radiation, RF, health, and environmental protection. 2.2 European Directives Compliance The compliance with European directives, including RoHS compliance and device recycling guide. 2.3 USA Regulatory Compliance 2.5 Japanese Compliance The USA regulatory compliance, including FCC part 15. The Japan regulatory compliance, including VCCI Class A.. 2.6 CISPR 22 Compliance The CISPR 22 regulatory compliance. Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-5 2 Regulatory Compliance Information Compliance and Safety Manual 2.1 Regulatory Compliance Standards AR1200/AR2200/AR3200 Series Products comply with the standards listed in Table 2-1. Table 2-1 Regulatory compliance standards Discipline Standards EMC Safety CISPR22 Class A CISPR24 EN55022 Class A EN50024 ETSI EN 300 386 Class A CFR 47 FCC Part 15 Class A ICES 003 Class A AS/NZS CISPR22 Class A GB9254 Class A VCCI Class A CNS 13438 Class A IEC61000-3-2 IEC61000-3-3 EN61000-3-2 EN61000-3-3 ITU-T K.20 ITU-T K.44 ITU-T K.45 IEC 60950-1 IEC/EN41003 EN 60950-1 UL 60950-1 CSA C22.2 No 60950-1 AS/NZS 60950.1 BS EN 60950-1 IS 13252 GB4943 Laser safety FDA rules, 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 IEC60825-1, IEC60825-2, EN60825-1, EN60825-2 GB7247 2-6 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2012-4-27) Compliance and Safety Manual 2 Regulatory Compliance Information Discipline Standards Health ICNIRP Guideline 1999-519-EC EN 50385 OET Bulletin 65 IEEE Std C95.1 EN 60215 Environmental protection RoHS Grounding ITU-T K.27 ETSI EN 300 253 Note:
EMC: electromagnetic compatibility NEBS: Network Equipment Build Standard RF: radio frequency CISPR: International Special Committee on Radio Interference EN: European Standard ETSI: European Telecommunications Standards Institute CFR: Code of Federal Regulations FCC: Federal Communication Commission IEC: International Electrotechnical Commission AS/NZS: Australian/New Zealand Standard VCCI: Voluntary Control Council for Interference CNS: Chinese National Standard UL: Underwriters Laboratories CSA: Canadian Standards Association BS: British Standard IS: Indian Standard GR: general requirement FDA: Food and Drug Administration BTS: base transceiver station GSM: Global System for Mobile communications WLAN: wireless local area network ICNIRP: International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection OET: Office of Engineering Technology IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers RoHS: restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-7 2 Regulatory Compliance Information Compliance and Safety Manual 2.2 European Directives Compliance AR1200/AR2200/AR3200 Series Products comply with the following European directives. 89/336/EC (EMC) 2006/95/EC (low voltage) 1999/5/EC (R&TTE) Refer to Figure 1-1 for Huawei Declaration of Conformity. AR1200/AR2200/AR3200 Series Products comply with Directive 2002/95/EC, on the RoHS in electrical and electronic equipment. The device does not contain lead, mercury, cadmium, and hexavalent chromium and brominated flame retardants (polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) or polybrominated diphenyl ethers (PBDE)) except for those exempted applications allowed by RoHS directive for technical reasons. AR1200/AR2200/AR3200 Series Products comply with Directive 2002/96/EC on waste electrical and electronic equipment. Huawei is responsible for recycling its end-of-life devices. Contact Huawei local service center when recycling is required. The main materials in the device are steel, plastics, copper, and electronic components. Most of the materials are recyclable. Comply with the following rules for recycling at the end of life of the device. Remove power first in the disassembly. Remove and send batteryPCBfans and cables to special institution for disposal because it contains chemical substance. Dispose of battery separately because it contains hazardous substance. No hazardous substance is contained in the label printing ink and plastic paint, and no hazardous gas is emitted when the label printing ink and plastic paint is burning. Dispose of the yellow chromate conversion coating screw separately because it contains Cr6+. Provide the plastic marking reference, such as ISO1043, and EN50419. 2.3 USA Regulatory Compliance 2.3.1 FCC Part 15 AR1200/AR2200/AR3200 Series Products comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
This device does not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 2-8 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2012-4-27) Compliance and Safety Manual 2 Regulatory Compliance Information This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the device is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 centimeters between the radiator and your body. If this device is modified without authorization from Huawei, the device may no longer comply with FCC requirements for Class A digital devices. In that a case, your right to use the device may be limited by FCC regulations. Moreover, you may be required to correct any interference to radio or television communications at your own expense. This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the device is operated in a commercial environment. This device generates, uses and radiates radio frequency energy. If it is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this device in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference. In this case the user will be requested to correct the interference at his or her own expense. 2.4 Canada Regulatory Compliance 2.4.1 RSS-Gen & RSS-210 statement This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. 2.4.2 RSS-102 statement This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator and your body. Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-9 WARNING 2 Regulatory Compliance Information Compliance and Safety Manual 2.5 Japanese Compliance 2.5.1 VCCI AR1200/AR2200/AR3200 Series Products comply with VCCI Class A by Information Technology Equipment (ITE). 2.6 CISPR 22 Compliance AR1200/AR2200/AR3200 Series Products comply with CISPR 22 for Class A by the ITE. Class A ITE is a category of all other ITE that satisfies only the Class A ITE regulations, and not the Class B ITE regulations. Such equipment should not be restricted in its sale but the following warning shall be included in the instructions for use:
This is Class A Product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference;
therefore, the user is required to take appropriate measures. 2-10 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2012-4-27) WARNING Compliance and Safety Manual 3 Safety Information 3 Safety Information About This Chapter The following table lists the contents of this chapter. Title 3.1 Overview Description Safety precautions to be taken before installing and maintaining the Huawei device. 3.2 Electricity Safety Information about the electricity safety. 3.3 Inflammable Environment Information about the inflammable environment safety. 3.4 Battery 3.5 Laser Information about the battery safety. Safety precautions on the Electromagnetic Field Exposure of the device and laser. 3.6 Working at Heights Safety precautions to be taken before using the ladders or hoisting heavy objects. 3.7 Mechanical Safety Safety precautions on drilling, on sharp objects, on handling fans, and on lifting heavy objects. 3.8 Miscellaneous Safety precautions on inserting and removing boards, on bundling signal cables, and cabling requirements. Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-1 3 Safety Information 3.1 Overview 3.1.1 Safety Precautions Compliance and Safety Manual This section describes the safety precautions to be taken before installing and maintaining the Huawei device. Before performing an operation, read the operation instructions and precautions to be taken, and follow them to prevent accidents. The Caution, Warning and Danger items in other documents do not cover all the safety precautions that must be followed. They are only supplementary information. The installation and maintenance personnel need to understand the basic safety precautions to be taken. When operating the device, obey the local safety regulations. The safety precautions provided in the documents are supplementary and shall be in compliance with the local safety regulations. When operating the Huawei device, in addition to the precautions, follow the specific safety instructions given by Huawei. The installation and maintenance personnel must receive training in safety precautions. Only qualified personnel can install or maintain the device. 3.1.2 General Requirements To minimize the technically residual risk, it is imperative to obey the following rules. Read all the instructions before operation. Installation Ground The device (or system) must be installed or used in the access restricted location. Be care the hot surface when the device is operating. When touching the surface or operating the handle of the device by hands, wear gloves to protect your hands from scalding. Before operation, the device must be fixed securely on the floor or to other reliable objects, such as the walls and the mounting racks. When installing the unit, always make the ground connection first and disconnect it at the end. Do not block the ventilation while the device is running. Keep a minimum distance of 5 cm from the ventilation to the walls or the other objects that block the ventilation. Tighten the thumbscrews by using a tool after both initial installation and subsequent access to the panel. Do not damage the ground conductor or operate the device in the absence of well installed ground conductor. Conduct the appropriate electrical inspection. The device (or system) must be connected permanently to the protection ground before an operation. The cross sectional area of protective ground conductor shall be at least 1.0 mm. 3-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2012-4-27) Compliance and Safety Manual 3 Safety Information Power Supply For AC supplied model: The socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible. For AC supplied model: The device applies to TN, TT power systems. Prepared conductors are connected to the terminal block, and only appropriate AWG/Type of wire is secured in the listed lug terminals. This device relies on the buildings installation for short-circuit (overcurrent) protection. Ensure that a fuse or circuit breaker no larger than 240 VAC, 20 A for AC supplied model or 80 VDC, 10 A for DC supplied model is used on the phase conductors (all current-carrying conductors). For AC supplied model: The plug-socket combination must be accessible at all times because it serves as the main disconnect device. Because the device has several power supplies, disconnect all of them to switch off the device. The AC power supply has double pole/neutral fusing. To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Human Safety Do not operate the device or cables at lightning strikes. To avoid electric shock, do not connect safety extra-low voltage (SELV) circuits to telecommunication network voltage (TNV) circuits. Do not look directly into the optical port to prevent the laser radiation from injuring your eyes. Do not wear jewelry or watches when you operate the device. Operator Only qualified and skilled personnel must install, configure, and disassemble the device. Only the personnel authorized must operate the device. Any replacement or change to the device or parts of the device (including the software) must be done by qualified or authorized personnel of Huawei. Any fault or error that might cause safety problems must be reported immediately to the person in charge. Only qualified personnel must remove or disable the safety facilities, or to troubleshoot and maintain the device. Ensure that the instructions provided in this document are followed completely. The document also provides guidelines in selecting the measuring and testing device. 3.2 Electricity Safety 3.2.1 High Voltage Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-3 3 Safety Information Compliance and Safety Manual The high voltage power supply offers power for the device operation. Direct or indirect contact (through damp objects) with high voltage and AC mains supply may result in fatal danger. During the installation of the AC power supply facility, follow the local safety regulations. The personnel who install the AC facility must be qualified to perform high voltage and AC operations. Do not wear conductive articles, such as watches, hand chains, bracelets and rings during the operation. When water is found in the rack or the rack is damp, switch off the power supply immediately. When the operation is performed in a damp environment, make sure that the device is dry. Non-standard and improper high voltage operations may result in fire and electric shock. Therefore, you must obey the local rules and regulations when bridging and wiring AC cables. Only qualified personnel must perform high voltage and AC operations. 3.2.2 Thunderstorm High voltage and AC operations, or operations on a steel tower and a mast are prohibited during thunderstorm. During thunderstorm, the electromagnetic field generated in the thunderstorm area may damage the electronic parts. To prevent damage to the device during lightning, ground the device properly. 3.2.3 Tools Suggestion: Dedicated tools must be used during high voltage and AC operations. Avoid using ordinary tools. 3-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2012-4-27) DANGERWARNINGDANGERWARNING Compliance and Safety Manual 3.2.4 High Electrical Leakage 3 Safety Information Ground the device before powering on the device. Otherwise, the personnel and device are in danger. If the "high electrical leakage" flag is stuck to the power terminal of the device, you must ground the device before powering it on. 3.2.5 Power Cable Installation and removal of live line are prohibited. Transient contact between the core of the power cable and the conductor may generate electric arc or spark, which may cause fire or eye injury. Before installing or removing the power cable, turn off the power switch. Before connecting the power cable, confirm that the power cable and label comply with the requirements of the actual installation. For the DC power supplied device, use 1.0 mm or 16 AWG minimum power supply cord. For AC power supplied device, use 1.0 mm or 16 AWG minimum power supply cord. Use the type H03VV-F or light PVC sheathed flexible cord based on IEC 60227. 3.2.6 Fuse If a fuse is to be replaced, the new fuse shall be of the same type and specifications. Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-5 WARNINGWARNINGCAUTIONWARNING 3 Safety Information 3.2.7 Electrostatic Discharge Compliance and Safety Manual The static electricity generated by the human body may damage the electrostatic sensitive components on the circuit board, such as the large-scale integrated circuit (LSI). In the following situations, the human body will generate a static electromagnetic field:
Human body moving Clothes friction Friction between shoes and the ground Holding ordinary plastic in hand The static electromagnetic field will remain within the human body for a long time. Before touching the device, hand-operating parts, circuit boards, or ASICs, wear a grounded electrostatic discharge (ESD) wrist strap. It can prevent the sensitive components from damage by the static electricity in the human body. Figure 3-1 shows the wearing of an ESD wrist strap. Figure 3-1 Wearing an ESD wrist strap 3-6 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2012-4-27) CAUTION Compliance and Safety Manual 3 Safety Information 3.3 Inflammable Environment Operating the electrical device in inflammable environment can be fatal. Do not place the device in the environment that has inflammable and explosive air or fog. Do not perform any operation in this environment. 3.4 Battery 3.4.1 Storage Battery Before handling the battery, read carefully the safety precautions to be taken for battery handling and connections. Non-standard operation on batteries may result in danger. During operation:
Protect the battery against short-circuit Prevent electrolyte overflow and leakage Electrolyte overflow may damage the device. It will corrode the metal parts and the circuit boards, and ultimately damage the device and cause short-circuit of the circuit boards. General Operations Before installing and maintaining the battery, note the following:
Do not wear metal articles such as wristwatch, hand chain, bracelet and ring. Use special-purpose insulation tools. Take care to protect you eyes when operating the device. Wear rubber gloves and an apron in the case of electrolyte overflow. Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-7 DANGERDANGERCAUTION 3 Safety Information Compliance and Safety Manual Always keep the electrode front upright when handling the battery. Do not place the battery upside down or tilt it. Short-Circuit Battery short-circuit may cause physical injury. Though voltage of a general battery is low, high transient current generated by short-circuit will release a large amount of power. There is danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced. Therefore, replace the battery only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Keep away metal objects, which may cause battery short-circuit, from batteries. If they have to be used, first disconnect the batteries in use before performing any other operations. Harmful Gas Do not use unsealed lead-acid batteries, because the gas emitted from the battery may result in fire or device corrosion. Lay the battery horizontally and fix it properly. The battery in use will emit flammable gas. Therefore, put the battery in a place with good ventilation, and take fire precautions. High Temperature High temperature may result in distortion, damage and electrolyte overflow of the battery. When the temperature of the battery exceeds 60C, check whether there is acid liquid overflow. If acid liquid overflow occurs, handle the acid liquid immediately. 3-8 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2012-4-27) WARNINGCAUTIONCAUTIONCAUTION Compliance and Safety Manual Acid Liquid 3 Safety Information In case of acid liquid overflow, absorb and neutralize the liquid immediately. When moving or removing a leaky battery, note the possible damage caused by the acid liquid. Once the acid liquid spill is found, use the following materials to absorb and neutralize it. Sodium bicarbonate (baking soda): NaHCO3 Sodium carbonate (soda): Na2CO3 The use of antacids must follow the guide provided by the battery supplier. 3.4.2 Lithium Battery There is danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced. Therefore, replace the battery only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose the used batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions. Do not dispose of lithium battery in fire. 3.5 Laser The laser hazard level of this device is Class 1. When handling optical fibers, do not stand close to, or look at the optical fiber outlet directly with unaided eyes. 3.5.1 General Laser Information Laser transceivers or transmitters are used in the optical transmission system and associated test tools. The wavelength of the laser is between 780 nm and 1600 nm. Because the laser is transmitted through the optical fiber, it has very high power density and is invisible to human eyes. When a beam of light enters the eye, the retina may be damaged. Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-9 CAUTIONWARNINGWARNING 3 Safety Information Compliance and Safety Manual Laser of wavelengths used in telecommunications can cause thermal damage to the retina. Lasers used in lightwave systems have a larger beam divergence, typically 10 to 20 degrees. Viewing an un-terminated fiber or damaged fiber with the unaided eye at distances greater than 150 mm (6 inches) will normally not cause eye injury. However, damage may occur if an optical tool such as a microscope, magnifying glass or eye loupe is used to view the energized fiber end. In its normal operating mode, a lightwave system is totally enclosed and presents no risk of eye injury. Additional safety is achieved by an automatic laser shut-down (ALS) of the system. The ALS, however, can be applied for bi-directional transmission only. If the receiver side does not detect the laser from the transmission side, it will give the transmission side a signal. Upon receiving the signal, the ALS will shut down the laser emission within 100 ms. 3.5.2 Laser Safety Guidelines Read the following guidelines to avoid laser radiation:
Read the instructions before installing, operating and maintaining the device. Ignoring the instructions can cause exposure to dangerous laser radiation. Wear a pair of eye-protective glasses when you are handling lasers or fibers. All the operation shall be performed by personnel who have completed the approved training courses. Make sure that the optical source is switched off before disconnecting optical fiber connectors. Before opening the front door of an optical transmission system, make sure that you are not exposed to laser radiation. Do not look at the end of an exposed fiber or an open connector when you are not sure whether the optical source is switched off or not. Use an optical power meter to check and ensure that the optical source is switched off by measuring the optical power. Do not use an optical tool such as a microscope, a magnifying glass or an eye loupe to view the optical connector or fiber. 3.5.3 Handling Fibers Read the instructions before handling fibers. Cutting and splicing fibers must be performed by the trained personnel only. Before cutting or splicing a fiber, ensure the fiber is disconnected from the optical source. After disconnecting the fiber, use protecting caps to protect all the optical connectors. 3.6 Working at Heights 3-10 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2012-4-27) Compliance and Safety Manual 3 Safety Information When working at heights, be careful to prevent objects from falling. When working at heights, shall comply with the following requirements. The personnel who work at heights must be trained. The operating machines and tools shall be carried and handled safely to avoid falling. Safety protection measures, such as wearing a helmet and a safety belt, shall be taken. In cold regions, wear worm clothes when performing high-altitude operation. All lifting appliances must be thoroughly checked before the work is started. 3.6.1 Weight Lifting Do not access the areas under the jib arm and the goods in suspension when lifting weight. Ensure the operators have completed the related training and are qualified. Check the weight lifting tools and confirm that the tools are in good condition. Lift the weight only when the weight lifting tools are firmly fixed onto the weight-bearing object or the wall. Use a concise command to avoid incorrect operation. Ensure the angle between the two cables is less than or equal to 90 degrees during the lift.
(see Figure 3-2). Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-11 WARNINGWARNING 3 Safety Information Figure 3-2 Weight lifting Compliance and Safety Manual 3.6.2 Safety Guide on Ladder Use Checking the Ladder Before using the ladder, first check if the ladder is in good condition. Make sure that you know the maximum weight that the ladder can support; overweight on the ladder is strictly prohibited. Placing the Ladder Slant angle is suggested to be 75 degrees. The slant can be measured with the angle square or with arms. When using a ladder, place the wider end of the ladder on the ground. Otherwise, take protective measures on the base part of the ladder to avoid skidding. Place the ladder on stable ground. 3-12 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2012-4-27) Maximum 90 Compliance and Safety Manual Climbing the Ladder 3 Safety Information When climbing the ladder, note the following. Ensure the gravity center of your body does not deviate from the ladder edge. To lessen the danger and ensure the safety, hold your balance on the ladder before any operation. Do not climb higher than the forth highest step of the ladder. If you are about to climb to the top, the length of the ladder shall be one meter higher than the eave. 3.7 Mechanical Safety 3.7.1 Drilling Drilling on the rack without permission is strictly prohibited. Drilling that does not satisfy the requirements concerned may damage the wires and cables inside the rack. If the metal shavings from the drilling fall into the rack, it may result in short circuit of the circuit boards. Before drilling a hole on the rack, wear insulation gloves, and remove the cables inside the rack. During the drilling, ensure that your eyes are well protected. The hot shavings may injury to your eyes. Ensure that the metal shavings do not get into the rack. Non-standard drilling may damage the electromagnetic shielding performance of the rack. After drilling, clean the metal shavings in time. 3.7.2 Sharp Objects When carrying the device by hand, wear protection gloves to avoid injury by sharp objects. 3.7.3 Handling Fans Ensure the following:
When replacing a component, place the component, screw, and tool at a safe place to prevent them from falling into the running fan. Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-13 WARNINGWARNING 3 Safety Information Compliance and Safety Manual When replacing the ambient equipment around the fan, do not place the finger or board into the running fan until the fan is switched off and stops running. 3.7.4 Lifting Heavy Objects When lifting heavy objects, do not stand or walk under the arm or the lifted object. 3.8 Miscellaneous 3.8.1 Inserting and Removing a Board To insert or remove a board, abide by the following requirements:
When inserting a board, handle it gently to avoid distorting pins on the backplane. Insert the board along the slot guide. The two sides of one board should not contact another board to avoid short-circuit or scratch. When holding a board in hand, do not touch the board circuit, components, connectors, or connection slots. 3.8.2 Bundling Signal Cables Bundle the signal cables separately from the strong current cables or high voltage cables. Maintain a minimum space of 150 mm between adjacent ties. 3.8.3 Cabling Requirements At a very low temperature, movement of the cable may damage the plastic skin of the cable. To ensure the construction safety, comply with the following requirements:
When installing cables, ensure that the environment temperature is above 0C. If cables are stored in the place below 0C, move the cables into a place at a room temperature and store the cables for more than 24 hours before installation. 3-14 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2012-4-27) WARNINGCAUTIONCAUTION Compliance and Safety Manual 3 Safety Information Move the cables with care, especially at a low temperature. Do not drop the cables directly from the vehicle. 3.9 3G antenna The product uses standard 3G antenna. Only qualified personnel can install and maintain the antennas. Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-15 CAUTION 4 Sicherheitsinformationen Compliance and Safety Manual 4 Sicherheitsinformationen ber dieses Kapitel In der folgenden Tabelle ist der Inhalt dieses Kapitels aufgefhrt. Titel 4.1 berblick Beschreibung Sicherheitsvorkehrungen, die vor der Installation und Wartung des Huawei-Gerts ergriffen werden mssen. 4.2 Elektrische Sicherheit Informationen ber die elektrische Sicherheit. 4.3 Feuergefhrliche Umgebung Informationen ber die Sicherheit feuergefhrlicher Umgebungen. 4.4 Batterie 4.5 Laser 4.6 Arbeiten in groen Hhen 4.7 Mechanische Sicherheit 4.8 Verschiedenes Informationen ber die Sicherheit der Batterie. Sicherheitsmanahmen, wenn das Gert und der Laser elektromagnetischen Feldern ausgesetzt sind. Sicherheitsmanahmen, die vor Verwendung von Leitern oder vor dem Heben schwerer Gegenstnde ergriffen werden mssen. Sicherheitsmanahmen beim Bohren, bei scharfkantigen Gegenstnden, beim Umgang mit Lftern und beim Heben schwerer Gegenstnde. Sicherheitsmanahmen beim Einsetzen und Entfernen von Leiterplatten, beim Bndeln von Signalleitungen sowie Verkabelungsanforderungen. 4-16 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2012-4-27) Compliance and Safety Manual 4 Sicherheitsinformationen 4.1 berblick 4.1.1 Sicherheitsmanahmen Dieser Abschnitt beschreibt die Sicherheitsvorkehrungen, die vor der Installation und Wartung des Huawei-Gerts ergriffen werden mssen. Lesen Sie vor der Durchfhrung von Arbeiten die Bedienungsanleitung und die zu ergreifenden Vorsichtsmanahmen durch und befolgen Sie sie, um Unflle zu verhindern. Die in anderen Dokumenten aufgefhrten Symbole fr Achtung, Warnung und Gefahr beinhalten nicht alle zu beachtenden Sicherheitsvorschriften. Sie dienen nur als Zusatzinformationen. Das Installations- und Wartungspersonal muss die grundlegenden Sicherheitsmanahmen kennen, die ergriffen werden mssen. Beachten Sie beim Betrieb des Gerts die rtlichen Sicherheitsvorschriften. Die in diesen Dokumenten angegebenen Sicherheitsmanahmen dienen nur als Ergnzung und mssen den rtlichen Sicherheitsvorschriften entsprechen. Befolgen Sie beim Betrieb des Huawei-Gerts neben den Vorsichtsmanahmen auch die von Huawei angegebenen spezifischen Sicherheitsanweisungen. Das Installations- und Wartungspersonal muss in den Sicherheitsmanahmen geschult werden. Nur qualifiziertes Fachpersonal darf das Gert installieren oder warten. 4.1.2 Allgemeine Anforderungen Um das technische Restrisiko zu minimieren, mssen die folgenden Regeln befolgt werden. Lesen Sie alle Anweisungen sorgfltig durch, bevor Sie mit dem Arbeiten beginnen. Aufstellen Das Gert (oder das System) darf nur an Orten mit beschrnktem Zugang aufgestellt oder benutzt werden. Seien Sie vorsichtig, da die Oberflche des Gerts whrend des Betriebs hei wird. Wenn Sie die Oberflche mit den Hnden berhren oder den Griff des Gerts bettigen, sollten Sie zum Schutz Handschuhe tragen. Vor dem Betrieb muss das Gert sicher auf dem Boden oder an anderen zuverlssigen Gegenstnden befestigt sein, zum Beispiel an Wnden oder Montagegestellen. Beim Aufstellen der Einheit ist zuerst der Erdleiter anzuschlieen. Beim Trennen ist er als letzter zu entfernen. Decken Sie Lftungsffnungen whrend des Betriebes nicht ab. Sorgen Sie fr einen Abstand der Belftungsffnungen von mindestens 5 cm von Wnden oder anderen Gegenstnden, die die Belftung blockieren. Flgelmuttern und -schrauben sind nach der Erstinstallation und nach Wiederanbringung von Abdeckungen mit Hilfe von Werkzeug festzuziehen. Erdung Beschdigen Sie den Erdleiter nicht und betreiben Sie das Gert niemals ohne Erdung. Nehmen Sie Kontakt mit einem prfenden Elektriker auf. Das Gert (oder das System) muss vor der Inbetriebnahme permanent geerdet werden. Der Querschnitt des Schutzleiters muss mindestens 1,0 mm betragen. Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-17 4 Sicherheitsinformationen Energieversorgung Compliance and Safety Manual Mit Wechselstrom betriebenes Modell: Die Steckdose muss sich in der Nhe des Gerts befinden und leicht zugnglich sein. Mit Wechselstrom betriebenes Modell: Das Gert arbeitet mit einem TN oder TT-Stromversorgungssystem. Vorbereitete Leiter werden an den Klemmenblock angeschlossen und nur die entsprechende AWG/Kabelart wird mit den Kabelschuhen gesichert. Dieses Gert bentigt eine Sicherung vor Kurzschluss (berstrom) in der Gebudeinstallation. Stellen Sie sicher, dass die Sicherungswerte auf allen Phasenleitern
(alle stromfhrenden Leiter) nicht grer als 240 VAC, 20 A bei den mit Wechselstrom betriebenen Modellen sowie 80 VDC, 10 A bei den mit Gleichstrom betriebenen Modellen sind. Mit Wechselstrom betriebenes Modell: Die Stecker-Steckdosen-Verbindung muss jederzeit zugnglich sein, da sie die Netztrennstelle ist. Das Gert hat mehrere Energiequellen, daher ist es notwendig, stets alle Verbindungen zu unterbrechen, um den energiefreien Zustand zu erreichen. Das mit Wechselstrom betriebene Modell hat eine Zweiphasen-Sicherung. Um die Brandgefahr zu minimieren, drfen ausschlielich Nr. 26 AWG oder leistungsfhigere Telekommunikationskabel verwendet werden. Personensicherheit Betreiben Sie das Gert und die Kabel nicht whrend eines Gewitters. Um einen elektrischen Schlag zu vermeiden, drfen Kleinspannungsschaltungen (SELV) nicht mit Telefonnetzwerken (TNV) verbunden werden. Blicken Sie nicht direkt in den optischen Anschluss, da die Laserstrahlung zu Augenverletzungen fhren kann. Tragen Sie keinen Schmuck oder Uhren, wenn Sie am Gert arbeiten. Bediener Das Gert darf nur von qualifiziertem Fachpersonal installiert, konfiguriert und zerlegt werden. Das Gert darf nur von autorisierten Personen betrieben werden. Ein Austausch oder eine nderung des Gerts oder der Teile des Gerts (einschl. der Software) darf nur von qualifiziertem Fachpersonal oder von Personen durchgefhrt werden, die von Huawei autorisiert sind. Jeder Fehler und jede Strung, die die Sicherheit verletzen knnten, sind sofort den verantwortlichen Personen zu melden. Nur qualifiziertes Fachpersonal darf Sicherheitseinrichtungen beseitigen oder auer Betrieb setzen, und Fehlersuche oder Wartungsarbeiten durchfhren. Lesen und befolgen Sie alle Anweisungen sorgfltig, bevor Sie mit dem Arbeiten beginnen. Das Dokument enthlt auch Richtlinien zur Auswahl der Mess- und Prfinstrumente. 4-18 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2012-4-27) Compliance and Safety Manual 4 Sicherheitsinformationen 4.2 Elektrische Sicherheit 4.2.1 Hochspannung Hochspannungsleitungen stellen die fr den Betrieb des Gerts erforderliche Energie zur Verfgung. Direkter oder indirekter Kontakt (durch feuchte Gegenstnde) mit Hochspannung und Wechselstromversorgung kann zu tdlichen Unfllen fhren. Whrend des Aufstellens der Wechselstromversorgungseinheit sind die lokalen Sicherheitsvorschriften einzuhalten. Das Personal fr das Aufstellen der Wechselstromeinheit muss fr Arbeiten an Hochspannung und Wechselstrom qualifiziert sein. Tragen Sie whrend der Arbeiten keine leitfhigen Gegenstnde wie Uhren, Armreifen, Ketten oder Ringe. Sollte sich Wasser im Gestell befinden oder das Gestell feucht sein, ist die Energiezufuhr sofort zu unterbrechen. Stellen Sie sicher, dass das Gert trocken ist, wenn die Arbeiten in einer feuchten Umgebung durchgefhrt werden. Die Nichtbeachtung der Sicherheitsvorschriften bei der Arbeit mit Hochspannung kann zu Feuer und elektrischem Schlag fhren. Deshalb muss die Verlegung von Leitungen und Verbindungen den rtlichen Anforderungen und Sicherheitsvorschriften entsprechen. Arbeiten mit Hochspannung drfen nur von qualifiziertem Fachpersonal durchgefhrt werden. 4.2.2 Gewitter Hochspannung und Betrieb mit Wechselstrom oder Arbeiten auf einem Stahlturm und -mast sind whrend Gewittern verboten. Das elektromagnetische Feld, das whrend eines Gewitters entsteht, kann die Elektronik beschdigen. Um die Ausrstung vor Beschdigung durch Blitzschlag zu schtzen, ist eine ordnungsgeme Erdung erforderlich. Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-19 GEFAHRWARNUNGGEFAHR 4 Sicherheitsinformationen 4.2.3 Werkzeuge Compliance and Safety Manual Vorschlag: Fr Arbeiten mit Hochspannung und Wechselstrom sind Spezialwerkzeuge zu verwenden. Normale Werkzeuge drfen nicht verwendet werden. 4.2.4 Hoher Kriechstrom Erden Sie das Gert bevor Sie es anschalten. Es besteht sonst Gefahr fr Menschen und das Gert. Wenn sich die Markierung hoher Kriechstrom am Leistungsanschluss des Gertes befindet, mssen Sie das Gert erden, bevor Sie es anschalten. 4.2.5 Zuleitung Eine Installation und ein Entfernen stromfhrender Leitungen ist verboten. Kurzschlsse zwischen innerem und uerem Leiter knnen Lichtbgen oder Funkenflug verursachen, was zu Feuer oder einer Augenverletzung fhren kann. Das System muss stets abgeschaltet werden, bevor die Zuleitung angebracht oder entfernt wird. berprfen Sie vor dem Anbringen der Zuleitung immer, ob das von Ihnen verwendete Kabel den Anforderungen entspricht. Verwenden Sie fr ein mit Gleichstrom betriebenes Gert ein Stromversorgungskabel mit mind. 1,0 mm oder 16 AWG. Verwenden Sie fr ein mit Wechselstrom betriebenes Gert ein Stromversorgungskabel mit mind. 1,0 mm oder 16 AWG. Es sind Typ H03VVF oder eine leichte PVC-Schlauchleitung entsprechend IEC 60227 zu benutzen. 4-20 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2012-4-27) WARNUNGWARNUNGWARNUNGVORSICHT Compliance and Safety Manual 4.2.6 Sicherung 4 Sicherheitsinformationen Ersetzen Sie die Sicherung bei Bedarf immer nur mit einem Sicherungstyp, der die gleichen technischen Daten besitzt. 4.2.7 Elektrostatische Entladung Die vom menschlichen Krper erzeugte elektrostatische Elektrizitt kann sensible elektrostatische Bauteile auf der Leiterplatte beschdigen, zum Beispiel integrierte Schaltkreise (ICs). Der menschliche Krper erzeugt in den folgenden Situationen ein statisches elektromagnetisches Feld:
Bei Bewegung Durch Reibung der Kleidung Durch Reibung zwischen den Schuhen und dem Boden Beim Halten von normalem Kunststoff in der Hand Das statische elektromagnetische Feld bleibt lange Zeit im Krper. Tragen Sie beim Berhren des Gerts, mit der Hand zu bedienenden Teilen, Leiterplatten oder ASICs ein geerdetes Armband zur elektrostatischen Entladung (ESD). Dies kann verhindern, dass empfindliche Bauteile durch statische Elektrizitt im menschlichen Krper beschdigt werden. Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-21 WARNUNGVORSICHT 4 Sicherheitsinformationen Figure 4-1 zeigt das Tragen eines ESD-Armbandes. Figure 4-1 Tragen eines ESD-Armbandes Compliance and Safety Manual 4.3 Feuergefhrliche Umgebung Jegliches Betreiben des elektrischen Gertes in einer feuergefhrlichen Umgebung verursacht Gefahr. Stellen Sie das Gert nicht bei Umgebungsbedingungen auf, wo brennbare und explosive Luft oder Gase vorherrschen. Nehmen Sie bei diesen Umgebungsbedingungen das Gert nicht in Betrieb. 4-22 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2012-4-27) GEFAHR Compliance and Safety Manual 4.4 Batterie 4.4.1 Speicherbatterie 4 Sicherheitsinformationen Lesen Sie vor dem Umgang mit der Batterie die Sicherheitsmanahmen sorgfltig durch, die beim Umgang mit der Batterie und beim Anschlieen ergriffen werden sollen. Nicht vorschriftsgeme Arbeiten an den Batterien knnen Gefahren beinhalten. Whrend des Betriebs:
Schtzen Sie die Batterie vor Kurzschluss. Verhindern Sie berlaufen und Auslaufen der Elektrolytflssigkeit. Das berlaufen von Elektrolytflssigkeit kann das Gert beschdigen. Es kann Metallteile und die Leiterplatten korrodieren und das Gert beschdigen, sowie zu Kurzschlssen in den Leiterplatten fhren. Allgemeiner Betrieb Beachten Sie Folgendes whrend der Montage und Wartung von Batterien:
Tragen Sie keine metallischen Gegenstnde wie Uhren, Armreifen, Ketten und Ringe. Benutzen Sie isoliertes Spezialwerkzeug. Tragen Sie eine Schutzbrille whrend der Bedienung des Gerts. Tragen Sie Gummihandschuhe und eine Schrze fr den Fall des berlaufens von Elektrolytflssigkeit. Halten Sie die Elektrode beim Umgang mit der Batterie immer senkrecht vor sich. Drehen Sie Batterie nicht um und kippen Sie sie nicht. Kurzschluss Der Kurzschluss der Batterie kann Verletzungen zur Folge haben. Auch wenn die Spannung einer normalen Batterie gering ist, setzt hoher bergangsstrom, der durch einen Kurzschluss verursacht wird, eine groe Menge Energie frei. Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-23 GEFAHRVORSICHTWARNUNG 4 Sicherheitsinformationen Compliance and Safety Manual Bei unsachgemem Einsetzen der Batterie besteht die Gefahr einer Explosion. Ersetzen Sie die Batterie daher nur mit dem gleichen oder einem hnlichem, vom Hersteller empfohlenen Batterietyp. Halten Sie metallische Gegenstnde von der Batterie fern, die einen Kurzschluss verursachen knnten. Wenn sie verwendet werden mssen, trennen Sie zuerst die verwendeten Batterien, bevor Sie andere Arbeiten durchfhren. Gefhrliches Gas Verwenden Sie keine unversiegelten Bleisurebatterien, da das Gas, das von der Batterie abgegeben wird, zu einem Feuer oder einer Korrosion des Gerts fhren kann. Legen Sie die Batterie horizontal hin und befestigen Sie sie richtig. Die verwendete Batterie gibt brennbares Gas ab. Stellen Sie die Batterie deshalb an einem Ort mit guter Belftung auf und ergreifen Sie Vorsichtsmanahmen gegen Feuer. Hohe Temperatur Hohe Temperatur kann zu einem Verziehen, Schaden oder berlaufen der Elektrolytflssigkeit der Batterie fhren. Wenn die Temperatur der Batterie 60 C bersteigt, sollten Sie prfen, ob Sureflssigkeit berluft. Falls Sureflssigkeit berluft, beseitigen Sie die Sureflssigkeit sofort. Sureflssigkeit Falls Sureflssigkeit berluft, absorbieren und neutralisieren Sie die Flssigkeit sofort. 4-24 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2012-4-27) VORSICHTVORSICHTVORSICHTVORSICHT Compliance and Safety Manual 4 Sicherheitsinformationen Beachten Sie beim Bewegen oder Entfernen einer auslaufenden Batterie den mglichen Schaden, der durch die Sureflssigkeit verursacht werden kann. Wenn Sie verschttete Sureflssigkeit gefunden haben, verwenden Sie die folgenden Materialien, um sie zu absorbieren und zu neutralisieren. Natriumbikarbonat (Backpulver): NaHCO3 Natriumkarbonat (Soda): Na2CO3 Bei Verwendung von surebindenden Mitteln mssen die Anweisungen des Batterielieferanten befolgt werden. 4.4.2 Lithium-Batterie Bei unsachgemem Einsetzen der Batterie besteht die Gefahr einer Explosion. Ersetzen Sie die Batterie daher nur mit dem gleichen oder einem hnlichem, vom Hersteller empfohlenen Batterietyp. Entsorgen Sie verbrauchte Batterien gem den Anweisungen des Herstellers. Verbrennen Sie Lithium-Batterien nicht. 4.5 Laser Die von diesem Laser ausgehende Gefahr entspricht der Klasse 1. Halten Sie bei der Handhabung von optischen Fasern Abstand und schauen Sie nicht ohne Augenschutz in das Ende von optischen Fasern. 4.5.1 Allgemeine Informationen zum Laser Lasersender und -empfnger werden in optischen bertragungs- und berwachungssystemen eingesetzt. Die Wellenlnge des Lasers betrgt zwischen 780 nm und 1600 nm. Die Laserenergie, die durch optische Fasern bertragen wird, hat eine sehr hohe Energiedichte. Das Laserlicht ist aber nicht sichtbar fr das menschliche Auge. Wenn ein Lichtstrahl in das Auge eindringt, kann die Retina beschdigt werden. Bei der im Telekommunikationsbereich genutzten Wellenlnge von Lasern kann die Retina durch Wrme geschdigt werden. Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-25 WARNUNGWARNUNG 4 Sicherheitsinformationen Compliance and Safety Manual Laser, die in Lichtwellenleitersystemen verwendet werden, weisen eine grere Streuung des Lichtstrahls auf, typisch sind Werte zwischen 10 und 20. Der versehentliche Blick in eine beschdigte oder nicht abgeschlossene optische Faser ohne Augenschutz aus einer Entfernung von mehr als 150 mm verursacht keine Verletzung der Augen. Es kann aber zu Augenverletzungen kommen, wenn optische Instrumente, wie z. B. ein Mikroskop, Vergrerungsglas oder eine Lupe verwendet werden, um das spannungsfhrende Faserende zu betrachten. Im normalen Betriebszustand ist ein LWL-System komplett abgeschlossen und stellt keine Gefahr von Augenverletzungen dar. Zustzliche Sicherheit wird durch eine automatische Laserabschaltung (ALS) des Systems erreicht werden. Die ALS kann jedoch nur fr bidirektionale bertragung angewendet werden. Wenn die Empfngerseite den Laser von der Senderseite nicht erkennt, gibt er ein Signal an die Senderseite aus. Die ALS beendet die Lasersendung in weniger als 100 ms nach Erhalt des Signals. 4.5.2 Sicherheitsrichtlinien fr Laser Beachten Sie die folgenden Richtlinien, um Laserstrahlung zu vermeiden:
Lesen Sie alle Anweisungen, bevor Sie das Gert installieren, warten und in Betrieb nehmen. Die Nichtbeachtung dieser Anweisungen kann zu gefhrlicher Laserstrahlung fhren. Tragen Sie whrend des Umgangs mit den optischen Fasern oder mit dem Laser eine Schutzbrille. Die Bedienung darf nur durch Personal erfolgen, das die entsprechenden Schulungen absolviert hat. Vergewissern Sie sich, dass die optische Quelle abgeschaltet ist, bevor Sie die Verbindungen der optischen Fasern abklemmen. Bevor Sie die vordere Tr eines optischen bertragungssystems ffnen, mssen Sie sicherstellen, dass Sie keiner Laserstrahlung ausgesetzt werden knnen. Sehen Sie niemals in das Ende einer freigelegten Faser oder in eine offene Verbindung, wenn Sie nicht sicher sind, dass die optische Quelle auch tatschlich abgeschaltet ist. Messen Sie mit einem optischen Leistungsmesser die optische Leistung, um festzustellen, ob die optische Quelle ausgeschaltet ist. Benutzen Sie keine optischen Instrumente, wie z. B. ein Mikroskop, Vergrerungsglas oder eine Lupe, um die Fasern oder die Verbindungen anzusehen. 4.5.3 Umgang mit Fasern Lesen Sie die Anweisungen, bevor Sie mit den Fasern arbeiten. Schneiden und Verbinden von Fasern darf nur von geschultem Personal durchgefhrt werden. Vergewissern Sie sich stets vor dem Trennen und Verbinden von Fasern, dass diese auch wirklich von der optischen Quelle getrennt wurden. Nach dem Abklemmen der Fasern mssen alle optischen Verbindungen durch spezielle Verschlusskappen geschtzt werden. 4-26 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2012-4-27) Compliance and Safety Manual 4 Sicherheitsinformationen 4.6 Arbeiten in groen Hhen Achten Sie beim Arbeiten in groen Hhen darauf, dass keine Gegenstnde herunterfallen. Bei Arbeiten in groen Hhen sind folgende Anforderungen einzuhalten. Das in groer Hhe arbeitende Personal muss geschult sein. Der Betrieb von Maschinen und Werkzeugen muss sicher ausgefhrt werden, um ein Herunterfallen zu vermeiden. Es mssen Sicherheitsmanahmen ergriffen werden, zum Beispiel das Tragen eines Helms und eines Sicherheitsgurts. Tragen Sie in kalten Gegenden warme Kleidung, wenn Sie Arbeiten in groer Hhe durchfhren. Alle Hebegerte mssen vor Beginn der Arbeiten sorgfltig berprft werden. 4.6.1 Heben von groen Gewichten Betreten Sie beim Heben von groen Gewichten keine Bereiche unter dem Ausleger und hngenden Gegenstnden. Stellen Sie sicher, dass die Bediener die entsprechenden Schulungen abgeschlossen haben und qualifiziert sind. berprfen Sie die Werkzeuge zum Heben des Gewichts und vergewissern Sie sich, dass die Werkzeuge in gutem Zustand sind. Heben Sie das Gewicht nur, wenn die Werkzeuge zum Heben des Gewichts fest an einem Gegenstand, der das Gewicht aushlt, oder an einer Wand befestigt sind. Verwenden Sie einen knappen Befehl, um Fehlbedienung zu vermeiden. Stellen Sie sicher, dass der Winkel zwischen den zwei Kabeln whrend des Hebens hchstens 90 Grad betrgt. (siehe Figure 4-2). Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-27 WARNUNGWARNUNG 4 Sicherheitsinformationen Figure 4-2 Heben von groen Gewichten Compliance and Safety Manual 4.6.2 Sicherheitsleitfaden zur Verwendung von Leitern berprfen der Leiter berprfen Sie vor Verwendung der Leiter zuerst, ob die Leiter in gutem Zustand ist. Stellen Sie sicher, dass Sie das maximale Gewicht kennen, das die Leiter tragen kann. Ein berlasten der Leiter ist strengstens verboten. Aufstellen der Leiter Der Neigungswinkel sollte 75 Grad sein. Die Neigung kann mit einem Winkelmesser oder mit den Armen gemessen werden. Stellen Sie bei Verwendung einer Leiter das breitere Ende der Leiter auf den Boden. Ergreifen Sie ansonsten Schutzmanahmen am unteren Teil der Leiter, um ein Rutschen zu verhindern. Stellen Sie die Leiter auf einen stabilen Boden. 4-28 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2012-4-27) Maximal Compliance and Safety Manual Besteigen der Leiter 4 Sicherheitsinformationen Beachten Sie beim Besteigen der Leiter Folgendes. Stellen Sie sicher, dass der Schwerpunkt Ihres Krper nicht jenseits des Randes der Leiter liegt. Um die Gefahr zu verringern und die Sicherheit zu gewhrleisten, sollten Sie vor der Durchfhrung irgendwelchen Arbeiten sicher auf der Leiter stehen. Steigen Sie nicht hher als die vierthchste Stufe der Leiter. Wenn Sie ganz nach oben klettern, sollte die Lnge der Leiter einen Meter hher als die Traufe sein. 4.7 Mechanische Sicherheit 4.7.1 Bohren Bohren auf dem Gestell ohne Erlaubnis ist strengstens verboten. Bohren, das die entsprechenden Anforderungen nicht erfllt, kann die Drhte und Kabel im Gestell beschdigen. Wenn Metallspne aufgrund des Bohrens in das Gestell fallen, kann dies zu einem Kurzschluss der Leiterplatten fhren. Tragen Sie beim Bohren eines Lochs am Gestell isolierte Handschuhe und entfernen Sie die Kabel im Gestell. Stellen Sie whrend des Bohrens sicher, dass Ihre Augen geschtzt sind. Heie Spne knnen Ihre Augen verletzen. Stellen Sie sicher, dass keine Metallspne in das Gestell gelangen. Nicht vorschriftsgemes Bohren kann die elektromagnetische Abschirmung des Gestells beschdigen. Entfernen Sie die Metallspne nach dem Bohren umgehend. 4.7.2 Scharfkantige Gegenstnde Tragen Sie, wenn Sie das Gert von Hand transportieren, Schutzhandschuhe, um Verletzungen durch scharfkantige Gegenstnde zu vermeiden. 4.7.3 Umgang mit Ventilatoren Stellen Sie Folgendes sicher:
Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-29 WARNUNGWARNUNG 4 Sicherheitsinformationen Compliance and Safety Manual Stellen Sie beim Austauschen eines Bauteils das Bauteil, die Schrauben und das Werkzeug an einen sicheren Ort, um zu verhindern, dass sie in den laufenden Lfter fallen. Stecken Sie beim Austauschen der Umgebungsvorrichtungen rund um den Lfter nicht Ihre Finger oder die Leiterplatte in den laufenden Lfter. Warten Sie, bis der Lfter ausgeschaltet ist und nicht mehr luft. 4.7.4 Heben schwerer Gegenstnde Stehen oder gehen Sie beim Heben schwerer Gegenstnde nicht unter dem Arm oder dem gehobenen Gegenstand. 4.8 Verschiedenes 4.8.1 Einsetzen und Entfernen von Leiterplatten Beachten Sie beim Einsetzen und Entfernen von Leiterplatten die folgenden Anforderungen:
Behandeln Sie Leiterplatten beim Einsetzen vorsichtig, um ein Verdrehen der Stifte auf der Rckseite zu verhindern. Setzen Sie Leiterplatten nur entlang der Fhrungsschlitze ein. Die zwei Seiten einer Leiterplatte sollten keine andere Leiterplatte berhren, um Kurzschlsse oder Kratzer zu verhindern. Berhren Sie die Leiterplatte, Bauteile, Anschlsse oder Anschlussschlitze nicht, wenn Sie eine Leiterplatte in der Hand halten. 4.8.2 Bndeln von Signalleitungen 4-30 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue (2012-4-27) WARNUNGVORSICHT Compliance and Safety Manual 4 Sicherheitsinformationen Bndeln Sie die Signalleitungen getrennt von Starkstromkabeln oder Hochspannungskabeln. Benutzen Sie Kabelbinder in einen Abstand von maximal 150 mm. 4.8.3 Verkabelungsanforderungen Bei sehr niedrigen Temperaturen kann eine Bewegung der Kabel die Kunststoffhlle der Kabel beschdigen. Um die Bausicherheit zu gewhrleisten, befolgen Sie die nachfolgenden Anordnungen:
Stellen Sie beim Installieren von Kabeln sicher, dass die Umgebungstemperatur ber 0 C liegt. Wenn Kabel an Orten unter 0 C aufbewahrt werden, sollten Sie die Kabel an einen Ort mit Raumtemperatur transportieren und dort die Kabel vor der Installation mindestens 24 Stunden aufbewahren. Bewegen Sie die Kabel vorsichtig, besonders bei niedrigen Temperaturen. Lassen Sie die Kabel nicht direkt vom Fahrzeug fallen. 4.9 3G Antenne Der Produkt benutzt Standard 3G Antenne, Einrichtung und Wartung darf nur von der qualifizierten Person ausgefhrt werden. Issue (2012-4-27) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-31 VORSICHTVORSICHT
1 2 3 4 | User manual II | Users Manual | 2.47 MiB | June 06 2012 / June 09 2012 |
Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers V200R001C01 Hardware Description Issue Date 03 2012-04-20 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2012. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied. Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address:
Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China Website:
Email:
http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description About This Document About This Document Intended Audience This document provides an overall description of the AR routers, details about each chassis and board, cables available to the device, and lists of components. This document is intended for:
l Network planning engineers l Hardware installation engineers l Commissioning engineers l On-site maintenance engineers l System maintenance engineers Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii DANGERWARNINGCAUTIONTIPNOTE Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Change History About This Document Changes between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains all the changes in previous issues. Changes in Issue 02 (2012-03-30) Based on issue 01 (2011-12-30), this issue has the following updates:
l The AR2220-S model is added. Changes in Issue 01 (2011-12-30) Initial commercial release. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Contents Contents About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii 1 Version Matching..........................................................................................................................1 1.1 Matching Between Product Models and Software Versions..............................................................................2 1.2 Matching Between Power Supplies and Software Versions..............................................................................2 1.3 Matching Between Cards and Software Versions..............................................................................................3 2 Chassis.............................................................................................................................................7 2.1 Introduction........................................................................................................................................................8 2.2 Naming Convention............................................................................................................................................8 2.3 Device Structure.................................................................................................................................................9 2.3.1 AR1200-S Series.......................................................................................................................................9 2.3.2 AR2200-S Series.....................................................................................................................................12 2.4 System Configuration.......................................................................................................................................14 2.5 Physical Specifications.....................................................................................................................................14 3 Power Supply Units....................................................................................................................16 3.1 Power Supply Configuration............................................................................................................................17 3.2 Power Supply Unit Connection Layouts..........................................................................................................17 3.2.1 Single Non-PoE AC Power Supply Unit.................................................................................................17 3.2.2 Single Non-PoE + PoE AC Power Supply Unit......................................................................................18 3.3 HW-100-48AC14D..........................................................................................................................................19 4 Heat Dissipation System............................................................................................................23 4.1 Heat Dissipation Process..................................................................................................................................24 5 Cards..............................................................................................................................................25 5.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................................................26 5.1.1 Relationships Between Cards..................................................................................................................26 5.1.2 Interface Numbering................................................................................................................................27 5.1.3 Card Dimensions.....................................................................................................................................28 5.2 WLAN Subcard................................................................................................................................................29 5.2.1 Functions and Applications.....................................................................................................................29 5.2.2 Technical Specifications..........................................................................................................................29 5.3 Ethernet LAN Interface Card............................................................................................................................29 5.3.1 8FE1GE-8-Port 100BASE-RJ45 and 1-Port 1000BASE-RJ45 L2/L3 Ethernet Interface Card.............30 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iv Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Contents 5.3.2 24GE-24-Port 1000BASE-RJ45 L2/L3 Ethernet Interface Card............................................................33 5.4 WAN Interface Card.........................................................................................................................................36 5.4.1 1GEC (1-Port-GE Combo WAN Interface Card)....................................................................................36 5.4.2 2FE-2-Port-FE WAN Interface Card.......................................................................................................40 5.4.3 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M-1/2 Port-Channelized E1/T1/PRI/VE1 Multifunctional Interface Card................42 5.4.4 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F (1/2-Port-Fractional Channelized E1/T1 WAN Interface Card)..............................47 5.4.5 1SA/2SA-1/2-Port-Synchronous/Asynchronous WAN Interface Card..................................................50 5.4.6 8AS (8-Port-Asynchronous WAN Interface Card)..................................................................................54 5.4.7 1BST (1-Port-ISDN S/T WAN Interface Card)......................................................................................56 5.4.8 1CPOS-155M (1-Port Channelized POS Interface Card).......................................................................59 5.4.9 3G-HSPA+7 (3G WAN Interface Card).................................................................................................62 5.4.10 4GEW-T (4-Port-GE Electrical WAN Interface Card).........................................................................67 5.4.11 4GEW-S (4-Port-GE Optical WAN Interface Card..............................................................................69 5.5 Voice Interface Card.........................................................................................................................................73 5.5.1 2BST (2-Port-ISDN S/T Voice Interface Card)......................................................................................73 5.5.2 4FXS1FXO-4-Port FXS and 1-Port FXO Voice Interface Card.............................................................77 5.5.3 16/32/64/128-Channel DSP Module.......................................................................................................80 5.6 xDSL Interface Card.........................................................................................................................................81 5.6.1 ADSL-A/M and ADSL-B-1-Port-ADSL2+ ANNEX A/M and B WAN Interface Card........................81 5.6.2 4G.SHDSL-1-Port-4-Channel G.SHDSL WAN Interface Card.............................................................85 5.6.3 1PON (1-Port GPON/EPON Dual-Mode Interface Card).......................................................................87 5.6.4 VDSL (1-Port VDSL2 over POTS WAN Interface Card)......................................................................91 6 Cables.............................................................................................................................................95 6.1 AC Power Cable...............................................................................................................................................97 6.2 DC Power Cables..............................................................................................................................................98 6.3 Ground Cable..................................................................................................................................................100 6.4 Console Cable.................................................................................................................................................101 6.5 Network Cable................................................................................................................................................102 6.6 Optical Fiber...................................................................................................................................................105 6.7 E1/T1 Trunk Cables........................................................................................................................................109 6.8 Synchronous/Asynchronous Serial Interface Cables......................................................................................114 6.9 4G.SHDSL Cables..........................................................................................................................................120 6.10 ISDN-ST Cables...........................................................................................................................................122 6.11 Regular Telephone Lines..............................................................................................................................126 6.12 8AS Cable.....................................................................................................................................................127 6.13 3G Antenna...................................................................................................................................................132 7 List of Indicators........................................................................................................................136 7.1 Indicators on the AR1200-S Panel.................................................................................................................137 7.2 Indicators on the AR2220-S Panel.................................................................................................................140 7.3 Power Indicators.............................................................................................................................................142 8 List of Cards................................................................................................................................145 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Contents 8.1 Cards Supported by the AR............................................................................................................................146 8.2 Power Consumption and Weight....................................................................................................................149 9 List of Interface Attributes.......................................................................................................150 9.1 Electrical Interfaces........................................................................................................................................152 9.2 GE/PON Optical Interface Attributes.............................................................................................................153 9.3 CPOS Interface Attributes..............................................................................................................................155 9.4 E1 Interface Attributes....................................................................................................................................156 9.5 T1 Interface Attributes....................................................................................................................................157 9.6 Synchronous/Asynchronous Serial Interface Attributes.................................................................................158 9.7 ISDN S/T Interface Attributes........................................................................................................................159 9.8 FXS/FXO Interface Attributes........................................................................................................................159 9.9 ADSL2/ADSL2+/G.SHDSL Interface Attributes..........................................................................................161 9.10 Attributes of the Console Interface...............................................................................................................162 9.11 Attributes of the USB Interface....................................................................................................................162 9.12 3G Interface Attributes.................................................................................................................................163 9.13 VDSL Interface Attributes............................................................................................................................164 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vi Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 1 Version Matching 1 Version Matching About This Chapter This section describes the matching relationships between the chassis, power supplies, cards, and system software versions of AR routers. NOTE l AR version roadmap: ARV200R001C01, ARV200R002C00, ARV200R002C01. l Unless otherwise specified, if a power supply or card is supported by version A, it is also supported by all versions later than version A. 1.1 Matching Between Product Models and Software Versions This section describes the matching relationship between AR models and software versions. 1.2 Matching Between Power Supplies and Software Versions This section describes the matching relationships between power supplies, power modes, and software versions. 1.3 Matching Between Cards and Software Versions This section describes the cards supported by AR routers, including SRUs, Ethernet LAN interface cards, WAN interface cards, voice interface cards, and xDSL/xPON interface cards. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 1 Version Matching 1.1 Matching Between Product Models and Software Versions This section describes the matching relationship between AR models and software versions. Table 1-1 Matching between product models and software versions Model Software Version ARV200R001C01 AR1200-S series AR2200-S series AR12 20-S AR12 20W-
S AR22 20-S ARV200R002C00 ARV200R002C01 1.2 Matching Between Power Supplies and Software Versions This section describes the matching relationships between power supplies, power modes, and software versions. Table 1-2 Matching between power supplies and software versions Model&Version 3.3 HW-100-48AC 14D PWR150A 60 W AC Power Supply Unit in an Open Rack ARV200R001C01&
ARV200R002C00&
ARV200R002C01 AR1220-S AR1220W-
S AR2220-S Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 1 Version Matching Table 1-3 Matching between power modes and software versions Model&Versi on Single DC Power Supply Unit Dual DC Power Supply Units Single Non-PoE AC Power Supply Unit Dual Non-
PoE AC Power Supply Units AR12 20-S AR12 20W-S AR22 20-S ARV2 00R0 01C0 1&A RV20 0R00 2C00
&AR V200 R002 C01 Single Non-PoE
+ PoE AC Power Supply Unit 1.3 Matching Between Cards and Software Versions This section describes the cards supported by AR routers, including SRUs, Ethernet LAN interface cards, WAN interface cards, voice interface cards, and xDSL/xPON interface cards. Matching between physical cards and software versions Table 1-4 Matching between physical cards and software versions Model&Version ARV200R001C0 1&ARV200R002 C00&ARV200R0 02C01 SIC WSIC XSIC voice card AR1220-
S AR1220 W-S AR2220-
S Matching between SRUs and software versions Table 1-5 Matching between SRUs and software versions Model&Version ARV200R001C0 1&ARV200R002 AR1220-S SRU WLAN Subcard Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 1 Version Matching Model&Version C00&ARV200R 002C01 SRU WLAN Subcard AR1220W-S AR2220-S Matching between Ethernet LAN interface cards and software versions Table 1-6 Matching between Ethernet LAN interface cards and software versions Model&Version ARV200R001C0 1&ARV200R002 C00&ARV200R 002C01 AR1220W-S AR1220-S 8FE1GE 24GE AR2220-S Matching between WAN cards and software versions Table 1-7 Matching between WAN cards and software versions Model&Ver sion 1S A 2S A 2F E 2E1 T1-
M
(WS IC) 1E 1T 1-
F/
2E 1T 1-F 1E1 T1-
M/
2E1 T1-
M
(SIC
) 1 G E C 8 A S 1 B S T 4 G E W
-T 4 G E W
-S 1 C P O S-
15 5 M 3 G
-
H S P A
+
7 AR1 220-
S AR1 220 W-S AR2 220-
S AR1 220-
S ARV 200R 001C 01 ARV 200R 002C 00 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Model&Ver sion 2F E 1S A 2S A 1 G E C 8 A S 1 B S T 2E1 T1-
M
(WS IC) 1E 1T 1-
F/
2E 1T 1-F 1E1 T1-
M/
2E1 T1-
M
(SIC
) 1 Version Matching 4 G E W
-T 4 G E W
-S 1 C P O S-
15 5 M 3 G
-
H S P A
+
7 AR1 220 W-S AR2 220-
S AR1 220-
S AR1 220 W-S AR2 220-
S ARV 200R 002C 01 Matching between voice cards and software versions Table 1-8 Matching between voice cards and software versions Model&Version 4FXS1FXO 2BST(SIC) 2BST(WSIC) ARV200R0 01C01 AR12 20-S AR12 20W-S AR22 20-S AR12 20-S AR12 20W-S ARV200R0 02C00&AR V200R002 C01 16/32/64/128
-Channel DSP Module Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 1 Version Matching Model&Version 4FXS1FXO 2BST(SIC) 2BST(WSIC) 16/32/64/128
-Channel DSP Module AR22 20-S Matching between xDSL/xPON cards and software versions Table 1-9 Matching between xDSL/xPON cards and software versions Model&Versi on ARV2 00R00 1C01 ADSL-
A/M ADSL-
B 4G.SH DSL AR122 0-S 1PON AR122 0W-S AR222 0-S AR122 0-S AR122 0W-S AR222 0-S AR122 0-S AR122 0W-S AR222 0-S ARV2 00R00 2C00 ARV2 00R00 2C01 VDSL Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 2 Chassis 2 Chassis About This Chapter This section describes the characteristics, naming rules, appearance, structure, system performance, and technical specifications of the AR routers. 2.1 Introduction This section briefly describes the AR routers and the models available. 2.2 Naming Convention This section describes the naming conventions used when naming AR routers. 2.3 Device Structure This section describes the structure of the AR routers. 2.4 System Configuration 2.5 Physical Specifications Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 2 Chassis 2.1 Introduction This section briefly describes the AR routers and the models available. Description Models Huawei AR Enterprise Router (AR router for short) are the next-generation routers integrating data,voice, security, routing, switching, and virtual private network (VPN) functions. As an egress gateway for enterprises, the AR routers use the multi-core CPU processing capabilities and rapid expansibility. The AR routers offer the following models. Model AR1200
-S AR1220-
S AR1220 W-S AR2200 AR2220-
S Characteristics The AR1220-S is 1 U high (1 U = 44.45 mm [1.75 in.]), uses a 60 W open frame AC power supply, and supports two SIC slots. The integrated SRU provides eight fixed FE interfaces and two fixed GE electrical interfaces. l Compared with the AR1220-S, the AR1220W-S supports the Wi-
Fi function and external PoE power supply unit. The last four FE interfaces (FE4-FE7) on the main control unit support the PoE function. l The silkscreen on the rear side of AR1220W-S chassis is AR1220W-S and two antennas and a PoE power supply port are provided. The AR2220-S is 1 U high (1 U = 44.45 mm), uses a 150 W AC power supply unit, and supports four SIC cards and two WSIC cards. The integrated SRU supports fixed 3GE interfaces (including one combo interface). The backplane is in the middle of the chassis, and cards are installed on the front and rear sides of the backplane. NOTE l SIC: Service Interface Card. This is the smallest card supported by ARs. l WSIC: Wide SIC. The same height as a SIC, but twice the width. l XSIC: Extended SIC. Double the height and width of an XSIC and twice those of a SIC. NOTE In this document, AR1200S indicates AR1220S and AR1220WS. 2.2 Naming Convention This section describes the naming conventions used when naming AR routers. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Figure 2-1 Naming convention 2 Chassis ARB1 B2 B3 B4C1-D1 Example:
AR1220 -S Table 2-1 Naming convention of AR routers Field B1 Description Product series code. AR routers includes series 1 and 2. B2 B3 B4 C1 D1 Fixed as 2, indicating enterprise router. Number of service card slots (dependent on B1):
l When B1 is 1, B3 indicates the number of SIC cards. l When B1 is 2, B3 indicates the number of WSIC and XSIC cards. The value is fixed as 0. C1 contains one or two upper-case letters. l W: WLAN l V: voice l A: AC (This is the default configuration, so A is not contained in the product name) l D: DC l S: Soho 2.3 Device Structure This section describes the structure of the AR routers. 2.3.1 AR1200-S Series This section describes the structure of the AR1200-S. Appearance Figure 2-2 and Figure 2-3 show front views of AR1200-S. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Figure 2-2 AR1220-S front view 2 Chassis Figure 2-3 AR1220W-S front view 18 19 18 20 Figure 2-4 and Figure 2-5 show rear views of AR1200-S. Figure 2-4 AR1220-S rear view 7 2 1 4 3 15 14 13 12 10 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Figure 2-5 AR1220W-S rear view 2 Chassis 7 2 1 4 3 15 14 13 12 11 10 1: Pluggable card 2: ESD jack 3: Ground screw 4: AC jack 7: Security lock 10: AC power switch 11: PoE port 13: Two Fixed GE interfaces on the panel 14: Mini USB interface 15: CON/AUX interface 12: Fixed 8FE interface on the panel 18: USB interfaces NOTE After a 3G USB modem is inserted, install a protection cap on it, as shown in the following figure. 19: Antenna 20: WLAN switch Slot Distribution Figure 2-6 shows slot distribution on AR1200-S. NOTE l Two SIC slots can be combined into one WSIC slot by removing the guide rail. l Slots can be combined into one, but one slot cannot be divided into multiple slots. l After two slots are combined into one, the slot ID is the larger number of the two original slots. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 2 Chassis Figure 2-6 AR1200-S slot distribution on Device Model Front view AR1200
-S Slot Distribution Slot Combination NA NA Rear view 2(SIC) 1(SIC) 0(SRU) Two SIC slots are combined into one WSIC slot 2(WSIC) 0(SRU) As shown in Figure 2-6, the slots of AR1200-S can be combined :
Slot 1 and slot 2 are combined into new slot 2. 2.3.2 AR2200-S Series This section describes the structure of the AR2200-S. Appearance Figure 2-7 show front views of AR2200-S. Figure 2-7 AR2220-S front view 10 4 16 17 13 18 14 15 Figure 2-8 show rear views of AR2200-S. Figure 2-8 AR2220-S rear view 23 1 1: Pluggable card 2: ESD jack 3: Ground screw 4: AC jack Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 12 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 2 Chassis 10: AC power switch 13: Two Fixed GE interfaces on the panel 14: Mini USB interface 15: CON/AUX interface 16: Micro SD card interface 17: GE optical/
electrical Combo interface 18: USB interfaces NOTE After a 3G USB modem is inserted, install a protection cap on it, as shown in the following figure. Slot Distribution Figure 2-9 shows slot distribution on AR2200-S. NOTE l Two SIC slots can be combined into one WSIC slot by removing the guide rail. l Two SIC slots and one WSIC slot can be combined into one XSIC slot by removing the guide rail. l Two XSIC slots can be combined into one EXSIC slot by removing the guide rail. l Slots can be combined into one, but one slot cannot be divided into multiple slots. l After two slots are combined into one, the slot ID is the larger number of the two original slots. Figure 2-9 AR2200-S slot distribution Device Model Front view AR2220
-S Rear view Slot Distribution Slot Combination 7(Power) 0(SRU) NA 4(SIC) 3(SIC) 6(WSIC) 2(SIC) 1(SIC) 5(WSIC) Two SIC slots are combined into one WSIC slot 4(WSIC) 6(WSIC) 2(WSIC) 5(WSIC) Two WSIC slots are combined into one XSIC slot 6(XSIC) 5(XSIC) As shown in Figure 2-9, the slots of AR2200-S can be combined :
l AR2220-S Slot 1 and slot 2 are combined into new slot 2. Slot 3 and slot 4 are combined into new slot 4. New slot 2 and slot 5 are combined into new slot 5. New slot 4 and slot 6 are combined into new slot 6. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 13 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 2 Chassis 2.4 System Configuration Table 2-2 System configuration Model Processor AR1200-S Series AR2220-S 2-core: 500 MHz 4-core: 600 MHz Memory 512 MB 2 GB Flash Memory 256 MB Micro SD Card 0 16 MB 2 GB 2.5 Physical Specifications Table 2-3 Physical specifications Item Dimensions (width x depth x height) Description l Without rack-mounting ear:
AR1200-S: 390.0 mm x 220.0 mm x 44.5 mm (15.35 in. x 8.66 in. x 1.75 in.) AR2220-S: 442.0 mm x 420.0 mm x 44.5 mm (17.4 in. x 16.54 in. x 1.75 in.) l With rack-mounting ear:
AR1200-S: 482.6 mm x 220.0 mm x 44.5 mm (19 in. x 8.66 in. x 1.75 in.) AR2220-S: 482.6 mm x 420.0 mm x 44.5 mm (19 in. x 16.54 in. x 1.75 in.) Maximum power consumption Full configuration Empty chassis Weight Full configuration Empty chassis Operating temperature Relative humidity l AR1200-S: 52 W l AR2220-S: 95 W l AR1200-S: 33.3 W l AR2220-S: 65.1 W l AR1200-S: 3.60 kg (7.94 lb) l AR2220-S: 8.45 kg (18.63 lb) l AR1200-S: 2.90 kg (6.39 lb) l AR2220-S: 4.95 kg (10.91 lb) 0C to 40C (0F to 104F) 5% RH to 90% RH, non-condensing Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 14 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 2 Chassis Item Altitude AC input voltage Long-term operating altitude Description Below 4000 m (13123.2 ft.) Storage altitude Below 4000 m (13123.2 ft.) Rated voltage 100 V AC to 240 V AC, 50/60Hz Maximum voltage 85 V AC to 264 V AC, 47/63Hz Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 3 Power Supply Units 3 Power Supply Units About This Chapter This section describes the power supply units supported by the AR routers. CAUTION l Power off the AR routers before removing or performing maintenance on the power supply units. l To power off the AR routers , power off all its power supply units. 3.1 Power Supply Configuration This section describes the configurations of power supply units on the AR routers. 3.2 Power Supply Unit Connection Layouts This section illustrates the connection between each power supply unit and the motherboard. 3.3 HW-100-48AC14D This section describes the HW-100-48AC14D power supply unit, including the naming convention, functions, appearance, and technical specifications. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 16 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 3 Power Supply Units 3.1 Power Supply Configuration This section describes the configurations of power supply units on the AR routers. Table 3-1 describes the power supply units supported by each model. Table 3-1 Power supply units supported by each model Power Supply Unit Description 60 W AC power supply unit in an open rack AC power supply unit fixed in the chassis Installation Fixed in the chassis, does not need to be connected to the chassis using cables. 3.3 HW-100-48AC14D External PoE AC power supply unit PWR150A AC power supply unit Connected to the PoE port at the back of the chassis using its own power cable. Inserted into a power supply slot. The device supports only one power supply unit. Maintenance Maintain together with the chassis. Maintain independently from the chassis. Maintain together with the chassis. 3.2 Power Supply Unit Connection Layouts This section illustrates the connection between each power supply unit and the motherboard. 3.2.1 Single Non-PoE AC Power Supply Unit Figure 3-1 shows the layout of single non-PoE AC power supply unit connection to motherboard. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 17 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 3 Power Supply Units Figure 3-1 Layout of single non-PoE AC power supply unit connection to motherboard 12V GND Motherboard PWR L N PGND 1. L: Live wire 2. N: Neutral wire 3. PGND: PGND wire 4. GND: Grounding After the AC power is transmitted to the PWR module, the PWR module outputs 12 V voltage, and then the motherboard provides power for the entire device. 3.2.2 Single Non-PoE + PoE AC Power Supply Unit Figure 3-2 shows the layout of single non-PoE + PoE AC power supply unit connection to motherboard. Figure 3-2 Layout of single non-PoE + PoE AC power supply unit connection to motherboard
-53V RTN PoE Port (FE4~FE7) 12V GND
-53V RTN Motherboard PSE on the SRU PWR PWR L N PGND L N PGND 1. L: Live wire 2. N: Neutral wire 3. PGND: PGND wire 4. GND: Grounding 5. RTN: Power ground cable The non-PoE AC power supply unit and PoE AC power supply unit are independent of each other:
l Non-PoE AC power supply unit: After the AC power is transmitted to the PWR module, the PWR module outputs 12 V voltage, and then the motherboard provides power for the entire device. l PoE AC power supply unit: After the AC power is transmitted to the PoE module, the PoE module outputs -53 V voltage, and then the PSE on the SRU provides power for the powered devices (PDs) connected to the PoE interface. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 18 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 3 Power Supply Units 3.3 HW-100-48AC14D This section describes the HW-100-48AC14D power supply unit, including the naming convention, functions, appearance, and technical specifications. Naming Convention Figure 3-3 illustrates the naming convention of the HW-100-48AC14D. Figure 3-3 HW-100-48AC14D naming convention HW-100-48AC14D 1 2 3 4 5 Number Description
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5) Product brand Output power parameters l 100: The output power is 100 W. l 48: The output voltage is 48 V. Power supply unit type l A (Alternate): AC/DC power supply unit l D (Direct): DC/DC power supply unit Socket type l C14 is a type of socket. D (Desk), indicating the desktop power supply. Functions The HW-100-48AC14D uses 90 V AC-264 V AC input power, and provide 48 V/100 W output power when no fan is used. Table 3-2 describes the protection functions provided by the HW-100-48AC14D. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 19 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 3 Power Supply Units Table 3-2 Protection functions of the HW-100-48AC14D Item Minimu m Value
-
Typical Value
-
Maximu m Value 62 V Input protecti on Output protecti on Input undervolta ge protection Input undervolta ge recovery Output overvoltag e protection Output overcurrent protection Output short-
circuit protection
-
Overheating protection
-
-
51 V
-
-
80 V 58 V 2.5 A 3 A 3.5 A
-
-
-
-
Remarks Input voltage can be restored to the normal range automatically. Hysteresis is not smaller than 5 V. Output voltage can be restored to the normal range automatically. Output current can be restored to the normal range automatically. Output short-circuit can be recovered automatically. When temperature exceeds the upper limit, the power supply unit automatically shuts down to avoid permanent damage. No smoke will be generated. Temperature is reduced below 55C (131F). Appearance Figure 3-4 shows the appearance of the HW-100-48AC14D. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 20 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 3 Power Supply Units Figure 3-4 Appearance of the HW-100-48AC14D Table 3-3 describes meanings of the indicators. Table 3-3 Description of the HW-100-48AC14D indicators Indicator Power indicator Color Blue Description If the indicator is steady on, the output power is in the normal range. If the indicator is off, the power supply unit does not have output power. Technical Specifications Table 3-4 describes the technical specifications of the HW-100-48AC14D. Table 3-4 Technical specifications of the HW-100-48AC14D Item Dimensions (width x depth x height) Specification 72 mm x 171 mm x 40 mm (2.83 in. x 6.73 in. x 1.57 in.) Weight 0.65 kg (1.5 lb) AC input voltage 90 V AC to 264 V AC; typical: 110 V AC/220 V AC AC input frequency 47 Hz to 63 Hz; typical: 50 Hz/60 Hz Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 21 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 3 Power Supply Units Item Rated operating voltage Rated output current Rated output voltage Specification 100 V AC to 240 V AC; typical: 110 V AC/220 V AC 2.08 A 48 V Output power 100 W Operating temperature Humidity Altitude 0C to 40C (0F to 104F) 20% RH to 80% RH 4000 m (13123.2 ft.) Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 22 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 4 Heat Dissipation System 4 Heat Dissipation System About This Chapter This section describes the heat dissipation system of the AR router. The fan module of the AR router is described as follows:
l The fan module of the AR1200-S and AR2220-S is located on the right side in the chassis. The fan module dimensions of the AR1200-S are 40 mm [1.58 in.] (width) x 20 mm
[0.79 in.] (depth). The fan module dimensions of the AR2220-S are 40 mm [1.58 in.] (width) x 20 mm
[0.79 in.] (depth). 4.1 Heat Dissipation Process The AR routers heat dissipation system uses fans to create a left-to-right air channel. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 23 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 4 Heat Dissipation System 4.1 Heat Dissipation Process The AR routers heat dissipation system uses fans to create a left-to-right air channel. NOTE The heat dissipation system ensures that the AR routers operates at a normal temperature. For temperature requirements, see 2.5 Physical Specifications. Figure 4-1 shows air circulation through the AR1200-S chassis. Figure 4-1 Air circulation through the AR1200-S chassis Figure 4-2 shows air circulation through the AR2220-S chassis. Figure 4-2 Air circulation through the AR2220-S chassis Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 24 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards 5 Cards About This Chapter This chapter describes the cards supported by the AR routers. 5.1 Introduction This section describes the cards supported by the AR routers, including card types, relationships between cards, the interface numbering scheme, and card dimensions. 5.2 WLAN Subcard WLAN subcards are Wi-Fi modules. 5.3 Ethernet LAN Interface Card This section describes the types, functions, applications, appearance, interfaces, and technical specifications of the Ethernet LAN interface card. 5.4 WAN Interface Card This section describes the types, functions, applications, appearance, interfaces, and technical specifications of the WAN interface card. 5.5 Voice Interface Card This section describes the types, functions, applications, appearance, interfaces, and technical specifications of the voice interface card. 5.6 xDSL Interface Card This section describes the types, functions, applications, appearance, interfaces, and technical specifications of the xDSL/xPON interface card. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 25 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards 5.1 Introduction This section describes the cards supported by the AR routers, including card types, relationships between cards, the interface numbering scheme, and card dimensions. 5.1.1 Relationships Between Cards This section describes the relationships between the cards supported by the AR routers. NOTE l On the AR1200, the backplane is at the bottom of the chassis, and cards are installed on the backplane. l On the AR2220, the backplane is in the middle of the chassis, cards are installed on the rear side of the backplane, and a power supply module is installed on the front side of the backplane. l On the AR2240, the backplane is in the middle of the chassis, cards are installed on the front and rear sides of the backplane, and a power supply unit is installed on the front side of the backplane. l On the AR3260, the backplane is in the middle of the chassis, cards are installed on the front and rear sides of the backplane, and a power supply unit is installed on the front side of the backplane. Figure 5-1 and Figure 5-2 illustrates the relationships between the cards supported by the AR routers. NOTE l On the AR1200S, the backplane is at the bottom of the chassis, and cards are installed on the backplane. l On the AR2220S, the backplane is in the middle of the chassis, cards are installed on the rear side of the backplane, and a power supply module is installed on the front side of the backplane. Figure 5-1 Relationships between cards on the AR1200-S SRU Fan Service card Service card Power Backplane Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 26 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Figure 5-2 Relationships between cards on the AR2220-S Backplane Service card Service card SRU Fan Power 5.1.2 Interface Numbering This section describes the interface numbering scheme on the AR routers. On the AR routers, interfaces are numbered in the format of slot ID/subcard ID/interface sequence number. l Slot ID The slot ID specifies the ID of the slot where a card resides. The SRU of the AR1200-S and 2220-S is integrated with the chassis, so the slot ID is fixed as 0. When slots need to be combined into one slot, the greater slot ID is used as the new slot ID. For example, when slot 1 and slot 2 are combined, slot ID 2 is used as the new slot ID. l Subcard ID The subcard ID specifies the ID of a subcard. The cards of AR routers series routers do not support subcards. Therefore, the subcard ID of the AR routers is fixed as 0. l Interface sequence number The interface sequence number indicates the number of each interface on a card. There is only one row of interfaces on the interface card. These interfaces are numbered from left to right starting with 0. 0 1 2 3 There are two rows of interfaces on the interface card. These interfaces are numbered from bottom to top and left to right starting with 0. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 27 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards 1 0 3 2 5 4 7 6 9 8 11 10 5.1.3 Card Dimensions This section explains the conventions for measuring cards and lists the dimensions of SIC, WSIC, XSIC card. Figure 5-3 illustrates the dimensions of a card. Figure 5-3 Card dimensions description Height Width Depth NOTE The card dimensions are defined as follows:
l Depth: the distance between the handle and the end of Printed Circuit Board (PCB) l Width: the longest distance between the tops of two handles l Height: the height of the ejector lever Figure 5-4 shows the cards supported by the AR routers and Table 5-1 lists the card dimensions. Figure 5-4 Card appearances SIC WSIC XSIC Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 28 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Table 5-1 Card dimensions Card Type SIC card WSIC card XSIC card Dimensions (Depth x Width x Height) 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 3.94 in. x 0.78 in.) 223.5 mm x 201 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 7.92 in. x 0.78 in.) 223.5 mm x 201 mm x 40.14 mm (8.8 in. x 7.92 in. x 1.58 in.) 5.2 WLAN Subcard WLAN subcards are Wi-Fi modules. 5.2.1 Functions and Applications Functions l WLAN subcards provide Wi-Fi interfaces. Wi-Fi interfaces comply with IEEE 802.11n, 802.11g, and 802.11b, and each of these interfaces provides a maximum of 300 Mbit/s transmission rate. l WLAN subcards provide a high wireless performance and reliability, and large coverage scope using the multiple-input and multiple-output (MIMO) technology. l WLAN subcards support 64/128/152-bit WEP encryption, WPA/WPA2 encryption, and WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK encryption to provide secure data transmission. Applications A WLAN subcard has a dedicated WLAN slot on the AR routers. 5.2.2 Technical Specifications Table 5-2 describes the technical specifications of the WLAN subcard. Table 5-2 Technical specifications of the WLAN subcard Item Maximum power consumption Specification 7.24 W 5.3 Ethernet LAN Interface Card This section describes the types, functions, applications, appearance, interfaces, and technical specifications of the Ethernet LAN interface card. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 29 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards 5.3.1 8FE1GE-8-Port 100BASE-RJ45 and 1-Port 1000BASE-RJ45 L2/
L3 Ethernet Interface Card The 8FE1GE is the 8-port 100M+1-port 1000M Ethernet electrical interface card (RJ45). It implements the 9-channel Ethernet Layer 2 and Layer 3 switching functions. Functions and Applications Functions The 8FE1GE provides eight FE electrical interfaces and one GE electrical interface to implement data access and line-speed switching. l When category 5 twisted pairs (straight-through cables or crossover cables) are used, the maximum transmission distance is 100 meters. l When category 5 twisted pairs (straight-through cables or crossover cables) are used, 100 Mbit/s line-speed forwarding is supported between the eight FE interfaces. l The eight FE interfaces work at 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s, in auto-sensing mode. The GE interface works at 10/100/1000 Mbit/s, in auto-sensing mode. l These interfaces support the half duplex mode and full duplex mode. The full duplex mode is most commonly used. Applications The 8FE1GE can be installed into the WSIC slots of the AR1200-S and AR2220-S, On the AR1200-S, two SIC slots are combined into one WSIC slot. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-5 shows the appearance of the 8FE1GE. Figure 5-5 Appearance of the 8FE1GE 1 2 3 a b Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-3 describes the buttons and indicators on the 8FE1GE panel. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 30 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Table 5-3 Buttons and indicators on the 8FE1GE panel Indicator Color Description Number in Figure 5-5 1 STAT Green If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. Red Off Green Yellow 2 and 3 FE/GE interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator is in green. l The ACT indicator is in yellow. Interfaces Table 5-4 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 8FE1GE. Table 5-4 Types and functions of interfaces on the 8FE1GE Name Quan tity Description Cable Type 6.5 Network Cable 8 1 10BASE-TX/
100BASE-
TX electrical interface 1000BASE-T electrical interface The 8FE1GE provides eight FE electrical interfaces to transmit and receive FE services. The 8FE1GE provides one GE electrical interface to transmit and receive GE services. Letter in Figure 5-5 a b Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 31 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Interface Attributes 5 Cards Table 5-5 Attributes of 10BASE-TX/100BASE-TX electrical interfaces Item Connector type Description RJ45 Interface attribute MDI/MDIX NOTE l The interfaces of most network cards are medium dependent interfaces
(MDIs). l MDIX interfaces are usually used on hubs or LAN switches. IEEE802.3, IEEE802.3u, IEEE802.3ab Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, or Ethernet_SNAP IP Standards compliance Frame format Network layer protocol Table 5-6 Attributes of 1000BASE-T electrical interfaces Item Connector type Description RJ45 Interface attribute MDI/MDIX NOTE l The interfaces of most network cards are medium dependent interfaces
(MDIs). l MDIX interfaces are usually used on hubs or LAN switches. IEEE802.3, IEEE802.3u, IEEE802.3ab Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, or Ethernet_SNAP IP Standards compliance Frame format Network layer protocol Technical Specifications Table 5-7 describes the technical specifications of the 8FE1GE. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 32 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Table 5-7 Technical specifications of the 8FE1GE Item Dimensions
(depth x width x height) Specification 223.5 mm x 201 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 7.92 in. x 0.78 in.) Maximum power consumption 12.036 W Weight 0.6 kg (1.33 lb) 5.3.2 24GE-24-Port 1000BASE-RJ45 L2/L3 Ethernet Interface Card The 24GE is the 24-port 1000M Ethernet electrical interface card (RJ45). It implements the 24-
channel Ethernet Layer 2 and Layer 3 switching functions. Functions and Applications Functions The 24GE provides 24 GE electrical interfaces to implement data access and line-speed switching. l When category 5 twisted pairs (straight-through cables or crossover cables) are used, the maximum transmission distance is 100 meters. l When category 5 twisted pairs (straight-through cables or crossover cables) are used, 1000 Mbit/s line-speed forwarding is supported between the 24 GE interfaces. l These interfaces work in 10/100/1000 Mbit/s auto-sensing mode. l These interfaces support the half duplex mode and full duplex mode. The full duplex mode is most commonly used. Applications The 24GE can be installed into the XSIC slot on the AR2220-S. On the AR2220-S, two WSIC slots are combined into one XSIC slot. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-6 shows the appearance of the 24GE. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 33 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Figure 5-6 Appearance of the 24GE 5 Cards 2 2 3 2 3 1 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 2 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 a Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-8 describes the buttons and indicators on the 24GE panel. Table 5-8 Buttons and indicators on the 24GE panel Number in Figure 5-6 1 Indicator Color STAT Green Red Off Green LINK 2: indicators of interfaces in the second row 3: indicators of interfaces in the first row Interfaces Description If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, the link is not connected. Table 5-9 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 24GE. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 34 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Table 5-9 Types and functions of interfaces on the 24GE Letter in Figure 5-6 a Qua ntity 24 Name 1000BASE-
T electrical interface Description Cable Type The 24GE provides 24 GE electrical interfaces to transmit and receive GE services. 6.5 Network Cable Interface Attributes Table 5-10 Attributes of 1000BASE-T electrical interfaces Item Connector type Interface attribute Description RJ45 MDI/MDIX NOTE l The interfaces of most network cards are medium dependent interfaces
(MDIs). l MDIX interfaces are usually used on hubs or LAN switches. IEEE802.3, IEEE802.3u, IEEE802.3ab Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, or Ethernet_SNAP IP Standards compliance Frame format Network layer protocol Technical Specifications Table 5-11 describes the technical specifications of the 24GE. Table 5-11 Technical specifications of the 24GE Item Dimensions
(depth x width x height) Specification 223.50 mm x 201.00 mm x 40.14 mm (8.8 in. x 7.92 in. x 1.58 in.) Maximum power consumption 25 W Weight 0.85 kg (1.88 lb) Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 35 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards 5.4 WAN Interface Card This section describes the types, functions, applications, appearance, interfaces, and technical specifications of the WAN interface card. 5.4.1 1GEC (1-Port-GE Combo WAN Interface Card) 1GEC is a 1-port 1000M Ethernet optical and electrical Combo interface card (RJ45, SFP). Only one of the optical interface and electrical interface can be used at a time. 1GEC stands for:
l 1: one interface l GE: 1000M Ethernet l C: Combo interface Functions and Applications Functions The 1GEC provides one GE optical and electrical Combo interface to implement data access and line-speed switching. l The Combo interface sends, receives, and processes GE data traffic. l The electrical interface works at 10/100/1000 Mbit/s in auto-sensing mode. l The optical interface works at 100/1000 Mbit/s in auto-sensing mode. Applications The 1GEC is installed into the SIC slot of the AR1200-S and AR2220-S. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-7 shows the appearance of the 1GEC panel. Figure 5-7 Appearance of the 1GEC panel 1 2 3 4 5 a b Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-12 describes the buttons and indicators on the 1GEC panel. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 36 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Indicator Table 5-12 Buttons and indicators on the 1GEC panel Number in Figure 5-7 1 Color STAT Green Red Off Green Yellow Green Yellow 2 and 3 4 and 5 GE interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator is in green. l The ACT indicator is in yellow. SFP interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator is in green. l The ACT indicator is in yellow. Description If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. Interfaces Table 5-13 describes the types and functions of interface on the 1GEC. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 37 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Table 5-13 Types and functions of the interface on the 1GEC Description Cable Type The 1GEC provides one GE electrical interface to transmit and receive GE services. NOTE Only one of the optical interface and electrical interface can be used at a time. 6.5 Network Cable The 1GEC provides one GE optical interface to transmit and receive GE services. 6.6 Optical Fiber Qu ant ity 1 1 Name 1000BA SE-T electrica l interface 1000BA SE-X optical interface Lette r in Figur e 5-7 a b Interface Attributes Table 5-14 Attributes of 1000BASE-T electrical interfaces Item Connector type Interface attribute Description RJ45 MDI/MDIX NOTE l The interfaces of most network cards are medium dependent interfaces
(MDIs). l MDIX interfaces are usually used on hubs or LAN switches. IEEE802.3, IEEE802.3u, IEEE802.3ab Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, or Ethernet_SNAP IP Standards compliance Frame format Network layer protocol Table 5-15 Attributes of the SFP optical module (100/1000 Mbit/s) supported by the GE optical interface Description 500 m 10 km Attri bute Tran smiss ion dista nce 10 km (single-
mode bidirectional fiber) 40 km 40 km 80 km 100 km Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 38 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Description 850 nm 1310 nm Tx:
1310 nm Rx:
1490 nm Tx:
1490 nm Rx:
1310 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm 1550 nm 1550 nm
-9.5 dBm to
-2.5 dBm
-9.0 dBm to
-3.0 dBm
-9.0 dBm to
-3.0 dBm
-9.0 dBm to
-3.0 dBm
-5.0 dBm to 0 dBm
-5.0 dBm to 0 dBm
-2.0 dBm to 5.0 dBm 0 dBm to 5 dBm
-17.0 dBm
-20.0 dBm
-19.5 dBm
-19.5 dBm
-23 dBm
-22 dBm
-23.0 dBm
-30.0 dBm 0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-9.0 dBm 9 dB 9 dB 6 dB 6 dB 9 dB 8.5 dB 9 dB 8 dB Multi-
mode Single-mode Attri bute Cent er wave lengt h Tran smitt ing powe r Rece iver sensi tivity Over load optic al powe r Extin ction ratio Fiber type Technical Specifications Table 5-16 describes the technical specifications of the 1GEC. Table 5-16 Technical specifications of the 1GEC Item Dimensions
(depth x width x height) Maximum power consumption Specification 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 3.94 in. x 0.78 in.) 2.28 W Weight 0.25 kg (0.55 lb) Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 39 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards 5.4.2 2FE-2-Port-FE WAN Interface Card The 2FE is the 2-port 100M Ethernet electrical interface card (RJ45). Functions and Applications Functions The 2FE provides two FE electrical interfaces to implement data access and line-speed switching. l When category 5 twisted pairs (straight-through cables or crossover cables) are used, the maximum transmission distance is 100 meters. l Two FE electrical interfaces can be bound to function as an upstream interface at the line rate of 200 Mbit/s. l The two FE interfaces work in 10/100 Mbit/s auto-sensing mode. l These interfaces support the half duplex mode and full duplex mode. The full duplex mode is most commonly used. Applications The 2FE can be installed into the SIC slot of the AR1200-S, AR2220-S. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-8 shows the appearance of the 2FE. Figure 5-8 Appearance of the 2FE 1 2 3 a Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-17 describes the buttons and indicators on the 2FE panel. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 40 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Table 5-17 Buttons and indicators on the 2FE panel Number in Figure 5-8 1 Indicator Color STAT Green Red Off Green Yellow 2 and 3 FE interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator is in green. l The ACT indicator is in yellow. Description If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. Interfaces Table 5-18 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 2FE. Name Table 5-18 Types and functions of interfaces on the 2FE Letter Description in Figure 5-8 a Qua ntit y 2 FE electrical interface The 2FE provides two FE electrical interfaces to transmit and receive FE services. Cable Type 6.5 Network Cable Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 41 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Interface Attributes 5 Cards Table 5-19 Attributes of 10BASE-TX/100BASE-TX electrical interfaces Item Connector type Description RJ45 Interface attribute MDI/MDIX NOTE l The interfaces of most network cards are medium dependent interfaces
(MDIs). l MDIX interfaces are usually used on hubs or LAN switches. IEEE802.3, IEEE802.3u, IEEE802.3ab Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, or Ethernet_SNAP IP Standards compliance Frame format Network layer protocol Technical Specifications Table 5-20 describes the technical specifications of the 2FE. Table 5-20 Technical specifications of the 2FE Item Dimensions
(depth x width x height) Specification 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 3.94 in. x 0.78 in.) Maximum power consumption 3.01 W Weight 0.3 kg (0.66 lb) 5.4.3 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M-1/2 Port-Channelized E1/T1/PRI/VE1 Multifunctional Interface Card The 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M is the E1/T1/PRI/VE1 processing unit on the AR routers and provides one or two E1/T1/PRI/VE1 interfaces. Primary Rate Interface (PRI) indicates ISDN primary rate interfaces. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 42 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards NOTE l 1/2: indicates one or two interfaces. l E1: indicates E1 interfaces. l T1: indicates T1 interfaces. l M: indicates multiflex trunks. l VE1: indicates voice E1 interfaces. Table 5-21 lists the number of interfaces on the 1E1T1-M and 2E1T1-M. Table 5-21 Number of interfaces on the 1E1T1-M and 2E1T1-M Card Name 1E1T1-M 2E1T1-M Quantity of Interfaces 1 2 2E1T1-M cards have two types: SIC and WSIC. Table 5-22 lists the slots where the SIC card and WSIC card are installed. Table 5-22 Slots of 2E1T1-M SIC and WSIC cards Card 2E1T1-M (SIC) 2E1T1-M (WSIC) Slot SIC slot WSIC slot or XSIC slot NOTE In an XSIC slot, the WSIC card is installed in the lower part of the slot. The WSIC card uses the XSIC slot ID as its own slot ID. Functions and Applications Functions The 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M provides the following functions:
l Sends, receives, and processes E1/T1 data traffic. l Provides CE1/T1 access. l Provides the ISDN PRI function. Applications 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M(SIC) can be installed into the SIC slot of the AR1200-S and AR2220-S. 2E1T1-M(WSIC) is installed in a WSIC or XSIC slot on the AR2220-S. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 43 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Panel and Interfaces 5 Cards Figure 5-9 shows the appearance of the 1E1T1-M. Figure 5-9 Appearance of the 1E1T1-M 1 2 a Figure 5-10 shows the appearance of the 2E1T1-M (SIC). Figure 5-10 Appearance of the 2E1T1-M (SIC) 1 2 a Figure 5-11 shows the appearance of the 2E1T1-M (WSIC). Figure 5-11 Appearance of the 2E1T1-M (WSIC) 1 2 a Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-23 describes the buttons and indicators on the 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M panel. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 44 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Indicator Table 5-23 Buttons and indicators on the 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M panel Number in Figure 5-9, Figure 5-10, Figure 5-11 1 Color STAT Green Description If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. Red Off 2 LINK/ACT Green Yellow (The indicator is in green and blinks red.) Off If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is in green and blinks red, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, there is no connection. Interfaces Table 5-24 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M. Quantity Nam e Table 5-24 Types and functions of interfaces on the 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M Letter in Cable Type Figure 5-9, Figure 5-10, Figure 5-11 a Description DB9 6.7 E1/T1 Trunk Cables 1E1T1-M: 1 2E1T1-M: 2 75-ohm or 120-
ohm E1 cable or 100-ohm T1 cable Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 45 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Interface Attributes 5 Cards Table 5-25 Attributes of channelized E1 interfaces Attribute Connector type Description DB9 Standards compliance G.703 or G.704 Transmission rate 2.048 Mbit/s Cable type E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable E1 120-ohm balanced twisted pair cable E1 trunk cable extension Working mode CE1, ISDN PRI, or VE1 Function Backup Terminal access ISDN PRI Table 5-26 Attributes of channelized T1 interfaces Attribute Connector type Description DB9 Standards compliance G.703 or G.704 Transmission rate 1.544 Mbit/s Cable type T1 100-ohm coaxial cable Working mode CT1, ISDN PRI, or VT1 Function Backup Terminal access ISDN PRI Technical Specifications Table 5-27 describes the technical specifications of the 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 46 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Table 5-27 Technical specifications of the 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M Item Dimensions
(depth x width x height) Specification 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M (SIC): 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 3.94 in. x 0.78 in.) 2E1T1-M (WSIC): 223.5 mm x 201 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 7.92 in. x 0.78 in.) Maximum power consumption 7 W Weight 0.3 kg (0.66 lb) 5.4.4 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F (1/2-Port-Fractional Channelized E1/T1 WAN Interface Card) The 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F is the E1/T1 processing unit on the AR routers and provides one or two E1/T1 interfaces. NOTE 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F stands for:
l 1/2: one or two interfaces l E1: E1 interface l T1: T1 interface l F: fractional E1 Table 5-28 lists the number of interfaces on the 1E1T1-F and 2E1T1-F. Table 5-28 Number of interfaces on the 1E1T1-F and 2E1T1-F Card Name 1E1T1-F Quantity of Interfaces 1 2E1T1-F 2 Functions and Applications Functions The 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F sends, receives, and processes E1/T1 data traffic. Table 5-29 describes the differences in functions provided by the 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F and 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 47 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Table 5-29 Differences in functions provided by the 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F and 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-
M Whether to Support the PRI Mode No Card Name 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F Fractional E1 Mode Timeslots of an E1/T1 interface can only be bundled into one channel at a rate of n x 64 kbit/s (n specifies the number of bundled timeslots and ranges from 1 to 31). 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M Timeslots of an E1/T1 interface can be bundled into multiple channels. Yes Applications The 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F is installed into the SIC slot of the AR1200-S and AR2220-S. Panel and Interfaces The 1E1T1-F and 1E1T1-M panels are identical except for having different silkscreens. Figure 5-9 shows the appearance of the 1E1T1-F panel. The 2E1T1-F and 2E1T1-M panels are identical except for having different silkscreens. Figure 5-10 shows the appearance of the 2E1T1-F panel. Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-23 describes the buttons and indicators on the 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F panel. Interfaces Table 5-24 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F. Interface Attributes Table 5-30 Attributes of unchannelized E1 interfaces Attribute Connector type Standards compliance Description DB9 G.703 or G.704 Transmission rate 2.048 Mbit/s Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 48 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Attribute Cable type Description E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable E1 120-ohm balanced twisted pair cable E1 trunk cable extension Working mode Unchannelized E1 Function Backup Terminal access Table 5-31 Attributes of unchannelized T1 interfaces Attribute Connector type Description DB9 Standards compliance G.703 or G.704 Transmission rate 1.544 Mbit/s Cable type T1 100-ohm coaxial cable Working mode Unchannelized T1 Function Backup Terminal access Technical Specifications Table 5-32 describes the technical specifications of the 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F. Table 5-32 Technical specifications of the 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F Item Dimensions
(depth x width x height) Specification 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 3.94 in. x 0.78 in.) Maximum power consumption 7 W Weight 0.3 kg (0.66 lb) Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 49 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards 5.4.5 1SA/2SA-1/2-Port-Synchronous/Asynchronous WAN Interface Card The 1SA/2SA is the 1-port/2-port synchronous/asynchronous serial interface module on the AR routers. NOTE l 1/2: indicates one interface or two interfaces. l S: indicates synchronous serial interface. l A: indicates asynchronous serial interface. Table 5-33 lists the number of interfaces on the 1SA and 2SA. Table 5-33 Number of interfaces on the 1SA and 2SA Quantity of Interfaces 1 2 Card Name 1SA 2SA Functions and Applications Functions The 1SA/2SA provides the following functions:
l A synchronous serial interface can function as a DCE or DTE. It supports multiple physical layer protocols, such as V.24, V.35, and X.21, but does not support X.21 DCE. The maximum rate of V.24 is 64 kbit/s and V.35 is 2.048 Mbit/s. l An asynchronous serial interface supports the RS232 protocol and provides a maximum transmission rate of 115.2 kbit/s. l The 1SA/2SA provides system management channels by using in-band GE channels and implements in-service upgrade by using system management channels. l The system powers on or off the 1SA/2SA and monitors the current of the 1SA/2SA; the backplane provides 12 V voltage for the 1SA/2SA. l The 1SA/2SA is hot swappable. Applications 1SA/2SA can be installed into the SIC slot of the AR1200-S, and AR2220-S. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-12 shows the appearance of the 1SA. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 50 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Figure 5-12 Appearance of the 1SA 1 2 3 a Figure 5-13 shows the appearance of the 2SA. Figure 5-13 Appearance of the 2SA 1 2 3 2 3 a Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-34 describes the buttons and indicators on the 1SA/2SA panel. Table 5-34 Buttons and indicators on the 1SA/2SA panel Numbe r in Figure 5-12 and Figure 5-13 1 Indicator Color Description STAT Green Red If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 51 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Numbe r in Figure 5-12 and Figure 5-13 2 and 3 Indicator Color Description Off Green Yellow Synchronous/
Asynchronous serial interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator is in green. l The ACT indicator is in yellow. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the LINK indicator is off, the link is not connected. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the ACT indicator is off, no data is transmitted or received. Interfaces Table 5-35 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 1SA/2SA. Name Quantity Description Table 5-35 Types and functions of interfaces on the 1SA/2SA Lett er in Figu re 5-12 and Figu re 5-13 a DB28 1SA: 1 2SA: 2 The synchronous/
asynchronous serial interface cable is selected according to attributes of the connected line. Cable Type 6.8 Synchronous/
Asynchronous Serial Interface Cables Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 52 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Interface Attributes 5 Cards Table 5-36 Attributes of synchronous/asynchronous serial interfaces Attribute Description Synchronous Serial Interface Connector type Standards compliance and working mode DB28 l V.24 DTE l V.24 DCE l V.35 DTE l V.35 DCE l X.21 DTE l RS449 DTE l RS449 DCE l RS530 DTE l RS530 DCE Asynchronous Serial Interface RS232 Minimum baud rate (bit/
s) Maximum baud rate (bit/
s) Cable type 1200 64 k 1200 600 2.048 M 115.2 k l V.24 DTE cable l V.24 DCE cable l V.35 DTE cable l V.35 DCE cable l X.21 DTE cable l RS449 DTE cable l RS449 DCE cable l RS530 DTE cable l RS530 DCE cable Function DDN leased line Terminal access l Modem dial-up l Backup l Asynchronous leased line l Terminal access Technical Specifications Table 5-37 describes the technical specifications of the 1SA/2SA. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 53 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Table 5-37 Technical specifications of the 1SA/2SA Item Dimensions
(Depth x Width x Height) Specification 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 3.94 in. x 0.78 in.) Maximum power consumption Weight l 1SA: 10 W l 2SA: 11.7 W 0.3 kg (0.66 lb) 5.4.6 8AS (8-Port-Asynchronous WAN Interface Card) The 8AS is an 8-port asynchronous serial interface module on the AR routers. NOTE 8AS stands for:
l 8: eight interfaces l AS: asynchronous serial interface Functions and Applications Functions The 8AS sends, receives, and processes asynchronous data traffic. l Supports a maximum of 115.2 kbit/s transmission rate for each asynchronous serial interface. l Supports terminal access and asynchronous leased lines. l Functions as a dialup access server for small and medium-sized ISPs when asynchronous serial interfaces are used for dialup. Applications The 8AS is installed into the WSIC slot of the AR1200-S and AR2220-S. On the AR1200-S, a WSIC slot consists of two SIC slots. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-14 shows the appearance of the 8AS panel. Figure 5-14 Appearance of the 8AS panel 1 2 a Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 54 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-38 describes the buttons and indicators on the 8AS panel. 5 Cards Table 5-38 Buttons and indicators on the 8AS panel Number in Figure 5-14 1 Indicator Color STAT Green Red Off Green LINK
(interface status indicator) 2 Description If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. Interfaces Table 5-39 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 8AS. Name Quant Table 5-39 Types and functions of interfaces on the 8AS Letter in Figure 5-14 a Description RJ45 ity 8 Interfaces on the 8AS send, receive, and process asynchronous data traffic using customized RJ45 cables. Cable Type 6.12 8AS Cable Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 55 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Interface Attributes Table 5-40 Attributes of asynchronous serial interfaces 5 Cards Attribute Connector type Standards compliance and working mode Minimum baud rate (bit/s) Maximum baud rate (bit/s) Cable type Function Description RJ45 RS232 300 115.2 k Customized RJ45 cable l Modem dial-up l Backup l Asynchronous leased line l Terminal access Technical Specifications Table 5-41 describes the technical specifications of the 8AS. Table 5-41 Technical specifications of the 8AS Item Dimensions
(depth x width x height) Maximum power consumption Specification 223.5 mm x 201 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 7.92 in. x 0.78 in.) 8.9 W Weight 0.6 kg (1.32 lb) 5.4.7 1BST (1-Port-ISDN S/T WAN Interface Card) The 1BST is the ISDN module on the AR routers and provides one ISDN S/T interface, which transmits data services. The 1BST transmits, receives, and processes 1-channel ISDN BRI S/T data flow. Functions and Applications Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 56 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Functions 5 Cards The 1BST provides one ISDN S/T interface for data access. The 1BST consists of the following modules:
l CPU control module: manages the system and loads programs. l CPLD logic module: provides the working clock and reset signals for the chip, controls the service port status, and monitors the board clock. l ISDN chip module: provides S/T interface access, supports TE mode, and provides parallel interfaces and serial interfaces. l Power supply module: conducts power from backplane to card. l Clock module: provides the working clock for the CPU and working modules. Applications The 1BST is installed into the SIC slot of the AR1200-S and AR2220-S. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-15 shows the appearance of the 1BST panel. Figure 5-15 Appearance of the 1BST panel 21 3 a Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-42 describes the buttons and indicators on the 1BST panel. Table 5-42 Buttons and indicators on the 1BST panel Number in Figure 5-15 1 Indicator Color Description STAT Green If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 57 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Number in Figure 5-15 Indicator Color Description Red Off Green ACT (interface status indicator) B1/B2 Green If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, the ISDN channel is activated. If the indicator is off, the ISDN channel is deactivated. If the indicator is blinking, the B1/
B2 channel of the ISDN channel is being occupied. If the indicator is off, the B1/B2 channel of the ISDN channel is idle. 2 3 Interfaces Table 5-43 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 1BST. Table 5-43 Types and functions of interfaces on the 1BST Name Quantity Description Cable Type RJ45 1 ISDN S/T interfaces are provided. 6.10 ISDN-ST Cables Letter in Figure 5-15 a Interface Attributes Table 5-44 ISDN S/T interface attributes Item Connector Description RJ45 Standards compliance ITU-T I.430, Q.921, Q.931 Rate Bandwidth 192 kbit/s 0 to 100 MHz Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 58 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Item Cable Technical Specifications Description l TE: standard ISDN S/T interface cables (straight-
through cables) l NT: ISDN S/T interface crossover cables Table 5-45 describes the technical specifications of the 1BST. Table 5-45 Technical specifications of the 1BST Item Dimensions
(depth x width x height) Specification 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 3.94 in. x 0.78 in.) Maximum power consumption 12 W Weight 0.3 kg (0.66 lb) 5.4.8 1CPOS-155M (1-Port Channelized POS Interface Card) 1CPOS-155M provides an STM-1/OC3 optical interface to implement 63-channel E1 or 84-
channel T1 transmission in compliance with SDH/SONET. NOTE 1CPOS-155M stands for:
l 1: one interface l C: channelized l POS: Packet Over SDH/SONET l 155M: a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s Functions and Applications Functions 1CPOS-155M has the following functions:
l Supports clear channel (unframed) E1, non-channelized (framed) E1, and channelized CE1. l Supports non-channelized (framed) T1 and channelized CT1. l Supports the link layer protocols such as HDLC and PPP and a maximum of 1024 HDLC channels. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 59 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards l Supports four SFP optical module types: short-distance multi-mode (1310 nm), mid-
distance single-mode (1310 nm), long-distance single-mode (1310 nm), and ultra-long-
distance single-mode (1550 nm). l Automatically starts and loads configurations after being powered on, provides the system management function using a GE inband channel, and uses the UART serial interface as the escape channel for subcard. l Uses the 12 V power provided by the backplane, be powered on and off by the main control board, and monitors voltage and current. l Be hot swappable. Applications 1CPOS-155M can be installed in a SIC slot of AR2220-S. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-16 shows the appearance of the 1CPOS-155M. Figure 5-16 Appearance of the 1CPOS-155M 1 2 3 a Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-46 describes the buttons and indicators on the 1CPOS-155M panel. Table 5-46 Buttons and indicators on the 1CPOS-155M panel Number in Figure 5-16 1 Indicator Color Description STAT Green Red If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 60 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Number in Figure 5-16 Indicator Color Description Off Green LINK ACT Yellow If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. 2 3 Interfaces Table 5-47 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 1CPOS-155M. Table 5-47 Types and functions of interfaces on the 1CPOS-155M Letter in Figure 5-16 a Quantit y 1 Name SFP optical interface Description Cable Type 6.6 Optical Fiber The 1CPOS-155M provides one SFP optical interface to transmit and receive SDH/
SONET frames. Interface Attributes Table 5-48 CPOS interface attributes Attribute Connector type Description LC/PC Optical interface attribute Standards compliance Depending on the SFP optical module STM-1 Frame format SDH/SONET Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 61 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Description IP Attribute Network layer protocol Table 5-49 Attributes of the SFP optical module supported by the CPOS interface Attribute Transmissio n distance Description 2 km 15 km 40 km 80 km Center wavelength 1310 nm 1310 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm Transmittin g power
-19.0 dBm to
-14.0 dBm
-15.0 dBm to 8.0 dBm
-15.0 dBm to 8.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm to 0 dBm Receiver sensitivity Overload optical power Extinction ratio
-28.0 dBm
-23.0 dBm
-23.0 dBm
-32.98 dBm
-14.0 dBm
-10.17 dBm
-8.0 dBm
-8.0 dBm
>10.0 dB 58.86 dB 14.08 dB 43.09 dB Fiber type Multimode Single-mode Technical Specifications Table 5-50 describes the technical specifications of the 1CPOS-155M. Table 5-50 Technical specifications of the 1CPOS-155M Item Dimensions
(depth x width x height) Specification 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 3.94 in. x 0.78 in.) Maximum power consumption 12 W Weight 0.3 kg (0.66 lb) 5.4.9 3G-HSPA+7 (3G WAN Interface Card) A 3G-HSPA+7 interface card provides two 3G antenna interfaces and one mini USB interface. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 62 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Functions and Applications Functions Applications The 3G-HSPA+7 interface card provides WAN access through WCDMA. The 3G-HSPA+7 interface card can be installed in the SIC slot on the AR1200-S and AR2220-
S chassis. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-17 shows the appearance of the 3G-HSPA+7 interface card. Figure 5-17 3G-HSPA+7 panel 1 2 3 4 a b a Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 63 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-51 describes the buttons and indicators on the 3G-HSPA+7 panel. 5 Cards Indicator Table 5-51 Buttons and indicators on the 3G-HSPA+7 panel Number in Figure 5-17 1 Color STAT Green Description If the indicator is steady on, the router has been powered on, but the system software is not running. If the indicator blinks once every 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once every 0.25s
(4 Hz), the system is loading software after power-on or is restarting. Red Orange Green 3G 2G Green 2 3 If the indicator is steady on, a fault that affects services has occurred and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, the 3G signal strength is high. If the indicator blinks once every 2s (0.5 Hz), the 3G signals strength is low. If the indicator blinks once every 0.25s
(4 Hz), the 3G signals strength is medium. If the indicator is steady on, the 2G signal strength is high. If the indicator blinks once every 2s (0.5 Hz), the 2G signals strength is low. If the indicator blinks once every 0.25s
(4 Hz), the 2G signals strength is medium. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 64 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Number in Figure 5-17 4 Indicator Color Description WWAN Green If the indicator is steady on, the 3G/2G connection is being established or is active. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received over the 3G/2G connection. If the indicator is off, the 3G/2G connection has not been established or is inactive. Interfaces Table 5-52 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 3G-HSPA+7 interface card. Name Description Table 5-52 Types and functions of interfaces on the 3G-HSPA+7 interface card Lette r in Figu re 5-17 a Qu ant ity 2 3G antenna Cable Type Antenna interface The 3G-HSPA+7 interface card provides two 3G interfaces to transmit and receive 3G service data. One interface is the primary interface, and the other is the secondary interface. The mini USB interface is used to commission the 3G module. Mini USB cable 1 Mini USB interface b Interface Attributes Table 5-53 3G interface attributes Item Connector Description SMA RF: connects to an antenna to provide wireless access. mini USB: connects to a USB flash drive with third-party wireless network test software, for example, Qualcomm CAIT. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 65 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Item Standards compliance and frequency bands supported Rate Description GSM/GPRS/EDGE: 850/900/1800/1900 (MHz) HSPA+/HSUPA/HSDPA/WCDMA: 2100/1900/900/850 (MHz) GSM CS:
l Upstream (Tx): 9.6kbit/s l Downstream (Rx): 9.6kbit/s GPRS/EDGE: Multi-slot Class 12, Class B WCDMA CS:
l Upstream (Tx): 64 kbit/s l Downstream (Rx): 64 kbit/s WCDMA PS:
l Upstream (Tx): 384 kbit/s l Downstream (Rx): 384 kbit/s HSPA:
l Upstream (Tx): 5.76 Mbit/s l Downstream (Rx): 14.4 Mbit/s HSPA+:
l Upstream (Tx): 5.76 Mbit/s l Downstream (Rx): 21 Mbit/s Network protocol WCDMA/HSPA/GPRS/EDGE Installing a 3G SIM Card For details on how to installing a 3G SIM card on the 3G-HSPA+7 interface card, see the AR1200&2200&3200 Quick Installation Guide. Technical Specifications Table 5-54 describes the technical specifications of the 3G-HSPA+7 interface card. Table 5-54 Technical specifications of the 3G-HSPA+7 Parameter Dimensions (W x D x H) Maximum power consumption Weight Description 100.1 mm x 223.5 mm x 19.82 mm 7 W 0.2 kg Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 66 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards 5.4.10 4GEW-T (4-Port-GE Electrical WAN Interface Card) The 4GEW-T interface card provides four GE electrical interfaces. 4GEW-T stands for:
l 4: four interfaces l GE: 1000M Ethernet l W: WAN l T: electrical interface Functions and Applications Functions The 4GEW-T interface card provides four GE electrical interfaces to implement data access and line-speed switching. The 4GEW-T interface card sends, receives, and processes GE data traffic. The four GE electrical interfaces work in 10/100/1000 Mbit/s auto-negotiation mode. Applications The 4GEW-T interface card can be installed in the WSIC slot on the AR1200-S and AR2220-
S chassis. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-18 shows the appearance of the 4GEW-T interface card. Figure 5-18 4GEW-T panel 3 1 2 2 3 2 3 2 3 a Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-55 describes the buttons and indicators on the 4GEW-T panel. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 67 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Table 5-55 Buttons and indicators on the 4GEW-T panel Indicator Color Description Number in Figure 5-18 1 STAT Green If the indicator is steady on, the router has been powered on, but the system software is not running. If the indicator blinks once every 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once every 0.25s
(4 Hz), the system is loading software after power-on or is restarting. If the indicator is steady on, a fault that affects services has occurred and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. If the indicator is blinking, the interface is transmitting or receiving data. If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. Red Off Green Yellow 2 and 3 GE interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator is in green. l The ACT indicator is in yellow. Interfaces Table 5-56 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 4GEW-T interface card. Table 5-56 Types and functions of interfaces on the 4GEW-T interface card Lette r in Figur e 5-18 a Qu ant ity 4 Name 1000BA SE-T electrica l interface Description Cable Type The 4GEW-T interface card provides four 1000M electrical interfaces to transmit and receive GE data traffic. 6.5 Network Cable Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 68 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Interface Attributes Table 5-57 Attributes of 1000BASE-T electrical interfaces Item Connector type Interface attribute Description RJ45 MDI/MDIX NOTE l The interfaces of most network cards are medium dependent interfaces
(MDIs). l MDIX interfaces are usually used on hubs or LAN switches. IEEE802.3, IEEE802.3u, IEEE802.3ab Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, or Ethernet_SNAP IP Standards compliance Frame format Network layer protocol Technical Specifications Table 5-58 describes the technical specifications of the 4GEW-T interface card. Table 5-58 Technical specifications of the 4GEW-T Parameter Dimensions (W x D x H) Maximum power consumption Weight Description 201 mm x 223.5 mm x 19.82 mm 11 W 0.3 kg 5.4.11 4GEW-S (4-Port-GE Optical WAN Interface Card The 4GEW-S interface card provides four GE optical interfaces. 4GEW-S stands for:
l 4: four interfaces l GE: 1000M Ethernet l W: WAN l S: optical interface Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 69 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Functions and Applications 5 Cards Functions Applications The 4GEW-S interface card provides four GE optical interfaces to implement data access and line-speed switching. The 4GEW-S interface card sends, receives, and processes GE data traffic. The four GE optical interfaces work in 100/1000 Mbit/s auto-sensing mode. The 4GEW-S interface card can be installed in the WSIC slot on the AR1200-S and AR2220-
S chassis. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-19 shows the appearance of the 4GEW-S interface card. Figure 5-19 4GEW-S panel 1 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 a Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-59 describes the buttons and indicators on the 4GEW-S panel. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 70 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Indicator Table 5-59 Buttons and indicators on the 4GEW-S panel Number in Figure 5-19 1 Color STAT Green Description If the indicator is steady on, the router has been powered on, but the system software is not running. If the indicator blinks once every 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once every 0.25s
(4 Hz), the system is loading software after power-on or is restarting. Red Off Green Yellow If the indicator is steady on, a fault that affects services has occurred and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. If the indicator is blinking, the interface is transmitting or receiving data. If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. 2 and 3 GE interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator is in green. l The ACT indicator is in yellow. Interfaces Table 5-60 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 4GEW-S interface card. Name Description Table 5-60 Types and functions of interfaces on the 4GEW-S interface card Lette r in Figur e 5-19 a Qu ant ity 4 The 4GEW-S interface card provides four GE optical interfaces to transmit and receive GE service traffic. 1000BA SE-X optical interface Cable Type 6.6 Optical Fiber Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 71 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Interface Attributes 5 Cards Table 5-61 Attributes of the 100/1000BASE-X GE optical interface Attribute Connector type Description LC/PC Optical interface attribute Standards compliance Depending on the SFP optical module. IEEE 802.3ab Frame format Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, or Ethernet_SNAP Network layer protocol IP Description Table 5-62 Attributes of the SFP optical module (100/1000 Mbit/s) supported by the GE optical interface Attri bute Tran smiss ion dista nce 10 km (single-
mode bidirectional fiber) 100 km 500 m 10 km 40 km 40 km 80 km 850 nm 1310 nm Tx:
1310 nm Rx:
1490 nm Tx:
1490 nm Rx:
1310 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm 1550 nm 1550 nm
-9.5 dBm to
-2.5 dBm
-9.0 dBm to
-3.0 dBm
-9.0 dBm to
-3.0 dBm
-9.0 dBm to
-3.0 dBm
-5.0 dBm to 0 dBm
-5.0 dBm to 0 dBm
-2.0 dBm to 5.0 dBm 0 dBm to 5 dBm
-17.0 dBm
-20.0 dBm
-19.5 dBm
-19.5 dBm
-23 dBm
-22 dBm
-23.0 dBm
-30.0 dBm Cent er wave lengt h Tran smitt ing powe r Rece iver sensi tivity Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 72 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Description 0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-9.0 dBm 9 dB 9 dB 6 dB 6 dB 9 dB 8.5 dB 9 dB 8 dB Multi-
mode Single-mode Attri bute Over load optic al powe r Extin ction ratio Fiber type Technical Specifications Table 5-63 describes the technical specifications of the 4GEW-S interface card. Table 5-63 Technical specifications of the 4GEW-S Parameter Dimensions (W x D x H) Maximum power consumption Weight Description 201 mm x 223.5 mm x 19.82 mm 8 W 0.3 kg 5.5 Voice Interface Card This section describes the types, functions, applications, appearance, interfaces, and technical specifications of the voice interface card. 5.5.1 2BST (2-Port-ISDN S/T Voice Interface Card) The 2BST is the ISDN module on the AR routers and provides two ISDN S/T interfaces, which transmit voice service. The 2BST implements the ISDN BRI function and provides the bandwidth of two B channels and one D channel:
l B channel: provides 64 kbit/s bandwidth and transmits voice service. l D channel: is a signaling channel and provides 16 kbit/s bandwidth. l The total bandwidth of two B channels and one D channel is 144 kbit/s. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 73 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards The S/T interface on the 2BST provides a rate of 192 kbit/s, including 144 kbit/s for data transmission and 48 kbit/s for maintenance information transmission. Table 5-64 lists the number of interfaces on the 1BST and 2BST. Table 5-64 Number of interfaces on the 1BST and 2BST User Interface One S/T interface Two S/T interfaces Usage Scenario Data services Mode TE Feed Supported No Voice services NT
-40 V feed Card Name 1BST 2BST NOTE l TE: terminal equipment l NT: network termination 2BST cards have two types: SIC and WSIC. Table 5-65 lists the slots where the SIC card and WSIC card are installed. Table 5-65 Slots of 2BST SIC and WSIC cards Slot SIC slot WSIC slot or XSIC slot NOTE In an XSIC slot, the WSIC card is installed in the lower part of the slot. The WSIC card uses the XSIC slot ID as its own slot ID. Card 2BST (SIC) 2BST (WSIC) Functions and Applications Functions The 2BST has the following functions:
l Provides two ISDN S/T interfaces for voice access. l Implements NT mode. The 2BST consists of the following modules:
l CPU control module: manages the system and loads programs. l CPLD logic module: provides the working clock and reset signals for the chip, controls the line -40 V feed, controls the service port status, and monitors the board clock. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 74 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards l ISDN chip module: provides S/T interface access, supports NT mode, and provides parallel interfaces and serial interfaces. l Power supply module: conducts power from backplane to card. l Clock module: provides the working clock for the CPU and working modules. Applications 2BST (SIC) is installed into the SIC slot of the AR2220-S. The 2BST (WSIC) is installed in a WSIC slot on the AR2220-S. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-20 shows the appearance of the 2BST (SIC) panel. Figure 5-20 Appearance of the 2BST (SIC) panel 1 2 3 2 3 a Figure 5-21 shows the appearance of the 2BST (WSIC). Figure 5-21 Appearance of the 2BST (WSIC) panel 1 2 3 2 3 a Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-66 describes the buttons and indicators on the 2BST panel. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 75 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Table 5-66 Buttons and indicators on the 2BST panel Number in Figure 5-20, Figure 5-21 1 Indicator Color STAT Green Red Off Green ACT (interface status indicator) B1/B2 Green 2 3 Description If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, the ISDN channel is activated. If the indicator is off, the ISDN channel is deactivated. If the indicator is blinking, the B1/
B2 channel of the ISDN channel is being occupied. If the indicator is off, the B1/B2 channel of the ISDN channel is idle. Interfaces Table 5-67 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 2BST. Name Quantity Description Table 5-67 Types and functions of interfaces on the 2BST Letter in Figure 5-20, Figure 5-21 a RJ45 2 ISDN S/T interfaces are provided. Cable Type 6.10 ISDN-ST Cables Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 76 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Interface Attributes 5 Cards Table 5-68 ISDN S/T interface attributes Item Connector Description RJ45 Standards compliance ITU-T I.430, Q.921, Q.931 Rate Bandwidth Cable Technical Specifications 192 kbit/s 0 to 100 MHz l TE: standard ISDN S/T interface cables (straight-
through cables) l NT: ISDN S/T interface crossover cables Table 5-69 describes the technical specifications of the 2BST. Table 5-69 Technical specifications of the 2BST Item Dimensions
(depth x width x height) Specification 2BST (SIC): 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 3.94 in. x 0.78 in.) 2BST (WSIC): 223.5 mm x 201 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 7.92 in. x 0.78 in.) Maximum power consumption 16.8 W Weight 0.3 kg (0.66 lb) 5.5.2 4FXS1FXO-4-Port FXS and 1-Port FXO Voice Interface Card The 4FXS1FXO is the voice module on the AR routers. It provides five RJ11 interfaces, including four POTS FXS interfaces and one POTS FXO interface. NOTE l An FXS interface is a simulated subscriber line interface and provides access to AT0 loop trunk of the analog phone, fax, and telephone exchange. l An FXO interface is a loop trunk interface and provides access to the telephone exchange by using regular subscriber lines. Functions and Applications Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 77 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Functions Applications The 4FXS1FXO works with the SRU to implement the voice call function. The first FXS interface works with an FXO interface to implement the power failure survival function. The 4FXS1FXO can be installed into the SIC slot of the AR2220-S. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-22 shows the appearance of the 4FXS1FXO. Figure 5-22 Appearance of the 4FXS1FXO a 1 2 3 Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-70 describes the buttons and indicators on the 4FXS1FXO panel. Table 5-70 Buttons and indicators on the 4FXS1FXO panel Indicator Color Description Number in Figure 5-22 1 STAT Green If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, the FXO channel is being occupied by a call. Red Off Green 2 ACT (interface status indicator) Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 78 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Number in Figure 5-22 Indicator Color Description ACT (interface status indicator) Green If the indicator is off, the FXO channel is idle. If the indicator is steady on, the FXS channel is being occupied by a call. If the indicator is off, the FXS channel is idle. 3 Interfaces Table 5-71 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 4FXS1FXO. Table 5-71 Types and functions of interfaces on the 4FXS1FXO Letter in Figure 5-22 a Name Qua ntity Description Cable Type FXS (RJ11) FXO (RJ11) 4 1 The POTS voice FXS interface uses regular telephone lines. The POTS voice FXO interface uses regular telephone lines. 6.11 Regular Telephone Lines Interface Attributes Table 5-72 Attributes of FXS/FXO (RJ11) interfaces Attribute Connector type Standards compliance Cable type Dialing mode Description RJ11 ITU Q.512 for FXS interfaces ITU Q.552 for FXO interfaces ITU K.20 for protection against overcurrent and overvoltage Regular telephone line DTMF in accordance with GB3378 Pulse dialing Bandwidth 300 Hz to 3400 Hz Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 79 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Technical Specifications Table 5-73 describes the technical specifications of the 4FXS1FXO. Table 5-73 Technical specifications of the 4FXS1FXO Item Dimensions
(Depth x Width x Height) Specification 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 3.94 in. x 0.78 in.) Maximum power consumption 12.78 W Weight 0.3 kg (0.66 lb) 5.5.3 16/32/64/128-Channel DSP Module The 16/32/64/128-channel DSP module is a VoIP voice processing DIMM. Functions and Applications Functions The 16/32/64/128-channel DSP module provides the voice over IP (VoIP) functions, including:
l Processes the dial tone. l Parses telephone numbers. l Generates interactive voice response (IVR) and voice signal. l Encodes, decodes, and converts voice. l Implements voice conferences and echo canceler (EC). l Processes IP packets. Applications The 16/32/64/128-channel DSP module is installed into the DSP DIMM of the main control board on the AR2220-S. CAUTION Only the DSP module supported by the product can be inserted into the DSP DIMM slot. The DDR3 memory board or unsupported DIMMs cannot be inserted; otherwise, the device may be damaged or does not function properly. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 80 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Technical Specifications 5 Cards Table 5-74 shows the technical specifications of the 16/32/64/128-channel DSP module. Table 5-74 Technical specifications of the 16/32/64/128-channel DSP module Item Maximum power consumption Specification 2.89 W Weight 0.05 kg (0.11 lb) 5.6 xDSL Interface Card This section describes the types, functions, applications, appearance, interfaces, and technical specifications of the xDSL/xPON interface card. 5.6.1 ADSL-A/M and ADSL-B-1-Port-ADSL2+ ANNEX A/M and B WAN Interface Card The ADSL-A/M and ADSL-B are the ADSL2/ADSL2+ service access modules on the AR routers and support ADSL2+ Annex A, Annex B, and Annex M specifications. NOTE l The ADSL-A/M supports both Annex A and Annex M. l The ADSL-B supports Annex B. Table 5-75 describes the comparison between Annex A, Annex B, and Annex M. Table 5-75 Comparison between Annex A, Annex B, and Annex M Card Name Annex A Usage Scenario Annex A is applied to ADSL over POTS and compatible with POTS services. Annex B Annex B is applied to ADSL over ISDN and compatible with ISDN services. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 81 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Card Name Annex M Usage Scenario Annex M expands the upstream frequency band of ADSL and provides a higher upstream transmission rate. G.992.3 and G.992.5 each define Annex M:
l Annex M defined in G.992.3 and Annex M defined in G.992.5 have the same upstream frequency band. l They have different downstream frequency bands:
The maximum downstream frequency band of Annex M defined in G.992.3 is 1104 kHz. The maximum downstream frequency band of Annex M defined in G.992.5 is 2208 kHz. Functions and Applications Functions The ADSL-A/M and ADSL-B each provide 1-channel ADSL/ADSL2+ access, provide independent CPU and management interfaces, and support ADSL2+ Annex A, Annex B, and Annex M specifications. The ADSL-A/M or ADSL-B consists of the following modules:
l CPU control module: manages the system and loads programs. l ADSL2+ module: implements ADSL2+ modulation and demodulation on CPEs. l SGMII upstream module: provides one SGMII upstream interface to communicate with the active and standby SRUs. l Power supply module: conducts power from backplane to card. l Clock module: provides two types of working clocks for cards. Applications The ADSL-A/M and ADSL-B can be installed into the SIC slot of the AR1200-S and AR2220-
S. Panel and Interfaces NOTE The ADSL-A/M and ADSL-B panels are identical except for having different silkscreens. The following describes the panel and Interfaces of the ADSL-A/M. Figure 5-23 shows the appearance of the ADSL-A/M. Figure 5-23 Appearance of the ADSL-A/M 1 2 a Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 82 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-76 describes the buttons and indicators on the ADSL-A/M panel. Table 5-76 Buttons and indicators on the ADSL-A/M panel Indicator Color Description Number in Figure 5-23 1 STAT Green Red Off Green 2 LINK If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, the DSL channel has been activated. If the indicator is off, the DSL channel is not activated. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the DSL channel is being activated. Interfaces Table 5-77 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the ADSL-A/M. Table 5-77 Types and functions of interfaces on the ADSL-A/M Letter in Figure 5-23 a Name ADSL2+
(RJ11) Quanti ty 1 Description Cable Type 6.11 Regular Telephone Lines The ADSL-A/M provides one RJ11 interface, which supports regular telephone lines. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 83 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Interface Attributes 5 Cards Table 5-78 Attributes of ADSL2/ADSL2+ interfaces Attribute Connector type Description RJ11 Standards compliance ADSL-A/M:
ITU-T 992.1 G.DMT ITU-T 992.3 ITU-T 992.5 Transmission rate ADSL-B:
ITU-T 992.1 G.DMT ANSI T1.413 Issue 2 ITU-T 992.3 ITU-T 992.5 ADSL-A/M:
l ADSL full rate mode (ITU-T 992.1 G.DMT): a downstream transmission rate of 8 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1024 kbit/s l ADSL2 full rate mode (ITU-T 992.3): a downstream transmission rate of 12 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1024 kbit/s l ADSL2+ full rate mode (ITU-T 992.5): a downstream transmission rate of 24 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1024 kbit/s ADSL-B:
A downstream transmission rate of 8 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1024 kbit/s Cable type Regular telephone line Technical Specifications Table 5-79 describes the technical specifications of the ADSL-A/M and ADSL-B. Table 5-79 Technical specifications of the ADSL-A/M and ADSL-B Item Dimensions
(Depth x Width x Height) Specification 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 3.94 in. x 0.78 in.) Maximum power consumption 5.4 W Weight 0.3 kg (0.66 lb) Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 84 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards 5.6.2 4G.SHDSL-1-Port-4-Channel G.SHDSL WAN Interface Card The 4G.SHDSL is the G.SHDSL service access module on the AR routers. G.Single-Pair High-Speed Digital Subscriber Line (G.SHDSL) uses trellis coded pulse amplitude modulation (TCPAM), provides up to 5.696 Mbit/s symmetric data rates, and supports 2/3/4-pair binding. The transmission rate can automatically adapt according to the line length and conditions. G.SHDSL provides a longer transmission distance than ADSL. Functions and Applications Functions The 4G.SHDSL provides 4-channel G.SHDSL access and the independent CPU as well as management interfaces. The 4G.SHDSL consists of the following modules:
l CPU control module: manages the system and loads programs. l G.SHDSL module: processes G.SHDSL services on CPEs. l GE upstream module: provides one upstream interface to communicate with the active and standby SRUs. l Power supply module: conducts power from backplane to card. l Clock module: provides three types of working clocks for cards. Applications The 4G.SHDSL can be installed into the SIC slot of the AR1200-S and AR2220-S. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-24 shows the appearance of the 4G.SHDSL. Figure 5-24 Appearance of the 4G.SHDSL 1 2 3 a Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-80 describes the buttons and indicators on the 4G.SHDSL panel. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 85 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Table 5-80 Buttons and indicators on the 4G.SHDSL panel Number in Figure 5-24 1 Indicator Color STAT Green Description If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. 2 LINK Red Off Green If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, the four DSL channels have been activated. If the indicator is off, the four DSL channels have not been activated. l If the indicator is on for 0.25 seconds and blinks three times in the next 0.75 seconds, the DSL channel has been activated. l If the indicator is on for 0.5 seconds and blinks twice in the next 0.5 seconds, the two DSL channels have been activated. l If the indicator is on for 0.75 seconds and blinks in the next 0.25 seconds, the three DSL channels have been activated. ACT Yellow If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. 3 Interfaces Table 5-81 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 4G.SHDSL. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 86 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Name Table 5-81 Types and functions of interfaces on the 4G.SHDSL Letter in Figure 5-24 a Description Qua ntity 1 Cable Type G.SHDSL
(RJ45) 6.9 4G.SHDSL Cables or 6.5 Network Cable The 4G.SHDSL provides one RJ45 interface, which supports standard network cables. Interface Attributes Table 5-82 Attributes of G.SHDSL interfaces Attribute Connector type Description One RJ45 connector on one end and four RJ11 connectors on the other end Standards compliance G.SHDSL.bit Transmission rate 5.696 Mbit/s per pair Technical Specifications Table 5-83 describes the technical specifications of the 4G.SHDSL. Table 5-83 Technical specifications of the 4G.SHDSL Item Dimensions
(Depth x Width x Height) Specification 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 3.94 in. x 0.78 in.) Maximum power consumption 8.2 W Weight 0.35 kg (0.78 lb) 5.6.3 1PON (1-Port GPON/EPON Dual-Mode Interface Card) The 1PON card is the EPON/GPON auto-sensing module on the AR routers. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 87 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards NOTE 1 port: There are two ports on the 1PON card, one of which is the backup port. Therefore, the 1PON card is also called the 1PON. The 1PON card functions as the ONU of the EPON/GPON system:
l Receives cells broadcast in TDM mode at a downlink rate of 1.25 Gbit/s (EPON) or 2.488 Gbit/s (GPON). l Supports burst transmission in TDMA mode at an uplink rate of 1.25 Gbit/s (EPON) or 1.244 Gbit/s (GPON). Functions and Applications Functions The 1PON card works with the main control board and supports two PON SFP uplink interfaces. The 1PON card has the following functions:
l Supports OLT clock synchronization but not the 1588 function. l Supports EPON/GPON but not GE. l Supports the DyingGasp function. l Supports rogue ONT detection and isolation. l Detects the receiving optical power. l Supports delayed reset. Applications The 1PON card is installed into the SIC slot of the AR1200-S and AR2220-S. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-25 shows the appearance of the 1PON panel. Figure 5-25 Appearance of the 1PON panel 1 2 3 2 3 a Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-84 describes the buttons and indicators on the 1PON panel. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 88 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Indicator Table 5-84 Buttons and indicators on the 1PON panel Number in Figure 5-25 1 Color STAT Green Description If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. 2 and 3 PON interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator indicates whether the PON card is requesting data transmission. l The AUTH indicator indicates the authentication status. Red Off Green If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If both the LINK indicator and AUTH indicator are steady on, the 1PON card is registered successfully. If the LINK indicator is steady on and the AUTH indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the 1PON card is being registered. If both the LINK indicator and AUTH indicator blink once 0.25s (4 Hz), the 1PON card keeps requesting data transmission. When this occurs, the 1PON card is a rogue ONU. If both the LINK indicator and AUTH indicator are off, the 1PON card does not request data transmission. Interfaces Table 5-85 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 1PON card. Table 5-85 Types and functions of interfaces on the 1PON card Letter in Figure 5-25 a Qua ntity 2 Description Name PON interface The 1PON card provides EPON/GPON interfaces that are connected using SC/PC fibers. Cable Type 6.6 Optical Fiber Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 89 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Interface Attributes 5 Cards Table 5-86 Attributes of the SFP optical module supported by the PON optical interface Attribute Connector type Transport mode Transmission rate Standards compliance Sending end Center wavelength Average transmitting optical power Average turn-off optical power Side-mode suppression ratio Description SC/PC connector (SFP encapsulation) Single-mode bidirectional l Downstream transmission rate of 2488 Mbit/s l Upstream transmission rate of 1244 Mbit/s ITU-T G.984.2 CLASS B+
ITU-T G.984.5 WBF 1290 nm to 1330 nm 0.5 dBm to 5 dBm
-45 dBm 30 dB Receivin g end Extinction ratio 10 dB to 15 dB Overload power
-8 dBm Input wavelength range 1480 nm to 1500 nm Operating temperature 0C to 70C Technical Specifications Table 5-87 describes the technical specifications of the 1PON card. Table 5-87 Technical specifications of the 1PON card Item Dimensions
(depth x width x height) Maximum power consumption Specification 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm 8.72 W Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 90 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Item Weight Specification 0.3 kg 5.6.4 VDSL (1-Port VDSL2 over POTS WAN Interface Card) The VDSL interface card provides an interface for VDSL2 access. Functions and Applications Functions The VDSL interface card is used for packet switching and device management. It supports the following functions:
l Works in VDSL2 mode that complies with ITU-T G.993.2 and supports profile 17a defined in G.993.2. l Rolls back to ADSL2+ mode that complies with G.992.5. l Supports temperature and power measurement. l Sends a dying gasp alarm in the case of a power failure. The VDSL interface card consists of the following modules:
l ADSL2/VDSL2 socket: implements ADSL2/VDSL2 modulation and demodulation on customer premises equipment (CPE). l Storage module: stores data and programs on the interface card. l GE uplink interface module: provides a GE uplink interface to receive and transmit data. The SRU manages the interface through this GE interface. l Temperature and power module: measures temperature and power on the interface card. l Clock resetting module: provides signals to reset the system clock. Applications The VDSL interface card can be installed in the SIC slot on the AR1200-S and AR2220-S chassis. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-26 shows the appearance of the VDSL interface card. Figure 5-26 VDSL panel 1 2 a Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 91 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-88 describes the buttons and indicators on the VDSL panel. 5 Cards Table 5-88 Buttons and indicators on the VDSL panel Number in Figure 5-26 1 Indicator Color STAT Green Red Off Green 2 LINK Description If the indicator is steady on, the router has been powered on, but the system software is not running. If the indicator blinks once every 2s
(0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once every 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is loading software after power-on or is restarting. If the indicator is steady on, a fault that affects services has occurred and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, the VDSL channel has been activated. If the indicator is off, the VDSL channel has not been activated. If the indicator blinks once every 0.25s (4 Hz), the VDSL channel is being activated. Interfaces Table 5-89 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the VDSL interface card. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 92 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Table 5-89 Types and functions of interfaces on the VDSL interface card Letter in Figure 5-26 a Name VDSL2
(RJ11) Quanti ty 1 Description Cable Type 6.11 Regular Telephone Lines The VDSL interface card provides an RJ11 interface, which connects to a DSLAM through a telephone cable. Interface Attributes Table 5-90 VDSL interface attributes Item Connector Standards compliance Rate Description RJ11 VDSL standards:
ITU-T 993.2 ITU-T 992.5 ITU-T 992.3 ITU-T 992.1 G.DMT l ADSL2+ full rate mode (ITU-T 992.3): a downstream transmission rate of 12 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1 Mbit/s l VDSL2 mode (ITU-T 993.2): a downstream transmission rate of 100 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 50 kbit/s l ADSL2 full rate mode (ITU-T 992.5): a downstream transmission rate of 24 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1 Mbit/s l ADSL full rate mode (ITU-T 992.1 G.DMT): a downstream transmission rate of 8 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1 Mbit/s Cable type Telephone cable Technical Specifications Table 5-91 describes the technical specifications of the VDSL interface card. Table 5-91 Technical specifications of the VDSL interface card Parameter Dimensions (W x D x H) Description 100.1 mm x 223.5 mm x 19.82 mm Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 93 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Parameter Maximum power consumption Description 7.6 W Weight 0.2 kg Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 94 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables 6 Cables About This Chapter This chapter describes the cables used by the AR routers, including the structures and technical specifications of the cables. 6.1 AC Power Cable An AC power cable transmits AC power to the switch. 6.2 DC Power Cables A DC power cable transmits DC power to the switch. 6.3 Ground Cable A ground cable protects the device from lightning strike and electromagnetic interference. 6.4 Console Cable A console cable is used to debug or maintain a local device. 6.5 Network Cable A network cable subtends devices, enables a device to communication with other network devices, and allows users to locally or remotely maintain the device. 6.6 Optical Fiber An optical fiber connects the optical interface of a device to an upstream device or optical network terminal. 6.7 E1/T1 Trunk Cables This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the E1/T1 trunk cable. 6.8 Synchronous/Asynchronous Serial Interface Cables This section describes the categories, structure, and technical specifications of the synchronous/
asynchronous serial interface cable. 6.9 4G.SHDSL Cables This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the 4G.SHDSL cable. 6.10 ISDN-ST Cables This section describes the categories, structure, and technical specifications of the ISDN-ST cable. 6.11 Regular Telephone Lines Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 95 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the regular telephone line. 6.12 8AS Cable An 8AS cable is connected to an 8AS interface card to commission or maintain the 8AS interface card. 6.13 3G Antenna A 3G antenna transmits and receives 3G signals to enable an AR router to communicate with a 3G network. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 96 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables 6.1 AC Power Cable An AC power cable transmits AC power to the switch. Application Appearance An AC power cable connects the following:
l The AC input power jack on the chassis l The other end is connected to the AC power supply Figure 6-1 shows the appearance of the AC power cable. Figure 6-1 Appearance of the AC power cable Specifications NOTE The AC power cables used in different countries and regions may have different specifications. The following are the specifications of the international standard AC power cable. Table 6-1 lists the specifications of the AC power cable. Table 6-1 Specifications of the AC power cable Item Cable type Function Description External power cable 250 V AC/10 A complying with international standard Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 97 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Item Connector 1 Connector 2 Cable type Description PI-straight-male C13-straight-female l 227 IEC 53 (RVV)-300 V/500 V l Rated voltage: 300 V/500 V l Standards compliance: 227 IEC 53 (RVV) Conductor cross-sectional area 3 x 1.0 mm2 (3 x 0.00155 in.2) Fireproof level GB18380.1 6.2 DC Power Cables Applications A DC power cable transmits DC power to the switch. A DC power cable connects the following two interfaces:
l Input power jack on the chassis l Output power interface on an external power system NOTE A black -48 V DC power return wire (RTN) is connected to the RTN(+) end of the DC power supply. A blue -48 V DC power cable is connected to the NEG(-) end of the DC power supply. Appearance and Structure The black -48 V DC power return wire and the blue -48 V DC power cable are shown in Figure 6-2 and Figure 6-3. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 98 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Figure 6-2 -48 V DC power return wire 6 Cables Figure 6-3 -48 V DC power cable Specifications The technical specifications of a -48 V DC power return wire and a -48 V DC power cable are the same, as described in Table 6-2. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 99 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Table 6-2 Specifications of the DC power cables Item Cable type Color Connector 1 Connector 2 Impedance Description Power cable Blue for -48 V DC power cable and black for -48 V DC power return wire OT Cord end terminal 4.95 /km Conductor cross-sectional area 1.2 mm2 (0.00186 in.2) 6.3 Ground Cable A ground cable protects the device from lightning strike and electromagnetic interference. Application Appearance A ground cable connects the chassis to the ground. Figure 6-4 shows the appearance of the ground cable. Figure 6-4 Appearance of the ground cable Specifications Table 6-3 lists the specifications of the ground cable. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 100 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Table 6-3 Specifications of the ground cable Item Cable type Color Description Power cable Green-yellow Connector type (X1/X2) OT/OT naked crimping terminal Gauge Cable type Maximum current Fireproof level 10 AWG (cross-sectional area 5.2 mm2
[0.0081 in.2]) l Standards compliance: H07Z-K UL3386 l Length: 0.3 m 50.0 A VW-1, CSA FT1 6.4 Console Cable A console cable is used to debug or maintain a local device. Application A console cable connects the console port of the device to the serial port of an operation terminal to transmit configuration data. A shielded cable or an unshielded cable can be used according to the onsite situation. A console cable connects the device and terminal as follows:
l The 8-pin RJ45 connector is inserted into the console port of the device. l The DB9 male connector is connected to an operation terminal, which is usually a PC. Appearance and Structure Figure 6-5 shows the structure of the console cable. Figure 6-5 Structure of the console cable D-type connector
(9-pin, male) Pos.9 Pos.5 Label Network port connector
(8-pin, RJ-45) Pos.6 Pos.1 X1 X2 1 8 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 101 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Pin Assignments 6 Cables Table 6-4 describes the pin assignments of the console cable. Table 6-4 Pin assignments of the console cable Connector Pin assignment X1(DB9) 2 3 5 X2(RJ45) 3 6 5 Specifications Table 6-5 lists the specifications of the console cable. Table 6-5 Specifications of the console cable Item Connector type Cable type Color Diameter Gauge Pin Length Description l Connector X1: cable connector, D-type, 9-pin, male l Connector X2: network interface connector, RJ45, 8-
pin, 8-bit, male Twisted pair PANTONE WARM GRAY 1U 0.32 mm (0.13 in.) 28 AWG (cross-sectional area 0.08 mm2 [0.0002 in. 2]) 2 pairs 3 m (9.85 ft.) 6.5 Network Cable A network cable subtends devices, enables a device to communication with other network devices, and allows users to locally or remotely maintain the device. Application A network cable connects a maintenance terminal to the console port on the main control board for local or remote maintenance. The network cables are classified into straight-through cables and crossover cables. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 102 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Pin Assignments 6 Cables Table 6-6 describes the pin assignments of the straight-through cable. Table 6-6 Pin assignments of the straight-through cable X1 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Tip Color White and orange Orange White and Green Blue White and Blue Green White and brown Brown X2 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Table 6-7 describes the pin assignments of the crossover cable. Table 6-7 Pin assignments of the crossover cable Tip Color White and orange Orange White and Green Blue White and Blue Green White and brown Brown X2 Pin 3 6 1 4 5 2 7 8 X1 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 NOTE To achieve the optimum electrical transmission performance, ensure that the wires connected to pins 1 and 2 and to pins 3 and 6 are twisted pairs. Specifications Table 6-8 lists the specifications of the network cable. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 104 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Table 6-8 Specifications of the network cable Item Connector type (X1/X2) Description RJ45 connectors Cable type Color Characteristic impedance Diameter Breakdown voltage Impedance Pin Frequency Category-3 and category-5 unshielded twisted pairs
(UTP-3 and UTP-5) or shielded twisted pairs (STP) Dark gray 100.0 0.510 mm (0.02 in.) 500.0 V 93.8 8 pins 0 MHz to 100 MHz Frequency attenuation 22 dB/100 m@100 MHz Fireproof level Length CM l Straight through cable: 5 meters (16.4 ft.), 10 meters
(32.8 ft.), 20 meters (65.6 ft.), and 30 meters (98.5 ft.) l Crossover cable: 5 meters (16.4 ft.) and 30 meters
(98.5 ft.) 6.6 Optical Fiber Application An optical fiber connects the optical interface of a device to an upstream device or optical network terminal. An optical fiber carries optical signals and transmits them over short distance. An optical fiber connects the following:
l The optical interface on a board l The optical distribution frame (ODF) or the optical interface on another device Table 6-9 lists the classification of optical fibers. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 105 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Table 6-9 Optical fiber classification No. Purpose Local End Connector LC/PC To connect LPU of the device to the ODF To connect LPUs of two devices LC/PC Remote End Connector FC/PC LC/PC To connect LPU of the device to another device LC/PC SC/PC or LC/
PC 1 2 3 Mode Single mode, indoor Single mode/
multimode, indoor Single mode/
multimode, indoor Appearance The appearances of the single-mode optical fiber and the multimode optical fiber are the same, but their colors are different. The single-mode optical fiber is yellow, and the multi-mode optical fiber is orange. CAUTION When connecting or removing the LC/PC optical connector, align the connector with the optical interface, and do not rotate the fiber. Pay attention to the following points:
l Align the head of the fiber jumper with the optical interface and insert the optical fiber into the interface gently. l To remove the fiber, press the latch on the connector and pull the fiber out. Figure 6-8 and Figure 6-9 show the appearances of the single mode fiber. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 106 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Figure 6-8 Single mode fiber with LC/PC connectors Figure 6-9 Single mode fiber with SC/PC connectors Figure 6-10 shows the appearance of the multimode fiber. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 107 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Figure 6-10 Multimode fiber with LC/PC connectors Pin Assignments Table 6-10 describes the pin assignments of the optical fiber. Table 6-10 Pin assignments of the optical fiber Local End Terminal Signal Direction
->
Remote End Terminal Optical interface Rx terminal Optical interface Tx terminal Optical interface Tx terminal Optical interface Rx terminal
<-
Fiber Selection Criterion Table 6-11 lists the criteria for selecting optical fibers. Table 6-12 lists common optical connectors. Table 6-11 Fiber selection criterion Parameter Length Criterion Onsite survey result Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 108 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Parameter Single mode or multimode Criterion Optical module type l The optical transmitting module of the multitransverse mode is connected to the multimode fiber. l The optical transmitting module of the single-longitudinal mode or multi-longitudinal mode is connected to the single mode fiber. NOTE If the optical fiber jumper is used, the connector connected to the device must be the LC/PC connector, and the connector connected to the remote end must be of the same type as the remote end interface. Connector shape l Cube: SC/PC, LC/PC, and MTRJ/PC l Column: ST/PC and FC/PC Table 6-12 Common optical connectors SC/PC optical connector LC/PC optical connector FC/PC optical connector MTRJ/PC optical connector
-
ST/PC optical connector 6.7 E1/T1 Trunk Cables This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the E1/T1 trunk cable. Introduction E1 trunk cables are classified into 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cables and 120-ohm balanced twisted pair cables. The connectors of the cables are as follows:
l 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable (DB9 to BNC):
One end provides a DB9 connector. The other end provides two BNC connectors. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 109 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables l 120-ohm balanced twisted pair cable (DB9 to RJ45):
One end provides a DB9 connector. The other end provides an RJ45 connector. A T1 trunk cable is a 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable. Its appearance is the same as the appearance of an E1 120-ohm balanced twisted pair cable. Appearance and Structure Figure 6-11 shows the appearance of an E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable. Figure 6-11 Appearance of an E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable Figure 6-12 shows the appearance of the E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable. Figure 6-12 Appearance of the E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 110 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Figure 6-13 shows the structure of an E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable. Figure 6-13 Structure of an E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable D-type connector
(9-pin, male) Label 1 Pos.6 Pos.1 Main Label BNC connector Pos.9 Pos.5 X1 X2 X3 Label 2 BNC connector Figure 6-14 shows the structure of the E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable. Figure 6-14 Structure of the E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable D-type connector
(9-pin, male) Pos.6 Pos.1 Label Network port connector
(8-pin, RJ-45) X2 1 8 Pos.9 Pos.5 X1 Pin Assignments Table 6-13 describes the pin assignments of an E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable. Table 6-13 Pin assignments of an E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable Connector Pin assignment X1 (DB9) 1 BNC Connector X2 2 6 7 X3 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 111 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Table 6-14 describes the pin assignments of the E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable. Table 6-14 Pin assignments of the E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable Connector Pin assignment X1 (DB9) 1 X2 (RJ45) 4 2 6 7 5 1 2 Tip Color White and orange Orange White and Blue Blue E1/T1 Trunk Cable Extension NOTE The E1/T1 trunk cable is 3 m long. If the connection distance is long, a cable extension is required. l E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable: BNC to BNC (The two connectors are BNC 75 angle male-II.) l E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable: RJ45 to RJ45 (The two connectors are RJ45.) The E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable is connected as follows:
l If the E1 trunk cable extension is not used, the BNC connector is connected to the remote device. l If the E1 trunk cable extension is used, the BNC connector is connected to a coaxial connector, and the coaxial connector is connected to the remote device through the cable extension, as shown in Figure 6-15. CAUTION The Tx end of the E1 trunk cable is connected to the Rx end of the remote device, and the Rx end is connected to the Tx end. Figure 6-15 E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable extension DB9 connector R o u t e r BNC BNC DDN E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable Coaxial connector E1 75-ohm cable extension Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 112 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables The E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable is connected as follows:
l If the E1/T1 trunk cable extension is not used, the RJ45 connector is connected to the RJ45 interface of the remote device. l If the E1/T1 trunk cable extension is used, the RJ45 connector is connected to a network interface connector, and the network interface connector is connected to the remote device through the cable extension, as shown in Figure 6-16. Figure 6-16 E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable extension DB9 connector R o u t e r RJ45 RJ45 DDN E1 120-ohm and T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair Network interface connector Specifications E1 120-ohm and T1 100-ohm cable extension Table 6-15 lists the specifications of the E1/T1 trunk cable. Table 6-15 Specifications of the E1/T1 trunk cable Item Characteristic impedance Cable type Color Diameter Description l E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable: 75 ohm l E1 120-ohm balanced twisted pair cable: 120 ohm l T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable: 100 ohm l E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable: coaxial cable l E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable: balanced twisted pair cable l E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable: PANTONE WARM GREY 1U l E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable: PANTONE 430U l E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable: 0.254 mm
(0.01 in.) l E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable: 0.4 mm (0.016 in.) Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 113 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Item Gauge Cores Description l E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable: 30 AWG l E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable: 26 AWG l E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable:
SYFVZP-75-1-1*4 l E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable: SEYVP-120 6.8 Synchronous/Asynchronous Serial Interface Cables This section describes the categories, structure, and technical specifications of the synchronous/
asynchronous serial interface cable. Introduction A synchronous/asynchronous serial interface cable is connected as follows:
l The DB28 connector is connected to the DB28 port on a card. l Another end depends on the connected device:
If the wide area network (WAN) uses the DDN line, the cable is connected to the CSU/
DSU. If the WAN uses the dial-up line, the cable is connected to the modem. Cable Category CAUTION Verify that devices are connected using appropriate synchronous/asynchronous serial interface cables. Appropriate cable type is determined based on device connection mode (such as synchronous/asynchronous and DTE/DCE modes), signals used by the connected device, baud rate, and clock. Table 6-16 lists the categories of synchronous/asynchronous serial interface cables. Table 6-16 Categories of synchronous/asynchronous serial interface cables Cable V.24 DTE cable V.24 DCE cable V.35 DTE cable Local End Connector DB28 connector Network-side Connector DB25 (male) connector DB25 (female) connector DB28 (male) connector Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 114 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Cable V.35 DCE cable X.21 DTE cable RS449 DTE cable RS449 DCE cable RS530 DTE cable RS530 DCE cable Local End Connector Network-side Connector DB28 (female) connector DB15 (male) connector DB28 (male) connector DB28 (female) connector DB25 (male) connector DB25 (female) connector Appearance Figure 6-17 shows the appearance of the V.24 DTE cable. Figure 6-17 Appearance of the V.24 DTE cable Figure 6-18 shows the appearance of the V.24 DCE cable. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 115 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Figure 6-18 Appearance of the V.24 DCE cable Figure 6-19 shows the appearance of the V.35 DTE cable. Figure 6-19 Appearance of the V.35 DTE cable Figure 6-20 shows the appearance of the V.35 DCE cable. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 116 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Figure 6-20 Appearance of the V.35 DCE cable Figure 6-21 shows the appearance of the X.21 DTE cable. Figure 6-21 Appearance of the X.21 DTE cable Figure 6-22 shows the appearance of the RS449 DTE cable. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 117 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Figure 6-22 Appearance of the RS449 DTE cable Figure 6-23 shows the appearance of the RS449 DCE cable. Figure 6-23 Appearance of the RS449 DCE cable Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 118 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Figure 6-24 shows the appearance of the RS530 DTE cable. Figure 6-24 Appearance of the RS530 DTE cable Figure 6-25 shows the appearance of the RS530 DCE cable. Figure 6-25 Appearance of the RS530 DCE cable Specifications Table 6-17 lists the specifications of the synchronous/asynchronous serial interface cable. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 119 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Table 6-17 Specifications of the synchronous/asynchronous serial interface cable Item Characteristic impedance Description 100 ohm Cable type Transmission rate Color Diameter Gauge Pin Twisted pair l V.24: 1200 bit/s to 64 kbit/s l V.35/X.21/RS449/RS530: 1200 bit/s to 2.048 Mbit/
s Dark blue (PANTONE 296U) l V.24 DTE/DCE cable, V.35 DTE/DCE cable, and X. 21 DTE cable: 0.38 mm (0.015 in.) l RS449 DTE/DCE cable and RS530 DTE/DCE cable:
0.32 mm (0.013 in.) 28 AWG l V.24 DTE/DCE cable, V.35 DTE/DCE cable, X.21 DTE cable: 5 pairs + 8 pins l RS449 DTE/DCE cable and RS530 DTE/DCE cable:
26 pins 6.9 4G.SHDSL Cables This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the 4G.SHDSL cable. Introduction The connectors of a 4G.SHDSL cable are as follows:
l Four RJ11 connectors on the local end l An RJ45 connector on the network side Appearance and Structure Figure 6-26 shows the appearance of the 4G.SHDSL cable. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 120 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Figure 6-26 Appearance of the 4G.SHDSL cable Figure 6-27 shows the structure of the 4G.SHDSL cable. Figure 6-27 Structure of the 4G.SHDSL cable Network port connector
(8-pin, RJ-45) Main Label 1 8 X1 Pin Assignments 6-pin connector Label 1 6 1 X2 Label 2 X3 Label 3 X4 Label 4 X5 Table 6-18 describes the pin assignments of the 4G.SHDSL cable. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 121 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Table 6-18 Pin assignments of the 4G.SHDSL cable Connector Pin assignment X1 (RJ45) 1 (LINE1 A) X2/X3/X4/X5 (RJ11) Tip Color 2.3 White and orange 2 (LINE1 B) 3 (LINE2 A) 6 (LINE2 B) 4 (LINE0 A) 5 (LINE0 B) 7 (LINE3 A) 8 (LINE3 B) 2.4 3.3 3.4 4.3 4.4 5.3 5.4 Orange White and Green Green White and Blue Blue White and brown Brown Specifications NOTE As shown in Table 6-18, the 4G.SHDSL cable uses standard pin assignments. A cable has four ports, each of them has two lines (A/B). The two lines in a port can be assigned in any sequence, but the line pairs must be assigned in certain sequence. Table 6-19 lists the specifications of the 4G.SHDSL cable. Table 6-19 Specifications of the 4G.SHDSL cable Item Description 100 ohm Characteristic impedance Cable type Color Diameter Gauge Pin Category 5 twisted pairs PANTONE 430U 0.51 mm (0.02 in.) 24 AWG 8 pins 6.10 ISDN-ST Cables This section describes the categories, structure, and technical specifications of the ISDN-ST cable. Introduction ISDN-ST cables are classified into the following types:
Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 122 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Figure 6-29 Appearance of an ISDN S/T interface crossover cable Figure 6-30 shows the structure of an ISDN S/T interface crossover cable. Figure 6-30 Structure of an ISDN S/T interface crossover cable Network port connector
(8-pin, RJ-45, male) Label Network port connector
(8-pin, RJ-45, female) X1 1 8 Pin Assignments 1 8 X2 Table 6-20 describes the pin assignments of the standard ISDN S/T interface cable. Pins 3 and 6 are the sending end, and pins 4 and 5 are the receiving end. Table 6-20 Pin assignments of the standard ISDN S/T interface cable RJ45 1 Signal
-
RJ45 1 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 124 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables RJ45 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal
-
Tx+
Rx+
Rx-
Tx-
-
-
RJ45 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Table 6-21 describes the pin assignments of the ISDN S/T interface crossover cable. Pins 4 and 5 are the sending end, and pins 3 and 6 are the receiving end. Table 6-21 Pin assignments of the standard ISDN S/T interface crossover cable RJ45 (TE) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal
-
-
Tx+
Rx+
Rx-
Tx-
-
-
RJ45 (NT) 1 2 4 3 6 5 7 8 Technical Specifications Table 6-22 lists the technical specifications of an ISDN-ST cable. Table 6-22 Technical specifications of an ISDN-ST cable Item Characteristic impedance Specification 100 ohm Cable Color Diameter Category 5 twisted pairs PANTONE 430U 0.51 mm (0.02 in.) Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 125 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Item Gauge Impedance Pin Specification 24 AWG 93.8 ohm 8 pins 6.11 Regular Telephone Lines This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the regular telephone line. Introduction Appearance The regular telephone line is connected as follows:
l The RJ11 connector is connected to a device such as a phone and fax machine. l Another RJ11 connector is connected to the voice card of the AR1200-S. Figure 6-31 shows the appearance of the regular telephone line. Figure 6-31 Appearance of the regular telephone line 6PIN-RJ11 6PIN-RJ11 1 6 X1 Pin Assignment 6 1 X2 Table 6-23 provides the pin assignment of a regular telephone line. Table 6-23 Pin assignment of a regular telephone line X1 Pin 3 4 Wire Color Red Green X2 Pin 3 4 Remarks Tip(+) Ring(-) Specifications Table 6-24 lists the specifications of the regular telephone line. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 126 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Table 6-24 Specifications of the regular telephone line Item Dielectric strength Description 150 V Maximum current Impedance Cable type Color Gauge Pin 1 A 237.25 ohm UL20251 White 28 AWG 2 pins 6.12 8AS Cable An 8AS cable is connected to an 8AS interface card to commission or maintain the 8AS interface card. Introduction An 8AS cable connects the console port on an 8AS interface card to the serial port of an operation terminal. You can use shield cables or unshielded cables as required in different scenarios. The common usage scenarios of 8AS cables are:
l To connect an 8AS interface card to automatic teller machines in a bank, use shield straight-
through cables. You can buy shield straight-through cables from Huawei or made these cables onsite. l To connect an 8AS interface card to a dumb terminal, use a transit cable and a shield straight-through cable. A transit cable has an RJ45 plug on one end and an RJ45 socket on the other end. The transit cable converts the pin assignments on the dumb terminal to the standard pin assignments, which are the same as those on the straight-through cable. Then the straight-through cable can connect to the dumb terminal. l To connect an 8AS interface card to a serial port device, such as a PC or modem, use an asynchronous serial cable and a transit cable. One end of an asynchronous serial cable is an RJ45 socket, and the other end has a DB25 plug and a DB9 plug. The asynchronous serial cable connects to the PC or modem through the transit cable. NOTE Huawei can customize 8AS cables of specified length. Straight-through cable Figure 6-32 shows the appearance of a straight-through cable. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 127 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables X1 Pin (8AS) 5 6 7 8 X2 Pin (Console) 3 6 1 8 Table 6-8 lists the technical specifications of a straight-through cable. Transit Cable Figure 6-34 shows the appearance of a transit cable. Figure 6-34 Transit cable appearance Figure 6-35 shows the structure of a transit cable. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 129 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Figure 6-35 Transit cable structure Network port connector
(8-pin, RJ-45, male) Label Network port connector
(8-pin, RJ-45, female) 1 8 X2 X1 1 8 Table 6-26 lists the pin assignments of a transit cable. Table 6-26 Pin assignments of a transit cable X1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 X2 4 2 7 5 6 3 8 1 Table 6-27 lists the specifications of a transit cable. Table 6-27 Specifications of a transit cable Item Characteristic impedance Cable type Color Description 100 ohm Category 5 twisted pairs PANTONE 430U Core diameter of the inner conductor Wire gauge of the inner conductor DC resistance of the inner conductor Number of pins 0.51 mm 24 AWG 93.8 ohm 8 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 130 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Asynchronous Serial Cable 6 Cables Figure 6-36 shows the appearance of an asynchronous serial cable. Figure 6-36 Appearance of an asynchronous serial cable Figure 6-37 shows the structure of an asynchronous serial cable. Figure 6-37 Structure of an asynchronous serial cable D-type connector
(25-pin, male) Pos.14 Pos.1 Label Network port connector
(8-pin, RJ-45) Pos.25 Pos.13 X1 X2 1 8 Pos.6 Pos.1 Pos.5 X3 Pos.9 D-type connector
(9-pin, male) Table 6-28 lists the pin assignments of an asynchronous serial cable. Table 6-28 Pin assignments of an asynchronous serial cable X1 4 X2 1 X3 7 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 131 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables X1 20 2 8 7 3 6 5 X2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 X3 4 3 1 5 2 6 8 Table 6-29 lists the specifications an asynchronous serial cable. Table 6-29 Specifications of an asynchronous serial cable Item Connector Cable type Color Description l Connector X1: cable connector, D-type, 25-pin, male l Connector X2: network interface connector, RJ45, 8-pin, 8-bit l Connector X3: cable connector, D-type, 9-pin, male Symmetrical twisted pair PANTONE WARM GRAY 1U Core diameter of the inner conductor 0.32 mm Wire gauge of the inner conductor 28 AWG (cross-sectional area approximately equal to 0.08 mm2) Number of pins Length 6.13 3G Antenna 2 pairs 3 m A 3G antenna transmits and receives 3G signals to enable an AR router to communicate with a 3G network. Introduction The antenna interfaces on a 3G-HSPA+7 interface card can connect to whip antennas and indoor remote antennas. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 132 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables l Whip antennas are directly installed on an AR router and are recommended when a router is desk installed or wall mounted. l Indoor remote antennas have a 3 m long feed line and can use two 6 m feed lines to expand the length to 15 m. Indoor remote antennas are recommended when an AR router is installed in a cabinet or rack. (Indoor remote antennas need to be ordered separately if needed.) Whip Antenna Figure 6-38 shows the appearance of a whip antenna. Figure 6-38 Whip antenna Table 6-30 lists the technical specifications of a whip antenna. Table 6-30 Technical specifications of a whip antenna Item Connector Color Characteristic impedance Length Frequency Maximum power Operating temperature Description SMA-J Black 50 ohm 150 mm 824 MHz to 960 MHz/1710 MHz to 2170 MHz 10 W
-40C to +70C Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 133 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Item Relative humidity Gain Description 5% RH to 90% RH, non-condensing l 824 MHz to 960 MHz: 1d Bi l 1710 MHz to 2170 MHz: 2 dBi Voltage standing wave ratio
< 3 Remote Antenna Figure 6-39 shows the appearance of a remote antenna. Figure 6-39 Remote antenna Table 6-31 lists the technical specifications of a remote antenna. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 134 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Table 6-31 Technical specifications of a remote antenna Item Connector Description SMA-Male Color Characteristic impedance Height Frequency Maximum power Operating temperature Gain Black 50 ohm 260 mm 824 MHz to 960 MHz/1710 MHz to 2170 MHz 50 W
-40C to +90C l 824 MHz to 960 MHz: 1 dBi l 1710 MHz to 2170 MHz: 2.5 dBi Voltage standing wave ratio
< 2.5 Attenuation
< 0.3 dB on each meter of feed line (within the working frequency band) Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 135 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 7 List of Indicators 7 List of Indicators About This Chapter This chapter describes the status and meanings of indicators on the AR routers, including indicators on the front and rear panels, cards, fan modules, and power supply units. 7.1 Indicators on the AR1200-S Panel This section describes the indicators on the AR1200-S panel. 7.2 Indicators on the AR2220-S Panel This section describes the indicators on the AR2220-S panel. 7.3 Power Indicators This section describes the power indicators. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 136 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 7 List of Indicators 7.1 Indicators on the AR1200-S Panel This section describes the indicators on the AR1200-S panel. NOTE The indicators on the AR1220W-S and AR1220-S front panels are the same. The AR1220W-S is used as an example to describe the indicators. Figure 7-1 shows the indicators on the AR1220W-S front panel. Figure 7-1 Indicators on the AR1220W-S front panel 3 4 1 2 5 6 Table 7-1 describes the indicators on the AR1220W-S front panel. Table 7-1 Indicators on the AR1220W-S front panel Indicator Color Description Number in Figure 7-1 1 SYS Green Red Off Green 2 WAN If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, at least one GE interface has been connected or activated. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 137 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 7 List of Indicators Indicator Color Description Number in Figure 7-1 3 ACT Red and green If the indicator is off, neither GE interface is connected or activated. If the indicator is green, devices have been deployed by using the USB disk. If the indicator blinks green, data is being read from the USB disk. If the indicator is red, the device cannot be correctly connected to the NMS or cannot be registered with the NMS. If the indicator blinks red, an error occurs when configuration files are being executed or data is being read from the USB disk. If the indicator is off, the USB disk is not inserted, the USB interface fails, or the indicator fails. 4 5 6 RST CAUTION The Reset button is used for resetting the device manually. Resetting the device will cause service interruption; therefore, confirm the action before you reset the device. WLAN Green If the indicator is steady on, the link has been connected or activated. If the indicator blinks (20 Hz), the link is transmitting data. If the traffic volume of transmitted data increases, the indicator blinks faster. If the indicator is off, the link is not connected or activated. WLAN The button enables and disables the WLAN function. Figure 7-2 shows the indicators on the AR1220W-S rear panel. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 138 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 7 List of Indicators Figure 7-2 Indicators on the AR1220W-S rear panel 7 8 9 10 Table 7-2 shows the indicators on the AR1220W-S rear panel. Table 7-2 Description of indicators on the AR1220W-S rear panel Number in Figure 7-2 7 Indicator Color Green Description If the indicator is steady on, the port is used as a CON/AUX port. If the indicator is off, the port does not function as a CON/AUX port. EN (CON/
AUX interface) NOTE l Either the CON/AUX port or the MiniUSB port can be used at a time. l By default, the port is used as the CON/AUX port. The EN indicator is green no matter whether a cable is installed. 8 EN (MiniUSB interface) Green If the indicator is steady on, the port is used as a MiniUSB port. If the indicator is off, the port does not function as a MiniUSB port. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 139 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 7 List of Indicators Number in Figure 7-2 9 and 10 Indicator Color Description Green Yellow GE interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator is in green. l The ACT indicator is in yellow. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. 7.2 Indicators on the AR2220-S Panel This section describes the indicators on the AR2220-S panel. Figure 7-3 shows the indicators on the AR2220-S front panel. Figure 7-3 Indicators on the AR2220-S front panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Table 7-3 describes the indicators on the AR2220-S front panel. Table 7-3 Indicators on the AR2220-S front panel Number in Figure 7-3 1 Indicator Color Description SYS Green Red Off If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 140 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 7 List of Indicators Indicator Color Description Number in Figure 7-3 2 3 and 4 5 and 6 MiniSD card indicator Green Green Yellow Green Yellow SFP interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator is in green. l The ACT indicator is in yellow. GE interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator is in green. l The ACT indicator is in yellow. 7 ACT Red and green If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, there is no MiniSD card. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is green, devices have been deployed by using the USB disk. If the indicator blinks green, data is being read from the USB disk. If the indicator is red, the device cannot be correctly connected to the NMS or cannot be registered with the NMS. If the indicator blinks red, an error occurs when configuration files are being executed or data is being read from the USB disk. If the indicator is off, the USB disk is not inserted, the USB interface fails, or the indicator fails. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 141 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 7 List of Indicators Indicator Color Description Number in Figure 7-3 8 EN (MiniUSB interface) Green If the indicator is steady on, the port is used as a MiniUSB port. If the indicator is off, the port does not function as a MiniUSB port. If the indicator is steady on, the port is used as a CON/AUX port. If the indicator is off, the port does not function as a CON/AUX port. 9 Green EN (CON/
AUX interface) NOTE l Either the CON/AUX port or the MiniUSB port can be used at a time. l By default, the port is used as the CON/AUX port. The EN indicator is green no matter whether a cable is installed. RST 10 CAUTION The Reset button is used for resetting the device manually. Resetting the device will cause service interruption; therefore, confirm the action before you reset the device. 7.3 Power Indicators This section describes the power indicators. HW-100-48AC14D Figure 7-4 shows the indicator of the HW-100-48AC14D. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 142 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 7 List of Indicators Figure 7-4 Indicator of the HW-100-48AC14D Indicator Table 7-4 Description of the HW-100-48AC14D indicators Indicator Power indicator Color Blue Description If the indicator is steady on, the output power is in the normal range. If the indicator is off, the power supply unit does not have output power. PWR150A Figure 7-5 shows the indicator of the PWR150A. Figure 7-5 Indicator of the PWR150A Indicator Table 7-5 Description of the PWR150A indicators Indicator Power indicator
(STATUS) Color Green Description If the indicator is steady on, the power supply unit functions properly. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 143 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 7 List of Indicators Indicator Color Description If the indicator blinks, the output power is out of range, for example, overvoltage, overcurrent, and short-circuit. If the indicator is off, the input power is out of range, for example no AC input, overvoltage, and undervoltage, or the output power is out of range, for example, undervoltage and overtemperature. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 144 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 8 List of Cards 8 List of Cards About This Chapter This chapter describes the types and technical specifications of cards on the AR routers. 8.1 Cards Supported by the AR This section describes the cards supported by AR routers, including SRUs, Ethernet LAN interface cards, WAN interface cards, voice interface cards, and xDSL/xPON interface cards. 8.2 Power Consumption and Weight This section describes the power consumption and weight of cards supported by the AR routers. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 145 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 8 List of Cards 8.1 Cards Supported by the AR This section describes the cards supported by AR routers, including SRUs, Ethernet LAN interface cards, WAN interface cards, voice interface cards, and xDSL/xPON interface cards. Matching between physical cards and software versions Table 8-1 Matching between physical cards and software versions Model&Version ARV200R001C0 1&ARV200R002 C00&ARV200R0 02C01 AR1220-
S WSIC SIC XSIC AR1220 W-S AR2220-
S Matching between SRUs and software versions voice card Table 8-2 Matching between SRUs and software versions Model&Version ARV200R001C0 1&ARV200R002 C00&ARV200R 002C01 AR1220W-S AR1220-S SRU AR2220-S WLAN Subcard Matching between Ethernet LAN interface cards and software versions Table 8-3 Matching between Ethernet LAN interface cards and software versions Model&Version ARV200R001C0 1&ARV200R002 C00&ARV200R 002C01 AR1220W-S AR1220-S 8FE1GE 24GE AR2220-S Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 146 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 8 List of Cards Matching between WAN cards and software versions Table 8-4 Matching between WAN cards and software versions Model&Ver sion 1S A 2S A 2F E 2E1 T1-
M
(WS IC) 1E 1T 1-
F/
2E 1T 1-F 1E1 T1-
M/
2E1 T1-
M
(SIC
) 1 G E C 8 A S 1 B S T 4 G E W
-T 4 G E W
-S 1 C P O S-
15 5 M 3 G
-
H S P A
+
7 AR1 220-
S AR1 220 W-S AR2 220-
S AR1 220-
S AR1 220 W-S AR2 220-
S AR1 220-
S AR1 220 W-S AR2 220-
S ARV 200R 001C 01 ARV 200R 002C 00 ARV 200R 002C 01 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 147 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Matching between voice cards and software versions Table 8-5 Matching between voice cards and software versions Model&Version 4FXS1FXO 2BST(SIC) 2BST(WSIC) 8 List of Cards 16/32/64/128
-Channel DSP Module ARV200R0 01C01 AR12 20-S AR12 20W-S AR22 20-S AR12 20-S AR12 20W-S AR22 20-S ARV200R0 02C00&AR V200R002 C01 Matching between xDSL/xPON cards and software versions Table 8-6 Matching between xDSL/xPON cards and software versions Model&Versi on ARV2 00R00 1C01 ADSL-
A/M ADSL-
B 4G.SH DSL AR122 0-S 1PON AR122 0W-S ARV2 00R00 2C00 AR222 0-S AR122 0-S AR122 0W-S AR222 0-S VDSL Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 148 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 8 List of Cards ADSL-
A/M ADSL-
B 4G.SH DSL 1PON VDSL Model&Versi on ARV2 00R00 2C01 AR122 0-S AR122 0W-S AR222 0-S 8.2 Power Consumption and Weight This section describes the power consumption and weight of cards supported by the AR routers. Table 8-7 describes the power consumption and weight of cards supported by the AR routers. The table describes the power consumption of the cards operating at 25C (80F). Table 8-7 Power consumption and weight of cards supported by the AR1200-S Card Name Weight Maximum Power Consumption 12.036 W 2.28 W 3.01 W 7 W 7 W l 1SA: 10 W l 2SA: 11.7 W 8.9 W 12 W 16.8 W 12.78 W 5.4 W 8.2 W 8FE1GE 1GEC 2FE 1E1T1-M/
2E1T1-M 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-
F 1SA/2SA 8AS 1BST 2BST 4FXS1FXO ADSL-A/M ADSL-B 4G.SHDSL 0.6 kg (1.33 lb) 0.25 kg (0.55 lb) 0.3 kg (0.67 lb) 0.3 kg (0.67 lb) 0.3 kg (0.67 lb) 0.3 kg (0.67 lb) 0.6 kg (1.33 lb) 0.3 kg (0.67 lb) 0.3 kg (0.67 lb) 0.3 kg (0.67 lb) 0.3 kg (0.67 lb) 0.35 kg (0.77 lb) Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 149 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes 9 List of Interface Attributes About This Chapter This section describes the interface attributes supported by the AR routers. 9.1 Electrical Interfaces This section describes the attributes of electrical interfaces. 9.2 GE/PON Optical Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of GE/PON optical interfaces. 9.3 CPOS Interface Attributes This section describes the CPOS interface attributes. 9.4 E1 Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of E1 interfaces. 9.5 T1 Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of T1 interfaces. 9.6 Synchronous/Asynchronous Serial Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of synchronous/asynchronous serial interfaces. 9.7 ISDN S/T Interface Attributes This section describes ISDN S/T interface attributes. 9.8 FXS/FXO Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of FXS/FXO interfaces. 9.9 ADSL2/ADSL2+/G.SHDSL Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of ADSL2/ADSL2+/G.SHDSL interfaces. 9.10 Attributes of the Console Interface This section describes the attributes of the console interface. 9.11 Attributes of the USB Interface This section describes the attributes of the USB interface. 9.12 3G Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of 3G interfaces. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 150 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes 9.13 VDSL Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of the VDSL interface. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 151 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes 9.1 Electrical Interfaces This section describes the attributes of electrical interfaces. Table 9-1 describes the attributes of 10BASE-TX/100BASE-TX electrical interfaces. Table 9-1 Attributes of 10BASE-TX/100BASE-TX electrical interfaces Item Connector type Description RJ45 Interface attribute MDI/MDIX NOTE l The interfaces of most network cards are medium dependent interfaces
(MDIs). l MDIX interfaces are usually used on hubs or LAN switches. IEEE802.3, IEEE802.3u, IEEE802.3ab Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, or Ethernet_SNAP IP Standards compliance Frame format Network layer protocol Table 9-2 describes the attributes of 1000BASE-T electrical interfaces. Table 9-2 Attributes of 1000BASE-T electrical interfaces Item Connector type Description RJ45 Interface attribute MDI/MDIX NOTE l The interfaces of most network cards are medium dependent interfaces
(MDIs). l MDIX interfaces are usually used on hubs or LAN switches. IEEE802.3, IEEE802.3u, IEEE802.3ab Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, or Ethernet_SNAP IP Standards compliance Frame format Network layer protocol Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 152 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes 9.2 GE/PON Optical Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of GE/PON optical interfaces. A GE optical interface can be connected to an optical module. Table 9-3 and Table 9-4 describe the attributes of optical interfaces and optical modules. Table 9-3 Attributes of the 100/1000BASE-X GE optical interface Attribute Connector type Description LC/PC Optical interface attribute Standards compliance Depending on the SFP optical module. IEEE 802.3ab Frame format Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, or Ethernet_SNAP Network layer protocol IP Description Table 9-4 Attributes of the SFP optical module (100/1000 Mbit/s) supported by the GE optical interface Attri bute Tran smiss ion dista nce 10 km (single-
mode bidirectional fiber) 100 km 500 m 10 km 40 km 40 km 80 km 850 nm 1310 nm Tx:
1310 nm Rx:
1490 nm Tx:
1490 nm Rx:
1310 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm 1550 nm 1550 nm
-9.5 dBm to
-2.5 dBm
-9.0 dBm to
-3.0 dBm
-9.0 dBm to
-3.0 dBm
-9.0 dBm to
-3.0 dBm
-5.0 dBm to 0 dBm
-5.0 dBm to 0 dBm
-2.0 dBm to 5.0 dBm 0 dBm to 5 dBm Cent er wave lengt h Tran smitt ing powe r Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 153 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes Description
-17.0 dBm
-20.0 dBm
-19.5 dBm
-19.5 dBm
-23 dBm
-22 dBm
-23.0 dBm
-30.0 dBm 0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-9.0 dBm 9 dB 9 dB 6 dB 6 dB 9 dB 8.5 dB 9 dB 8 dB Multi-
mode Single-mode Attri bute Rece iver sensi tivity Over load optic al powe r Extin ction ratio Fiber type Table 9-5 Attributes of the SFP optical module supported by the PON optical interface Attribute Connector type Description SC/PC connector (SFP encapsulation) Transport mode Transmission rate Standards compliance Sending end Center wavelength Average transmitting optical power Average turn-off optical power Side-mode suppression ratio Single-mode bidirectional l Downstream transmission rate of 2488 Mbit/s l Upstream transmission rate of 1244 Mbit/s ITU-T G.984.2 CLASS B+
ITU-T G.984.5 WBF 1290 nm to 1330 nm 0.5 dBm to 5 dBm
-45 dBm 30 dB Extinction ratio 10 dB to 15 dB Overload power
-8 dBm Receivin g end Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 154 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes Attribute Input wavelength range Description 1480 nm to 1500 nm Operating temperature 0C to 70C 9.3 CPOS Interface Attributes This section describes the CPOS interface attributes. A CPOS optical interface can be connected to an optical module. Table 9-6 and Table 9-7 describe the attributes of optical interfaces and optical modules. Table 9-6 CPOS interface attributes Attribute Connector type Description LC/PC Optical interface attribute Standards compliance Depending on the SFP optical module STM-1 Frame format SDH/SONET Network layer protocol IP Table 9-7 Attributes of the SFP optical module supported by the CPOS interface Attribute Transmissio n distance Center wavelength Description 2 km 15 km 40 km 80 km 1310 nm 1310 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm Transmittin g power
-19.0 dBm to
-14.0 dBm
-15.0 dBm to 8.0 dBm
-15.0 dBm to 8.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm to 0 dBm
-28.0 dBm
-23.0 dBm
-23.0 dBm
-32.98 dBm
-14.0 dBm
-10.17 dBm
-8.0 dBm
-8.0 dBm Receiver sensitivity Overload optical power Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 155 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes Attribute Extinction ratio Description
>10.0 dB 58.86 dB 14.08 dB 43.09 dB Fiber type Multimode Single-mode 9.4 E1 Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of E1 interfaces. Table 9-8 describes the attributes of channelized E1 interfaces. Table 9-8 Attributes of channelized E1 interfaces Attribute Connector type Standards compliance Description DB9 G.703 or G.704 Transmission rate 2.048 Mbit/s Cable type E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable E1 120-ohm balanced twisted pair cable E1 trunk cable extension Working mode CE1, ISDN PRI, or VE1 Function Backup Terminal access ISDN PRI Table 9-9 describes the attributes of unchannelized E1 interfaces. Table 9-9 Attributes of unchannelized E1 interfaces Attribute Connector type Standards compliance Description DB9 G.703 or G.704 Transmission rate 2.048 Mbit/s Cable type E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable E1 120-ohm balanced twisted pair cable E1 trunk cable extension Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 156 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes Attribute Working mode Function Description Unchannelized E1 Backup Terminal access 9.5 T1 Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of T1 interfaces. Table 9-10 describes the attributes of channelized T1 interfaces. Table 9-10 Attributes of channelized T1 interfaces Attribute Connector type Standards compliance Description DB9 G.703 or G.704 Transmission rate 1.544 Mbit/s Cable type T1 100-ohm coaxial cable Working mode CT1, ISDN PRI, or VT1 Function Backup Terminal access ISDN PRI Table 9-11 describes the attributes of unchannelized T1 interfaces. Table 9-11 Attributes of unchannelized T1 interfaces Attribute Connector type Standards compliance Description DB9 G.703 or G.704 Transmission rate 1.544 Mbit/s Cable type T1 100-ohm coaxial cable Working mode Unchannelized T1 Function Backup Terminal access Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 157 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes 9.6 Synchronous/Asynchronous Serial Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of synchronous/asynchronous serial interfaces. Table 9-12 describes the attributes of synchronous/asynchronous serial interfaces. Table 9-12 Attributes of synchronous/asynchronous serial interfaces Attribute Description Synchronous Serial Interface Connector type Standards compliance and working mode DB28 l V.24 DTE l V.24 DCE l V.35 DTE l V.35 DCE l X.21 DTE l RS449 DTE l RS449 DCE l RS530 DTE l RS530 DCE Asynchronous Serial Interface RS232 Minimum baud rate (bit/
s) Maximum baud rate (bit/
s) Cable type 1200 64 k 1200 600 2.048 M 115.2 k l V.24 DTE cable l V.24 DCE cable l V.35 DTE cable l V.35 DCE cable l X.21 DTE cable l RS449 DTE cable l RS449 DCE cable l RS530 DTE cable l RS530 DCE cable Function DDN leased line Terminal access l Modem dial-up l Backup l Asynchronous leased line l Terminal access Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 158 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes Table 9-13 describes the attributes of asynchronous serial interfaces. Table 9-13 Attributes of asynchronous serial interfaces Attribute Connector type Standards compliance and working mode Minimum baud rate (bit/s) Maximum baud rate (bit/s) Cable type Function Description RJ45 RS232 300 115.2 k Customized RJ45 cable l Modem dial-up l Backup l Asynchronous leased line l Terminal access 9.7 ISDN S/T Interface Attributes This section describes ISDN S/T interface attributes. Table 9-14 lists ISDN S/T interface attributes. Table 9-14 ISDN S/T interface attributes Item Connector Description RJ45 Standards compliance ITU-T I.430, Q.921, Q.931 Rate Bandwidth Cable 192 kbit/s 0 to 100 MHz l TE: standard ISDN S/T interface cables (straight-
through cables) l NT: ISDN S/T interface crossover cables 9.8 FXS/FXO Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of FXS/FXO interfaces. Table 9-15 describes the attributes of FXS/FXO (RJ11) interfaces on the 4FXS1FXO. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 159 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes Table 9-15 Attributes of FXS/FXO (RJ11) interfaces Attribute Connector type Standards compliance Cable type Dialing mode Bandwidth Description RJ11 ITU Q.512 for FXS interfaces ITU Q.552 for FXO interfaces ITU K.20 for protection against overcurrent and overvoltage Regular telephone line DTMF in accordance with GB3378 Pulse dialing 300 Hz to 3400 Hz Table 9-16 describes the attributes of FXS (DB68) interfaces on the 32FXS/16FXS. Table 9-16 Attributes of FXS (DB68) interfaces Attribute Connector type Description DB68 Standards compliance IEEE 1284C Interface as a 36 contact connector Cable type Dialing mode Bandwidth Twisted pair DTMF in accordance with GB3378 Pulse dialing 300 Hz to 3400 Hz Table 9-17 describes the attributes of FXO (RJ11) interfaces on the 4FXO. Table 9-17 Attributes of FXO (RJ11) interfaces Attribute Connector type Standards compliance Cable type Dialing mode Description RJ11 ITU Q.552 for FXO interfaces ITU K.20 for protection against overcurrent and overvoltage Telephone cable DTMF in accordance with GB3378 Pulse dialing Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 160 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes Attribute Bandwidth Description 300 Hz to 3400 Hz 9.9 ADSL2/ADSL2+/G.SHDSL Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of ADSL2/ADSL2+/G.SHDSL interfaces. Table 9-18 describes the attributes of ADSL2/ADSL2+ interfaces. Table 9-18 Attributes of ADSL2/ADSL2+ interfaces Attribute Connector type Description RJ11 Standards compliance ADSL-A/M:
ITU-T 992.1 G.DMT ITU-T 992.3 ITU-T 992.5 Transmission rate ADSL-B:
ITU-T 992.1 G.DMT ANSI T1.413 Issue 2 ITU-T 992.3 ITU-T 992.5 ADSL-A/M:
l ADSL full rate mode (ITU-T 992.1 G.DMT): a downstream transmission rate of 8 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1024 kbit/s l ADSL2 full rate mode (ITU-T 992.3): a downstream transmission rate of 12 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1024 kbit/s l ADSL2+ full rate mode (ITU-T 992.5): a downstream transmission rate of 24 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1024 kbit/s ADSL-B:
A downstream transmission rate of 8 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1024 kbit/s Cable type Regular telephone line Table 9-19 describes the attributes of G.SHDSL interfaces. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 161 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes Table 9-19 Attributes of G.SHDSL interfaces Attribute Connector type Standards compliance Description One RJ45 connector on one end and four RJ11 connectors on the other end G.SHDSL.bit Transmission rate 5.696 Mbit/s per pair 9.10 Attributes of the Console Interface This section describes the attributes of the console interface. Table 9-20 lists the attributes of the console interface. Table 9-20 Attributes of the console interface Item Connector type Description RJ45 Standards compliance RS232 Operating mode Full duplex Universal Asynchronous Receiver/
Transmitter (UART) Data equipment type Data Circuit-terminating Equipment (DCE) Table 9-21 lists the attributes of the MiniUSB-B interface. Table 9-21 Attributes of the MiniUSB-B interface Item Connector type Standards compliance Operating mode Description MiniUSB-B, angle USB1.0 Device 9.11 Attributes of the USB Interface This section describes the attributes of the USB interface. Table 9-22 lists the attributes of the USB-A interface. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 162 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes Table 9-22 Attributes of the USB-A interface Item Connector type Description USB-A Standards compliance USB2.0, compatible with USB1.0 and USB1.1 Operating mode Host 9.12 3G Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of 3G interfaces. Table 9-23 lists the attributes of 3G interfaces. Table 9-23 3G interface attributes Item Connector Description SMA RF: connects to an antenna to provide wireless access. mini USB: connects to a USB flash drive with third-party wireless network test software, for example, Qualcomm CAIT. Standards compliance and frequency bands supported Rate GSM/GPRS/EDGE: 850/900/1800/1900 (MHz) HSPA+/HSUPA/HSDPA/WCDMA: 2100/1900/900/850 (MHz) GSM CS:
l Upstream (Tx): 9.6kbit/s l Downstream (Rx): 9.6kbit/s GPRS/EDGE: Multi-slot Class 12, Class B WCDMA CS:
l Upstream (Tx): 64 kbit/s l Downstream (Rx): 64 kbit/s WCDMA PS:
l Upstream (Tx): 384 kbit/s l Downstream (Rx): 384 kbit/s HSPA:
l Upstream (Tx): 5.76 Mbit/s l Downstream (Rx): 14.4 Mbit/s HSPA+:
l Upstream (Tx): 5.76 Mbit/s l Downstream (Rx): 21 Mbit/s Network protocol WCDMA/HSPA/GPRS/EDGE Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 163 Huawei AR1200-S&2200-S Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes 9.13 VDSL Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of the VDSL interface. Table 9-24 lists attributes of the VDSL interface. Table 9-24 VDSL interface attributes Item Description RJ11 Connector Standards compliance Rate VDSL standards:
ITU-T 993.2 ITU-T 992.5 ITU-T 992.3 ITU-T 992.1 G.DMT l ADSL2+ full rate mode (ITU-T 992.3): a downstream transmission rate of 12 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1 Mbit/s l VDSL2 mode (ITU-T 993.2): a downstream transmission rate of 100 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 50 kbit/s l ADSL2 full rate mode (ITU-T 992.5): a downstream transmission rate of 24 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1 Mbit/s l ADSL full rate mode (ITU-T 992.1 G.DMT): a downstream transmission rate of 8 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1 Mbit/s Cable type Telephone cable Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 164
1 2 3 4 | User manual III | Users Manual | 3.10 MiB | June 06 2012 / June 09 2012 |
Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Issue Date 03 2012-04-20 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2012. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied. Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address:
Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China Website:
Email:
http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description About This Document About This Document Intended Audience This document provides an overall description of the AR routers, details about each chassis and board, cables available to the device, and lists of components. This document is intended for:
l Network planning engineers l Hardware installation engineers l Commissioning engineers l On-site maintenance engineers l System maintenance engineers Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii DANGERWARNINGCAUTIONTIPNOTE Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description About This Document Change History Changes between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains all the changes in previous issues. Changes in Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Based on issue 02 (2012-03-19), this issue has the following updates:
l 3G-HSPA+7 sub card l 4GEW-T sub card l 4GEW-S sub card l VDSL sub card l AR1220L Changes in Issue 02 (2012-03-19) Based on issue 01 (2011-12-30), this issue has the following updates:
l The AR1220 DC model is added. Changes in Issue 01 (2011-12-30) Initial commercial release. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Contents Contents About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii 1 Version Matching..........................................................................................................................1 1.1 Matching Between Product Models and Software Versions..............................................................................2 1.2 Matching Between Power Supplies and Software Versions..............................................................................2 1.3 Matching Between Cards and Software Versions..............................................................................................5 2 Chassis...........................................................................................................................................15 2.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................................................16 2.2 Naming Convention..........................................................................................................................................17 2.3 Device Structure...............................................................................................................................................18 2.3.1 AR1200 Series.........................................................................................................................................18 2.3.2 AR2200 Series.........................................................................................................................................22 2.3.3 AR3200 Series.........................................................................................................................................25 2.4 System Configuration.......................................................................................................................................28 2.5 Physical Specifications.....................................................................................................................................28 3 Power Supply Units....................................................................................................................30 3.1 Power Supply Configuration............................................................................................................................31 3.2 Power Supply Unit Connection Layouts..........................................................................................................32 3.2.1 Single DC Power Supply Unit.................................................................................................................32 3.2.2 Two DC Power Supply Units..................................................................................................................32 3.2.3 Single Non-PoE AC Power Supply Unit.................................................................................................33 3.2.4 Two Non-PoE AC Power Supply Units..................................................................................................33 3.2.5 Single Non-PoE + PoE AC Power Supply Unit......................................................................................34 3.3 HW-100-48AC14D..........................................................................................................................................35 3.4 PWR350A.........................................................................................................................................................38 3.5 PWR350D.........................................................................................................................................................41 4 Heat Dissipation System............................................................................................................44 4.1 Heat Dissipation Process..................................................................................................................................45 4.2 AR2240 Fan Module........................................................................................................................................46 4.3 AR3260 Fan Module........................................................................................................................................48 5 Cards..............................................................................................................................................51 5.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................................................52 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iv Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Contents 5.1.1 Relationships Between Cards..................................................................................................................52 5.1.2 Interface Numbering................................................................................................................................54 5.1.3 Card Dimensions.....................................................................................................................................55 5.2 SRU..................................................................................................................................................................56 5.2.1 Functions and Applications.....................................................................................................................56 5.2.2 Panel and Interfaces.................................................................................................................................57 5.2.3 Technical Specifications..........................................................................................................................62 5.3 WLAN Subcard................................................................................................................................................62 5.3.1 Functions and Applications.....................................................................................................................62 5.3.2 Technical Specifications..........................................................................................................................63 5.4 Ethernet LAN Interface Card............................................................................................................................63 5.4.1 8FE1GE-8-Port 100BASE-RJ45 and 1-Port 1000BASE-RJ45 L2/L3 Ethernet Interface Card.............63 5.4.2 24GE-24-Port 1000BASE-RJ45 L2/L3 Ethernet Interface Card............................................................67 5.5 WAN Interface Card.........................................................................................................................................69 5.5.1 1GEC (1-Port-GE Combo WAN Interface Card)....................................................................................69 5.5.2 2FE-2-Port-FE WAN Interface Card.......................................................................................................74 5.5.3 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M-1/2 Port-Channelized E1/T1/PRI/VE1 Multifunctional Interface Card................76 5.5.4 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F (1/2-Port-Fractional Channelized E1/T1 WAN Interface Card)..............................81 5.5.5 1SA/2SA-1/2-Port-Synchronous/Asynchronous WAN Interface Card..................................................84 5.5.6 8AS (8-Port-Asynchronous WAN Interface Card)..................................................................................88 5.5.7 1BST (1-Port-ISDN S/T WAN Interface Card)......................................................................................90 5.5.8 1CPOS-155M (1-Port Channelized POS Interface Card).......................................................................93 5.5.9 3G-HSPA+7 (3G WAN Interface Card).................................................................................................96 5.5.10 4GEW-T (4-Port-GE Electrical WAN Interface Card).......................................................................101 5.5.11 4GEW-S (4-Port-GE Optical WAN Interface Card............................................................................103 5.6 Voice Interface Card.......................................................................................................................................107 5.6.1 2BST (2-Port-ISDN S/T Voice Interface Card)....................................................................................107 5.6.2 4FXS1FXO-4-Port FXS and 1-Port FXO Voice Interface Card...........................................................111 5.6.3 16/32/64/128-Channel DSP Module.....................................................................................................114 5.7 xDSL/xPON Interface Card............................................................................................................................115 5.7.1 ADSL-A/M and ADSL-B-1-Port-ADSL2+ ANNEX A/M and B WAN Interface Card......................115 5.7.2 4G.SHDSL-1-Port-4-Channel G.SHDSL WAN Interface Card...........................................................119 5.7.3 1PON (1-Port GPON/EPON Dual-Mode Interface Card).....................................................................121 5.7.4 VDSL (1-Port VDSL2 over POTS WAN Interface Card)....................................................................125 6 Cables...........................................................................................................................................129 6.1 AC Power Cable.............................................................................................................................................131 6.2 DC Power Cables............................................................................................................................................132 6.3 Ground Cable..................................................................................................................................................134 6.4 Console Cable.................................................................................................................................................135 6.5 Network Cable................................................................................................................................................136 6.6 Optical Fiber...................................................................................................................................................139 6.7 E1/T1 Trunk Cables........................................................................................................................................143 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Contents 6.8 Synchronous/Asynchronous Serial Interface Cables......................................................................................148 6.9 4G.SHDSL Cables..........................................................................................................................................154 6.10 ISDN-ST Cables...........................................................................................................................................156 6.11 Regular Telephone Lines..............................................................................................................................160 6.12 8AS Cable.....................................................................................................................................................161 6.13 3G Antenna...................................................................................................................................................166 7 List of Indicators........................................................................................................................170 7.1 Indicators on the AR1200 Panel.....................................................................................................................171 7.2 Indicators on the AR2220 Panel.....................................................................................................................174 7.3 Indicators on the AR2240 Panel.....................................................................................................................176 7.4 Indicators on the AR3260 Panel.....................................................................................................................177 7.5 Fan Module Indicators....................................................................................................................................177 7.6 Power Indicators.............................................................................................................................................178 7.7 SRU Indicators...............................................................................................................................................182 8 List of Cards................................................................................................................................185 8.1 Cards Supported by the AR............................................................................................................................186 8.2 Power Consumption and Weight....................................................................................................................195 9 List of Interface Attributes.......................................................................................................197 9.1 Electrical Interfaces........................................................................................................................................199 9.2 GE/PON Optical Interface Attributes.............................................................................................................200 9.3 CPOS Interface Attributes..............................................................................................................................202 9.4 E1 Interface Attributes....................................................................................................................................203 9.5 T1 Interface Attributes....................................................................................................................................204 9.6 Synchronous/Asynchronous Serial Interface Attributes.................................................................................205 9.7 ISDN S/T Interface Attributes........................................................................................................................206 9.8 FXS/FXO Interface Attributes........................................................................................................................206 9.9 ADSL2/ADSL2+/G.SHDSL Interface Attributes..........................................................................................208 9.10 Attributes of the Console Interface...............................................................................................................209 9.11 Attributes of the USB Interface....................................................................................................................209 9.12 3G Interface Attributes.................................................................................................................................210 9.13 VDSL Interface Attributes............................................................................................................................211 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vi Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 1 Version Matching 1 Version Matching About This Chapter This section describes the matching relationships between the chassis, power supplies, cards, and system software versions of AR routers. NOTE l AR version roadmap: ARV200R001C00, ARV200R001C01, ARV200R002C00, ARV200R002C01. l Unless otherwise specified, if a power supply or card is supported by version A, it is also supported by all versions later than version A. 1.1 Matching Between Product Models and Software Versions This section describes the matching relationship between AR models and software versions. 1.2 Matching Between Power Supplies and Software Versions This section describes the matching relationships between power supplies, power modes, and software versions. 1.3 Matching Between Cards and Software Versions This section describes the cards supported by AR routers, including SRUs, Ethernet LAN interface cards, WAN interface cards, voice interface cards, and xDSL/xPON interface cards. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 1 Version Matching 1.1 Matching Between Product Models and Software Versions This section describes the matching relationship between AR models and software versions. Table 1-1 Matching between product models and software versions Model Software Version ARV200R0 01C00 ARV200R0 01C01 AR1220 AR1220V AR1220W AR1220VW AR1220L AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 AR1200 series AR2200 series AR3200 series ARV200R0 02C00 ARV200R0 02C01 1.2 Matching Between Power Supplies and Software Versions This section describes the matching relationships between power supplies, power modes, and software versions. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Table 1-2 Matching between power supplies and software versions Model&Version PW R150 A 3.4 PWR 350A 3.3 HW-
100-4 8AC1 4D 54 W AC Pow er Sup ply Unit in an Ope n Rac k 54 W DC Pow er Sup ply Unit in an Ope n Rac k 60 W AC Pow er Sup ply Unit in an Ope n Rac k 1 Version Matching 3.5 PWR3 50D 150 W DC Powe r Supp ly Unit ARV20 0R001C 00 AR1220 AR1220V AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 AR1220 AR1220V AR1220W AR1220V W AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 AR1220 AR1220V AR1220W AR1220V W AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 AR1220 AR1220V ARV20 0R001C 01 ARV20 0R002C 00 ARV20 0R002C 01 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Model&Version 54 W AC Pow er Sup ply Unit in an Ope n Rac k AR1220W AR1220V W AR1220L AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 54 W DC Pow er Sup ply Unit in an Ope n Rac k 60 W AC Pow er Sup ply Unit in an Ope n Rac k PW R150 A 3.4 PWR 350A 3.3 HW-
100-4 8AC1 4D 1 Version Matching 3.5 PWR3 50D 150 W DC Powe r Supp ly Unit Table 1-3 Matching between power modes and software versions Model&Version Single DC Power Supply Unit Dual DC Power Supply Units Single Non-PoE AC Power Supply Unit ARV 200R 001C 00 ARV 200R 001C 01 AR1220 AR1220V AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 AR1220 AR1220V AR1220W AR1220VW Dual Non-PoE AC Power Supply Units Single Non-PoE
+ PoE AC Power Supply Unit Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 1 Version Matching Model&Version AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 AR1220 AR1220V AR1220W AR1220VW AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 AR1220 AR1220V AR1220W AR1220VW AR1220L AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 ARV 200R 002C 00 ARV 200R 002C 01 Single DC Power Supply Unit Dual DC Power Supply Units Single Non-PoE AC Power Supply Unit Dual Non-PoE AC Power Supply Units Single Non-PoE
+ PoE AC Power Supply Unit 1.3 Matching Between Cards and Software Versions This section describes the cards supported by AR routers, including SRUs, Ethernet LAN interface cards, WAN interface cards, voice interface cards, and xDSL/xPON interface cards. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 1 Version Matching Matching between physical cards and software versions Table 1-4 Matching between physical cards and software versions Model&Version ARV200R001C 00 AR1220 WSIC SIC XSIC AR1220 V AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 AR1220 AR1220 V AR1220 W AR1220 VW AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 AR1220 AR1220 V AR1220 W AR1220 VW AR1220 L AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 ARV200R001C 01&ARV200R0 02C00 ARV200R002C 01 voice card Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 1 Version Matching Matching between SRUs and software versions Table 1-5 Matching between SRUs and software versions Model&Version ARV200R001 C00 AR1220 AR1220V AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 AR1220 AR1220V AR1220W AR1220VW AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 AR1220 AR1220V AR1220W AR1220VW AR1220L AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 ARV200R001 C01&ARV20 0R002C00 ARV200R002 C01 SRU WLAN Subcard Matching between Ethernet LAN interface cards and software versions Table 1-6 Matching between Ethernet LAN interface cards and software versions Model&Version ARV200R001C0 0 8FE1GE 24GE AR1220 AR1220V AR2220 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 1 Version Matching Model&Version 8FE1GE 24GE ARV200R001C0 1&ARV200R002 C00 ARV200R002C0 1 AR2240 AR3260 AR1220 AR1220V AR1220W AR1220VW AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 AR1220 AR1220V AR1220W AR1220VW AR1220L AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 Matching between WAN cards and software versions Table 1-7 Matching between WAN cards and software versions Model&
8 Version A S 1S A 2S A 2F E 1 G E C 1E1T 1-F/
2E1T 1-F 2E1 T1-
M
(WS IC) 1E1 T1-
M/
2E1 T1-
M
(SIC
) 1 B S T 4 G E W
-T 4 G E W
-S 3 G-
H SP A
+7 1C P O S-
15 5 M A R1 22 0 AR V20 0R0 01C 00 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 1E1T 1-F/
2E1T 1-F 2E1 T1-
M
(WS IC) 1S A 2S A 1 G E C 8 A S 1 B S T Model&
Version 2F E 1E1 T1-
M/
2E1 T1-
M
(SIC
) 1 Version Matching 4 G E W
-T 4 G E W
-S 3 G-
H SP A
+7 1C P O S-
15 5 M AR V20 0R0 01C 01 A R1 22 0V A R2 22 0 A R2 24 0 A R3 26 0 A R1 22 0 A R1 22 0V A R1 22 0 W A R1 22 0V W A R2 22 0 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 1E1T 1-F/
2E1T 1-F 2E1 T1-
M
(WS IC) 1S A 2S A 1 G E C 8 A S 1 B S T Model&
Version 2F E 1E1 T1-
M/
2E1 T1-
M
(SIC
) 1 Version Matching 4 G E W
-T 4 G E W
-S 3 G-
H SP A
+7 1C P O S-
15 5 M AR V20 0R0 02C 00 A R2 24 0 A R3 26 0 A R1 22 0 A R1 22 0V A R1 22 0 W A R1 22 0V W A R2 22 0 A R2 24 0 A R3 26 0 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 1E1T 1-F/
2E1T 1-F 2E1 T1-
M
(WS IC) 1S A 2S A 1 G E C 8 A S 1 B S T Model&
Version 2F E 1E1 T1-
M/
2E1 T1-
M
(SIC
) 1 Version Matching 4 G E W
-T 4 G E W
-S 3 G-
H SP A
+7 1C P O S-
15 5 M A R1 22 0 A R1 22 0V A R1 22 0 W A R1 22 0V W A R1 22 0L A R2 22 0 A R2 24 0 A R3 26 0 AR V20 0R0 02C 01 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 1 Version Matching Matching between voice cards and software versions Table 1-8 Matching between voice cards and software versions Model&Version 4FXS1FXO 2BST(SIC) 2BST(WSIC) ARV200 R001C00 ARV200 R001C01 ARV200 R002C00 AR122 0 AR122 0V AR222 0 AR224 0 AR326 0 AR122 0 AR122 0V AR122 0W AR122 0VW AR222 0 AR224 0 AR326 0 AR122 0 AR122 0V AR122 0W AR122 0VW 16/32/64/128
-Channel DSP Module Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 12 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Model&Version 4FXS1FXO 2BST(SIC) 2BST(WSIC) 1 Version Matching 16/32/64/128
-Channel DSP Module AR222 0 AR224 0 AR326 0 AR122 0 AR122 0V AR122 0W AR122 0VW AR122 0L AR222 0 AR224 0 AR326 0 ARV200 R002C01 Matching between xDSL/xPON cards and software versions Table 1-9 Matching between xDSL/xPON cards and software versions ADSL-
A/M ADSL-B 4G.SHDSL 1PON VDSL Model&Versio n AR V20 0R0 01C 00 AR1220 V AR1220 AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 13 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 1 Version Matching ADSL-
A/M ADSL-B 4G.SHDSL 1PON VDSL AR1220 Model&Versio n AR V20 0R0 01C 01 AR1220 V AR1220 W AR1220 VW AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 AR1220 AR1220 V AR1220 W AR1220 VW AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 AR1220 AR1220 V AR1220 W AR1220 VW AR1220 L AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 AR V20 0R0 02C 00 AR V20 0R0 02C 01 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 14 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 2 Chassis 2 Chassis About This Chapter This section describes the characteristics, naming rules, appearance, structure, system performance, and technical specifications of the AR routers. 2.1 Introduction This section briefly describes the AR routers and the models available. 2.2 Naming Convention This section describes the naming conventions used when naming AR routers. 2.3 Device Structure This section describes the structure of the AR routers. 2.4 System Configuration 2.5 Physical Specifications Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 2 Chassis 2.1 Introduction This section briefly describes the AR routers and the models available. Description Models Huawei AR Enterprise Router (AR router for short) are the next-generation routers integrating data,voice, security, routing, switching, and virtual private network (VPN) functions. As an egress gateway for enterprises, the AR routers use the multi-core CPU processing capabilities and rapid expansibility. The AR routers offer the following models. Model AR1200 AR1220 AR1220 V AR1220 W AR1220 VW Characteristics The AR1220 is 1 U high (1 U = 44.45 mm [1.75 in.]), uses a 60 W AC power supply unit installed in an open rack, and supports two SIC cards. The integrated SRU supports fixed 8FE interfaces and fixed 2GE electrical interfaces. NOTE l AR V200R001C00 uses the 54 W AC power supply unit installed in an open rack. l AR V200R001C01 and later versions use the 60 W AC power supply unit installed in an open rack. l Compared with the AR1220, the AR1220V supports 32-channel voice and the PoE power supply unit can be installed on it. The last four FE interfaces (FE4-FE7) on the main control unit support the PoE function. l The silkscreen on the rear side of AR1220V chassis is AR1220V and a PoE power supply port is provided. l Compared with the AR1220, the AR1220W supports the Wi-Fi function and external PoE power supply unit. The last four FE interfaces (FE4-FE7) on the main control unit support the PoE function. l The silkscreen on the rear side of AR1220W chassis is AR1220W and two antennas and a PoE power supply port are provided. l Compared with the AR1220, the AR1220VW supports 32-
channel voice, Wi-Fi, and external PoE power supply unit. The last four FE interfaces (FE4-FE7) on the main control unit support the PoE function. l The silkscreen on the rear side of AR1220VW chassis is AR1220VW and two antennas and a PoE power supply port are provided. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 16 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 2 Chassis Model AR2200 AR2220 AR2240 AR3200 AR3260 Characteristics The AR2220 is 1 U high (1 U = 44.45 mm), uses a 150 W power supply unit, and supports four SIC cards and two WSIC cards. The integrated SRU supports fixed 3GE interfaces (including one combo interface). The backplane is in the middle of the chassis, and cards are installed on the front and rear sides of the backplane. The AR2240 is 2 U high (1 U = 44.45 mm [1.75 in.]) and uses a 350 W pluggable power supply unit. The AR2240 has a backplane, front subcards, and rear subcards. The pluggable fan module uses front-
access design. The AR2240 supports four SIC cards, two WSIC cards, and two XSIC cards. The AR3260 is 3 U high (1 U = 44.45 mm [1.75 in.]) and uses a 350 W pluggable power supply unit. The AR3260 has a backplane, front subcards, and rear subcards. The pluggable fan module uses front-
access design. The AR3260 supports four SIC cards, two WSIC cards, and four XSIC cards. NOTE l SIC: Service Interface Card. This is the smallest card supported by ARs. l WSIC: Wide SIC. The same height as a SIC, but twice the width. l XSIC: Extended SIC. Double the height and width of an XSIC and twice those of a SIC. l EXSIC: Extra-Extended SIC. Twice the height of a SIC, and four times the width of a SIC. NOTE In this document, AR1200 indicates AR1220, AR1220V, AR1220W, and AR1220VW. 2.2 Naming Convention This section describes the naming conventions used when naming AR routers. Figure 2-1 Naming convention ARB1 B2 B3 B4C1-D1 Example:
AR1220 V Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 17 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 2 Chassis Table 2-1 Naming convention of AR routers Field B1 B2 B3 B4 C1 D1 Description Product series code. AR routers includes series 1, 2 and 3. Fixed as 2, indicating enterprise router. Number of service card slots (dependent on B1):
l When B1 is 1, B3 indicates the number of SIC cards. l When B1 is 2 or 3, B3 indicates the number of WSIC and XSIC cards. The value is fixed as 0. C1 contains one or two upper-case letters. l W: WLAN l V: voice l A: AC (This is the default configuration, so A is not contained in the product name) l D: DC 2.3 Device Structure This section describes the structure of the AR routers. 2.3.1 AR1200 Series This section describes the structure of the AR1200. Appearance NOTE AR1220 has two models: AC model and DC model. The two models are identical in the front panels, but different in the power supply units at the rear of the chassis. Figure 2-2 and Figure 2-3 show front views of AR1200. Figure 2-2 AR1220, AR1220L and AR1220V front view 18 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 18 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 2 Chassis Figure 2-3 AR1220W and AR1220VW front view 19 18 20 Figure 2-4, Figure 2-5, Figure 2-6, Figure 2-7, Figure 2-8 and Figure 2-9 show rear views of AR1200. Figure 2-4 AR1220 AC model rear view 7 2 15 14 13 Figure 2-5 AR1220 DC model rear view 7 2 1 1 12 10 4 3 21 3 15 14 13 12 10 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 19 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Figure 2-6 AR1220V rear view 7 2 1 2 Chassis 4 3 15 14 13 12 11 10 Figure 2-7 AR1220W rear view 7 2 1 4 3 15 14 13 12 11 10 Figure 2-8 AR1220VW rear view 7 2 1 4 3 15 14 13 12 11 10 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 20 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Figure 2-9 AR1220L rear view 7 2 1 2 Chassis 4 3 15 14 13 10 1: Pluggable card 2: ESD jack 3: Ground screw 4: AC jack 7: Security lock 10: AC power switch 11: PoE port 13: Two Fixed GE interfaces on the panel 14: Mini USB interface 15: CON/AUX interface 12: Fixed 8FE interface on the panel 18: USB interfaces NOTE After a 3G USB modem is inserted, install a protection cap on it, as shown in the following figure. 19: Antenna 20: WLAN switch 21: DC power jack Slot Distribution Figure 2-10 shows slot distribution on AR1200. NOTE l Two SIC slots can be combined into one WSIC slot by removing the guide rail. l Slots can be combined into one, but one slot cannot be divided into multiple slots. l After two slots are combined into one, the slot ID is the larger number of the two original slots. Figure 2-10 AR1200 slot distribution Device Model Front view AR1200 Slot Distribution Slot Combination NA NA Rear view 2(SIC) 1(SIC) 0(SRU) Two SIC slots are combined into one WSIC slot 2(WSIC) 0(SRU) Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 21 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 2 Chassis As shown in Figure 2-10, the slots of AR1200 can be combined :
Slot 1 and slot 2 are combined into new slot 2. 2.3.2 AR2200 Series This section describes the structure of the AR2200. Appearance Figure 2-11 and Figure 2-12 show front views of AR2200. Figure 2-11 AR2220 front view 10 4 16 17 13 18 14 15 Figure 2-12 AR2240 front view 6 10 4 9 6 10 4 2 8 Figure 2-13 and Figure 2-14 show rear views of AR2200. Figure 2-13 AR2220 rear view 23 1 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 22 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 2 Chassis Figure 2-14 AR2240 rear view 2 3 1 1: Pluggable card 2: ESD jack 3: Ground screw 4: AC jack 6: Pluggable AC power supply unit 8: Pluggable fan module 9: SRU 10: AC power switch 13: Two Fixed GE interfaces on the panel 14: Mini USB interface 15: CON/AUX interface 16: Micro SD card interface 17: GE optical/
electrical Combo interface 18: USB interfaces NOTE After a 3G USB modem is inserted, install a protection cap on it, as shown in the following figure. NOTE The two power supply units of the AR2240 work in load balancing mode. Slot Distribution Figure 2-15 shows slot distribution on AR2200. NOTE l Two SIC slots can be combined into one WSIC slot by removing the guide rail. l Two SIC slots and one WSIC slot can be combined into one XSIC slot by removing the guide rail. l Two XSIC slots can be combined into one EXSIC slot by removing the guide rail. l Slots can be combined into one, but one slot cannot be divided into multiple slots. l After two slots are combined into one, the slot ID is the larger number of the two original slots. l In AR V200R002C00, a WSIC card can be inserted into an XSIC slot with a special component. The WSIC card is in the lower side of the slot and uses the XSIC slot ID as its own slot ID. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 23 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Figure 2-15 AR2200 slot distribution 2 Chassis Device Model Front view AR2220 Rear view Slot Distribution Slot Combination 7(Power) 0(SRU) NA 4(SIC) 3(SIC) 6(WSIC) 2(SIC) 1(SIC) 5(WSIC) Two SIC slots are combined into one WSIC slot 4(WSIC) 6(WSIC) 2(WSIC) 5(WSIC) Two WSIC slots are combined into one XSIC slot 6(XSIC) 5(XSIC) Front view AR2240 10(Power) 9(Power) 11(SRU) F A N NA Two SIC slots are combined into one WSIC slot 4(WSIC) 6(WSIC) 8(XSIC) 2(WSIC) 5(WSIC) 7(XSIC) Rear view 4(SIC) 3(SIC) 6(WSIC) 8(XSIC) 2(SIC) 1(SIC) 5(WSIC) 7(XSIC) Two WSIC slots are combined into one XSIC slot 6(XSIC) 5(XSIC) 8(XSIC) 7(XSIC) Two XSIC slots are combined into one EXSIC slot 6(XSIC) 5(XSIC) 8(EXSIC) As shown in Figure 2-15, the slots of AR2200 can be combined as follows:
l AR2220:
Slot 1 and slot 2 are combined into new slot 2. Slot 3 and slot 4 are combined into new slot 4. New slot 2 and slot 5 are combined into new slot 5. New slot 4 and slot 6 are combined into new slot 6. l AR2240:
Slot 1 and slot 2 are combined into new slot 2. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 24 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 2 Chassis Slot 3 and slot 4 are combined into new slot 4. New slot 2 and slot 5 are combined into new slot 5. New slot 4 and slot 6 are combined into new slot 6. Slot 7 and slot 8 are combined into new slot 8. 2.3.3 AR3200 Series This section describes the structure of the AR3200. Appearance Figure 2-16 shows the front view of AR3260. Figure 2-16 AR3260 front view 6 10 4 9 6 10 4 2 8 Figure 2-17 shows the rear view of AR3260. Figure 2-17 AR3260 rear view 2 3 1 1: Pluggable card 2: ESD jack 3: Ground screw 4: AC jack Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 25 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 2 Chassis 6: Pluggable AC power supply unit 8: Pluggable fan module 9: SRU 10: AC power switch NOTE The two power supply units of the AR3260 work in load balancing mode. Slot Distribution Figure 2-18 shows slot distribution on AR3260. NOTE l Two SIC slots can be combined into one WSIC slot by removing the guide rail. l Two SIC slots and one WSIC slot can be combined into one XSIC slot by removing the guide rail. l Two XSIC slots can be combined into one EXSIC slot by removing the guide rail. l Slots can be combined into one, but one slot cannot be divided into multiple slots. l After two slots are combined into one, the slot ID is the larger number of the two original slots. l In AR V200R002C00 and later versions, a WSIC card can be inserted into an XSIC slot. The WSIC card is in the lower side of the slot and uses the XSIC slot ID as its own slot ID. l MFS: Multiple Function Slot. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 26 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 2 Chassis Figure 2-18 AR3200 slot distribution Device Model Slot Distribution AR3260 Front view 12(Power) 11(Power) 14(MFS) 13(MFS) 15(SRU) F A N Slot Combination Insert the SRU into slot 15. Two SIC slots are combined into one WSIC slot 4(WSIC) 6(WSIC) 8(XSIC) 2(WSIC) 5(WSIC) 7(XSIC) 10(XSIC) 9(XSIC) 4(SIC) 3(SIC) 6(WSIC) 8(XSIC) Rear view 2(SIC) 1(SIC) 5(WSIC) 7(XSIC) Two WSIC slots are combined into one XSIC slot 6(XSIC) 5(XSIC) 10(XSIC) 9(XSIC) 8(XSIC) 10(XSIC) 7(XSIC) 9(XSIC) Two XSIC slots are combined into one EXSIC slot 6(XSIC) 5(XSIC) 8(EXSIC) 10(EXSIC) As shown in Figure 2-18, the slots of AR3260 can be combined as follows:
l AR3260:
Slot 1 and slot 2 are combined into new slot 2. Slot 3 and slot 4 are combined into new slot 4. New slot 2 and slot 5 are combined into new slot 5. New slot 4 and slot 6 are combined into new slot 6. Slot 7 and slot 8 are combined into new slot 8. Slot 9 and slot 10 are combined into new slot 10. Slot 13 and slot 14 are combined into new slot 14, which is reserved for the slave main control board. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 27 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 2 Chassis 2.4 System Configuration Table 2-2 System configuration Model Processor AR1200 Series AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 2-core: 500 MHz 4-core: 600 MHz 8-core: 600 MHz 12-core: 750 MHz Memory 512 MB 2 GB 2 GB 2 GB Flash Memory 256 MB Micro SD Card 0 16 MB 2 GB 16 MB 2 GB 16 MB 2 GB 2.5 Physical Specifications Table 2-3 Physical specifications Item Dimensions (width x depth x height) Description l Without rack-mounting ear:
AR1200: 390.0 mm x 220.0 mm x 44.5 mm
(15.35 in. x 8.66 in. x 1.75 in.) AR2220: 442.0 mm x 420.0 mm x 44.5 mm
(17.4 in. x 16.54 in. x 1.75 in.) AR2240: 442.0 mm x 470.0 mm x 88.1 mm
(17.4 in. x 18.5 in. x 3.47 in.) AR3260: 442.0 mm x 470.0 mm x 130.5 mm (17.4 in. x 18.5 in. x 5.14 in.) l With rack-mounting ear:
AR1200: 482.6 mm x 220.0 mm x 44.5 mm
(19 in. x 8.66 in. x 1.75 in.) AR2220: 482.6 mm x 420.0 mm x 44.5 mm
(19 in. x 16.54 in. x 1.75 in.) AR2240: 482.6 mm x 470.0 mm x 88.1 mm
(19 in. x 18.5 in. x 3.47 in.) AR3260: 482.6 mm x 470.0 mm x 130.5 mm (19 in. x 18.5 in. x 5.14 in.) Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 28 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 2 Chassis Item Maximum power consumption Full configuration Empty chassis Weight Full configuration Empty chassis Operating temperature Relative humidity Altitude Long-term operating altitude Description l AR1200: 52 W l AR2220: 95 W l AR2240: 180 W l AR3260: 270 W l AR1200: 33.3 W l AR2220: 65.1 W l AR2240: 114.9 W l AR3260: 163.2 W l AR1200: 3.60 kg (7.94 lb) l AR2220: 8.45 kg (18.63 lb) l AR2240: 19.30 kg (42.56 lb) l AR3260: 25.65 kg (56.56 lb) l AR1200: 2.90 kg (6.39 lb) l AR2220: 4.95 kg (10.91 lb) l AR2240: 8.85 kg (19.51 lb) l AR3260: 11.00 kg (24.26 lb) 0C to 40C (0F to 104F) 5% RH to 90% RH, non-condensing Below 4000 m (13123.2 ft.) Storage altitude Below 4000 m (13123.2 ft.) Rated voltage 100 V AC to 240 V AC, 50/60Hz Maximum voltage 85 V AC to 264 V AC, 47/63Hz AC input voltage Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 29 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 3 Power Supply Units 3 Power Supply Units About This Chapter This section describes the power supply units supported by the AR routers. CAUTION l Power off the AR routers before removing or performing maintenance on the power supply units. l To power off the AR routers , power off all its power supply units. 3.1 Power Supply Configuration This section describes the configurations of power supply units on the AR routers. 3.2 Power Supply Unit Connection Layouts This section illustrates the connection between each power supply unit and the motherboard. 3.3 HW-100-48AC14D This section describes the HW-100-48AC14D power supply unit, including the naming convention, functions, appearance, and technical specifications. 3.4 PWR350A This section describes the PWR350A power supply unit, including the naming convention, functions, appearance, and technical specifications. 3.5 PWR350D This section describes the PWR350D power supply unit, including the naming convention, functions, appearance, and technical specifications. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 30 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 3 Power Supply Units 3.1 Power Supply Configuration This section describes the configurations of power supply units on the AR routers. Table 3-1 describes the power supply units supported by each model. Maintenance Maintain together with the chassis. Table 3-1 Power supply units supported by each model Power Supply Unit Description 60 W AC power supply unit in an open rack NOTE AC power supply unit fixed in the chassis Installation Fixed in the chassis, does not need to be connected to the chassis using cables. l AR V200R001C00 uses the 54 W AC power supply unit installed in an open rack. l AR V200R001C01 and later versions use the 60 W AC power supply unit installed in an open rack. 3.3 HW-100-48AC14D External PoE AC power supply unit PWR150A AC power supply unit 3.4 PWR350A AC power supply unit 150 W DC Power Supply DC power supply unit Maintain independently from the chassis. Maintain together with the chassis. Front-access design, removable. Maintain together with the chassis. Connected to the PoE port at the back of the chassis using its own power cable. Inserted into a power supply slot. The device supports only one power supply unit. Inserted into a power supply slot. The device supports two power supply units. Inserted into a power supply slot. The device supports only one power supply unit. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 31 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Power Supply Unit Description 3.5 PWR350D DC power supply unit 3 Power Supply Units Maintenance Front-access design, removable. Installation Inserted into a power supply slot. The device supports two power supply units. 3.2 Power Supply Unit Connection Layouts This section illustrates the connection between each power supply unit and the motherboard. 3.2.1 Single DC Power Supply Unit Figure 3-1 shows the layout of single DC power supply unit connection to motherboard. Figure 3-1 Layout of single DC power supply unit connection to motherboard 12V GND Motherboard PWR NEG RTN 1. NEG: Power cable 2. RTN: Power ground cable 3. GND: Grounding After the DC power is transmitted to the PWR module, the PWR module outputs 12 V voltage, and then the motherboard provides power for the entire device. 3.2.2 Two DC Power Supply Units Figure 3-2 shows the layout of dual DC power supply unit connection to motherboard. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 32 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 3 Power Supply Units Figure 3-2 Layout of dual DC power supply unit connection to motherboard 12V GND Motherboard PWR1 PWR2 NEG RTN NEG RTN 1. NEG: Power cable 2. RTN: Power ground cable 3. GND: Grounding After the DC power is transmitted to the PWR module, the PWR module outputs 12 V voltage, and then the motherboard provides power for the entire device. 3.2.3 Single Non-PoE AC Power Supply Unit Figure 3-3 shows the layout of single non-PoE AC power supply unit connection to motherboard. Figure 3-3 Layout of single non-PoE AC power supply unit connection to motherboard 12V GND Motherboard PWR L N PGND 1. L: Live wire 2. N: Neutral wire 3. PGND: PGND wire 4. GND: Grounding After the AC power is transmitted to the PWR module, the PWR module outputs 12 V voltage, and then the motherboard provides power for the entire device. 3.2.4 Two Non-PoE AC Power Supply Units Figure 3-4 shows the layout of dual non-PoE AC power supply unit connection to motherboard. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 33 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 3 Power Supply Units Figure 3-4 Layout of dual non-PoE AC power supply unit connection to motherboard 12V GND Motherboard PWR1 PWR2 L N PGND L N PGND 1. L: Live wire 2. N: Neutral wire 3. PGND: PGND wire 4. GND: Grounding After the AC power is transmitted to the PWR module, the PWR module outputs 12 V voltage, and then the motherboard provides power for the entire device. 3.2.5 Single Non-PoE + PoE AC Power Supply Unit Figure 3-5 shows the layout of single non-PoE + PoE AC power supply unit connection to motherboard. Figure 3-5 Layout of single non-PoE + PoE AC power supply unit connection to motherboard
-53V RTN PoE Port (FE4~FE7) 12V GND
-53V RTN Motherboard PSE on the SRU PWR PWR L N PGND L N PGND 1. L: Live wire 2. N: Neutral wire 3. PGND: PGND wire 4. GND: Grounding 5. RTN: Power ground cable The non-PoE AC power supply unit and PoE AC power supply unit are independent of each other:
l Non-PoE AC power supply unit: After the AC power is transmitted to the PWR module, the PWR module outputs 12 V voltage, and then the motherboard provides power for the entire device. l PoE AC power supply unit: After the AC power is transmitted to the PoE module, the PoE module outputs -53 V voltage, and then the PSE on the SRU provides power for the powered devices (PDs) connected to the PoE interface. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 34 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 3 Power Supply Units 3.3 HW-100-48AC14D This section describes the HW-100-48AC14D power supply unit, including the naming convention, functions, appearance, and technical specifications. Naming Convention Figure 3-6 illustrates the naming convention of the HW-100-48AC14D. Figure 3-6 HW-100-48AC14D naming convention HW-100-48AC14D 1 2 3 4 5 Number Description
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5) Product brand Output power parameters l 100: The output power is 100 W. l 48: The output voltage is 48 V. Power supply unit type l A (Alternate): AC/DC power supply unit l D (Direct): DC/DC power supply unit Socket type l C14 is a type of socket. D (Desk), indicating the desktop power supply. Functions The HW-100-48AC14D uses 90 V AC-264 V AC input power, and provide 48 V/100 W output power when no fan is used. Table 3-2 describes the protection functions provided by the HW-100-48AC14D. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 35 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 3 Power Supply Units Table 3-2 Protection functions of the HW-100-48AC14D Item Minimu m Value
-
Typical Value
-
Maximu m Value 62 V Input protecti on Output protecti on Input undervolta ge protection Input undervolta ge recovery Output overvoltag e protection Output overcurrent protection Output short-
circuit protection
-
Overheating protection
-
-
51 V
-
-
80 V 58 V 2.5 A 3 A 3.5 A
-
-
-
-
Remarks Input voltage can be restored to the normal range automatically. Hysteresis is not smaller than 5 V. Output voltage can be restored to the normal range automatically. Output current can be restored to the normal range automatically. Output short-circuit can be recovered automatically. When temperature exceeds the upper limit, the power supply unit automatically shuts down to avoid permanent damage. No smoke will be generated. Temperature is reduced below 55C (131F). Appearance Figure 3-7 shows the appearance of the HW-100-48AC14D. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 36 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 3 Power Supply Units Figure 3-7 Appearance of the HW-100-48AC14D Table 3-3 describes meanings of the indicators. Table 3-3 Description of the HW-100-48AC14D indicators Indicator Power indicator Color Blue Description If the indicator is steady on, the output power is in the normal range. If the indicator is off, the power supply unit does not have output power. Technical Specifications Table 3-4 describes the technical specifications of the HW-100-48AC14D. Table 3-4 Technical specifications of the HW-100-48AC14D Item Dimensions (width x depth x height) Specification 72 mm x 171 mm x 40 mm (2.83 in. x 6.73 in. x 1.57 in.) Weight 0.65 kg (1.5 lb) AC input voltage 90 V AC to 264 V AC; typical: 110 V AC/220 V AC AC input frequency 47 Hz to 63 Hz; typical: 50 Hz/60 Hz Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 37 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 3 Power Supply Units Item Rated operating voltage Rated output current Rated output voltage Specification 100 V AC to 240 V AC; typical: 110 V AC/220 V AC 2.08 A 48 V Output power 100 W Operating temperature Humidity Altitude 0C to 40C (0F to 104F) 20% RH to 80% RH 4000 m (13123.2 ft.) 3.4 PWR350A This section describes the PWR350A power supply unit, including the naming convention, functions, appearance, and technical specifications. Naming Convention Figure 3-8 illustrates the naming convention of the PWR350A. Figure 3-8 PWR350A naming convention PWR350A 1 2 3 Number Description
(1)
(2)
(3) Power supply unit Output power parameters l 350: The output power is 350 W. Powering mode l A (Alternate): alternating current Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 38 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 3 Power Supply Units Functions The PWR350A uses 90 V AC-290 V AC input power, and provides 12 V/350 W output power. The PWR350A has a fan. Table 3-5 describes the protection functions of the PWR350A. Table 3-5 Protection functions of the PWR350A Item Typical Value
-
Minimu m Value
-
Input protectio n Input undervolta ge protection Output protectio n Input overvoltag e Input overcurren t protection Output overvoltag e protection Output overcurren t protection Output short-
circuit protection Overheating protection 305 V
-
14 V 120% x 29.2 A
-
75C
(167F)
-
-
-
-
-
-
Maximu m Value 75 V 325 V
-
16 V 150% x 29.2 A
-
-
Remarks Input voltage can be restored to the normal range automatically, and hysteresis is 5 V or less. Input voltage can be restored to the normal range automatically, and hysteresis is 5 V or less. The AC input power lines
(L and N) have fuses.
-
-
Output short-circuit can be recovered automatically. When temperature exceeds the upper limit, the power supply unit automatically shuts down to avoid permanent damage. When temperature is restored to the normal range, the power supply unit restarts automatically. Appearance Figure 3-9 shows the appearance of the PWR350A. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 39 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 3 Power Supply Units Figure 3-9 Appearance of the PWR350A 3 2 4 1 1. Handle 2. Switch 3. Indicator 4. AC jack Table 3-6 describes the meanings of the PWR350A indicators. Table 3-6 Description of the PWR350A indicators Indicator Power indicator
(STATUS) Color Red and green Description If the indicator is steady green, the input power is in the normal range. If the indicator blinks alternately between red and green, the output power is out of range, for example, when an overvoltage, overcurrent, or short circuit event occurs. In these events, the power supply unit goes into hiccup protection mode. Technical Specifications Table 3-7 describes the technical specifications of the PWR350A. Table 3-7 Technical specifications of the PWR350A Item Dimensions (width x depth x height) Specification 201.0 mm x 260.5 mm x 38.5 mm (7.91 in. x 10.26 in. x 1.52 in.) Weight 1.45 kg (3.2 lb) AC input voltage 90 V AC to 290 V AC; typical: 110 V AC/220 V AC AC input frequency 47 Hz to 63 Hz; typical: 50 Hz/60 Hz Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 40 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 3 Power Supply Units Item Input current Rated output voltage Output voltage range Specification 5 A 12 V DC 11.64 V DC to 12.36 V DC Output power 350 W Operating temperature Humidity Altitude
-25C to 60C (-80F to 140F) 5% RH to 95% RH, non-condensing 4000 m (13123.2 ft.) The operating temperature is significantly reduced when at altitudes between 3000 (9842.4 ft.)and 4000 m (13123.2 ft.). The operating temperature drops 1C (33.8F)for every 200 m (656.16 ft.)increase in altitude. 3.5 PWR350D This section describes the PWR350D power supply unit, including the naming convention, functions, appearance, and technical specifications. Naming Convention Figure 3-10 illustrates the naming convention of the PWR350D. Figure 3-10 PWR350D naming convention PWR350D 1 2 3 Number Description
(1)
(2) Power supply unit Output power parameters l 350: The output power is 350 W. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 41 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 3 Power Supply Units
(3) Powering mode l D (Direct): direct current Functions Appearance The PWR350D provides +12 V DC power. It has the following functions:
l EMC filtering, surge protection, and short circuit protection. l Various alarms, for example, the alarm triggered when there is no power input, the alarm for the air breaker status, the alarm for ineffective surge protection, and the alarm for undervoltage input. Figure 3-11 shows the appearance of the PWR350D. Figure 3-11 Appearance of the PWR350D 1 2 3 4 1. Handle 2. Switch 3. Indicator 4. DC jack Table 3-8 describes the meanings of the PWR350D indicators. Table 3-8 Description of the PWR350D indicators Name STATUS Status Off Description l The input power is out of range, for example, no DC input power, DC input overvoltage, and DC input undervoltage. l The output power is out of range, for example, undervoltage or overtemperature occurs. Green The DC input power is within range. Blinking green The output power is out of range, for example, overvoltage, overcurrent, and short circuit occurs. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 42 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Technical Specifications 3 Power Supply Units Table 3-9 describes the technical specifications of the PWR350D. Table 3-9 Technical specifications of the PWR350D Item Dimensions
(width x depth x height) Specification 201.0 mm x 240.0 mm x 40.0 mm (7.91 in. x 9.45 in. x 1.57 in.) Weight Rated input voltage Input voltage range Rated output voltage 0.8 kg (1.77 lb)
-60 V DC to -48 V DC
-72 V DC to -38.4 V DC 12 V Output power 350 W Long-term operating temperature Humidity Altitude
-25C to 45C (-80F to 113F) 5% RH to 95% RH 4000 m (13123.2 ft.) The operating temperature is significantly reduced when at altitudes between 3000 (9842.4)and 4000 m (13123.2 ft.). The operating temperature drops 1C (33.8F) for every 200 m (656.16 ft.) increase in altitude. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 43 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 4 Heat Dissipation System 4 Heat Dissipation System About This Chapter This section describes the heat dissipation system of the AR router. The fan module of the AR router is described as follows:
l The fan module of the AR1200 and AR2220 is located on the right side in the chassis. The fan module dimensions of the AR1200 are 40 mm [1.58 in.] (width) x 20 mm [0.79 in.] (depth). The fan module dimensions of the AR2220 are 40 mm [1.58 in.] (width) x 20 mm [0.79 in.] (depth). l The fan module of the AR2240 is 2 U high. It is pluggable and uses front-access design. l The fan module of the AR3260 is 3 U high. It is pluggable and uses front-access design. 4.1 Heat Dissipation Process The AR routers heat dissipation system uses fans to create a left-to-right air channel. 4.2 AR2240 Fan Module The AR2240 fan module is 2 U high, pluggable and uses front-access design. 4.3 AR3260 Fan Module The fan module of the AR3260 is 3 U high. It is pluggable and uses front-access design. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 44 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 4 Heat Dissipation System 4.1 Heat Dissipation Process The AR routers heat dissipation system uses fans to create a left-to-right air channel. NOTE The heat dissipation system ensures that the AR routers operates at a normal temperature. For temperature requirements, see 2.5 Physical Specifications. Figure 4-1 shows air circulation through the AR1200 chassis. Figure 4-1 Air circulation through the AR1200 chassis Figure 4-2 shows air circulation through the AR2220 chassis. Figure 4-2 Air circulation through the AR2220 chassis Figure 4-3 shows air circulation through the AR2240 chassis. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 45 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 4 Heat Dissipation System Figure 4-3 Air circulation through the AR2240 chassis Figure 4-4 shows air circulation through the AR3260 chassis. Figure 4-4 Air circulation through the AR3260 chassis 4.2 AR2240 Fan Module The AR2240 fan module is 2 U high, pluggable and uses front-access design. Functions The fan module is located on the right side of the AR2240 chassis for heat dissipation and ventilation. If a single fan failed, the device will be overheated and its performance is then affected. When this occurs, replace the entire fan frame immediately. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 46 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 4 Heat Dissipation System Structure Panel The fan module of the AR2240 consists of a fan tray, five 12 V fans with dimensions 80 mm
[3.16 in.] (width) x 25 mm [0.99 in.] (depth), and a fan control board (FCB). Figure 4-5 shows the panel of the fan module. Figure 4-5 Fan module panel of the AR2240 Table 4-1 Description of the fan module indicator Indicator STATUS Color Red and green Description If the indicator blinks green once 2s (0.5 Hz), the fan module is operating properly. If the indicator blinks green once 0.25s (4 Hz), the fan module cannot communicate with the device. If the indicator is steady red, the fan module is faulty and an alarm is generated. Technical Specifications Table 4-2 describes the technical specifications of the fan module on the AR2240. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 47 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 4 Heat Dissipation System Table 4-2 Technical specifications of the fan module Item Dimensions (width x depth x height) Specification 27.4 mm x 478.6 mm x 84.3 mm (1.08 in. x 18.85 in. x 3.32 in.) Weight 1.05 kg (2.32 lb) Maximum power consumption Maximum wind pressure Maximum wind rate 60 W 150 Pa 400 CFM Maximum noise 61 dB Operating voltage of a fan 7 V DC to 15 V DC 4.3 AR3260 Fan Module The fan module of the AR3260 is 3 U high. It is pluggable and uses front-access design. Functions Structure Panel The fan module is located on the right side of the AR3260 chassis for heat dissipation and ventilation. If a single fan failed, the heat dissipation for the AR3260 will be affected. When this occurs, replace the entire fan frame immediately. The fan module of the AR3260 consists of a fan tray, three 12 V fans with dimensions 120 mm
(width) x 25 mm (depth), and a fan control board (FCB). Figure 4-6 shows the panel of the fan module. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 48 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 4 Heat Dissipation System Figure 4-6 Fan module panel of the AR3260 Table 4-3 Description of the fan module indicator Indicator STATUS Color Red and green Description If the indicator blinks green once 2s (0.5 Hz), the fan module is operating properly. If the indicator blinks green once 0.25s (4 Hz), the fan module cannot communicate with the device. If the indicator is steady red, the fan module is faulty and an alarm is generated. Technical Specifications Table 4-4 describes the technical specifications of the fan module on the AR3260. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 49 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 4 Heat Dissipation System Table 4-4 Technical specifications of the fan module Item Dimensions (width x depth x height) Specification 27.4 mm x 478.6 mm x 125.7 mm Weight Maximum power consumption Maximum wind pressure Maximum wind rate 1.45 kg 90 W 226 Pa 543 CFM Maximum noise 66.8 dB Operating voltage of a fan 7 V DC to 15 V DC Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 50 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards 5 Cards About This Chapter This chapter describes the cards supported by the AR routers. 5.1 Introduction This section describes the cards supported by the AR routers, including card types, relationships between cards, the interface numbering scheme, and card dimensions. 5.2 SRU The SRU is the main control board on the AR2240 or AR3260 and is pluggable. 5.3 WLAN Subcard WLAN subcards are Wi-Fi modules. 5.4 Ethernet LAN Interface Card This section describes the types, functions, applications, appearance, interfaces, and technical specifications of the Ethernet LAN interface card. 5.5 WAN Interface Card This section describes the types, functions, applications, appearance, interfaces, and technical specifications of the WAN interface card. 5.6 Voice Interface Card This section describes the types, functions, applications, appearance, interfaces, and technical specifications of the voice interface card. 5.7 xDSL/xPON Interface Card This section describes the types, functions, applications, appearance, interfaces, and technical specifications of the xDSL/xPON interface card. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 51 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards 5.1 Introduction This section describes the cards supported by the AR routers, including card types, relationships between cards, the interface numbering scheme, and card dimensions. 5.1.1 Relationships Between Cards This section describes the relationships between the cards supported by the AR routers. Figure 5-1,Figure 5-2,Figure 5-3 and Figure 5-4 illustrates the relationships between the cards supported by the AR routers. NOTE l On the AR1200, the backplane is at the bottom of the chassis, and cards are installed on the backplane. l On the AR2220, the backplane is in the middle of the chassis, cards are installed on the rear side of the backplane, and a power supply module is installed on the front side of the backplane. l On the AR2240, the backplane is in the middle of the chassis, cards are installed on the front and rear sides of the backplane, and a power supply unit is installed on the front side of the backplane. l On the AR3260, the backplane is in the middle of the chassis, cards are installed on the front and rear sides of the backplane, and a power supply unit is installed on the front side of the backplane. Figure 5-1 Relationships between cards on the AR1200 SRU Fan Service card Service card Power Backplane Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 52 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Figure 5-2 Relationships between cards on the AR2220 Backplane Service card Service card SRU Fan Power Figure 5-3 Relationships between cards on the AR2240 Backplane Service card Service card SRU Power Fan Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 53 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Figure 5-4 Relationships between cards on the AR3260 SRU Power Fan Backplane Service card Service card 5.1.2 Interface Numbering This section describes the interface numbering scheme on the AR routers. On the AR routers, interfaces are numbered in the format of slot ID/subcard ID/interface sequence number. l Slot ID The slot ID specifies the ID of the slot where a card resides. The SRU of the AR1200 and 2220 is integrated with the chassis, so the slot ID is fixed as 0. When slots need to be combined into one slot, the greater slot ID is used as the new slot ID. For example, when slot 1 and slot 2 are combined, slot ID 2 is used as the new slot ID. l Subcard ID The subcard ID specifies the ID of a subcard. The cards of AR routers series routers do not support subcards. Therefore, the subcard ID of the AR routers is fixed as 0. l Interface sequence number The interface sequence number indicates the number of each interface on a card. There is only one row of interfaces on the interface card. These interfaces are numbered from left to right starting with 0. 0 1 2 3 There are two rows of interfaces on the interface card. These interfaces are numbered from bottom to top and left to right starting with 0. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 54 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards 1 0 3 2 5 4 7 6 9 8 11 10 5.1.3 Card Dimensions This section explains the conventions for measuring cards and lists the dimensions of SIC, WSIC, XSIC and EXSIC card. Figure 5-5 illustrates the dimensions of a card. Figure 5-5 Card dimensions description Height Width Depth NOTE The card dimensions are defined as follows:
l Depth: the distance between the handle and the end of Printed Circuit Board (PCB) l Width: the longest distance between the tops of two handles l Height: the height of the ejector lever Figure 5-6 shows the cards supported by the AR routers and Table 5-1 lists the card dimensions. Figure 5-6 Card appearances SIC WSIC XSIC EXSIC Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 55 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Table 5-1 Card dimensions Card Type SIC card WSIC card XSIC card EXSIC card SRU 5.2 SRU 5 Cards Dimensions (Depth x Width x Height) 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 3.94 in. x 0.78 in.) 223.5 mm x 201 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 7.92 in. x 0.78 in.) 223.5 mm x 201 mm x 40.14 mm (8.8 in. x 7.92 in. x 1.58 in.) 223.5 mm x 402.8 mm x 40.14 mm (8.8 in. x 15.83 in. x 1.58 in.) 270.85 mm x 402.8 mm x 40.14 mm (10.67 in. x 15.83 in. x 1.58 in.) The SRU is the main control board on the AR2240 or AR3260 and is pluggable. The SRUs are classified into SRU40 and SRU80. NOTE l AR V200R001C00: SRU40 can only be used on AR2240 and SRU80 can only be used on AR3260. l AR V200R001C01 and later versions: SRU40 and SRU80 can be used on both AR2240 and AR3260. Table 5-2 shows the comparison between the SRU40 and SRU80. Table 5-2 Comparison between the SRU40 and SRU80 Card Name SRU40 Performance 600 MHZ CPU with eight kernels Function Traffic management is not supported. SRU80 750 MHZ CPU with 12 kernels Traffic management is supported. 5.2.1 Functions and Applications Functions The SRU integrates the control and management functions and provides the control plane, management plane, and switching plane for the system. l Control plane: provides functions such as protocol processing, service processing, route calculation, forwarding control, service scheduling, traffic statistics, and system security. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 56 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards l Management plane: provides functions such as system monitoring, environment monitoring, log and alarm processing, system loading, and system upgrade. l Switching plane: provides high-speed and non-blocking data channels to implement service switching between service modules. The SRU consists of the following modules:
l Control module: functions as the control and management plane for the system, implementing protocol processing, route calculation, forwarding control, system management, and system security. l Switching module: functions as the service switching plane and provides high-speed service channels to implement service switching, including voice switching, data switching, and conversion between voice and data services. l Power supply module: conducts power from backplane to card. l Clock module: provides synchronous clock signals for voice cards and local voice switching. NOTE l The SRU stores configuration data, startup files, upgrade software, and logs. l The SRU is hot swappable. Applications The AR2240,AR3260 must have an SRU installed. The AR2240,AR3260 can operate with one SRU installed and with two SRUs installed in future. l When one SRU is installed, it can be inserted into the following slot:
Slot 11 of the AR2240 Slot 15 of the AR3260 For slot distribution on the AR2240, see Figure 2-15. For slot distribution on the AR3260, see Figure 2-18. 5.2.2 Panel and Interfaces NOTE The SRU40 and SRU80 panels are identical except for having different silkscreens. Figure 5-7 shows the appearance of the SRU. Figure 5-7 Appearance of the SRU 1 2 3 4 56 56 7 8 7 8 7 8 9 10 11 a b c d e f Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 57 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-3 describes the buttons and indicators on the SRU panel. 5 Cards Table 5-3 Buttons and indicators on the SRU panel Number 1 Indicator SYS Color Green Red Off Green ACT (active/
standby status indicator) Micro SD Green ACT (USB) Red and green 2 3 4 Description If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is green, the SRU is in active state. If the indicator is off, the SRU is in standby state. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, there is no micro SD card. If the indicator is green, devices have been deployed by using the USB disk. If the indicator blinks green, data is being read from the USB disk. If the indicator is red, the device cannot be correctly connected to the NMS or cannot be registered with the NMS. If the indicator blinks red, an error occurs when configuration files are being executed or data is being read from the USB disk. If the indicator is off, the USB disk is not inserted, the USB interface fails, or the indicator fails. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 58 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Description If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is steady on, the port is used as a MiniUSB port. If the indicator is off, the port does not function as a MiniUSB port. If the indicator is steady on, the port is used as a CON/AUX port. If the indicator is off, the port does not function as a CON/AUX port. Number 5 and 6 7 and 8 9 10 Indicator SFP interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator is in green. l The ACT indicator is in yellow. GE interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator is in green. l The ACT indicator is in yellow. Color Green Yellow Green Yellow MiniUSB EN Green CON/AUX EN NOTE Green l Either the CON/AUX port or the MiniUSB port can be used at a time. l By default, the port is used as the CON/AUX port. The EN indicator is green no matter whether a cable is installed. 11 RST CAUTION The Reset button is used for resetting cards manually. Resetting a card will cause service interruption; therefore, carefully verify the issue before you reset a card. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 59 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Interfaces Table 5-4 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the SRU. Table 5-4 Types and functions of interfaces on the SRU Letter in Figure 5-7 a Name Micro SD card Qua ntit y 2 2 2 1 2 b c d USB GE optical/
electrical Combo interface GE electrical interface e and f Console interface, including the MiniUSB and RJ45 interface Description Cable Type MiniSD card USB disk SFP optical module and 6.6 Optical Fiber 6.5 Network Cable MiniUSB cable and 6.4 Console Cable The micro SD card is used to store system data. l SD1: built-in, default setting l SD0: installed in a reserved SD card on the front panel, an external extended card The USB disk is used to deploy devices. The SFP interface is used to receive and send services. An Ethernet interface is connected to the network interface of a configuration terminal or network management workstation for on-site or remote configuration. An Ethernet interface is also used to receive and send services. A console interface is connected to the console for on-site configuration. The MiniUSB and RJ45 interface cannot be used simultaneously. By default, an RJ45 interface is connected to the console for on-
site configuration. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 60 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Interface Attributes 5 Cards Table 5-5 Attributes of 10BASE-TX/100BASE-TX electrical interfaces Item Connector type Interface attribute Description RJ45 MDI/MDIX NOTE l The interfaces of most network cards are medium dependent interfaces
(MDIs). l MDIX interfaces are usually used on hubs or LAN switches. IEEE802.3, IEEE802.3u, IEEE802.3ab Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, or Ethernet_SNAP IP Standards compliance Frame format Network layer protocol Table 5-6 Attributes of 1000BASE-T electrical interfaces Item Connector type Interface attribute Description RJ45 MDI/MDIX NOTE l The interfaces of most network cards are medium dependent interfaces
(MDIs). l MDIX interfaces are usually used on hubs or LAN switches. IEEE802.3, IEEE802.3u, IEEE802.3ab Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, or Ethernet_SNAP IP Standards compliance Frame format Network layer protocol Table 5-7 Attributes of the console interface Item Connector type Description RJ45 Standards compliance RS232 Operating mode Full duplex Universal Asynchronous Receiver/
Transmitter (UART) Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 61 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Item Data equipment type Description Data Circuit-terminating Equipment (DCE) Table 5-8 Attributes of the MiniUSB-B interface Description Item MiniUSB-B, angle Connector type Standards compliance Operating mode USB1.0 Device Table 5-9 Attributes of the USB-A interface Item Connector type Description USB-A Standards compliance USB2.0, compatible with USB1.0 and USB1.1 Operating mode Host 5.2.3 Technical Specifications Table 5-10 describes the technical specifications of the SRU. Table 5-10 Technical specifications of the SRU Item Dimensions
(depth x width x height) Specification 270.85 mm x 402.8 mm x 40.14 mm (10.67 in. x 15.83 in. x 1.58in.) Maximum power consumption 85.44 W Weight 2.1 kg (4.63 lb) 5.3 WLAN Subcard WLAN subcards are Wi-Fi modules. 5.3.1 Functions and Applications Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 62 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Functions l WLAN subcards provide Wi-Fi interfaces. Wi-Fi interfaces comply with IEEE 802.11n, 802.11g, and 802.11b, and each of these interfaces provides a maximum of 300 Mbit/s transmission rate. l WLAN subcards provide a high wireless performance and reliability, and large coverage scope using the multiple-input and multiple-output (MIMO) technology. l WLAN subcards support 64/128/152-bit WEP encryption, WPA/WPA2 encryption, and WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK encryption to provide secure data transmission. Applications A WLAN subcard has a dedicated WLAN slot on the AR routers. 5.3.2 Technical Specifications Table 5-11 describes the technical specifications of the WLAN subcard. Table 5-11 Technical specifications of the WLAN subcard Item Maximum power consumption Specification 7.24 W 5.4 Ethernet LAN Interface Card This section describes the types, functions, applications, appearance, interfaces, and technical specifications of the Ethernet LAN interface card. 5.4.1 8FE1GE-8-Port 100BASE-RJ45 and 1-Port 1000BASE-RJ45 L2/
L3 Ethernet Interface Card The 8FE1GE is the 8-port 100M+1-port 1000M Ethernet electrical interface card (RJ45). It implements the 9-channel Ethernet Layer 2 and Layer 3 switching functions. Functions and Applications Functions The 8FE1GE provides eight FE electrical interfaces and one GE electrical interface to implement data access and line-speed switching. l When category 5 twisted pairs (straight-through cables or crossover cables) are used, the maximum transmission distance is 100 meters. l When category 5 twisted pairs (straight-through cables or crossover cables) are used, 100 Mbit/s line-speed forwarding is supported between the eight FE interfaces. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 63 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards l The eight FE interfaces work at 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s, in auto-sensing mode. The GE interface works at 10/100/1000 Mbit/s, in auto-sensing mode. l These interfaces support the half duplex mode and full duplex mode. The full duplex mode is most commonly used. Applications The 8FE1GE can be installed into the WSIC slots of the AR1200, AR2220, AR2240, and AR3260. On the AR1200, two SIC slots are combined into one WSIC slot. AR1200 V200R001C00 does not support the 8FE1GE. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-8 shows the appearance of the 8FE1GE. Figure 5-8 Appearance of the 8FE1GE 1 2 3 a b Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-12 describes the buttons and indicators on the 8FE1GE panel. Table 5-12 Buttons and indicators on the 8FE1GE panel Number in Figure 5-8 1 Indicator Color Description STAT Green Red Off If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 64 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Number in Figure 5-8 2 and 3 Indicator Color Description FE/GE interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator is in green. l The ACT indicator is in yellow. Green Yellow If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. Interfaces Table 5-13 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 8FE1GE. Table 5-13 Types and functions of interfaces on the 8FE1GE Name Quan tity Description Cable Type 6.5 Network Cable 8 1 10BASE-TX/
100BASE-
TX electrical interface 1000BASE-T electrical interface The 8FE1GE provides eight FE electrical interfaces to transmit and receive FE services. The 8FE1GE provides one GE electrical interface to transmit and receive GE services. Letter in Figure 5-8 a b Interface Attributes Table 5-14 Attributes of 10BASE-TX/100BASE-TX electrical interfaces Item Connector type Interface attribute Description RJ45 MDI/MDIX NOTE l The interfaces of most network cards are medium dependent interfaces
(MDIs). l MDIX interfaces are usually used on hubs or LAN switches. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 65 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Item Standards compliance Frame format Network layer protocol Description IEEE802.3, IEEE802.3u, IEEE802.3ab Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, or Ethernet_SNAP IP Table 5-15 Attributes of 1000BASE-T electrical interfaces Item Connector type Description RJ45 Interface attribute MDI/MDIX NOTE l The interfaces of most network cards are medium dependent interfaces
(MDIs). l MDIX interfaces are usually used on hubs or LAN switches. IEEE802.3, IEEE802.3u, IEEE802.3ab Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, or Ethernet_SNAP IP Standards compliance Frame format Network layer protocol Technical Specifications Table 5-16 describes the technical specifications of the 8FE1GE. Table 5-16 Technical specifications of the 8FE1GE Item Dimensions
(depth x width x height) Specification 223.5 mm x 201 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 7.92 in. x 0.78 in.) Maximum power consumption 12.036 W Weight 0.6 kg (1.33 lb) Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 66 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards 5.4.2 24GE-24-Port 1000BASE-RJ45 L2/L3 Ethernet Interface Card The 24GE is the 24-port 1000M Ethernet electrical interface card (RJ45). It implements the 24-
channel Ethernet Layer 2 and Layer 3 switching functions. Functions and Applications Functions The 24GE provides 24 GE electrical interfaces to implement data access and line-speed switching. l When category 5 twisted pairs (straight-through cables or crossover cables) are used, the maximum transmission distance is 100 meters. l When category 5 twisted pairs (straight-through cables or crossover cables) are used, 1000 Mbit/s line-speed forwarding is supported between the 24 GE interfaces. l These interfaces work in 10/100/1000 Mbit/s auto-sensing mode. l These interfaces support the half duplex mode and full duplex mode. The full duplex mode is most commonly used. Applications The 24GE can be installed into the XSIC slot on the AR2220, AR2240 and AR3260. On the AR2220, two WSIC slots are combined into one XSIC slot. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-9 shows the appearance of the 24GE. Figure 5-9 Appearance of the 24GE 2 2 3 2 3 1 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 2 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 a Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-17 describes the buttons and indicators on the 24GE panel. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 67 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Table 5-17 Buttons and indicators on the 24GE panel Indicator Color Description Number in Figure 5-9 1 STAT Green If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, the link is not connected. Red Off Green LINK 2: indicators of interfaces in the second row 3: indicators of interfaces in the first row Interfaces Table 5-18 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 24GE. Table 5-18 Types and functions of interfaces on the 24GE Letter in Figure 5-9 a Qua ntity 24 Name 1000BASE-
T electrical interface Description Cable Type The 24GE provides 24 GE electrical interfaces to transmit and receive GE services. 6.5 Network Cable Interface Attributes Table 5-19 Attributes of 1000BASE-T electrical interfaces Item Connector type Description RJ45 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 68 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Item Interface attribute Description MDI/MDIX NOTE l The interfaces of most network cards are medium dependent interfaces
(MDIs). l MDIX interfaces are usually used on hubs or LAN switches. IEEE802.3, IEEE802.3u, IEEE802.3ab Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, or Ethernet_SNAP IP Standards compliance Frame format Network layer protocol Technical Specifications Table 5-20 describes the technical specifications of the 24GE. Table 5-20 Technical specifications of the 24GE Item Dimensions
(depth x width x height) Specification 223.50 mm x 201.00 mm x 40.14 mm (8.8 in. x 7.92 in. x 1.58 in.) Maximum power consumption 25 W Weight 0.85 kg (1.88 lb) 5.5 WAN Interface Card This section describes the types, functions, applications, appearance, interfaces, and technical specifications of the WAN interface card. 5.5.1 1GEC (1-Port-GE Combo WAN Interface Card) 1GEC is a 1-port 1000M Ethernet optical and electrical Combo interface card (RJ45, SFP). Only one of the optical interface and electrical interface can be used at a time. 1GEC stands for:
l 1: one interface l GE: 1000M Ethernet l C: Combo interface Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 69 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Functions and Applications Functions 5 Cards The 1GEC provides one GE optical and electrical Combo interface to implement data access and line-speed switching. l The Combo interface sends, receives, and processes GE data traffic. l The electrical interface works at 10/100/1000 Mbit/s in auto-sensing mode. l The optical interface works at 100/1000 Mbit/s in auto-sensing mode. Applications The 1GEC is installed into the SIC slot of the AR1200, AR2220, AR2240 and AR3260. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-10 shows the appearance of the 1GEC panel. Figure 5-10 Appearance of the 1GEC panel 1 2 3 4 5 a b Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-21 describes the buttons and indicators on the 1GEC panel. Table 5-21 Buttons and indicators on the 1GEC panel Number in Figure 5-10 1 Indicator Color Description STAT Green Red If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 70 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Number in Figure 5-10 2 and 3 4 and 5 Indicator Color Description Off Green Yellow Green Yellow GE interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator is in green. l The ACT indicator is in yellow. SFP interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator is in green. l The ACT indicator is in yellow. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. Interfaces Table 5-22 describes the types and functions of interface on the 1GEC. Name Description Table 5-22 Types and functions of the interface on the 1GEC Lette r in Figur e 5-10 a Qu ant ity 1 1000BA SE-T electrica l interface The 1GEC provides one GE electrical interface to transmit and receive GE services. NOTE Only one of the optical interface and electrical interface can be used at a time. Cable Type 6.5 Network Cable Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 71 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Description Cable Type The 1GEC provides one GE optical interface to transmit and receive GE services. 6.6 Optical Fiber Qu ant ity 1 Name 1000BA SE-X optical interface Lette r in Figur e 5-10 b Interface Attributes Table 5-23 Attributes of 1000BASE-T electrical interfaces Item Connector type Description RJ45 Interface attribute MDI/MDIX NOTE l The interfaces of most network cards are medium dependent interfaces
(MDIs). l MDIX interfaces are usually used on hubs or LAN switches. IEEE802.3, IEEE802.3u, IEEE802.3ab Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, or Ethernet_SNAP IP Standards compliance Frame format Network layer protocol Description Table 5-24 Attributes of the SFP optical module (100/1000 Mbit/s) supported by the GE optical interface Attri bute Tran smiss ion dista nce 10 km (single-
mode bidirectional fiber) 100 km 500 m 10 km 40 km 40 km 80 km Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 72 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Description 850 nm 1310 nm Tx:
1310 nm Rx:
1490 nm Tx:
1490 nm Rx:
1310 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm 1550 nm 1550 nm
-9.5 dBm to
-2.5 dBm
-9.0 dBm to
-3.0 dBm
-9.0 dBm to
-3.0 dBm
-9.0 dBm to
-3.0 dBm
-5.0 dBm to 0 dBm
-5.0 dBm to 0 dBm
-2.0 dBm to 5.0 dBm 0 dBm to 5 dBm
-17.0 dBm
-20.0 dBm
-19.5 dBm
-19.5 dBm
-23 dBm
-22 dBm
-23.0 dBm
-30.0 dBm 0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-9.0 dBm 9 dB 9 dB 6 dB 6 dB 9 dB 8.5 dB 9 dB 8 dB Multi-
mode Single-mode Attri bute Cent er wave lengt h Tran smitt ing powe r Rece iver sensi tivity Over load optic al powe r Extin ction ratio Fiber type Technical Specifications Table 5-25 describes the technical specifications of the 1GEC. Table 5-25 Technical specifications of the 1GEC Item Dimensions
(depth x width x height) Maximum power consumption Specification 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 3.94 in. x 0.78 in.) 2.28 W Weight 0.25 kg (0.55 lb) Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 73 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards 5.5.2 2FE-2-Port-FE WAN Interface Card The 2FE is the 2-port 100M Ethernet electrical interface card (RJ45). Functions and Applications Functions The 2FE provides two FE electrical interfaces to implement data access and line-speed switching. l When category 5 twisted pairs (straight-through cables or crossover cables) are used, the maximum transmission distance is 100 meters. l Two FE electrical interfaces can be bound to function as an upstream interface at the line rate of 200 Mbit/s. l The two FE interfaces work in 10/100 Mbit/s auto-sensing mode. l These interfaces support the half duplex mode and full duplex mode. The full duplex mode is most commonly used. Applications The 2FE can be installed into the SIC slot of the AR1200, AR2220, AR2240 and AR3260. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-11 shows the appearance of the 2FE. Figure 5-11 Appearance of the 2FE 1 2 3 a Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-26 describes the buttons and indicators on the 2FE panel. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 74 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Table 5-26 Buttons and indicators on the 2FE panel Number in Figure 5-11 1 Indicator Color STAT Green Red Off Green Yellow 2 and 3 FE interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator is in green. l The ACT indicator is in yellow. Description If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. Interfaces Table 5-27 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 2FE. Name Table 5-27 Types and functions of interfaces on the 2FE Letter Description in Figure 5-11 a Qua ntit y 2 FE electrical interface The 2FE provides two FE electrical interfaces to transmit and receive FE services. Cable Type 6.5 Network Cable Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 75 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Interface Attributes 5 Cards Table 5-28 Attributes of 10BASE-TX/100BASE-TX electrical interfaces Item Connector type Description RJ45 Interface attribute MDI/MDIX NOTE l The interfaces of most network cards are medium dependent interfaces
(MDIs). l MDIX interfaces are usually used on hubs or LAN switches. IEEE802.3, IEEE802.3u, IEEE802.3ab Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, or Ethernet_SNAP IP Standards compliance Frame format Network layer protocol Technical Specifications Table 5-29 describes the technical specifications of the 2FE. Table 5-29 Technical specifications of the 2FE Item Dimensions
(depth x width x height) Specification 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 3.94 in. x 0.78 in.) Maximum power consumption 3.01 W Weight 0.3 kg (0.66 lb) 5.5.3 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M-1/2 Port-Channelized E1/T1/PRI/VE1 Multifunctional Interface Card The 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M is the E1/T1/PRI/VE1 processing unit on the AR routers and provides one or two E1/T1/PRI/VE1 interfaces. Primary Rate Interface (PRI) indicates ISDN primary rate interfaces. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 76 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards NOTE l 1/2: indicates one or two interfaces. l E1: indicates E1 interfaces. l T1: indicates T1 interfaces. l M: indicates multiflex trunks. l VE1: indicates voice E1 interfaces. Table 5-30 lists the number of interfaces on the 1E1T1-M and 2E1T1-M. Table 5-30 Number of interfaces on the 1E1T1-M and 2E1T1-M Card Name 1E1T1-M 2E1T1-M Quantity of Interfaces 1 2 2E1T1-M cards have two types: SIC and WSIC. Table 5-31 lists the slots where the SIC card and WSIC card are installed. Table 5-31 Slots of 2E1T1-M SIC and WSIC cards Card 2E1T1-M (SIC) 2E1T1-M (WSIC) Slot SIC slot WSIC slot or XSIC slot NOTE In an XSIC slot, the WSIC card is installed in the lower part of the slot. The WSIC card uses the XSIC slot ID as its own slot ID. Functions and Applications Functions The 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M provides the following functions:
l Sends, receives, and processes E1/T1 data traffic. l Provides CE1/T1 access. l Provides the ISDN PRI function. Applications 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M(SIC) can be installed into the SIC slot of the AR1200, AR2220, AR2240 and AR3260. 2E1T1-M(WSIC) is installed in a WSIC or XSIC slot on the AR2220, AR2240 and AR3260. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 77 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Panel and Interfaces 5 Cards Figure 5-12 shows the appearance of the 1E1T1-M. Figure 5-12 Appearance of the 1E1T1-M 1 2 a Figure 5-13 shows the appearance of the 2E1T1-M (SIC). Figure 5-13 Appearance of the 2E1T1-M (SIC) 1 2 a Figure 5-14 shows the appearance of the 2E1T1-M (WSIC). Figure 5-14 Appearance of the 2E1T1-M (WSIC) 1 2 a Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-32 describes the buttons and indicators on the 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M panel. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 78 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Indicator Table 5-32 Buttons and indicators on the 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M panel Number in Figure 5-12, Figure 5-13, Figure 5-14 1 Color STAT Green Description If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. Red Off 2 LINK/ACT Green Yellow (The indicator is in green and blinks red.) Off If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is in green and blinks red, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, there is no connection. Interfaces Table 5-33 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M. Quantity Nam e Description Table 5-33 Types and functions of interfaces on the 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M Letter in Cable Type Figure 5-12, Figure 5-13, Figure 5-14 a DB9 6.7 E1/T1 Trunk Cables 1E1T1-M: 1 2E1T1-M: 2 75-ohm or 120-
ohm E1 cable or 100-ohm T1 cable Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 79 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Interface Attributes 5 Cards Table 5-34 Attributes of channelized E1 interfaces Attribute Connector type Description DB9 Standards compliance G.703 or G.704 Transmission rate 2.048 Mbit/s Cable type E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable E1 120-ohm balanced twisted pair cable E1 trunk cable extension Working mode CE1, ISDN PRI, or VE1 Function Backup Terminal access ISDN PRI Table 5-35 Attributes of channelized T1 interfaces Attribute Connector type Description DB9 Standards compliance G.703 or G.704 Transmission rate 1.544 Mbit/s Cable type T1 100-ohm coaxial cable Working mode CT1, ISDN PRI, or VT1 Function Backup Terminal access ISDN PRI Technical Specifications Table 5-36 describes the technical specifications of the 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 80 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Table 5-36 Technical specifications of the 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M Item Dimensions
(depth x width x height) Specification 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M (SIC): 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 3.94 in. x 0.78 in.) 2E1T1-M (WSIC): 223.5 mm x 201 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 7.92 in. x 0.78 in.) Maximum power consumption 7 W Weight 0.3 kg (0.66 lb) 5.5.4 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F (1/2-Port-Fractional Channelized E1/T1 WAN Interface Card) The 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F is the E1/T1 processing unit on the AR routers and provides one or two E1/T1 interfaces. NOTE 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F stands for:
l 1/2: one or two interfaces l E1: E1 interface l T1: T1 interface l F: fractional E1 Table 5-37 lists the number of interfaces on the 1E1T1-F and 2E1T1-F. Table 5-37 Number of interfaces on the 1E1T1-F and 2E1T1-F Card Name 1E1T1-F Quantity of Interfaces 1 2E1T1-F 2 Functions and Applications Functions The 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F sends, receives, and processes E1/T1 data traffic. Table 5-38 describes the differences in functions provided by the 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F and 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 81 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Table 5-38 Differences in functions provided by the 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F and 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-
M Whether to Support the PRI Mode No Card Name 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F Fractional E1 Mode Timeslots of an E1/T1 interface can only be bundled into one channel at a rate of n x 64 kbit/s (n specifies the number of bundled timeslots and ranges from 1 to 31). 1E1T1-M/2E1T1-M Timeslots of an E1/T1 interface can be bundled into multiple channels. Yes Applications The 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F is installed into the SIC slot of the AR1200, AR2220, AR2240 and AR3260. Panel and Interfaces The 1E1T1-F and 1E1T1-M panels are identical except for having different silkscreens. Figure 5-12 shows the appearance of the 1E1T1-F panel. The 2E1T1-F and 2E1T1-M panels are identical except for having different silkscreens. Figure 5-13 shows the appearance of the 2E1T1-F panel. Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-32 describes the buttons and indicators on the 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F panel. Interfaces Table 5-33 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F. Interface Attributes Table 5-39 Attributes of unchannelized E1 interfaces Attribute Connector type Standards compliance Description DB9 G.703 or G.704 Transmission rate 2.048 Mbit/s Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 82 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Attribute Cable type Description E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable E1 120-ohm balanced twisted pair cable E1 trunk cable extension Working mode Unchannelized E1 Function Backup Terminal access Table 5-40 Attributes of unchannelized T1 interfaces Attribute Connector type Description DB9 Standards compliance G.703 or G.704 Transmission rate 1.544 Mbit/s Cable type T1 100-ohm coaxial cable Working mode Unchannelized T1 Function Backup Terminal access Technical Specifications Table 5-41 describes the technical specifications of the 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F. Table 5-41 Technical specifications of the 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-F Item Dimensions
(depth x width x height) Specification 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 3.94 in. x 0.78 in.) Maximum power consumption 7 W Weight 0.3 kg (0.66 lb) Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 83 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards 5.5.5 1SA/2SA-1/2-Port-Synchronous/Asynchronous WAN Interface Card The 1SA/2SA is the 1-port/2-port synchronous/asynchronous serial interface module on the AR routers. NOTE l 1/2: indicates one interface or two interfaces. l S: indicates synchronous serial interface. l A: indicates asynchronous serial interface. Table 5-42 lists the number of interfaces on the 1SA and 2SA. Table 5-42 Number of interfaces on the 1SA and 2SA Quantity of Interfaces 1 2 Card Name 1SA 2SA Functions and Applications Functions The 1SA/2SA provides the following functions:
l A synchronous serial interface can function as a DCE or DTE. It supports multiple physical layer protocols, such as V.24, V.35, and X.21, but does not support X.21 DCE. The maximum rate of V.24 is 64 kbit/s and V.35 is 2.048 Mbit/s. l An asynchronous serial interface supports the RS232 protocol and provides a maximum transmission rate of 115.2 kbit/s. l The 1SA/2SA provides system management channels by using in-band GE channels and implements in-service upgrade by using system management channels. l The system powers on or off the 1SA/2SA and monitors the current of the 1SA/2SA; the backplane provides 12 V voltage for the 1SA/2SA. l The 1SA/2SA is hot swappable. Applications 1SA/2SA can be installed into the SIC slot of the AR1200, AR2220, AR2240 and AR3260. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-15 shows the appearance of the 1SA. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 84 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Figure 5-15 Appearance of the 1SA 1 2 3 a Figure 5-16 shows the appearance of the 2SA. Figure 5-16 Appearance of the 2SA 1 2 3 2 3 a Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-43 describes the buttons and indicators on the 1SA/2SA panel. Table 5-43 Buttons and indicators on the 1SA/2SA panel Numbe r in Figure 5-15 and Figure 5-16 1 Indicator Color Description STAT Green Red If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 85 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Numbe r in Figure 5-15 and Figure 5-16 2 and 3 Indicator Color Description Off Green Yellow Synchronous/
Asynchronous serial interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator is in green. l The ACT indicator is in yellow. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the LINK indicator is off, the link is not connected. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the ACT indicator is off, no data is transmitted or received. Interfaces Table 5-44 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 1SA/2SA. Name Quantity Description Table 5-44 Types and functions of interfaces on the 1SA/2SA Lett er in Figu re 5-15 and Figu re 5-16 a DB28 1SA: 1 2SA: 2 The synchronous/
asynchronous serial interface cable is selected according to attributes of the connected line. Cable Type 6.8 Synchronous/
Asynchronous Serial Interface Cables Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 86 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Interface Attributes 5 Cards Table 5-45 Attributes of synchronous/asynchronous serial interfaces Attribute Description Synchronous Serial Interface Connector type Standards compliance and working mode DB28 l V.24 DTE l V.24 DCE l V.35 DTE l V.35 DCE l X.21 DTE l RS449 DTE l RS449 DCE l RS530 DTE l RS530 DCE Asynchronous Serial Interface RS232 Minimum baud rate (bit/
s) Maximum baud rate (bit/
s) Cable type 1200 64 k 1200 600 2.048 M 115.2 k l V.24 DTE cable l V.24 DCE cable l V.35 DTE cable l V.35 DCE cable l X.21 DTE cable l RS449 DTE cable l RS449 DCE cable l RS530 DTE cable l RS530 DCE cable Function DDN leased line Terminal access l Modem dial-up l Backup l Asynchronous leased line l Terminal access Technical Specifications Table 5-46 describes the technical specifications of the 1SA/2SA. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 87 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Table 5-46 Technical specifications of the 1SA/2SA Item Dimensions
(Depth x Width x Height) Specification 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 3.94 in. x 0.78 in.) Maximum power consumption Weight l 1SA: 10 W l 2SA: 11.7 W 0.3 kg (0.66 lb) 5.5.6 8AS (8-Port-Asynchronous WAN Interface Card) The 8AS is an 8-port asynchronous serial interface module on the AR routers. NOTE 8AS stands for:
l 8: eight interfaces l AS: asynchronous serial interface Functions and Applications Functions The 8AS sends, receives, and processes asynchronous data traffic. l Supports a maximum of 115.2 kbit/s transmission rate for each asynchronous serial interface. l Supports terminal access and asynchronous leased lines. l Functions as a dialup access server for small and medium-sized ISPs when asynchronous serial interfaces are used for dialup. Applications The 8AS is installed into the WSIC slot of the AR1200, AR2220, AR2240 and AR3260. On the AR1200, a WSIC slot consists of two SIC slots. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-17 shows the appearance of the 8AS panel. Figure 5-17 Appearance of the 8AS panel 1 2 a Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 88 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-47 describes the buttons and indicators on the 8AS panel. 5 Cards Table 5-47 Buttons and indicators on the 8AS panel Number in Figure 5-17 1 Indicator Color STAT Green Red Off Green LINK
(interface status indicator) 2 Description If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. Interfaces Table 5-48 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 8AS. Name Quant Table 5-48 Types and functions of interfaces on the 8AS Letter in Figure 5-17 a Description RJ45 ity 8 Interfaces on the 8AS send, receive, and process asynchronous data traffic using customized RJ45 cables. Cable Type 6.12 8AS Cable Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 89 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Interface Attributes Table 5-49 Attributes of asynchronous serial interfaces 5 Cards Attribute Connector type Standards compliance and working mode Minimum baud rate (bit/s) Maximum baud rate (bit/s) Cable type Function Description RJ45 RS232 300 115.2 k Customized RJ45 cable l Modem dial-up l Backup l Asynchronous leased line l Terminal access Technical Specifications Table 5-50 describes the technical specifications of the 8AS. Table 5-50 Technical specifications of the 8AS Item Dimensions
(depth x width x height) Maximum power consumption Specification 223.5 mm x 201 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 7.92 in. x 0.78 in.) 8.9 W Weight 0.6 kg (1.32 lb) 5.5.7 1BST (1-Port-ISDN S/T WAN Interface Card) The 1BST is the ISDN module on the AR routers and provides one ISDN S/T interface, which transmits data services. The 1BST transmits, receives, and processes 1-channel ISDN BRI S/T data flow. Functions and Applications Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 90 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Functions The 1BST provides one ISDN S/T interface for data access. The 1BST consists of the following modules:
l CPU control module: manages the system and loads programs. l CPLD logic module: provides the working clock and reset signals for the chip, controls the service port status, and monitors the board clock. l ISDN chip module: provides S/T interface access, supports TE mode, and provides parallel interfaces and serial interfaces. l Power supply module: conducts power from backplane to card. l Clock module: provides the working clock for the CPU and working modules. Applications The 1BST is installed into the SIC slot of the AR1200, AR2220, AR2240 and AR3260. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-18 shows the appearance of the 1BST panel. Figure 5-18 Appearance of the 1BST panel 21 3 a Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-51 describes the buttons and indicators on the 1BST panel. Table 5-51 Buttons and indicators on the 1BST panel Number in Figure 5-18 1 Indicator Color Description STAT Green If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 91 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Number in Figure 5-18 Indicator Color Description Red Off Green ACT (interface status indicator) B1/B2 Green If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, the ISDN channel is activated. If the indicator is off, the ISDN channel is deactivated. If the indicator is blinking, the B1/
B2 channel of the ISDN channel is being occupied. If the indicator is off, the B1/B2 channel of the ISDN channel is idle. 2 3 Interfaces Table 5-52 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 1BST. Table 5-52 Types and functions of interfaces on the 1BST Name Quantity Description Cable Type RJ45 1 ISDN S/T interfaces are provided. 6.10 ISDN-ST Cables Letter in Figure 5-18 a Interface Attributes Table 5-53 ISDN S/T interface attributes Item Connector Description RJ45 Standards compliance ITU-T I.430, Q.921, Q.931 Rate Bandwidth 192 kbit/s 0 to 100 MHz Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 92 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Item Cable Technical Specifications Description l TE: standard ISDN S/T interface cables (straight-
through cables) l NT: ISDN S/T interface crossover cables Table 5-54 describes the technical specifications of the 1BST. Table 5-54 Technical specifications of the 1BST Item Dimensions
(depth x width x height) Specification 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 3.94 in. x 0.78 in.) Maximum power consumption 12 W Weight 0.3 kg (0.66 lb) 5.5.8 1CPOS-155M (1-Port Channelized POS Interface Card) 1CPOS-155M provides an STM-1/OC3 optical interface to implement 63-channel E1 or 84-
channel T1 transmission in compliance with SDH/SONET. NOTE 1CPOS-155M stands for:
l 1: one interface l C: channelized l POS: Packet Over SDH/SONET l 155M: a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s Functions and Applications Functions 1CPOS-155M has the following functions:
l Supports clear channel (unframed) E1, non-channelized (framed) E1, and channelized CE1. l Supports non-channelized (framed) T1 and channelized CT1. l Supports the link layer protocols such as HDLC and PPP and a maximum of 1024 HDLC channels. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 93 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards l Supports four SFP optical module types: short-distance multi-mode (1310 nm), mid-
distance single-mode (1310 nm), long-distance single-mode (1310 nm), and ultra-long-
distance single-mode (1550 nm). l Automatically starts and loads configurations after being powered on, provides the system management function using a GE inband channel, and uses the UART serial interface as the escape channel for subcard. l Uses the 12 V power provided by the backplane, be powered on and off by the main control board, and monitors voltage and current. l Be hot swappable. Applications 1CPOS-155M can be installed in a SIC slot of AR2220, AR2240 and AR3260. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-19 shows the appearance of the 1CPOS-155M. Figure 5-19 Appearance of the 1CPOS-155M 1 2 3 a Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-55 describes the buttons and indicators on the 1CPOS-155M panel. Table 5-55 Buttons and indicators on the 1CPOS-155M panel Number in Figure 5-19 1 Indicator Color Description STAT Green Red If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 94 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Number in Figure 5-19 Indicator Color Description Off Green LINK ACT Yellow If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. 2 3 Interfaces Table 5-56 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 1CPOS-155M. Table 5-56 Types and functions of interfaces on the 1CPOS-155M Letter in Figure 5-19 a Quantit y 1 Name SFP optical interface Description Cable Type 6.6 Optical Fiber The 1CPOS-155M provides one SFP optical interface to transmit and receive SDH/
SONET frames. Interface Attributes Table 5-57 CPOS interface attributes Attribute Connector type Description LC/PC Optical interface attribute Standards compliance Depending on the SFP optical module STM-1 Frame format SDH/SONET Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 95 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Description IP Attribute Network layer protocol Table 5-58 Attributes of the SFP optical module supported by the CPOS interface Attribute Transmissio n distance Description 2 km 15 km 40 km 80 km Center wavelength 1310 nm 1310 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm Transmittin g power
-19.0 dBm to
-14.0 dBm
-15.0 dBm to 8.0 dBm
-15.0 dBm to 8.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm to 0 dBm Receiver sensitivity Overload optical power Extinction ratio
-28.0 dBm
-23.0 dBm
-23.0 dBm
-32.98 dBm
-14.0 dBm
-10.17 dBm
-8.0 dBm
-8.0 dBm
>10.0 dB 58.86 dB 14.08 dB 43.09 dB Fiber type Multimode Single-mode Technical Specifications Table 5-59 describes the technical specifications of the 1CPOS-155M. Table 5-59 Technical specifications of the 1CPOS-155M Item Dimensions
(depth x width x height) Specification 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 3.94 in. x 0.78 in.) Maximum power consumption 12 W Weight 0.3 kg (0.66 lb) 5.5.9 3G-HSPA+7 (3G WAN Interface Card) A 3G-HSPA+7 interface card provides two 3G antenna interfaces and one mini USB interface. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 96 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Functions and Applications Functions Applications The 3G-HSPA+7 interface card provides WAN access through WCDMA. The 3G-HSPA+7 interface card can be installed in the SIC slot on the AR1200, AR2220, AR2240, and AR3260 chassis. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-20 shows the appearance of the 3G-HSPA+7 interface card. Figure 5-20 3G-HSPA+7 panel 1 2 3 4 a b a Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 97 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-60 describes the buttons and indicators on the 3G-HSPA+7 panel. 5 Cards Indicator Table 5-60 Buttons and indicators on the 3G-HSPA+7 panel Number in Figure 5-20 1 Color STAT Green Description If the indicator is steady on, the router has been powered on, but the system software is not running. If the indicator blinks once every 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once every 0.25s
(4 Hz), the system is loading software after power-on or is restarting. Red Orange Green 3G 2G Green 2 3 If the indicator is steady on, a fault that affects services has occurred and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, the 3G signal strength is high. If the indicator blinks once every 2s (0.5 Hz), the 3G signals strength is low. If the indicator blinks once every 0.25s
(4 Hz), the 3G signals strength is medium. If the indicator is steady on, the 2G signal strength is high. If the indicator blinks once every 2s (0.5 Hz), the 2G signals strength is low. If the indicator blinks once every 0.25s
(4 Hz), the 2G signals strength is medium. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 98 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Number in Figure 5-20 4 Indicator Color Description WWAN Green If the indicator is steady on, the 3G/2G connection is being established or is active. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received over the 3G/2G connection. If the indicator is off, the 3G/2G connection has not been established or is inactive. Interfaces Table 5-61 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 3G-HSPA+7 interface card. Name Description Table 5-61 Types and functions of interfaces on the 3G-HSPA+7 interface card Lette r in Figu re 5-20 a Qu ant ity 2 3G antenna Cable Type Antenna interface The 3G-HSPA+7 interface card provides two 3G interfaces to transmit and receive 3G service data. One interface is the primary interface, and the other is the secondary interface. The mini USB interface is used to commission the 3G module. Mini USB cable 1 Mini USB interface b Interface Attributes Table 5-62 3G interface attributes Item Connector Description SMA RF: connects to an antenna to provide wireless access. mini USB: connects to a USB flash drive with third-party wireless network test software, for example, Qualcomm CAIT. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 99 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Item Standards compliance and frequency bands supported Rate Description GSM/GPRS/EDGE: 850/900/1800/1900 (MHz) HSPA+/HSUPA/HSDPA/WCDMA: 2100/1900/900/850 (MHz) GSM CS:
l Upstream (Tx): 9.6kbit/s l Downstream (Rx): 9.6kbit/s GPRS/EDGE: Multi-slot Class 12, Class B WCDMA CS:
l Upstream (Tx): 64 kbit/s l Downstream (Rx): 64 kbit/s WCDMA PS:
l Upstream (Tx): 384 kbit/s l Downstream (Rx): 384 kbit/s HSPA:
l Upstream (Tx): 5.76 Mbit/s l Downstream (Rx): 14.4 Mbit/s HSPA+:
l Upstream (Tx): 5.76 Mbit/s l Downstream (Rx): 21 Mbit/s Network protocol WCDMA/HSPA/GPRS/EDGE Installing a 3G SIM Card For details on how to installing a 3G SIM card on the 3G-HSPA+7 interface card, see the AR1200&2200&3200 Quick Installation Guide. Technical Specifications Table 5-63 describes the technical specifications of the 3G-HSPA+7 interface card. Table 5-63 Technical specifications of the 3G-HSPA+7 Parameter Dimensions (W x D x H) Maximum power consumption Weight Description 100.1 mm x 223.5 mm x 19.82 mm 7 W 0.2 kg Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 100 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards 5.5.10 4GEW-T (4-Port-GE Electrical WAN Interface Card) The 4GEW-T interface card provides four GE electrical interfaces. 4GEW-T stands for:
l 4: four interfaces l GE: 1000M Ethernet l W: WAN l T: electrical interface Functions and Applications Functions The 4GEW-T interface card provides four GE electrical interfaces to implement data access and line-speed switching. The 4GEW-T interface card sends, receives, and processes GE data traffic. The four GE electrical interfaces work in 10/100/1000 Mbit/s auto-negotiation mode. Applications The 4GEW-T interface card can be installed in the WSIC slot on the AR1200, AR2220, AR2240, and AR3260 chassis. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-21 shows the appearance of the 4GEW-T interface card. Figure 5-21 4GEW-T panel 3 1 2 2 3 2 3 2 3 a Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-64 describes the buttons and indicators on the 4GEW-T panel. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 101 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Table 5-64 Buttons and indicators on the 4GEW-T panel Indicator Color Description Number in Figure 5-21 1 STAT Green If the indicator is steady on, the router has been powered on, but the system software is not running. If the indicator blinks once every 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once every 0.25s
(4 Hz), the system is loading software after power-on or is restarting. If the indicator is steady on, a fault that affects services has occurred and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. If the indicator is blinking, the interface is transmitting or receiving data. If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. Red Off Green Yellow 2 and 3 GE interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator is in green. l The ACT indicator is in yellow. Interfaces Table 5-65 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 4GEW-T interface card. Table 5-65 Types and functions of interfaces on the 4GEW-T interface card Lette r in Figur e 5-21 a Qu ant ity 4 Name 1000BA SE-T electrica l interface Description Cable Type The 4GEW-T interface card provides four 1000M electrical interfaces to transmit and receive GE data traffic. 6.5 Network Cable Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 102 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Interface Attributes Table 5-66 Attributes of 1000BASE-T electrical interfaces Item Connector type Interface attribute Description RJ45 MDI/MDIX NOTE l The interfaces of most network cards are medium dependent interfaces
(MDIs). l MDIX interfaces are usually used on hubs or LAN switches. IEEE802.3, IEEE802.3u, IEEE802.3ab Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, or Ethernet_SNAP IP Standards compliance Frame format Network layer protocol Technical Specifications Table 5-67 describes the technical specifications of the 4GEW-T interface card. Table 5-67 Technical specifications of the 4GEW-T Parameter Dimensions (W x D x H) Maximum power consumption Weight Description 201 mm x 223.5 mm x 19.82 mm 11 W 0.3 kg 5.5.11 4GEW-S (4-Port-GE Optical WAN Interface Card The 4GEW-S interface card provides four GE optical interfaces. 4GEW-S stands for:
l 4: four interfaces l GE: 1000M Ethernet l W: WAN l S: optical interface Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 103 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Functions and Applications 5 Cards Functions Applications The 4GEW-S interface card provides four GE optical interfaces to implement data access and line-speed switching. The 4GEW-S interface card sends, receives, and processes GE data traffic. The four GE optical interfaces work in 100/1000 Mbit/s auto-sensing mode. The 4GEW-S interface card can be installed in the WSIC slot on the AR1200, AR2220, AR2240, and AR3260 chassis. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-22 shows the appearance of the 4GEW-S interface card. Figure 5-22 4GEW-S panel 1 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 a Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-68 describes the buttons and indicators on the 4GEW-S panel. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 104 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Indicator Table 5-68 Buttons and indicators on the 4GEW-S panel Number in Figure 5-22 1 Color STAT Green Description If the indicator is steady on, the router has been powered on, but the system software is not running. If the indicator blinks once every 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once every 0.25s
(4 Hz), the system is loading software after power-on or is restarting. Red Off Green Yellow If the indicator is steady on, a fault that affects services has occurred and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. If the indicator is blinking, the interface is transmitting or receiving data. If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. 2 and 3 GE interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator is in green. l The ACT indicator is in yellow. Interfaces Table 5-69 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 4GEW-S interface card. Name Description Table 5-69 Types and functions of interfaces on the 4GEW-S interface card Lette r in Figur e 5-22 a Qu ant ity 4 The 4GEW-S interface card provides four GE optical interfaces to transmit and receive GE service traffic. 1000BA SE-X optical interface Cable Type 6.6 Optical Fiber Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 105 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Interface Attributes 5 Cards Table 5-70 Attributes of the 100/1000BASE-X GE optical interface Attribute Connector type Description LC/PC Optical interface attribute Standards compliance Depending on the SFP optical module. IEEE 802.3ab Frame format Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, or Ethernet_SNAP Network layer protocol IP Description Table 5-71 Attributes of the SFP optical module (100/1000 Mbit/s) supported by the GE optical interface Attri bute Tran smiss ion dista nce 10 km (single-
mode bidirectional fiber) 100 km 500 m 10 km 40 km 40 km 80 km 850 nm 1310 nm Tx:
1310 nm Rx:
1490 nm Tx:
1490 nm Rx:
1310 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm 1550 nm 1550 nm
-9.5 dBm to
-2.5 dBm
-9.0 dBm to
-3.0 dBm
-9.0 dBm to
-3.0 dBm
-9.0 dBm to
-3.0 dBm
-5.0 dBm to 0 dBm
-5.0 dBm to 0 dBm
-2.0 dBm to 5.0 dBm 0 dBm to 5 dBm
-17.0 dBm
-20.0 dBm
-19.5 dBm
-19.5 dBm
-23 dBm
-22 dBm
-23.0 dBm
-30.0 dBm Cent er wave lengt h Tran smitt ing powe r Rece iver sensi tivity Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 106 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Description 0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-9.0 dBm 9 dB 9 dB 6 dB 6 dB 9 dB 8.5 dB 9 dB 8 dB Multi-
mode Single-mode Attri bute Over load optic al powe r Extin ction ratio Fiber type Technical Specifications Table 5-72 describes the technical specifications of the 4GEW-S interface card. Table 5-72 Technical specifications of the 4GEW-S Parameter Dimensions (W x D x H) Maximum power consumption Weight Description 201 mm x 223.5 mm x 19.82 mm 8 W 0.3 kg 5.6 Voice Interface Card This section describes the types, functions, applications, appearance, interfaces, and technical specifications of the voice interface card. 5.6.1 2BST (2-Port-ISDN S/T Voice Interface Card) The 2BST is the ISDN module on the AR routers and provides two ISDN S/T interfaces, which transmit voice service. The 2BST implements the ISDN BRI function and provides the bandwidth of two B channels and one D channel:
l B channel: provides 64 kbit/s bandwidth and transmits voice service. l D channel: is a signaling channel and provides 16 kbit/s bandwidth. l The total bandwidth of two B channels and one D channel is 144 kbit/s. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 107 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards The S/T interface on the 2BST provides a rate of 192 kbit/s, including 144 kbit/s for data transmission and 48 kbit/s for maintenance information transmission. Table 5-73 lists the number of interfaces on the 1BST and 2BST. Table 5-73 Number of interfaces on the 1BST and 2BST User Interface One S/T interface Two S/T interfaces Usage Scenario Data services Mode TE Feed Supported No Voice services NT
-40 V feed Card Name 1BST 2BST NOTE l TE: terminal equipment l NT: network termination 2BST cards have two types: SIC and WSIC. Table 5-74 lists the slots where the SIC card and WSIC card are installed. Table 5-74 Slots of 2BST SIC and WSIC cards Slot SIC slot WSIC slot or XSIC slot NOTE In an XSIC slot, the WSIC card is installed in the lower part of the slot. The WSIC card uses the XSIC slot ID as its own slot ID. Card 2BST (SIC) 2BST (WSIC) Functions and Applications Functions The 2BST has the following functions:
l Provides two ISDN S/T interfaces for voice access. l Implements NT mode. The 2BST consists of the following modules:
l CPU control module: manages the system and loads programs. l CPLD logic module: provides the working clock and reset signals for the chip, controls the line -40 V feed, controls the service port status, and monitors the board clock. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 108 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards l ISDN chip module: provides S/T interface access, supports NT mode, and provides parallel interfaces and serial interfaces. l Power supply module: conducts power from backplane to card. l Clock module: provides the working clock for the CPU and working modules. Applications 2BST (SIC) is installed into the SIC slot of the AR1200, AR2220, AR2240 and AR3260. The 2BST (WSIC) is installed in a WSIC or XSIC slot on the AR2220, AR2240 and AR3260. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-23 shows the appearance of the 2BST (SIC) panel. Figure 5-23 Appearance of the 2BST (SIC) panel 1 2 3 2 3 a Figure 5-24 shows the appearance of the 2BST (WSIC). Figure 5-24 Appearance of the 2BST (WSIC) panel 1 2 3 2 3 a Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-75 describes the buttons and indicators on the 2BST panel. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 109 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Table 5-75 Buttons and indicators on the 2BST panel Number in Figure 5-23, Figure 5-24 1 Indicator Color STAT Green Red Off Green ACT (interface status indicator) B1/B2 Green 2 3 Description If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, the ISDN channel is activated. If the indicator is off, the ISDN channel is deactivated. If the indicator is blinking, the B1/
B2 channel of the ISDN channel is being occupied. If the indicator is off, the B1/B2 channel of the ISDN channel is idle. Interfaces Table 5-76 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 2BST. Name Quantity Description Table 5-76 Types and functions of interfaces on the 2BST Letter in Figure 5-23, Figure 5-24 a RJ45 2 ISDN S/T interfaces are provided. Cable Type 6.10 ISDN-ST Cables Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 110 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Interface Attributes 5 Cards Table 5-77 ISDN S/T interface attributes Item Connector Description RJ45 Standards compliance ITU-T I.430, Q.921, Q.931 Rate Bandwidth Cable Technical Specifications 192 kbit/s 0 to 100 MHz l TE: standard ISDN S/T interface cables (straight-
through cables) l NT: ISDN S/T interface crossover cables Table 5-78 describes the technical specifications of the 2BST. Table 5-78 Technical specifications of the 2BST Item Dimensions
(depth x width x height) Specification 2BST (SIC): 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 3.94 in. x 0.78 in.) 2BST (WSIC): 223.5 mm x 201 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 7.92 in. x 0.78 in.) Maximum power consumption 16.8 W Weight 0.3 kg (0.66 lb) 5.6.2 4FXS1FXO-4-Port FXS and 1-Port FXO Voice Interface Card The 4FXS1FXO is the voice module on the AR routers. It provides five RJ11 interfaces, including four POTS FXS interfaces and one POTS FXO interface. NOTE l An FXS interface is a simulated subscriber line interface and provides access to AT0 loop trunk of the analog phone, fax, and telephone exchange. l An FXO interface is a loop trunk interface and provides access to the telephone exchange by using regular subscriber lines. Functions and Applications Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 111 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Functions Applications The 4FXS1FXO works with the SRU to implement the voice call function. The first FXS interface works with an FXO interface to implement the power failure survival function. The 4FXS1FXO can be installed into the SIC slot of the AR1200, AR2220, AR2240 and AR3260. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-25 shows the appearance of the 4FXS1FXO. Figure 5-25 Appearance of the 4FXS1FXO a 1 2 3 Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-79 describes the buttons and indicators on the 4FXS1FXO panel. Table 5-79 Buttons and indicators on the 4FXS1FXO panel Number in Figure 5-25 1 Indicator Color STAT Green Description If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. Red Off Green If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, the FXO channel is being occupied by a call. 2 ACT (interface status indicator) Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 112 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Number in Figure 5-25 Indicator Color Description ACT (interface status indicator) Green If the indicator is off, the FXO channel is idle. If the indicator is steady on, the FXS channel is being occupied by a call. If the indicator is off, the FXS channel is idle. 3 Interfaces Table 5-80 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 4FXS1FXO. Table 5-80 Types and functions of interfaces on the 4FXS1FXO Letter in Figure 5-25 a Name Qua ntity Description Cable Type FXS (RJ11) FXO (RJ11) 4 1 The POTS voice FXS interface uses regular telephone lines. The POTS voice FXO interface uses regular telephone lines. 6.11 Regular Telephone Lines Interface Attributes Table 5-81 Attributes of FXS/FXO (RJ11) interfaces Attribute Connector type Standards compliance Cable type Dialing mode Description RJ11 ITU Q.512 for FXS interfaces ITU Q.552 for FXO interfaces ITU K.20 for protection against overcurrent and overvoltage Regular telephone line DTMF in accordance with GB3378 Pulse dialing Bandwidth 300 Hz to 3400 Hz Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 113 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Technical Specifications Table 5-82 describes the technical specifications of the 4FXS1FXO. Table 5-82 Technical specifications of the 4FXS1FXO Item Dimensions
(Depth x Width x Height) Specification 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 3.94 in. x 0.78 in.) Maximum power consumption 12.78 W Weight 0.3 kg (0.66 lb) 5.6.3 16/32/64/128-Channel DSP Module The 16/32/64/128-channel DSP module is a VoIP voice processing DIMM. Functions and Applications Functions The 16/32/64/128-channel DSP module provides the voice over IP (VoIP) functions, including:
l Processes the dial tone. l Parses telephone numbers. l Generates interactive voice response (IVR) and voice signal. l Encodes, decodes, and converts voice. l Implements voice conferences and echo canceler (EC). l Processes IP packets. Applications The 16/32/64/128-channel DSP module is installed into the DSP DIMM of the main control board on the AR2220, AR2240 and AR3260. CAUTION Only the DSP module supported by the product can be inserted into the DSP DIMM slot. The DDR3 memory board or unsupported DIMMs cannot be inserted; otherwise, the device may be damaged or does not function properly. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 114 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Technical Specifications 5 Cards Table 5-83 shows the technical specifications of the 16/32/64/128-channel DSP module. Table 5-83 Technical specifications of the 16/32/64/128-channel DSP module Item Maximum power consumption Specification 2.89 W Weight 0.05 kg (0.11 lb) 5.7 xDSL/xPON Interface Card This section describes the types, functions, applications, appearance, interfaces, and technical specifications of the xDSL/xPON interface card. 5.7.1 ADSL-A/M and ADSL-B-1-Port-ADSL2+ ANNEX A/M and B WAN Interface Card The ADSL-A/M and ADSL-B are the ADSL2/ADSL2+ service access modules on the AR routers and support ADSL2+ Annex A, Annex B, and Annex M specifications. NOTE l The ADSL-A/M supports both Annex A and Annex M. l The ADSL-B supports Annex B. Table 5-84 describes the comparison between Annex A, Annex B, and Annex M. Table 5-84 Comparison between Annex A, Annex B, and Annex M Card Name Annex A Usage Scenario Annex A is applied to ADSL over POTS and compatible with POTS services. Annex B Annex B is applied to ADSL over ISDN and compatible with ISDN services. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 115 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Card Name Annex M Usage Scenario Annex M expands the upstream frequency band of ADSL and provides a higher upstream transmission rate. G.992.3 and G.992.5 each define Annex M:
l Annex M defined in G.992.3 and Annex M defined in G.992.5 have the same upstream frequency band. l They have different downstream frequency bands:
The maximum downstream frequency band of Annex M defined in G.992.3 is 1104 kHz. The maximum downstream frequency band of Annex M defined in G.992.5 is 2208 kHz. Functions and Applications Functions The ADSL-A/M and ADSL-B each provide 1-channel ADSL/ADSL2+ access, provide independent CPU and management interfaces, and support ADSL2+ Annex A, Annex B, and Annex M specifications. The ADSL-A/M or ADSL-B consists of the following modules:
l CPU control module: manages the system and loads programs. l ADSL2+ module: implements ADSL2+ modulation and demodulation on CPEs. l SGMII upstream module: provides one SGMII upstream interface to communicate with the active and standby SRUs. l Power supply module: conducts power from backplane to card. l Clock module: provides two types of working clocks for cards. Applications The ADSL-A/M and ADSL-B can be installed into the SIC slot of the AR1200, AR2220, AR2240 and AR3260. Panel and Interfaces NOTE The ADSL-A/M and ADSL-B panels are identical except for having different silkscreens. The following describes the panel and Interfaces of the ADSL-A/M. Figure 5-26 shows the appearance of the ADSL-A/M. Figure 5-26 Appearance of the ADSL-A/M 1 2 a Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 116 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-85 describes the buttons and indicators on the ADSL-A/M panel. Table 5-85 Buttons and indicators on the ADSL-A/M panel Indicator Color Description Number in Figure 5-26 1 STAT Green Red Off Green 2 LINK If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, the DSL channel has been activated. If the indicator is off, the DSL channel is not activated. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the DSL channel is being activated. Interfaces Table 5-86 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the ADSL-A/M. Table 5-86 Types and functions of interfaces on the ADSL-A/M Letter in Figure 5-26 a Name ADSL2+
(RJ11) Quanti ty 1 Description Cable Type 6.11 Regular Telephone Lines The ADSL-A/M provides one RJ11 interface, which supports regular telephone lines. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 117 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Interface Attributes 5 Cards Table 5-87 Attributes of ADSL2/ADSL2+ interfaces Attribute Connector type Description RJ11 Standards compliance ADSL-A/M:
ITU-T 992.1 G.DMT ITU-T 992.3 ITU-T 992.5 Transmission rate ADSL-B:
ITU-T 992.1 G.DMT ANSI T1.413 Issue 2 ITU-T 992.3 ITU-T 992.5 ADSL-A/M:
l ADSL full rate mode (ITU-T 992.1 G.DMT): a downstream transmission rate of 8 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1024 kbit/s l ADSL2 full rate mode (ITU-T 992.3): a downstream transmission rate of 12 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1024 kbit/s l ADSL2+ full rate mode (ITU-T 992.5): a downstream transmission rate of 24 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1024 kbit/s ADSL-B:
A downstream transmission rate of 8 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1024 kbit/s Cable type Regular telephone line Technical Specifications Table 5-88 describes the technical specifications of the ADSL-A/M and ADSL-B. Table 5-88 Technical specifications of the ADSL-A/M and ADSL-B Item Dimensions
(Depth x Width x Height) Specification 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 3.94 in. x 0.78 in.) Maximum power consumption 5.4 W Weight 0.3 kg (0.66 lb) Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 118 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards 5.7.2 4G.SHDSL-1-Port-4-Channel G.SHDSL WAN Interface Card The 4G.SHDSL is the G.SHDSL service access module on the AR routers. G.Single-Pair High-Speed Digital Subscriber Line (G.SHDSL) uses trellis coded pulse amplitude modulation (TCPAM), provides up to 5.696 Mbit/s symmetric data rates, and supports 2/3/4-pair binding. The transmission rate can automatically adapt according to the line length and conditions. G.SHDSL provides a longer transmission distance than ADSL. Functions and Applications Functions The 4G.SHDSL provides 4-channel G.SHDSL access and the independent CPU as well as management interfaces. The 4G.SHDSL consists of the following modules:
l CPU control module: manages the system and loads programs. l G.SHDSL module: processes G.SHDSL services on CPEs. l GE upstream module: provides one upstream interface to communicate with the active and standby SRUs. l Power supply module: conducts power from backplane to card. l Clock module: provides three types of working clocks for cards. Applications The 4G.SHDSL can be installed into the SIC slot of the AR1200, AR2220, AR2240 and AR3260. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-27 shows the appearance of the 4G.SHDSL. Figure 5-27 Appearance of the 4G.SHDSL 1 2 3 a Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-89 describes the buttons and indicators on the 4G.SHDSL panel. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 119 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Table 5-89 Buttons and indicators on the 4G.SHDSL panel Number in Figure 5-27 1 Indicator Color STAT Green Description If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. 2 LINK Red Off Green If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, the four DSL channels have been activated. If the indicator is off, the four DSL channels have not been activated. l If the indicator is on for 0.25 seconds and blinks three times in the next 0.75 seconds, the DSL channel has been activated. l If the indicator is on for 0.5 seconds and blinks twice in the next 0.5 seconds, the two DSL channels have been activated. l If the indicator is on for 0.75 seconds and blinks in the next 0.25 seconds, the three DSL channels have been activated. ACT Yellow If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. 3 Interfaces Table 5-90 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 4G.SHDSL. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 120 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Name Table 5-90 Types and functions of interfaces on the 4G.SHDSL Letter in Figure 5-27 a Description Qua ntity 1 Cable Type G.SHDSL
(RJ45) 6.9 4G.SHDSL Cables or 6.5 Network Cable The 4G.SHDSL provides one RJ45 interface, which supports standard network cables. Interface Attributes Table 5-91 Attributes of G.SHDSL interfaces Attribute Connector type Description One RJ45 connector on one end and four RJ11 connectors on the other end Standards compliance G.SHDSL.bit Transmission rate 5.696 Mbit/s per pair Technical Specifications Table 5-92 describes the technical specifications of the 4G.SHDSL. Table 5-92 Technical specifications of the 4G.SHDSL Item Dimensions
(Depth x Width x Height) Specification 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm (8.8 in. x 3.94 in. x 0.78 in.) Maximum power consumption 8.2 W Weight 0.35 kg (0.78 lb) 5.7.3 1PON (1-Port GPON/EPON Dual-Mode Interface Card) The 1PON card is the EPON/GPON auto-sensing module on the AR routers. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 121 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards NOTE 1 port: There are two ports on the 1PON card, one of which is the backup port. Therefore, the 1PON card is also called the 1PON. The 1PON card functions as the ONU of the EPON/GPON system:
l Receives cells broadcast in TDM mode at a downlink rate of 1.25 Gbit/s (EPON) or 2.488 Gbit/s (GPON). l Supports burst transmission in TDMA mode at an uplink rate of 1.25 Gbit/s (EPON) or 1.244 Gbit/s (GPON). Functions and Applications Functions The 1PON card works with the main control board and supports two PON SFP uplink interfaces. The 1PON card has the following functions:
l Supports OLT clock synchronization but not the 1588 function. l Supports EPON/GPON but not GE. l Supports the DyingGasp function. l Supports rogue ONT detection and isolation. l Detects the receiving optical power. l Supports delayed reset. Applications The 1PON card is installed into the SIC slot of the AR1200, AR2220, AR2240 and AR3260. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-28 shows the appearance of the 1PON panel. Figure 5-28 Appearance of the 1PON panel 1 2 3 2 3 a Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-93 describes the buttons and indicators on the 1PON panel. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 122 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Indicator Table 5-93 Buttons and indicators on the 1PON panel Number in Figure 5-28 1 Color STAT Green Description If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. 2 and 3 PON interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator indicates whether the PON card is requesting data transmission. l The AUTH indicator indicates the authentication status. Red Off Green If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If both the LINK indicator and AUTH indicator are steady on, the 1PON card is registered successfully. If the LINK indicator is steady on and the AUTH indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the 1PON card is being registered. If both the LINK indicator and AUTH indicator blink once 0.25s (4 Hz), the 1PON card keeps requesting data transmission. When this occurs, the 1PON card is a rogue ONU. If both the LINK indicator and AUTH indicator are off, the 1PON card does not request data transmission. Interfaces Table 5-94 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the 1PON card. Table 5-94 Types and functions of interfaces on the 1PON card Letter in Figure 5-28 a Qua ntity 2 Description Name PON interface The 1PON card provides EPON/GPON interfaces that are connected using SC/PC fibers. Cable Type 6.6 Optical Fiber Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 123 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Interface Attributes 5 Cards Table 5-95 Attributes of the SFP optical module supported by the PON optical interface Attribute Connector type Transport mode Transmission rate Standards compliance Sending end Center wavelength Average transmitting optical power Average turn-off optical power Side-mode suppression ratio Description SC/PC connector (SFP encapsulation) Single-mode bidirectional l Downstream transmission rate of 2488 Mbit/s l Upstream transmission rate of 1244 Mbit/s ITU-T G.984.2 CLASS B+
ITU-T G.984.5 WBF 1290 nm to 1330 nm 0.5 dBm to 5 dBm
-45 dBm 30 dB Receivin g end Extinction ratio 10 dB to 15 dB Overload power
-8 dBm Input wavelength range 1480 nm to 1500 nm Operating temperature 0C to 70C Technical Specifications Table 5-96 describes the technical specifications of the 1PON card. Table 5-96 Technical specifications of the 1PON card Item Dimensions
(depth x width x height) Maximum power consumption Specification 223.5 mm x 100.1 mm x 19.82 mm 8.72 W Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 124 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Item Weight Specification 0.3 kg 5.7.4 VDSL (1-Port VDSL2 over POTS WAN Interface Card) The VDSL interface card provides an interface for VDSL2 access. Functions and Applications Functions The VDSL interface card is used for packet switching and device management. It supports the following functions:
l Works in VDSL2 mode that complies with ITU-T G.993.2 and supports profile 17a defined in G.993.2. l Rolls back to ADSL2+ mode that complies with G.992.5. l Supports temperature and power measurement. l Sends a dying gasp alarm in the case of a power failure. The VDSL interface card consists of the following modules:
l ADSL2/VDSL2 socket: implements ADSL2/VDSL2 modulation and demodulation on customer premises equipment (CPE). l Storage module: stores data and programs on the interface card. l GE uplink interface module: provides a GE uplink interface to receive and transmit data. The SRU manages the interface through this GE interface. l Temperature and power module: measures temperature and power on the interface card. l Clock resetting module: provides signals to reset the system clock. Applications The VDSL interface card can be installed in the SIC slot on the AR1200, AR2220, AR2240, and AR3260 chassis. Panel and Interfaces Figure 5-29 shows the appearance of the VDSL interface card. Figure 5-29 VDSL panel 1 2 a Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 125 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Buttons and Indicators on the Panel Table 5-97 describes the buttons and indicators on the VDSL panel. 5 Cards Table 5-97 Buttons and indicators on the VDSL panel Number in Figure 5-29 1 Indicator Color STAT Green Red Off Green 2 LINK Description If the indicator is steady on, the router has been powered on, but the system software is not running. If the indicator blinks once every 2s
(0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once every 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is loading software after power-on or is restarting. If the indicator is steady on, a fault that affects services has occurred and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. If the indicator is steady on, the VDSL channel has been activated. If the indicator is off, the VDSL channel has not been activated. If the indicator blinks once every 0.25s (4 Hz), the VDSL channel is being activated. Interfaces Table 5-98 describes the types and functions of interfaces on the VDSL interface card. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 126 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Table 5-98 Types and functions of interfaces on the VDSL interface card Letter in Figure 5-29 a Name VDSL2
(RJ11) Quanti ty 1 Description Cable Type 6.11 Regular Telephone Lines The VDSL interface card provides an RJ11 interface, which connects to a DSLAM through a telephone cable. Interface Attributes Table 5-99 VDSL interface attributes Item Connector Standards compliance Rate Description RJ11 VDSL standards:
ITU-T 993.2 ITU-T 992.5 ITU-T 992.3 ITU-T 992.1 G.DMT l ADSL2+ full rate mode (ITU-T 992.3): a downstream transmission rate of 12 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1 Mbit/s l VDSL2 mode (ITU-T 993.2): a downstream transmission rate of 100 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 50 kbit/s l ADSL2 full rate mode (ITU-T 992.5): a downstream transmission rate of 24 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1 Mbit/s l ADSL full rate mode (ITU-T 992.1 G.DMT): a downstream transmission rate of 8 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1 Mbit/s Cable type Telephone cable Technical Specifications Table 5-100 describes the technical specifications of the VDSL interface card. Table 5-100 Technical specifications of the VDSL interface card Parameter Dimensions (W x D x H) Description 100.1 mm x 223.5 mm x 19.82 mm Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 127 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 5 Cards Parameter Maximum power consumption Description 7.6 W Weight 0.2 kg Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 128 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables 6 Cables About This Chapter This chapter describes the cables used by the AR routers, including the structures and technical specifications of the cables. 6.1 AC Power Cable An AC power cable transmits AC power to the switch. 6.2 DC Power Cables A DC power cable transmits DC power to the switch. 6.3 Ground Cable A ground cable protects the device from lightning strike and electromagnetic interference. 6.4 Console Cable A console cable is used to debug or maintain a local device. 6.5 Network Cable A network cable subtends devices, enables a device to communication with other network devices, and allows users to locally or remotely maintain the device. 6.6 Optical Fiber An optical fiber connects the optical interface of a device to an upstream device or optical network terminal. 6.7 E1/T1 Trunk Cables This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the E1/T1 trunk cable. 6.8 Synchronous/Asynchronous Serial Interface Cables This section describes the categories, structure, and technical specifications of the synchronous/
asynchronous serial interface cable. 6.9 4G.SHDSL Cables This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the 4G.SHDSL cable. 6.10 ISDN-ST Cables This section describes the categories, structure, and technical specifications of the ISDN-ST cable. 6.11 Regular Telephone Lines Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 129 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the regular telephone line. 6.12 8AS Cable An 8AS cable is connected to an 8AS interface card to commission or maintain the 8AS interface card. 6.13 3G Antenna A 3G antenna transmits and receives 3G signals to enable an AR router to communicate with a 3G network. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 130 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables 6.1 AC Power Cable An AC power cable transmits AC power to the switch. Application Appearance An AC power cable connects the following:
l The AC input power jack on the chassis l The other end is connected to the AC power supply Figure 6-1 shows the appearance of the AC power cable. Figure 6-1 Appearance of the AC power cable Specifications NOTE The AC power cables used in different countries and regions may have different specifications. The following are the specifications of the international standard AC power cable. Table 6-1 lists the specifications of the AC power cable. Table 6-1 Specifications of the AC power cable Item Cable type Function Description External power cable 250 V AC/10 A complying with international standard Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 131 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Item Connector 1 Connector 2 Cable type Description PI-straight-male C13-straight-female l 227 IEC 53 (RVV)-300 V/500 V l Rated voltage: 300 V/500 V l Standards compliance: 227 IEC 53 (RVV) Conductor cross-sectional area 3 x 1.0 mm2 (3 x 0.00155 in.2) Fireproof level GB18380.1 6.2 DC Power Cables Applications A DC power cable transmits DC power to the switch. A DC power cable connects the following two interfaces:
l Input power jack on the chassis l Output power interface on an external power system NOTE A black -48 V DC power return wire (RTN) is connected to the RTN(+) end of the DC power supply. A blue -48 V DC power cable is connected to the NEG(-) end of the DC power supply. Appearance and Structure The black -48 V DC power return wire and the blue -48 V DC power cable are shown in Figure 6-2 and Figure 6-3. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 132 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Figure 6-2 -48 V DC power return wire 6 Cables Figure 6-3 -48 V DC power cable Specifications The technical specifications of a -48 V DC power return wire and a -48 V DC power cable are the same, as described in Table 6-2. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 133 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Table 6-2 Specifications of the DC power cables Item Cable type Color Connector 1 Connector 2 Impedance Description Power cable Blue for -48 V DC power cable and black for -48 V DC power return wire OT Cord end terminal 4.95 /km Conductor cross-sectional area 1.2 mm2 (0.00186 in.2) 6.3 Ground Cable A ground cable protects the device from lightning strike and electromagnetic interference. Application Appearance A ground cable connects the chassis to the ground. Figure 6-4 shows the appearance of the ground cable. Figure 6-4 Appearance of the ground cable Specifications Table 6-3 lists the specifications of the ground cable. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 134 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Table 6-3 Specifications of the ground cable Item Cable type Color Description Power cable Green-yellow Connector type (X1/X2) OT/OT naked crimping terminal Gauge Cable type Maximum current Fireproof level 10 AWG (cross-sectional area 5.2 mm2
[0.0081 in.2]) l Standards compliance: H07Z-K UL3386 l Length: 0.3 m 50.0 A VW-1, CSA FT1 6.4 Console Cable A console cable is used to debug or maintain a local device. Application A console cable connects the console port of the device to the serial port of an operation terminal to transmit configuration data. A shielded cable or an unshielded cable can be used according to the onsite situation. A console cable connects the device and terminal as follows:
l The 8-pin RJ45 connector is inserted into the console port of the device. l The DB9 male connector is connected to an operation terminal, which is usually a PC. Appearance and Structure Figure 6-5 shows the structure of the console cable. Figure 6-5 Structure of the console cable D-type connector
(9-pin, male) Pos.9 Pos.5 Label Network port connector
(8-pin, RJ-45) Pos.6 Pos.1 X1 X2 1 8 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 135 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Pin Assignments 6 Cables Table 6-4 describes the pin assignments of the console cable. Table 6-4 Pin assignments of the console cable Connector Pin assignment X1(DB9) 2 3 5 X2(RJ45) 3 6 5 Specifications Table 6-5 lists the specifications of the console cable. Table 6-5 Specifications of the console cable Item Connector type Cable type Color Diameter Gauge Pin Length Description l Connector X1: cable connector, D-type, 9-pin, male l Connector X2: network interface connector, RJ45, 8-
pin, 8-bit, male Twisted pair PANTONE WARM GRAY 1U 0.32 mm (0.13 in.) 28 AWG (cross-sectional area 0.08 mm2 [0.0002 in. 2]) 2 pairs 3 m (9.85 ft.) 6.5 Network Cable A network cable subtends devices, enables a device to communication with other network devices, and allows users to locally or remotely maintain the device. Application A network cable connects a maintenance terminal to the console port on the main control board for local or remote maintenance. The network cables are classified into straight-through cables and crossover cables. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 136 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Pin Assignments 6 Cables Table 6-6 describes the pin assignments of the straight-through cable. Table 6-6 Pin assignments of the straight-through cable X1 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Tip Color White and orange Orange White and Green Blue White and Blue Green White and brown Brown X2 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Table 6-7 describes the pin assignments of the crossover cable. Table 6-7 Pin assignments of the crossover cable Tip Color White and orange Orange White and Green Blue White and Blue Green White and brown Brown X2 Pin 3 6 1 4 5 2 7 8 X1 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 NOTE To achieve the optimum electrical transmission performance, ensure that the wires connected to pins 1 and 2 and to pins 3 and 6 are twisted pairs. Specifications Table 6-8 lists the specifications of the network cable. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 138 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Table 6-8 Specifications of the network cable Item Connector type (X1/X2) Description RJ45 connectors Cable type Color Characteristic impedance Diameter Breakdown voltage Impedance Pin Frequency Category-3 and category-5 unshielded twisted pairs
(UTP-3 and UTP-5) or shielded twisted pairs (STP) Dark gray 100.0 0.510 mm (0.02 in.) 500.0 V 93.8 8 pins 0 MHz to 100 MHz Frequency attenuation 22 dB/100 m@100 MHz Fireproof level Length CM l Straight through cable: 5 meters (16.4 ft.), 10 meters
(32.8 ft.), 20 meters (65.6 ft.), and 30 meters (98.5 ft.) l Crossover cable: 5 meters (16.4 ft.) and 30 meters
(98.5 ft.) 6.6 Optical Fiber Application An optical fiber connects the optical interface of a device to an upstream device or optical network terminal. An optical fiber carries optical signals and transmits them over short distance. An optical fiber connects the following:
l The optical interface on a board l The optical distribution frame (ODF) or the optical interface on another device Table 6-9 lists the classification of optical fibers. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 139 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Table 6-9 Optical fiber classification No. Purpose Local End Connector LC/PC To connect LPU of the device to the ODF To connect LPUs of two devices LC/PC Remote End Connector FC/PC LC/PC To connect LPU of the device to another device LC/PC SC/PC or LC/
PC 1 2 3 Mode Single mode, indoor Single mode/
multimode, indoor Single mode/
multimode, indoor Appearance The appearances of the single-mode optical fiber and the multimode optical fiber are the same, but their colors are different. The single-mode optical fiber is yellow, and the multi-mode optical fiber is orange. CAUTION When connecting or removing the LC/PC optical connector, align the connector with the optical interface, and do not rotate the fiber. Pay attention to the following points:
l Align the head of the fiber jumper with the optical interface and insert the optical fiber into the interface gently. l To remove the fiber, press the latch on the connector and pull the fiber out. Figure 6-8 and Figure 6-9 show the appearances of the single mode fiber. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 140 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Figure 6-8 Single mode fiber with LC/PC connectors Figure 6-9 Single mode fiber with SC/PC connectors Figure 6-10 shows the appearance of the multimode fiber. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 141 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Figure 6-10 Multimode fiber with LC/PC connectors Pin Assignments Table 6-10 describes the pin assignments of the optical fiber. Table 6-10 Pin assignments of the optical fiber Local End Terminal Signal Direction
->
Remote End Terminal Optical interface Rx terminal Optical interface Tx terminal Optical interface Tx terminal Optical interface Rx terminal
<-
Fiber Selection Criterion Table 6-11 lists the criteria for selecting optical fibers. Table 6-12 lists common optical connectors. Table 6-11 Fiber selection criterion Parameter Length Criterion Onsite survey result Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 142 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Parameter Single mode or multimode Criterion Optical module type l The optical transmitting module of the multitransverse mode is connected to the multimode fiber. l The optical transmitting module of the single-longitudinal mode or multi-longitudinal mode is connected to the single mode fiber. NOTE If the optical fiber jumper is used, the connector connected to the device must be the LC/PC connector, and the connector connected to the remote end must be of the same type as the remote end interface. Connector shape l Cube: SC/PC, LC/PC, and MTRJ/PC l Column: ST/PC and FC/PC Table 6-12 Common optical connectors SC/PC optical connector LC/PC optical connector FC/PC optical connector MTRJ/PC optical connector
-
ST/PC optical connector 6.7 E1/T1 Trunk Cables This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the E1/T1 trunk cable. Introduction E1 trunk cables are classified into 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cables and 120-ohm balanced twisted pair cables. The connectors of the cables are as follows:
l 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable (DB9 to BNC):
One end provides a DB9 connector. The other end provides two BNC connectors. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 143 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables l 120-ohm balanced twisted pair cable (DB9 to RJ45):
One end provides a DB9 connector. The other end provides an RJ45 connector. A T1 trunk cable is a 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable. Its appearance is the same as the appearance of an E1 120-ohm balanced twisted pair cable. Appearance and Structure Figure 6-11 shows the appearance of an E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable. Figure 6-11 Appearance of an E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable Figure 6-12 shows the appearance of the E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable. Figure 6-12 Appearance of the E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 144 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Figure 6-13 shows the structure of an E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable. Figure 6-13 Structure of an E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable D-type connector
(9-pin, male) Label 1 Pos.6 Pos.1 Main Label BNC connector Pos.9 Pos.5 X1 X2 X3 Label 2 BNC connector Figure 6-14 shows the structure of the E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable. Figure 6-14 Structure of the E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable D-type connector
(9-pin, male) Pos.6 Pos.1 Label Network port connector
(8-pin, RJ-45) X2 1 8 Pos.9 Pos.5 X1 Pin Assignments Table 6-13 describes the pin assignments of an E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable. Table 6-13 Pin assignments of an E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable Connector Pin assignment X1 (DB9) 1 BNC Connector X2 2 6 7 X3 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 145 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Table 6-14 describes the pin assignments of the E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable. Table 6-14 Pin assignments of the E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable Connector Pin assignment X1 (DB9) 1 X2 (RJ45) 4 2 6 7 5 1 2 Tip Color White and orange Orange White and Blue Blue E1/T1 Trunk Cable Extension NOTE The E1/T1 trunk cable is 3 m long. If the connection distance is long, a cable extension is required. l E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable: BNC to BNC (The two connectors are BNC 75 angle male-II.) l E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable: RJ45 to RJ45 (The two connectors are RJ45.) The E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable is connected as follows:
l If the E1 trunk cable extension is not used, the BNC connector is connected to the remote device. l If the E1 trunk cable extension is used, the BNC connector is connected to a coaxial connector, and the coaxial connector is connected to the remote device through the cable extension, as shown in Figure 6-15. CAUTION The Tx end of the E1 trunk cable is connected to the Rx end of the remote device, and the Rx end is connected to the Tx end. Figure 6-15 E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable extension DB9 connector R o u t e r BNC BNC DDN E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable Coaxial connector E1 75-ohm cable extension Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 146 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables The E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable is connected as follows:
l If the E1/T1 trunk cable extension is not used, the RJ45 connector is connected to the RJ45 interface of the remote device. l If the E1/T1 trunk cable extension is used, the RJ45 connector is connected to a network interface connector, and the network interface connector is connected to the remote device through the cable extension, as shown in Figure 6-16. Figure 6-16 E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable extension DB9 connector R o u t e r RJ45 RJ45 DDN E1 120-ohm and T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair Network interface connector Specifications E1 120-ohm and T1 100-ohm cable extension Table 6-15 lists the specifications of the E1/T1 trunk cable. Table 6-15 Specifications of the E1/T1 trunk cable Item Characteristic impedance Cable type Color Diameter Description l E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable: 75 ohm l E1 120-ohm balanced twisted pair cable: 120 ohm l T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable: 100 ohm l E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable: coaxial cable l E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable: balanced twisted pair cable l E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable: PANTONE WARM GREY 1U l E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable: PANTONE 430U l E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable: 0.254 mm
(0.01 in.) l E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable: 0.4 mm (0.016 in.) Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 147 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Item Gauge Cores Description l E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable: 30 AWG l E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable: 26 AWG l E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable:
SYFVZP-75-1-1*4 l E1 120-ohm or T1 100-ohm balanced twisted pair cable: SEYVP-120 6.8 Synchronous/Asynchronous Serial Interface Cables This section describes the categories, structure, and technical specifications of the synchronous/
asynchronous serial interface cable. Introduction A synchronous/asynchronous serial interface cable is connected as follows:
l The DB28 connector is connected to the DB28 port on a card. l Another end depends on the connected device:
If the wide area network (WAN) uses the DDN line, the cable is connected to the CSU/
DSU. If the WAN uses the dial-up line, the cable is connected to the modem. Cable Category CAUTION Verify that devices are connected using appropriate synchronous/asynchronous serial interface cables. Appropriate cable type is determined based on device connection mode (such as synchronous/asynchronous and DTE/DCE modes), signals used by the connected device, baud rate, and clock. Table 6-16 lists the categories of synchronous/asynchronous serial interface cables. Table 6-16 Categories of synchronous/asynchronous serial interface cables Cable V.24 DTE cable V.24 DCE cable V.35 DTE cable Local End Connector DB28 connector Network-side Connector DB25 (male) connector DB25 (female) connector DB28 (male) connector Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 148 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Cable V.35 DCE cable X.21 DTE cable RS449 DTE cable RS449 DCE cable RS530 DTE cable RS530 DCE cable Local End Connector Network-side Connector DB28 (female) connector DB15 (male) connector DB28 (male) connector DB28 (female) connector DB25 (male) connector DB25 (female) connector Appearance Figure 6-17 shows the appearance of the V.24 DTE cable. Figure 6-17 Appearance of the V.24 DTE cable Figure 6-18 shows the appearance of the V.24 DCE cable. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 149 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Figure 6-18 Appearance of the V.24 DCE cable Figure 6-19 shows the appearance of the V.35 DTE cable. Figure 6-19 Appearance of the V.35 DTE cable Figure 6-20 shows the appearance of the V.35 DCE cable. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 150 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Figure 6-20 Appearance of the V.35 DCE cable Figure 6-21 shows the appearance of the X.21 DTE cable. Figure 6-21 Appearance of the X.21 DTE cable Figure 6-22 shows the appearance of the RS449 DTE cable. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 151 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Figure 6-22 Appearance of the RS449 DTE cable Figure 6-23 shows the appearance of the RS449 DCE cable. Figure 6-23 Appearance of the RS449 DCE cable Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 152 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Figure 6-24 shows the appearance of the RS530 DTE cable. Figure 6-24 Appearance of the RS530 DTE cable Figure 6-25 shows the appearance of the RS530 DCE cable. Figure 6-25 Appearance of the RS530 DCE cable Specifications Table 6-17 lists the specifications of the synchronous/asynchronous serial interface cable. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 153 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Table 6-17 Specifications of the synchronous/asynchronous serial interface cable Item Characteristic impedance Description 100 ohm Cable type Transmission rate Color Diameter Gauge Pin Twisted pair l V.24: 1200 bit/s to 64 kbit/s l V.35/X.21/RS449/RS530: 1200 bit/s to 2.048 Mbit/
s Dark blue (PANTONE 296U) l V.24 DTE/DCE cable, V.35 DTE/DCE cable, and X. 21 DTE cable: 0.38 mm (0.015 in.) l RS449 DTE/DCE cable and RS530 DTE/DCE cable:
0.32 mm (0.013 in.) 28 AWG l V.24 DTE/DCE cable, V.35 DTE/DCE cable, X.21 DTE cable: 5 pairs + 8 pins l RS449 DTE/DCE cable and RS530 DTE/DCE cable:
26 pins 6.9 4G.SHDSL Cables This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the 4G.SHDSL cable. Introduction The connectors of a 4G.SHDSL cable are as follows:
l Four RJ11 connectors on the local end l An RJ45 connector on the network side Appearance and Structure Figure 6-26 shows the appearance of the 4G.SHDSL cable. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 154 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Figure 6-26 Appearance of the 4G.SHDSL cable Figure 6-27 shows the structure of the 4G.SHDSL cable. Figure 6-27 Structure of the 4G.SHDSL cable Network port connector
(8-pin, RJ-45) Main Label 1 8 X1 Pin Assignments 6-pin connector Label 1 6 1 X2 Label 2 X3 Label 3 X4 Label 4 X5 Table 6-18 describes the pin assignments of the 4G.SHDSL cable. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 155 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Table 6-18 Pin assignments of the 4G.SHDSL cable Connector Pin assignment X1 (RJ45) 1 (LINE1 A) X2/X3/X4/X5 (RJ11) Tip Color 2.3 White and orange 2 (LINE1 B) 3 (LINE2 A) 6 (LINE2 B) 4 (LINE0 A) 5 (LINE0 B) 7 (LINE3 A) 8 (LINE3 B) 2.4 3.3 3.4 4.3 4.4 5.3 5.4 Orange White and Green Green White and Blue Blue White and brown Brown Specifications NOTE As shown in Table 6-18, the 4G.SHDSL cable uses standard pin assignments. A cable has four ports, each of them has two lines (A/B). The two lines in a port can be assigned in any sequence, but the line pairs must be assigned in certain sequence. Table 6-19 lists the specifications of the 4G.SHDSL cable. Table 6-19 Specifications of the 4G.SHDSL cable Item Description 100 ohm Characteristic impedance Cable type Color Diameter Gauge Pin Category 5 twisted pairs PANTONE 430U 0.51 mm (0.02 in.) 24 AWG 8 pins 6.10 ISDN-ST Cables This section describes the categories, structure, and technical specifications of the ISDN-ST cable. Introduction ISDN-ST cables are classified into the following types:
Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 156 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Figure 6-29 Appearance of an ISDN S/T interface crossover cable Figure 6-30 shows the structure of an ISDN S/T interface crossover cable. Figure 6-30 Structure of an ISDN S/T interface crossover cable Network port connector
(8-pin, RJ-45, male) Label Network port connector
(8-pin, RJ-45, female) X1 1 8 Pin Assignments 1 8 X2 Table 6-20 describes the pin assignments of the standard ISDN S/T interface cable. Pins 3 and 6 are the sending end, and pins 4 and 5 are the receiving end. Table 6-20 Pin assignments of the standard ISDN S/T interface cable RJ45 1 Signal
-
RJ45 1 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 158 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables RJ45 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal
-
Tx+
Rx+
Rx-
Tx-
-
-
RJ45 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Table 6-21 describes the pin assignments of the ISDN S/T interface crossover cable. Pins 4 and 5 are the sending end, and pins 3 and 6 are the receiving end. Table 6-21 Pin assignments of the standard ISDN S/T interface crossover cable RJ45 (TE) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal
-
-
Tx+
Rx+
Rx-
Tx-
-
-
RJ45 (NT) 1 2 4 3 6 5 7 8 Technical Specifications Table 6-22 lists the technical specifications of an ISDN-ST cable. Table 6-22 Technical specifications of an ISDN-ST cable Item Characteristic impedance Specification 100 ohm Cable Color Diameter Category 5 twisted pairs PANTONE 430U 0.51 mm (0.02 in.) Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 159 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Item Gauge Impedance Pin Specification 24 AWG 93.8 ohm 8 pins 6.11 Regular Telephone Lines This section describes the structure and technical specifications of the regular telephone line. Introduction Appearance The regular telephone line is connected as follows:
l The RJ11 connector is connected to a device such as a phone and fax machine. l Another RJ11 connector is connected to the voice card of the AR1200. Figure 6-31 shows the appearance of the regular telephone line. Figure 6-31 Appearance of the regular telephone line 6PIN-RJ11 6PIN-RJ11 1 6 X1 Pin Assignment 6 1 X2 Table 6-23 provides the pin assignment of a regular telephone line. Table 6-23 Pin assignment of a regular telephone line X1 Pin 3 4 Wire Color Red Green X2 Pin 3 4 Remarks Tip(+) Ring(-) Specifications Table 6-24 lists the specifications of the regular telephone line. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 160 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Table 6-24 Specifications of the regular telephone line Item Dielectric strength Description 150 V Maximum current Impedance Cable type Color Gauge Pin 1 A 237.25 ohm UL20251 White 28 AWG 2 pins 6.12 8AS Cable An 8AS cable is connected to an 8AS interface card to commission or maintain the 8AS interface card. Introduction An 8AS cable connects the console port on an 8AS interface card to the serial port of an operation terminal. You can use shield cables or unshielded cables as required in different scenarios. The common usage scenarios of 8AS cables are:
l To connect an 8AS interface card to automatic teller machines in a bank, use shield straight-
through cables. You can buy shield straight-through cables from Huawei or made these cables onsite. l To connect an 8AS interface card to a dumb terminal, use a transit cable and a shield straight-through cable. A transit cable has an RJ45 plug on one end and an RJ45 socket on the other end. The transit cable converts the pin assignments on the dumb terminal to the standard pin assignments, which are the same as those on the straight-through cable. Then the straight-through cable can connect to the dumb terminal. l To connect an 8AS interface card to a serial port device, such as a PC or modem, use an asynchronous serial cable and a transit cable. One end of an asynchronous serial cable is an RJ45 socket, and the other end has a DB25 plug and a DB9 plug. The asynchronous serial cable connects to the PC or modem through the transit cable. NOTE Huawei can customize 8AS cables of specified length. Straight-through cable Figure 6-32 shows the appearance of a straight-through cable. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 161 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables X1 Pin (8AS) 5 6 7 8 X2 Pin (Console) 3 6 1 8 Table 6-8 lists the technical specifications of a straight-through cable. Transit Cable Figure 6-34 shows the appearance of a transit cable. Figure 6-34 Transit cable appearance Figure 6-35 shows the structure of a transit cable. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 163 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Figure 6-35 Transit cable structure Network port connector
(8-pin, RJ-45, male) Label Network port connector
(8-pin, RJ-45, female) 1 8 X2 X1 1 8 Table 6-26 lists the pin assignments of a transit cable. Table 6-26 Pin assignments of a transit cable X1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 X2 4 2 7 5 6 3 8 1 Table 6-27 lists the specifications of a transit cable. Table 6-27 Specifications of a transit cable Item Characteristic impedance Cable type Color Description 100 ohm Category 5 twisted pairs PANTONE 430U Core diameter of the inner conductor Wire gauge of the inner conductor DC resistance of the inner conductor Number of pins 0.51 mm 24 AWG 93.8 ohm 8 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 164 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Asynchronous Serial Cable 6 Cables Figure 6-36 shows the appearance of an asynchronous serial cable. Figure 6-36 Appearance of an asynchronous serial cable Figure 6-37 shows the structure of an asynchronous serial cable. Figure 6-37 Structure of an asynchronous serial cable D-type connector
(25-pin, male) Pos.14 Pos.1 Label Network port connector
(8-pin, RJ-45) Pos.25 Pos.13 X1 X2 1 8 Pos.6 Pos.1 Pos.5 X3 Pos.9 D-type connector
(9-pin, male) Table 6-28 lists the pin assignments of an asynchronous serial cable. Table 6-28 Pin assignments of an asynchronous serial cable X1 4 X2 1 X3 7 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 165 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables X1 20 2 8 7 3 6 5 X2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 X3 4 3 1 5 2 6 8 Table 6-29 lists the specifications an asynchronous serial cable. Table 6-29 Specifications of an asynchronous serial cable Item Connector Cable type Color Description l Connector X1: cable connector, D-type, 25-pin, male l Connector X2: network interface connector, RJ45, 8-pin, 8-bit l Connector X3: cable connector, D-type, 9-pin, male Symmetrical twisted pair PANTONE WARM GRAY 1U Core diameter of the inner conductor 0.32 mm Wire gauge of the inner conductor 28 AWG (cross-sectional area approximately equal to 0.08 mm2) Number of pins Length 6.13 3G Antenna 2 pairs 3 m A 3G antenna transmits and receives 3G signals to enable an AR router to communicate with a 3G network. Introduction The antenna interfaces on a 3G-HSPA+7 interface card can connect to whip antennas and indoor remote antennas. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 166 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables l Whip antennas are directly installed on an AR router and are recommended when a router is desk installed or wall mounted. l Indoor remote antennas have a 3 m long feed line and can use two 6 m feed lines to expand the length to 15 m. Indoor remote antennas are recommended when an AR router is installed in a cabinet or rack. (Indoor remote antennas need to be ordered separately if needed.) Whip Antenna Figure 6-38 shows the appearance of a whip antenna. Figure 6-38 Whip antenna Table 6-30 lists the technical specifications of a whip antenna. Table 6-30 Technical specifications of a whip antenna Item Connector Color Characteristic impedance Length Frequency Maximum power Operating temperature Description SMA-J Black 50 ohm 150 mm 824 MHz to 960 MHz/1710 MHz to 2170 MHz 10 W
-40C to +70C Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 167 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Item Relative humidity Gain Description 5% RH to 90% RH, non-condensing l 824 MHz to 960 MHz: 1d Bi l 1710 MHz to 2170 MHz: 2 dBi Voltage standing wave ratio
< 3 Remote Antenna Figure 6-39 shows the appearance of a remote antenna. Figure 6-39 Remote antenna Table 6-31 lists the technical specifications of a remote antenna. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 168 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 6 Cables Table 6-31 Technical specifications of a remote antenna Item Connector Description SMA-Male Color Characteristic impedance Height Frequency Maximum power Operating temperature Gain Black 50 ohm 260 mm 824 MHz to 960 MHz/1710 MHz to 2170 MHz 50 W
-40C to +90C l 824 MHz to 960 MHz: 1 dBi l 1710 MHz to 2170 MHz: 2.5 dBi Voltage standing wave ratio
< 2.5 Attenuation
< 0.3 dB on each meter of feed line (within the working frequency band) Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 169 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 7 List of Indicators 7 List of Indicators About This Chapter This chapter describes the status and meanings of indicators on the AR routers, including indicators on the front and rear panels, cards, fan modules, and power supply units. 7.1 Indicators on the AR1200 Panel This section describes the indicators on the AR1200 panel. 7.2 Indicators on the AR2220 Panel This section describes the indicators on the AR2220 panel. 7.3 Indicators on the AR2240 Panel This section describes the indicators on the AR2240 panel. 7.4 Indicators on the AR3260 Panel This section describes the indicators on the AR3260 panel. 7.5 Fan Module Indicators This section describes the fan module indicators. 7.6 Power Indicators This section describes the power indicators. 7.7 SRU Indicators This section describes the SRU indicators. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 170 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 7 List of Indicators 7.1 Indicators on the AR1200 Panel This section describes the indicators on the AR1200 panel. NOTE l The AR1220V and AR1220 have the same indicators. l The AR1220VW and AR1220W have the same indicators on the front panels. Compared with the AR1220V and AR1220, they have a WLAN indicator and switch button. l The AR1220, AR1220V, AR1220W, and AR1220VW have the same indicators on the rear panels. The AR1220VW is used as an example to describe the indicators. Figure 7-1 shows the indicators on the AR1220VW front panel. Figure 7-1 Indicators on the AR1220VW front panel 3 4 1 2 5 6 Table 7-1 describes the indicators on the AR1220VW front panel. Table 7-1 Description of indicators on the AR1220VW front panel Number in Figure 7-1 1 Indicator Color Description SYS Green Red Off If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 171 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 7 List of Indicators Indicator Color Description Number in Figure 7-1 2 WAN Green 3 ACT Red and green 5 WLAN Green If the indicator is steady on, at least one GE interface has been connected or activated. If the indicator is off, neither GE interface is connected or activated. If the indicator is green, devices have been deployed by using the USB disk. If the indicator blinks green, data is being read from the USB disk. If the indicator is red, the device cannot be correctly connected to the NMS or cannot be registered with the NMS. If the indicator blinks red, an error occurs when configuration files are being executed or data is being read from the USB disk. If the indicator is off, the USB disk is not inserted, the USB interface fails, or the indicator fails. If the indicator is steady on, the link has been connected or activated. If the indicator blinks (20 Hz), the link is transmitting data. If the traffic volume of transmitted data increases, the indicator blinks faster. If the indicator is off, the link is not connected or activated. 4 6 RST CAUTION The Reset button is used for resetting the device manually. Resetting the device will cause service interruption; therefore, confirm the action before you reset the device. WLAN The button enables and disables the WLAN function. Figure 7-2 shows the indicators on the AR1220VW rear panel. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 172 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 7 List of Indicators Figure 7-2 Indicators on the AR1220VW rear panel 7 8 9 10 Table 7-2 describes the indicators on the AR1220VW rear panel. Table 7-2 Description of indicators on the AR1220VW rear panel Number in Figure 7-2 7 Indicator Color Green Description If the indicator is steady on, the port is used as a CON/AUX port. If the indicator is off, the port does not function as a CON/AUX port. EN (CON/
AUX interface) NOTE l Either the CON/AUX port or the MiniUSB port can be used at a time. l By default, the port is used as the CON/AUX port. The EN indicator is green no matter whether a cable is installed. 8 EN (MiniUSB interface) Green If the indicator is steady on, the port is used as a MiniUSB port. If the indicator is off, the port does not function as a MiniUSB port. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 173 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 7 List of Indicators Number in Figure 7-2 9 and 10 Indicator Color Description Green Yellow GE interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator is in green. l The ACT indicator is in yellow. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. 7.2 Indicators on the AR2220 Panel This section describes the indicators on the AR2220 panel. Figure 7-3 shows the indicators on the AR2220 front panel. Figure 7-3 Indicators on the AR2220 front panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Table 7-3 describes the indicators on the AR2220 front panel. Table 7-3 Description of indicators on the AR2220 front panel Number in Figure 7-3 1 Indicator Color Description SYS Green Red Off If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 174 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 7 List of Indicators Indicator Color Description Number in Figure 7-3 2 3 and 4 5 and 6 MiniSD card indicator Green Green Yellow Green Yellow SFP interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator is in green. l The ACT indicator is in yellow. GE interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator is in green. l The ACT indicator is in yellow. 7 ACT Red and green If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, there is no MiniSD card. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is green, devices have been deployed by using the USB disk. If the indicator blinks green, data is being read from the USB disk. If the indicator is red, the device cannot be correctly connected to the NMS or cannot be registered with the NMS. If the indicator blinks red, an error occurs when configuration files are being executed or data is being read from the USB disk. If the indicator is off, the USB disk is not inserted, the USB interface fails, or the indicator fails. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 175 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 7 List of Indicators Indicator Color Description Number in Figure 7-3 8 EN (MiniUSB interface) Green If the indicator is steady on, the port is used as a MiniUSB port. If the indicator is off, the port does not function as a MiniUSB port. If the indicator is steady on, the port is used as a CON/AUX port. If the indicator is off, the port does not function as a CON/AUX port. 9 Green EN (CON/
AUX interface) NOTE l Either the CON/AUX port or the MiniUSB port can be used at a time. l By default, the port is used as the CON/AUX port. The EN indicator is green no matter whether a cable is installed. RST 10 CAUTION The Reset button is used for resetting the device manually. Resetting the device will cause service interruption; therefore, confirm the action before you reset the device. 7.3 Indicators on the AR2240 Panel This section describes the indicators on the AR2240 panel. There is no independent indicator on the AR2240 panel. Indicators on the AR2240 panel are indicators of modules inserted in slots. l Indicators on the AR2240 front panel:
7.6 Power Indicators 7.7 SRU Indicators l Indicators on the AR2240 rear panel:
Indicators of service subcards 7.5 Fan Module Indicators Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 176 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 7 List of Indicators 7.4 Indicators on the AR3260 Panel This section describes the indicators on the AR3260 panel. There is no independent indicator on the AR3260 panel. Indicators on the AR3260 panel are indicators of modules inserted in slots. l Indicators on the AR3260 front panel:
7.6 Power Indicators 7.7 SRU Indicators l Indicators on the AR3260 rear panel:
Service subcard indicators 7.5 Fan Module Indicators 7.5 Fan Module Indicators This section describes the fan module indicators. Figure 7-4 shows the fan module indicator of the AR2240. Figure 7-4 Fan module indicator of the AR2240 Indicator Figure 7-5 shows the fan module indicator of the AR3260. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 177 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 7 List of Indicators Figure 7-5 Fan module indicator of the AR3260 Indicator Table 7-4 describes the fan module indicator of the AR2240 and AR3260. Table 7-4 Description of the fan module indicator Indicator STATUS Color Red and green Description If the indicator blinks green once 2s (0.5 Hz), the fan module is operating properly. If the indicator blinks green once 0.25s (4 Hz), the fan module cannot communicate with the device. If the indicator is steady red, the fan module is faulty and an alarm is generated. 7.6 Power Indicators This section describes the power indicators. HW-100-48AC14D Figure 7-6 shows the indicator of the HW-100-48AC14D. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 178 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 7 List of Indicators Figure 7-6 Indicator of the HW-100-48AC14D Indicator Table 7-5 Description of the HW-100-48AC14D indicators Indicator Description If the indicator is steady on, the output power is Power indicator in the normal range. Color Blue If the indicator is off, the power supply unit does not have output power. 150 W DC Power Supply Unit Figure 7-7 shows the indicator of the 150 W DC power supply unit. Figure 7-7 Indicator of the 150 W DC power supply unit Indicator Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 179 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 7 List of Indicators Table 7-6 Description of 150 W DC power indicators Name STATU S Status Off Description l The input power is out of range, for example, no DC input power, DC input overvoltage, and DC input undervoltage. l The output power is out of range, for example, undervoltage or overtemperature occurs. Green The DC input power is within range. Blinking green The output power is out of range, for example, overvoltage, overcurrent, or short circuit occurs. PWR350D Figure 7-8 shows the indicator of the PWR350D. Figure 7-8 Indicator of the PWR350D Indicator Table 7-7 Description of the PWR350D indicators Name STATUS Status Off Description l The input power is out of range, for example, no DC input power, DC input overvoltage, and DC input undervoltage. l The output power is out of range, for example, undervoltage or overtemperature occurs. Green The DC input power is within range. Blinking green The output power is out of range, for example, overvoltage, overcurrent, and short circuit occurs. PWR150A Figure 7-9 shows the indicator of the PWR150A. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 180 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 7 List of Indicators Figure 7-9 Indicator of the PWR150A Indicator Table 7-8 Description of the PWR150A indicators Indicator Power indicator
(STATUS) Color Green Description If the indicator is steady on, the power supply unit functions properly. If the indicator blinks, the output power is out of range, for example, overvoltage, overcurrent, and short-circuit. If the indicator is off, the input power is out of range, for example no AC input, overvoltage, and undervoltage, or the output power is out of range, for example, undervoltage and overtemperature. PWR350A Figure 7-10 shows the indicators of the PWR350A. Figure 7-10 Indicator of the PWR350A Indicator Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 181 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 7 List of Indicators Table 7-9 Description of the PWR350A indicators Indicator Power indicator
(STATUS) Color Red and green Description If the indicator is steady green, the input power is in the normal range. If the indicator blinks alternately between red and green, the output power is out of range, for example, when an overvoltage, overcurrent, or short circuit event occurs. In these events, the power supply unit goes into hiccup protection mode. 7.7 SRU Indicators This section describes the SRU indicators. NOTE The SRU40 and SRU80 panels are identical except for having different silkscreens. The following describes the panel and Interfaces of the SRU40. Figure 7-11 shows the SRU indicators. Figure 7-11 SRU indicators 1 2 3 4 56 56 7 8 7 8 7 8 9 10 11 Table 7-10 Buttons and indicators on the SRU panel Number 1 Indicator SYS Color Green Red Off Description If the indicator blinks once 2s (0.5 Hz), the system is running properly. If the indicator blinks once 0.25s (4 Hz), the system is powering on or restarting. If the indicator is red, a fault that affects services occurs and cannot be rectified automatically. The fault needs to be rectified manually. If the indicator is off, the software is not running or is being reset. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 182 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 7 List of Indicators Number 2 Indicator ACT (active/
standby status indicator) Color Green 3 4 5 and 6 7 and 8 Micro SD Green ACT (USB) Red and green SFP interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator is in green. l The ACT indicator is in yellow. GE interface indicators:
l The LINK indicator is in green. l The ACT indicator is in yellow. Green Yellow Green Yellow Description If the indicator is green, the SRU is in active state. If the indicator is off, the SRU is in standby state. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, there is no micro SD card. If the indicator is green, devices have been deployed by using the USB disk. If the indicator blinks green, data is being read from the USB disk. If the indicator is red, the device cannot be correctly connected to the NMS or cannot be registered with the NMS. If the indicator blinks red, an error occurs when configuration files are being executed or data is being read from the USB disk. If the indicator is off, the USB disk is not inserted, the USB interface fails, or the indicator fails. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is steady on, a link has been established. If the indicator is off, no link is established. If the indicator is blinking, data is being transmitted or received. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 183 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 7 List of Indicators Description If the indicator is off, no data is being transmitted or received. If the indicator is steady on, the port is used as a MiniUSB port. If the indicator is off, the port does not function as a MiniUSB port. If the indicator is steady on, the port is used as a CON/AUX port. If the indicator is off, the port does not function as a CON/AUX port. Number Indicator Color 9 10 MiniUSB EN Green CON/AUX EN NOTE Green l Either the CON/AUX port or the MiniUSB port can be used at a time. l By default, the port is used as the CON/AUX port. The EN indicator is green no matter whether a cable is installed. 11 RST CAUTION The Reset button is used for resetting cards manually. Resetting a card will cause service interruption; therefore, carefully verify the issue before you reset a card. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 184 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 8 List of Cards 8 List of Cards About This Chapter This chapter describes the types and technical specifications of cards on the AR routers. 8.1 Cards Supported by the AR This section describes the cards supported by AR routers, including SRUs, Ethernet LAN interface cards, WAN interface cards, voice interface cards, and xDSL/xPON interface cards. 8.2 Power Consumption and Weight This section describes the power consumption and weight of cards supported by the AR routers. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 185 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 8 List of Cards 8.1 Cards Supported by the AR This section describes the cards supported by AR routers, including SRUs, Ethernet LAN interface cards, WAN interface cards, voice interface cards, and xDSL/xPON interface cards. Matching between physical cards and software versions Table 8-1 Matching between physical cards and software versions Model&Version ARV200R001C 00 ARV200R001C 01&ARV200R0 02C00 ARV200R002C 01 SIC WSIC XSIC voice card AR1220 AR1220 V AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 AR1220 AR1220 V AR1220 W AR1220 VW AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 AR1220 AR1220 V AR1220 W AR1220 VW AR1220 L AR2220 AR2240 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 186 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 8 List of Cards Model&Version SIC AR3260 WSIC XSIC voice card Matching between SRUs and software versions Table 8-2 Matching between SRUs and software versions Model&Version ARV200R001 C00 AR1220 SRU AR1220V AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 AR1220 AR1220V AR1220W AR1220VW AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 AR1220 AR1220V AR1220W AR1220VW AR1220L AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 ARV200R001 C01&ARV20 0R002C00 ARV200R002 C01 WLAN Subcard Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 187 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 8 List of Cards Matching between Ethernet LAN interface cards and software versions Table 8-3 Matching between Ethernet LAN interface cards and software versions Model&Version ARV200R001C0 0 8FE1GE AR1220 24GE AR1220V AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 AR1220 AR1220V AR1220W AR1220VW AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 AR1220 AR1220V AR1220W AR1220VW AR1220L AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 ARV200R001C0 1&ARV200R002 C00 ARV200R002C0 1 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 188 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 8 List of Cards Matching between WAN cards and software versions Table 8-4 Matching between WAN cards and software versions 8 Model&
A Version S 1S A 2S A 2F E 1 G E C 1E1T 1-F/
2E1T 1-F 2E1 T1-
M
(WS IC) 1E1 T1-
M/
2E1 T1-
M
(SIC
) 4 G E W
-T 4 G E W
-S 1 B S T 3 G-
H SP A
+7 1C P O S-
15 5 M AR V20 0R0 01C 00 AR V20 0R0 01C 01 A R1 22 0 A R1 22 0V A R2 22 0 A R2 24 0 A R3 26 0 A R1 22 0 A R1 22 0V A R1 22 0 W Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 189 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 1E1T 1-F/
2E1T 1-F 2E1 T1-
M
(WS IC) 1S A 2S A 1 G E C 8 A S 1 B S T Model&
Version 2F E 1E1 T1-
M/
2E1 T1-
M
(SIC
) 8 List of Cards 4 G E W
-T 4 G E W
-S 3 G-
H SP A
+7 1C P O S-
15 5 M A R1 22 0V W A R2 22 0 A R2 24 0 A R3 26 0 A R1 22 0 A R1 22 0V A R1 22 0 W A R1 22 0V W AR V20 0R0 02C 00 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 190 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 1E1T 1-F/
2E1T 1-F 2E1 T1-
M
(WS IC) 1S A 2S A 1 G E C 8 A S 1 B S T Model&
Version 2F E 1E1 T1-
M/
2E1 T1-
M
(SIC
) 8 List of Cards 4 G E W
-T 4 G E W
-S 3 G-
H SP A
+7 1C P O S-
15 5 M AR V20 0R0 02C 01 A R2 22 0 A R2 24 0 A R3 26 0 A R1 22 0 A R1 22 0V A R1 22 0 W A R1 22 0V W A R1 22 0L A R2 22 0 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 191 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 1E1T 1-F/
2E1T 1-F 2E1 T1-
M
(WS IC) 1S A 2S A 1 G E C 8 A S 1 B S T Model&
Version 2F E 1E1 T1-
M/
2E1 T1-
M
(SIC
) 8 List of Cards 4 G E W
-T 4 G E W
-S 3 G-
H SP A
+7 1C P O S-
15 5 M A R2 24 0 A R3 26 0 Matching between voice cards and software versions Table 8-5 Matching between voice cards and software versions Model&Version 4FXS1FXO 2BST(SIC) 2BST(WSIC) ARV200 R001C00 ARV200 R001C01 AR122 0 AR122 0V AR222 0 AR224 0 AR326 0 AR122 0 AR122 0V AR122 0W 16/32/64/128
-Channel DSP Module Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 192 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Model&Version 4FXS1FXO 2BST(SIC) 2BST(WSIC) 8 List of Cards 16/32/64/128
-Channel DSP Module ARV200 R002C00 ARV200 R002C01 AR122 0VW AR222 0 AR224 0 AR326 0 AR122 0 AR122 0V AR122 0W AR122 0VW AR222 0 AR224 0 AR326 0 AR122 0 AR122 0V AR122 0W AR122 0VW AR122 0L AR222 0 AR224 0 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 193 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description Model&Version 4FXS1FXO 2BST(SIC) 2BST(WSIC) 8 List of Cards 16/32/64/128
-Channel DSP Module AR326 0 Matching between xDSL/xPON cards and software versions Table 8-6 Matching between xDSL/xPON cards and software versions ADSL-
A/M ADSL-B 4G.SHDSL 1PON VDSL Model&Versio n AR V20 0R0 01C 00 AR1220 V AR1220 AR2220 AR V20 0R0 01C 01 AR V20 0R0 02C 00 AR2240 AR3260 AR1220 AR1220 V AR1220 W AR1220 VW AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 AR1220 AR1220 V AR1220 W AR1220 VW AR2220 Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 194 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 8 List of Cards Model&Versio n ADSL-
A/M ADSL-B 4G.SHDSL 1PON VDSL AR2240 AR3260 AR1220 AR1220 V AR1220 W AR1220 VW AR1220 L AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 AR V20 0R0 02C 01 8.2 Power Consumption and Weight This section describes the power consumption and weight of cards supported by the AR routers. Table 8-7 describes the power consumption and weight of cards supported by the AR routers. The table describes the power consumption of the cards operating at 25C (80F). Table 8-7 Power consumption and weight of cards supported by the AR1200 Card Name 8FE1GE 1GEC 2FE 1E1T1-M/
2E1T1-M 1E1T1-F/2E1T1-
F 1SA/2SA Maximum Power Consumption 12.036 W 2.28 W 3.01 W 7 W 7 W l 1SA: 10 W l 2SA: 11.7 W Weight 0.6 kg (1.33 lb) 0.25 kg (0.55 lb) 0.3 kg (0.67 lb) 0.3 kg (0.67 lb) 0.3 kg (0.67 lb) 0.3 kg (0.67 lb) 8AS 8.9 W 0.6 kg (1.33 lb) Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 195 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 8 List of Cards Card Name 1BST 2BST 4FXS1FXO ADSL-A/M ADSL-B 4G.SHDSL Maximum Power Consumption 12 W 16.8 W 12.78 W 5.4 W 8.2 W Weight 0.3 kg (0.67 lb) 0.3 kg (0.67 lb) 0.3 kg (0.67 lb) 0.3 kg (0.67 lb) 0.35 kg (0.77 lb) Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 196 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes 9 List of Interface Attributes About This Chapter This section describes the interface attributes supported by the AR routers. 9.1 Electrical Interfaces This section describes the attributes of electrical interfaces. 9.2 GE/PON Optical Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of GE/PON optical interfaces. 9.3 CPOS Interface Attributes This section describes the CPOS interface attributes. 9.4 E1 Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of E1 interfaces. 9.5 T1 Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of T1 interfaces. 9.6 Synchronous/Asynchronous Serial Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of synchronous/asynchronous serial interfaces. 9.7 ISDN S/T Interface Attributes This section describes ISDN S/T interface attributes. 9.8 FXS/FXO Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of FXS/FXO interfaces. 9.9 ADSL2/ADSL2+/G.SHDSL Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of ADSL2/ADSL2+/G.SHDSL interfaces. 9.10 Attributes of the Console Interface This section describes the attributes of the console interface. 9.11 Attributes of the USB Interface This section describes the attributes of the USB interface. 9.12 3G Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of 3G interfaces. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 197 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes 9.13 VDSL Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of the VDSL interface. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 198 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes 9.1 Electrical Interfaces This section describes the attributes of electrical interfaces. Table 9-1 describes the attributes of 10BASE-TX/100BASE-TX electrical interfaces. Table 9-1 Attributes of 10BASE-TX/100BASE-TX electrical interfaces Item Connector type Description RJ45 Interface attribute MDI/MDIX NOTE l The interfaces of most network cards are medium dependent interfaces
(MDIs). l MDIX interfaces are usually used on hubs or LAN switches. IEEE802.3, IEEE802.3u, IEEE802.3ab Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, or Ethernet_SNAP IP Standards compliance Frame format Network layer protocol Table 9-2 describes the attributes of 1000BASE-T electrical interfaces. Table 9-2 Attributes of 1000BASE-T electrical interfaces Item Connector type Description RJ45 Interface attribute MDI/MDIX NOTE l The interfaces of most network cards are medium dependent interfaces
(MDIs). l MDIX interfaces are usually used on hubs or LAN switches. IEEE802.3, IEEE802.3u, IEEE802.3ab Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, or Ethernet_SNAP IP Standards compliance Frame format Network layer protocol Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 199 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes 9.2 GE/PON Optical Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of GE/PON optical interfaces. A GE optical interface can be connected to an optical module. Table 9-3 and Table 9-4 describe the attributes of optical interfaces and optical modules. Table 9-3 Attributes of the 100/1000BASE-X GE optical interface Attribute Connector type Description LC/PC Optical interface attribute Standards compliance Depending on the SFP optical module. IEEE 802.3ab Frame format Ethernet_II, Ethernet_SAP, or Ethernet_SNAP Network layer protocol IP Description Table 9-4 Attributes of the SFP optical module (100/1000 Mbit/s) supported by the GE optical interface Attri bute Tran smiss ion dista nce 10 km (single-
mode bidirectional fiber) 100 km 500 m 10 km 40 km 40 km 80 km 850 nm 1310 nm Tx:
1310 nm Rx:
1490 nm Tx:
1490 nm Rx:
1310 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm 1550 nm 1550 nm
-9.5 dBm to
-2.5 dBm
-9.0 dBm to
-3.0 dBm
-9.0 dBm to
-3.0 dBm
-9.0 dBm to
-3.0 dBm
-5.0 dBm to 0 dBm
-5.0 dBm to 0 dBm
-2.0 dBm to 5.0 dBm 0 dBm to 5 dBm Cent er wave lengt h Tran smitt ing powe r Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 200 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes Description
-17.0 dBm
-20.0 dBm
-19.5 dBm
-19.5 dBm
-23 dBm
-22 dBm
-23.0 dBm
-30.0 dBm 0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm
-9.0 dBm 9 dB 9 dB 6 dB 6 dB 9 dB 8.5 dB 9 dB 8 dB Multi-
mode Single-mode Attri bute Rece iver sensi tivity Over load optic al powe r Extin ction ratio Fiber type Table 9-5 Attributes of the SFP optical module supported by the PON optical interface Attribute Connector type Description SC/PC connector (SFP encapsulation) Transport mode Transmission rate Standards compliance Sending end Center wavelength Average transmitting optical power Average turn-off optical power Side-mode suppression ratio Single-mode bidirectional l Downstream transmission rate of 2488 Mbit/s l Upstream transmission rate of 1244 Mbit/s ITU-T G.984.2 CLASS B+
ITU-T G.984.5 WBF 1290 nm to 1330 nm 0.5 dBm to 5 dBm
-45 dBm 30 dB Extinction ratio 10 dB to 15 dB Overload power
-8 dBm Receivin g end Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 201 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes Attribute Input wavelength range Description 1480 nm to 1500 nm Operating temperature 0C to 70C 9.3 CPOS Interface Attributes This section describes the CPOS interface attributes. A CPOS optical interface can be connected to an optical module. Table 9-6 and Table 9-7 describe the attributes of optical interfaces and optical modules. Table 9-6 CPOS interface attributes Attribute Connector type Description LC/PC Optical interface attribute Standards compliance Depending on the SFP optical module STM-1 Frame format SDH/SONET Network layer protocol IP Table 9-7 Attributes of the SFP optical module supported by the CPOS interface Attribute Transmissio n distance Center wavelength Description 2 km 15 km 40 km 80 km 1310 nm 1310 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm Transmittin g power
-19.0 dBm to
-14.0 dBm
-15.0 dBm to 8.0 dBm
-15.0 dBm to 8.0 dBm
-3.0 dBm to 0 dBm
-28.0 dBm
-23.0 dBm
-23.0 dBm
-32.98 dBm
-14.0 dBm
-10.17 dBm
-8.0 dBm
-8.0 dBm Receiver sensitivity Overload optical power Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 202 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes Attribute Extinction ratio Description
>10.0 dB 58.86 dB 14.08 dB 43.09 dB Fiber type Multimode Single-mode 9.4 E1 Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of E1 interfaces. Table 9-8 describes the attributes of channelized E1 interfaces. Table 9-8 Attributes of channelized E1 interfaces Attribute Connector type Standards compliance Description DB9 G.703 or G.704 Transmission rate 2.048 Mbit/s Cable type E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable E1 120-ohm balanced twisted pair cable E1 trunk cable extension Working mode CE1, ISDN PRI, or VE1 Function Backup Terminal access ISDN PRI Table 9-9 describes the attributes of unchannelized E1 interfaces. Table 9-9 Attributes of unchannelized E1 interfaces Attribute Connector type Standards compliance Description DB9 G.703 or G.704 Transmission rate 2.048 Mbit/s Cable type E1 75-ohm unbalanced coaxial cable E1 120-ohm balanced twisted pair cable E1 trunk cable extension Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 203 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes Attribute Working mode Function Description Unchannelized E1 Backup Terminal access 9.5 T1 Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of T1 interfaces. Table 9-10 describes the attributes of channelized T1 interfaces. Table 9-10 Attributes of channelized T1 interfaces Attribute Connector type Standards compliance Description DB9 G.703 or G.704 Transmission rate 1.544 Mbit/s Cable type T1 100-ohm coaxial cable Working mode CT1, ISDN PRI, or VT1 Function Backup Terminal access ISDN PRI Table 9-11 describes the attributes of unchannelized T1 interfaces. Table 9-11 Attributes of unchannelized T1 interfaces Attribute Connector type Standards compliance Description DB9 G.703 or G.704 Transmission rate 1.544 Mbit/s Cable type T1 100-ohm coaxial cable Working mode Unchannelized T1 Function Backup Terminal access Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 204 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes 9.6 Synchronous/Asynchronous Serial Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of synchronous/asynchronous serial interfaces. Table 9-12 describes the attributes of synchronous/asynchronous serial interfaces. Table 9-12 Attributes of synchronous/asynchronous serial interfaces Attribute Description Synchronous Serial Interface Connector type Standards compliance and working mode DB28 l V.24 DTE l V.24 DCE l V.35 DTE l V.35 DCE l X.21 DTE l RS449 DTE l RS449 DCE l RS530 DTE l RS530 DCE Asynchronous Serial Interface RS232 Minimum baud rate (bit/
s) Maximum baud rate (bit/
s) Cable type 1200 64 k 1200 600 2.048 M 115.2 k l V.24 DTE cable l V.24 DCE cable l V.35 DTE cable l V.35 DCE cable l X.21 DTE cable l RS449 DTE cable l RS449 DCE cable l RS530 DTE cable l RS530 DCE cable Function DDN leased line Terminal access l Modem dial-up l Backup l Asynchronous leased line l Terminal access Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 205 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes Table 9-13 describes the attributes of asynchronous serial interfaces. Table 9-13 Attributes of asynchronous serial interfaces Attribute Connector type Standards compliance and working mode Minimum baud rate (bit/s) Maximum baud rate (bit/s) Cable type Function Description RJ45 RS232 300 115.2 k Customized RJ45 cable l Modem dial-up l Backup l Asynchronous leased line l Terminal access 9.7 ISDN S/T Interface Attributes This section describes ISDN S/T interface attributes. Table 9-14 lists ISDN S/T interface attributes. Table 9-14 ISDN S/T interface attributes Item Connector Description RJ45 Standards compliance ITU-T I.430, Q.921, Q.931 Rate Bandwidth Cable 192 kbit/s 0 to 100 MHz l TE: standard ISDN S/T interface cables (straight-
through cables) l NT: ISDN S/T interface crossover cables 9.8 FXS/FXO Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of FXS/FXO interfaces. Table 9-15 describes the attributes of FXS/FXO (RJ11) interfaces on the 4FXS1FXO. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 206 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes Table 9-15 Attributes of FXS/FXO (RJ11) interfaces Attribute Connector type Standards compliance Cable type Dialing mode Bandwidth Description RJ11 ITU Q.512 for FXS interfaces ITU Q.552 for FXO interfaces ITU K.20 for protection against overcurrent and overvoltage Regular telephone line DTMF in accordance with GB3378 Pulse dialing 300 Hz to 3400 Hz Table 9-16 describes the attributes of FXS (DB68) interfaces on the 32FXS/16FXS. Table 9-16 Attributes of FXS (DB68) interfaces Attribute Connector type Description DB68 Standards compliance IEEE 1284C Interface as a 36 contact connector Cable type Dialing mode Bandwidth Twisted pair DTMF in accordance with GB3378 Pulse dialing 300 Hz to 3400 Hz Table 9-17 describes the attributes of FXO (RJ11) interfaces on the 4FXO. Table 9-17 Attributes of FXO (RJ11) interfaces Attribute Connector type Standards compliance Cable type Dialing mode Description RJ11 ITU Q.552 for FXO interfaces ITU K.20 for protection against overcurrent and overvoltage Telephone cable DTMF in accordance with GB3378 Pulse dialing Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 207 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes Attribute Bandwidth Description 300 Hz to 3400 Hz 9.9 ADSL2/ADSL2+/G.SHDSL Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of ADSL2/ADSL2+/G.SHDSL interfaces. Table 9-18 describes the attributes of ADSL2/ADSL2+ interfaces. Table 9-18 Attributes of ADSL2/ADSL2+ interfaces Attribute Connector type Description RJ11 Standards compliance ADSL-A/M:
ITU-T 992.1 G.DMT ITU-T 992.3 ITU-T 992.5 Transmission rate ADSL-B:
ITU-T 992.1 G.DMT ANSI T1.413 Issue 2 ITU-T 992.3 ITU-T 992.5 ADSL-A/M:
l ADSL full rate mode (ITU-T 992.1 G.DMT): a downstream transmission rate of 8 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1024 kbit/s l ADSL2 full rate mode (ITU-T 992.3): a downstream transmission rate of 12 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1024 kbit/s l ADSL2+ full rate mode (ITU-T 992.5): a downstream transmission rate of 24 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1024 kbit/s ADSL-B:
A downstream transmission rate of 8 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1024 kbit/s Cable type Regular telephone line Table 9-19 describes the attributes of G.SHDSL interfaces. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 208 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes Table 9-19 Attributes of G.SHDSL interfaces Attribute Connector type Standards compliance Description One RJ45 connector on one end and four RJ11 connectors on the other end G.SHDSL.bit Transmission rate 5.696 Mbit/s per pair 9.10 Attributes of the Console Interface This section describes the attributes of the console interface. Table 9-20 lists the attributes of the console interface. Table 9-20 Attributes of the console interface Item Connector type Description RJ45 Standards compliance RS232 Operating mode Full duplex Universal Asynchronous Receiver/
Transmitter (UART) Data equipment type Data Circuit-terminating Equipment (DCE) Table 9-21 lists the attributes of the MiniUSB-B interface. Table 9-21 Attributes of the MiniUSB-B interface Item Connector type Standards compliance Operating mode Description MiniUSB-B, angle USB1.0 Device 9.11 Attributes of the USB Interface This section describes the attributes of the USB interface. Table 9-22 lists the attributes of the USB-A interface. Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 209 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes Table 9-22 Attributes of the USB-A interface Item Connector type Description USB-A Standards compliance USB2.0, compatible with USB1.0 and USB1.1 Operating mode Host 9.12 3G Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of 3G interfaces. Table 9-23 lists the attributes of 3G interfaces. Table 9-23 3G interface attributes Item Connector Description SMA RF: connects to an antenna to provide wireless access. mini USB: connects to a USB flash drive with third-party wireless network test software, for example, Qualcomm CAIT. Standards compliance and frequency bands supported Rate GSM/GPRS/EDGE: 850/900/1800/1900 (MHz) HSPA+/HSUPA/HSDPA/WCDMA: 2100/1900/900/850 (MHz) GSM CS:
l Upstream (Tx): 9.6kbit/s l Downstream (Rx): 9.6kbit/s GPRS/EDGE: Multi-slot Class 12, Class B WCDMA CS:
l Upstream (Tx): 64 kbit/s l Downstream (Rx): 64 kbit/s WCDMA PS:
l Upstream (Tx): 384 kbit/s l Downstream (Rx): 384 kbit/s HSPA:
l Upstream (Tx): 5.76 Mbit/s l Downstream (Rx): 14.4 Mbit/s HSPA+:
l Upstream (Tx): 5.76 Mbit/s l Downstream (Rx): 21 Mbit/s Network protocol WCDMA/HSPA/GPRS/EDGE Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 210 Huawei AR1200&2200&3200 Series Enterprise Routers Hardware Description 9 List of Interface Attributes 9.13 VDSL Interface Attributes This section describes the attributes of the VDSL interface. Table 9-24 lists attributes of the VDSL interface. Table 9-24 VDSL interface attributes Item Description RJ11 Connector Standards compliance Rate VDSL standards:
ITU-T 993.2 ITU-T 992.5 ITU-T 992.3 ITU-T 992.1 G.DMT l ADSL2+ full rate mode (ITU-T 992.3): a downstream transmission rate of 12 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1 Mbit/s l VDSL2 mode (ITU-T 993.2): a downstream transmission rate of 100 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 50 kbit/s l ADSL2 full rate mode (ITU-T 992.5): a downstream transmission rate of 24 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1 Mbit/s l ADSL full rate mode (ITU-T 992.1 G.DMT): a downstream transmission rate of 8 Mbit/s and an upstream transmission rate of 1 Mbit/s Cable type Telephone cable Issue 03 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 211
1 2 3 4 | User manual IV | Users Manual | 1.45 MiB | June 06 2012 / June 09 2012 |
Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers V200R002C01 Product Description Issue Date 02 2012-04-20 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2012. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied. Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address:
Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China Website:
Email:
http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description About This Document About This Document Intended Audience This document describes the positioning, characteristics, networking and application, functions and features, device structure, maintenance and management, system parameters, and component selection guide for the AR. This document helps you understand the characteristics and features of the AR. This document is intended for:
l Network planning engineers l Hardware installation engineers l Commissioning engineer l Data configuration engineers l On-site maintenance engineers l Network monitoring engineers l System maintenance engineers Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol Description Alerts you to a high risk hazard that could, if not avoided, result in serious injury or death. Alerts you to a medium or low risk hazard that could, if not avoided, result in moderate or minor injury. Alerts you to a potentially hazardous situation that could, if not avoided, result in equipment damage, data loss, performance deterioration, or unanticipated results. Provides a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii DANGERWARNINGCAUTIONTIP Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description About This Document Symbol Description Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points in the main text. Changes in Issue 01 (2012-04-20) Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains all the updates made in previous issues. This issue is the first official release. Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii NOTE Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description Contents Contents About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii 1 Product Position and Characteristics.........................................................................................1 1.1 Product Positioning.............................................................................................................................................2 1.2 Product Characteristics.......................................................................................................................................3 1.2.1 Carrier-Class Reliability............................................................................................................................3 1.2.2 Service Integration Capability...................................................................................................................3 1.2.3 Hardware Extensibility..............................................................................................................................3 1.2.4 Remote Maintenance Capability...............................................................................................................3 2 Network Applications..................................................................................................................4 2.1 WAN Access......................................................................................................................................................5 2.2 VPN Access........................................................................................................................................................5 2.3 Enterprise Intranet Security................................................................................................................................6 2.4 Voice Application...............................................................................................................................................7 2.5 FTTx...................................................................................................................................................................8 3 Product Characteristics...............................................................................................................10 3.1 Feature List.......................................................................................................................................................11 3.2 Key Features.....................................................................................................................................................18 3.2.1 Voice........................................................................................................................................................18 3.2.2 WAN........................................................................................................................................................23 3.2.3 VPN.........................................................................................................................................................24 3.2.4 Security....................................................................................................................................................25 3.2.5 QoS..........................................................................................................................................................27 3.2.6 WLAN.....................................................................................................................................................28 3.2.7 IPv6..........................................................................................................................................................29 4 Device Structure of AR150 and AR200 Series........................................................................31 5 Device Structure of AR1200, AR2200 and AR3200 Series....................................................37 6 Maintenance and Management................................................................................................46 6.1 Various Maintenance Methods.........................................................................................................................47 6.1.1 Web-based Network Management System..............................................................................................47 6.1.2 CWMP.....................................................................................................................................................47 6.1.3 Remote Deployment and Maintenance Using USB................................................................................47 Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iv Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description Contents 6.1.4 SNMP-based Maintenance......................................................................................................................47 6.2 Fault Location...................................................................................................................................................47 6.2.1 Device Fault Location.............................................................................................................................48 6.2.2 Service Fault Location.............................................................................................................................48 7 System Parameters.......................................................................................................................49 7.1 System Configuration.......................................................................................................................................50 7.2 Physical Specifications.....................................................................................................................................51 8 Component Selection Guide.....................................................................................................54 8.1 Router Purchase List.........................................................................................................................................55 8.2 Board Purchase List..........................................................................................................................................59 Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 1 Product Position and Characteristics 1 Product Position and Characteristics About This Chapter 1.1 Product Positioning 1.2 Product Characteristics Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 1 Product Position and Characteristics 1.1 Product Positioning CAUTION AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers are class A products. Customers should take preventative measures as the operating devices may cause radio interference. AR series enterprise routers (ARs) include AR150, AR200, AR1200, AR2200, and AR3200. They are the next-generation routing and gateway devices, which provide the routing, switching, wireless, voice, and security functions. As shown in Figure 1-1, the ARs are located between an enterprise network and a public network, functioning as the only ingress and egress for data transmitted between the two networks. The deployment of various network services over the ARs reduces operation &
maintenance (O&M) costs as well as those associated with establishing an enterprise network. You can select ARs of different specifications as egress gateways based on the user quantity of an enterprise. Figure 1-1 ARs on the network Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 1 Product Position and Characteristics 1.2 Product Characteristics The ARs use leading hardware platforms and software architectures. The ARs provide integrated network solutions to enterprise customers with minimum investment costs; therefore, they can meet the many facets of future business expansion and IT industry developments. 1.2.1 Carrier-Class Reliability l The AR1200&2200&3200 boards are hot swappable and guarantee carrier-class reliability. l The ARs are designed to provide quality service and comply with telecommunication standards. l The ARs protect networks against attacks. l The ARs support in-service patching so that the system software can be upgraded during system operation. l The AR2200&3200 support redundant power supply units and fans. If one power supply unit or fan is faulty, the AR2200&3200 will still be able to operate. 1.2.2 Service Integration Capability The AR series routers integrate various services of routers, switches, and wireless devices, including voice, firewall, WLAN, and VPN. 1.2.3 Hardware Extensibility The ARs provide the highest port density in the industry and include flexible service interface card (SIC) slots, allowing enterprise customers to connect to LAN, WAN, or wireless networks. The ARs provide the most economical enterprise network solutions. The ARs support flexible slot combination. For example, two SIC slots can be combined into a wide SIC (WSIC) slot, two WSIC slots are combined into an extra SIC (XSIC) slot, and two XSIC slots can be combined into an extended extra SIC (EXSIC) slot. In addition, a SIC card can be installed into a WSIC slot. NOTE AR150&200 series do not support subcards. 1.2.4 Remote Maintenance Capability In addition to one-stop deployment, plug and play capability, and remote commissioning functions, the ARs manage the customer premises equipment (CPE) remotely. The remote maintenance function improves efficiency and greatly reduces maintenance costs. Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 2 Network Applications 2 Network Applications About This Chapter 2.1 WAN Access 2.2 VPN Access 2.3 Enterprise Intranet Security 2.4 Voice Application 2.5 FTTx Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 2.1 WAN Access 2 Network Applications Depending on the network environment provided by carriers, users can access the network by using CE1/CT1, E1/T1-F, 3G, FE/GE, ADSL, VDSL, G.SHDSL, Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN), CPOS, AS, xPON or SA. The ARs provide dual-uplink to ensure service reliability. The ARs provide the following services for access users:
As shown in Figure 2-1, enterprise A accesses the Internet using ADSL; enterprise B accesses the Internet using FE and CE1 dual-uplink; enterprise C accesses the Internet using G.SHDSL;
enterprise D accesses the Internet using 3G. Figure 2-1 WAN access Enterprise A Enterprise B AR AR FE AR E1/CE1 ADSL 3G Inter n et Inter n et Inter n et Inter n et G.SHDSL AR Enterprise D Enterprise C 2.2 VPN Access The headquarters and branches use the ARs establish a VPN and connect to the Internet. The enterprise establishes a VPN and uses GRE, MPLS, or IPSec VPN to ensure data security. The employees on a business trip use IPSec VPN tunnels to communicate with the headquarters. As shown in Figure 2-2, the headquarters is connected to the Internet by using the AR2200&3200, and provides services for all employees. The LAN of the branch connects to Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 2 Network Applications the Internet by using the AR150&200&1200&2200, so the employees in the branch can access the headquarters network. The headquarters and branch use GRE VPN, MPLS/BGP IP VPNor IPSec VPN tunnels to establish an intranet. The employees on a business trip set up IPSec VPN , L2TP VPN or SSL VPN tunnels, and access the intranet after passing authentication. Figure 2-2 VPN access Headquarters AR L2TP/SSL/IPSEC VPN GRE/MPLS /IPSEC VPN Inte r n e t Inte r n e t Inte r n e t Inte r n e t Employee on business trip AR Branch A GRE/MPLS /IPSEC VPN AR DSVPN Branch B 2.3 Enterprise Intranet Security The ARs, located between the enterprise intranet and the Internet, ensure information security on the entire intranet and intranet LANs. As shown in Figure 2-3, an intranet and the Internet are connected by the ARs. The users on the Internet cannot access the intranet. To allow the users on the intranet to access the Internet, configure network address translation (NAT) on the intranet. The financial department and marketing department have individual LANs on the intranet. The ARs utilize a demilitarized zone to protect the server on the external network. In addition, the application specific packet filter (ASPF) firewall can be deployed to protect the intranet. The ARs provide network access control (NAC) to restrict the access permissions of internal users. This ensures that only authorized users can access the intranet. Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 2 Network Applications Figure 2-3 Enterprise intranet security External server Public host Public server Internal server Wi-Fi AR Inte r n e t Inte r n e t Inte r n e t Inte r n e t Marketing Financial PC 2.4 Voice Application NOTE l Among the AR200 series routers, only the AR207Vs and AR207V-Ps support the voice features. Among the AR1200 series routers, only the AR1220Vs and AR1220VWs support the voice features. The AR2200 and AR3200 series routers support the voice features only after a DSP module is installed. l To provide voice services for POTS users on AR1200, AR2200 ,and AR3200 series routers, 4FXS/
1FXO board is required. l To provide voice services for ISDN users on AR1200, AR2200 ,and AR3200 series routers, 2BST board is required. An enterprise can build a voice communication system over the IP network, reducing operating expenses (OPEX). Within the voice communication system, an AR can function as an IP PBX or SIP access gateway
(AG). The AR connects to POTS users (analog phones or fax machines) and SIP user equipment
(UE) users (IP phones or PC software terminals) through FXS or Ethernet interfaces. The AR connects to the PSTN through FXO interfaces or to the IP network through Ethernet interfaces. Based on branch locations, the centralized or distributed call control model can be used. If all branches within an enterprise use the same number segment, the centralized call control model is recommended. If an enterprise has many branches that use different number segments, the distributed call control model is recommended. Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 2 Network Applications As shown in Figure 2-4, the enterprise headquarters and branch A use different number segments. The ARs working in IP PBX mode are deployed at the enterprise headquarters and branch A as egress routers. Voice users in the enterprise headquarters are registered with the AR in the enterprise headquarters, and voice users in each branch are registered with the AR in the branch. Voice traffic is transmitted between the enterprise headquarters and branches over voice routes. The AR of the enterprise headquarters provides voice routes to branches so that users in different branches can call each other. Branch B and the enterprise headquarters are connected through the MAN. An AR working in IP PBX mode is deployed at the enterprise headquarters and an AR working in SIP AG mode is deployed at branch B. All voice users at the enterprise headquarters and branches are registered with the AR at the enterprise headquarters. The AR in the enterprise headquarters provides call control services for all users in the enterprise. Figure 2-4 Voice application Branch B (centralized call control model) IP phone Eth Eth PC software terminal Eth FXS FXS SIP AG Eth FAX Analog phone FXS interface FXO interface E1 interface Ethernet interface E1 Branch A (distributed call control model) Analog phone IPPBX FXS Eth IMS/IP Headquarters Eth Eth IPPBX FXS FXO Eth Intranet FXO Eth Eth Eth PSTN TDM PBX FXS E1 Eth FAX Eth Eth FAX IAD FXS FXS IP phone FXS PC software terminal Analog phone IP phonePC software terminal 2.5 FTTx By working with the optical line terminal (OLT), the ARs function as optical network unit (ONU) to provide fiber access to the enterprise. As shown in Figure 2-5, the ARs are connected to upstream devices through a passive optical network (PON), and provide fiber-to-the-home, fiber-to-the-building, and fiber-to-the-enterprise services. Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 2 Network Applications The ARs provide the fiber-to-the-x (FTTx) service by connecting to upstream PON devices. This provides higher bandwidth than twisted-pair cable and guarantees the development of future high-speed services. Figure 2-5 FTTx Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 3 Product Characteristics 3 Product Characteristics About This Chapter 3.1 Feature List 3.2 Key Features Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 3 Product Characteristics 3.1 Feature List Table 3-1 Features supported by the AR Feature Description Sub-
feature VLAN LAN VLAN services including basic VLAN, super VLAN, MUX VLAN, voice VLAN, and guest VLAN; dynamic VLAN learning using Generic Attribute Registration Protocol
(GVRP) Dynamic and static MAC address learning; MAC address learning limit, blackhole MAC entries, sticky MAC entries, and anti-
MAC flapping Spanning Tree Protocol
(STP), Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP), and Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP); STP security Static link aggregation and Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)-based aggregation MAC STP Link aggregation LLDP Neighboring device discovery WLAN Wireless access to LANs Difference Only the AR2200 and AR3200 series support MUX VLAN. None None None None Only the AR1220W and AR1220VW support WLAN features. Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 3 Product Characteristics Feature WAN Sub-
feature WAN interface Interface backup Link layer protocol Dialing PON Network bridge Description Difference WAN interfaces: CE1/CT1 PRI interfaces, E1/T1-F interfaces, 3G interfaces, CPOS interfaces, FE/GE interfaces, ADSL interfaces, VDSL interface, G.SHDSL interfaces, ISDN BRI interfaces, synchronous and asynchronous serial interfaces, and PON interfaces Various WAN interface backup mechanisms, and association between interface backup and NQA, BFD, and routes Link layer protocols such as Point-to-Point Protocol/
Multilink Protocol (PPP/
MLPPP), Frame Relay/
Multilink Frame Relay (FR/
MFR), High-Level Data Link Control (HDLC), and ATM, and Operation, Administration, and Maintenance (OAM) mechanisms complying with link layer protocols FR compression and FR over IP Access of PPPoE IPv4 or IPv6 host and PPPoE dial-up Dial control center (DCC) function and logical interfaces that transmit the dialing service EPON and GPON working modes, and connection with an OLT Bridge between Ethernet interfaces and WAN interfaces WAN interfaces depend on the device model and the boards installed. None On the AR150 and AR200, the link layer protocol cannot be FR, MFR, or HDLC. None The AR150 series and AR200 series do not support PON. None Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 12 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 3 Product Characteristics Feature Sub-
feature 3G Voice Line configuratio n SIP AG PBX IP applicatio n ARP IPv4/IPv6 host DNS DHCP NetStream Description Difference 3G uplink, allowing access to 3G networks using the DCC function (the AR provides the 3G data card and 3G SIC card) The AR150 series and AR200 series do not support the 3G data card or 3G SIC card. Only specified 3G models support 3G uplink. Foreign exchange station
(FXS), foreign exchange office (FXO), VE1, and ISDN line access and configuration The upper-layer device such as soft switch performs call control and management. The AR communicates with the soft switch by using the SIP protocol. The AR provides the Branch Exchange for Survivable Telephony (BEST) function. The AR provides FXS, FXO, VE1, and ISDN interfaces, and supports R2 signaling, H323 signaling, media proxy, multi-party conference, blacklist, and DISA service. Address resolution for Ethernet IPv4 and Ipv6 address management, TCP/UDP socket, ICMP, ping and tracert, and UDP helper DNS client, DNS proxy, and dynamic DNS (DDNS) client DHCP client(v4/v6), DHCP relay, and DHCP server, and DHCP security Fixed packet sampling and packet statistics collection, with flow output in V5, V8 or V9 format Only the AR207V, AR207V-P, AR1220V, AR1220VW, AR2200 series, and AR3200 series support voice features. None None None None None Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 13 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 3 Product Characteristics Description Difference NAT, port address translation
(PAT), port application mapping (PAM), Easy NAT, and NAT server, providing application layer gateways
(ALG) for each application Redundancy backup mechanism for IP services Single-hop BFD, multi-hop BFD, BFD for VRRP, and BFD for routing protocols Detecting the performance of protocols running on the network None None None None Basic routing functions None Feature Sub-
feature NAT VRRP BFD Network Quality Analysis
(NQA) IPv4 and IPv6 Static route RIP and RIPng IP routing Routing protocol OSPFv2 and OSPFv3 Routing protocol ISIS and ISISv6 BGP and BGP4+
Routing policy Multicast IGMP Multicast routing Routing protocol Routing protocol Basic routing functions and intelligent PBR Basic IGMP functions including IGMP snooping Multicast route management, multicast route load balancing, and source-
specific multicast (SSM) mapping PIM (IPv4) PIM-DM and PIM-SM MSDP Inter-domain (PIM-SM domain) multicast routing None None None None None Only the AR2200 series and AR3200 series support IGMP snooping. None None None QoS MQC Modular traffic classification None Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 14 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 3 Product Characteristics Description Difference Feature Sub-
feature Priority mapping Traffic policing Traffic shaping Congestion management Mapping between local priorities, 802.1p priorities, DSCP priorities, and EXP priorities Single-rate-two-bucket and two-rate-two bucket policy based on traffic classifiers, permanent virtual circuits
(PVCs)/VLANs/data link connection identifiers
(DLCIs), and interfaces Traffic shaping based on traffic classifiers, PVCs/
VLANs/DLCIs, and ports, traffic shaping adaptation, and three-level traffic shaping Congestion management based on traffic classifiers, PVCs/VLANs/DLCIs, and ports; queue mechanisms including PQ, WRR, DRR, WFQ, PQ+WRR/PQ+DRR/
PQ+WFQ, and CBQ Congestion avoidance Priority-based weighted random early detection
(WRED) and tail drop HQoS Smart Application Control
(SAC) Security AAA Hierarchical Quality of Service (HQoS) implements hierarchical scheduling based on queues and differentiates services and users. SAC uses the deep packet inspection (DPI) technology to identify packets of dynamic protocols such as HTTP, FTP, and RTP by checking Layer 4 to Layer 7 information in the packets. SAC helps implement refined QoS management. AAA for administrators and access users, including local, RADIUS, and TACACS AAA None None None None None None None None Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 3 Product Characteristics Feature Sub-
feature Firewall Description Difference DMZ firewall, packet filtering firewall, and stateful firewall; blacklist and whitelist, and attack detection Traffic suppression Traffic suppression based on ports Access security Local attack defense ARP security 802.1x authentication, MAC address authentication, MAC address bypass authentication, and direct MAC address authentication based on users and ports; web authentication and guest VLAN for access users Device protection measures, including CPU attack defense and attack source tracing. Suppression of ARP packets from the user side and network side, ARP anti-
spoofing, ARP gateway attack inspection, and dynamic ARP inspection
(DAI) None None None None Only the AR2200 series and AR3200 series support DAI. IP security ICMP anti-attack, URPF, IP source guard and DHCP snooping Only the AR2200 series and AR3200 series support IP source guard and DHCP snooping. PKI HTTPS ACL Certificate request, update, and verification HTTPS server function, ensuring transmission security between users and devices using SSL features such as data encryption and identity verification Traffic classification based on physical ports, Layer 2 information, IP protocols, and TCP/UDP ports. None None None Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 16 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 3 Product Characteristics Description Difference Feature VPN Sub-
feature IPSec VPN SSL VPN DSVPN L2TP GRE VPN Interconnecting headquarters and branches using IKE V1/
V2 IPSec tunnels; hardware-
based MD5 and SHA algorithms; AES, DES, and 3DES algorithms Virtual gateway, front-door VPN function, and management of SSL VPN users and SSL VPN services Dynamic setup of a data forwarding channel between hubs Functioning as the LAC or LNS and allowing concurrent user access on multiple channels GRE tunnel for interconnecting the headquarters and branches Used together with IPSec. IPSec cannot protect multicast data, but GRE VPN can protect multicast data None None None None None None None None Device managem ent Information center monitoring Managing boards, power supply units, fans, and e-
labels Version management In-service upgrade, rollback, and patch installation Mirroring Port- and flow-based mirroring Remote PoE power supply Web-based network management system LAN-side remote power supply Only the AR207V-P, AR1220V, AR1220W and AR1220VW support the PoE features. Internal web management system, providing GUI to manage and maintain devices None Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 17 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description Feature Description Sub-
feature Deployment Automatic deployment using a universal serial bus (USB) flash drive; Auto-Config function for the entire network SNMP Network managem ent SNMP agent, fault management (FM), and trap switch control (TSC) Ping and Tracert NTP RMON CWMP MPLS Basic MPLS functions Network connectivity detection Time synchronization for traditional IP networks Monitoring and traffic statistics for traffic on a network segment CWMP (TR-069) for remotely managing AR devices Static label switched path
(LSP) and penultimate hop popping (PHP); MPLS LSP QoS MPLS LDP MPLS LDP L3VPN BGP L3VPN MPLS TE MPLS TE MPLS FRR LDP FRR, TE FRR, and VPN FRR 3 Product Characteristics Difference None None None None None None AR200 series routers do not support MPLS. 3.2 Key Features 3.2.1 Voice In addition to broadband services, such as video on demand (VOD) and live data and video, the AR provides high-quality voice service for terminal users. Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 18 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description NOTE 3 Product Characteristics l Among the AR200 series routers, only the AR207Vs and AR207V-Ps support the voice features. Among the AR1200 series routers, only the AR1220Vs and AR1220VWs support the voice features. The AR2200 and AR3200 series routers support the voice features only after a DSP module is installed. l To provide voice services for POTS users on AR1200, AR2200 ,and AR3200 series routers, 4FXS/
1FXO board is required. l To provide voice services for ISDN users on AR1200, AR2200 ,and AR3200 series routers, 2BST board is required. SIP AG Access gateway (AG) devices provide various access modes and convert various services into a uniform format that can be transmitted. The AG communicates with the soft switch by using the SIP protocol. SIP-based AGs are called SIP AGs. When an AR functions as the SIP AG, the upper-layer devices such as soft switch control and manage calls. The AR supports the following services. Table 3-2 Services Supported by a SIP AG Service Type Basic voice service Three-party service Description The basic voice service provides call connections, including intra-
office calls, local calls, national long-distance calls, international long-distance calls, and transit calls. The third-party service allows a calling party or called party in a conversation to call a third party without ending the current conversation. Then the calling party or original called party can make a three-party conversation or talk to the other two parties separately. Call waiting service If user C calls user A when user A is talking with user B, user A hears a call waiting tone indicating that there is an incoming call. MWI service Malicious call identification (MCID) service Call transfer service The message waiting indicator (MWI) service allows a user to read unread or leave messages. When the called user is busy, the MWI is on indicating that there are messages. The MCID service allows users to perform certain operations to find the phone number of an attacker that initiates malicious calls. The call transfer service allows the called party to transfer an incoming call to a third party by pressing the hookflash so that the calling party establishes a connection with a new called party. Call conference service The call conference service allows more than three parties to talk to each other. Calling line identification presentation (CLIP) service The CLIP service displays the calling number in onhook state or offhook state (for call waiting). The displayed information includes the phone number, name, date, and time. Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 19 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 3 Product Characteristics Service Type Calling line identification restriction
(CLIR) service Description The CLIR service shields the calling number on the terminal of a called party. Distinctive ringing service The distinctive ringing service plays different ring tones for incoming calls from different calling parties. Differentiated ringback tone service The differentiated ringback tone service plays different ringback tones for different users. Advice of charge (AoC) service The AoC service displays the charge rate, fee notification during a call, and total fee of the call. Polarity reversal charging service Polarity reversal pulse charging service The polarity reversal charging service notifies the accounting terminal of the accounting starting point and stop point using polarity reversal when users are in a conversation or end the conversation. The polarity reversal pulse charging service generates a polarity reversal pulse on an interface to notify the accounting terminal of the accounting starting point and stop point during a conversation or when the conversation ends. Urgent call process If the SIP AG detects an urgent call, it inserts an urgent call flag into the SIP message. Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS) service The CCBS service enables the SIP AG to monitor the called party status when the called party is busy. When the called party is idle, the SIP AG notifies the calling party so that the calling party can determine whether to make a call to the called party again. Multiple MSN numbers on a POTS interface Hotline service Multiple MSN numbers can be configured on a POTS interface. l Instant hotline service: After a user picks up a phone, the SIP AG dials the hotline number for the user. l No dialing within a long time after picking up the phone: If a user does not dial any number within the specified period of time after picking up a phone, the SIP AG dials the hotline number for the user. Anonymous call service The anonymous call service disables the called party from viewing information about incoming calls. BEST When the primary channel between the branch and headquarters is faulty, enable the Branch Exchange for Survivable Telephony
(BEST) function in the branch to implement communication in the branch and between the branch and the headquarters over the PSTN. Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 20 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description PBX 3 Product Characteristics PBXs are widely used in enterprises. They manage incoming and outgoing calls of enterprises. The AR as a PBX supports the following individual and group services. Table 3-3 Individual Service supported by a PBX Service Type Abbreviated dialing Description Allows a user to dial an abbreviated code of one or two digits instead of the original called number. Outgoing call barring Call forwarding Number barring Do-not-disturb Reject anonymous call Remote office Secretary Wake-up service Personal ring back tone (RBT) Restricts call-out permissions of some phones. For example, the outgoing call barring service can prevent a phone from making long-distance calls. Allows a called user to transfer a call to a specified third party if the called user has activated the call forwarding service and the call meets the call forwarding conditions. Prevents a user from dialing a specified number. Rejects calls to a user. When other users call a user that has subscribed to the do-not-
disturb service, they hear a do-not-disturb tone or busy tone. Allows a user to reject a call when the calling number is not displayed and plays a voice prompt to the calling user. Allows a user to access the office telephone network from any terminal and use original services such as abbreviated dialing and call transfer. Allows a user to designate another phone number (for example, the secretary's phone number) to process all incoming calls. That is, all incoming calls of the user are transferred to the secretary's phone number first, and only the secretary can call the user directly. Allows a phone to ring automatically at the preset time. Uses user-defined music or sound effects to replace the common ringback tone, and plays the music or sound effects to calling users. Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 21 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description Service Type Selective call rejection Selective call acceptance Table 3-4 Group Services supported by a PBX Service Type Call interception Distinctive ringing Enterprise RBT Interactive voice response (IVR) Number change Pre-routing number change Post-routing number change PBX line selection 3 Product Characteristics Description Filters every incoming call against a list of rejected calling numbers created by a user and rejects calls made by numbers on the list. Filters every incoming call against a list of calling numbers created by a user and accepts calls from only the numbers on the list. Description Provides a voice prompt when a call fails to be connected. The user can learn about the failure cause and determine whether to redial the called number according to the voice prompt. Plays different ring tones to users based on the prefix analysis result (local calls, national calls, international calls, and intra-Centrex calls). Uses music or sound effects made by an enterprise to replace the common ringback tone, and plays the music or sound effects to calling users. Provides the automated attendant function and allows enterprises to make their own IVR menus and voice prompts, improving user experience. Hides calling numbers or displays the same calling number for all outgoing calls. Provides various dialing modes and changes the calling number displayed on the called party's phone. Provides various dialing modes and changes the calling number displayed on the called party's phone. A post-routing number change plan can change a called number to a long number to ensure that it complies with the required number format. When a calling party dials the access number of a PBX group, the system uses the configured line selection mode to connect the call to a user in the group. Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 22 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 3 Product Characteristics Service Type Co-group pickup Simultaneous ringing Sequential ringing One number link you (ONLY) Description Allows users in the same group to answer calls for each other on their own phones. For example, when the phone of user A rings, user B in the same group can dial the service access code plus user A's phone number to answer the call. When a calling party dials the access number of a simultaneous ringing group, all member phones in the group ring simultaneously, and the called party can answer the call using any ringing phone. When a calling party dials the access number of a sequential ringing group, member phones in the group ring in the configured sequence. When the calling party calls ONLY number of the called party, multiple terminals of the called party ring according to the configured rules, and the called party can select one terminal to answer the incoming call. 3.2.2 WAN Frame Relay For details about voice features, see Feature Description - Voice. WAN uses the interfaces such as Ethernet, E1, T1, ADSL, VDSL, G.SHDSL, CPOS, 3G, and synchronous/asynchronous serial interfaces. The physical links on these interfaces can run the FR, PPP, and HDLC protocols. Working at the data link layer of the Open System Interconnection (OSI) model, Frame Relay
(FR) uses simple methods to transmit and exchange data. On a frame relay (FR) network, virtual circuits connect two FR devices. A physical line on the FR network provides multiple VCs. A VC defines an FR channel by using the data link connection identifier (DLCI), and detects and maintains the VC status by using the local management interface (LMI). Multilink frame relay (MFR) is a cost-effective solution provided for FR users. MFR (FRF.16) implements the multilink frame relay function on the user-to-network interfaces (UNIs). The FR compression technologies compress FR packets to save network bandwidth, reduce network load, and improve data forwarding on the FR network. The AR supports FRF.9 (FRF. 9 stac) and FRF.20 (FRF.20 IPHC). PPP The point-to-point protocol (PPP) is used at the data link layer of the OSI model as well as at the link layer of TCP/IP. PPP transmits data from one point to another through synchronous links and asynchronous links that support full duplex. Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 23 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 3 Product Characteristics PPP provides a complete authentication mechanism. To set up a PPP connection, users must pass authentication, ensuring a secured connection. Multilink PPP (MP) is a technique that bundles multiple PPP links together to increase bandwidth. It can be applied to the interfaces that support PPP, such as serial interfaces and low-
speed Packet over SDH (POS) interfaces. PPPoE ATM HDLC ISDN A Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) network consists of an Ethernet containing many hosts. It accesses the Internet through a remote access device. An AR can create a PPP session with the remote end by using PPPoE, and implement access control and accounting. An AR can function as the PPPoE server to connect to different types of PPPoE clients on the Ethernet or function as a dial-up PPPoE client. ATM is connection-oriented. Each VC is identified by a Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) and a Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI). One pair of VPI/VCI values is useful only on a link segment between ATM nodes. If a connection is broken, the relevant VPI/VCI values are released. The Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line (ADSL) , VDSL and G.Single-pair High Speed Digital Subscriber Line (G.SHDSL) interfaces of the ARs support the Asynchronous Transfer Mode
(ATM). The High-level Data Link Control (HDLC) is a typical bit-oriented synchronization data control protocol. It adopts the full-duplex mode and CRC check. Its transmission control function is independent of the processing function, and it features control capabilities and can be flexibly used. In HDLC, Keepalive packets are used to detect the link status. On the AR, you can set the interval for sending Keepalive packets by setting the polling interval. The ISDN protocol references the Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) model and implements functions of the physical layer, data link layer, and network layer on UNI interfaces. ISDN physical interfaces are classified into ISDN BRI and ISDN PRI interfaces.When the AR accesses an ISDN network by using an ISDN PRI interface, the AR is directly connected to an ISDN network-side device. When the AR accesses an ISDN network by using an ISDN BRI interface, the AR connects to an NT1 device, and the NT1 device connects to an ISDN network-
side device. For details about WAN features, see Feature Description - WAN. 3.2.3 VPN The ARs provide an IP security (IPSec) mechanism to ensure high quality, interoperable, and cryptology-based security for communication processes. The two parties in communication can Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 24 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 3 Product Characteristics encrypt data and authenticate the data source at the IP layer to ensure the confidentiality and integrity of the data and prevent replay on the network. IPSec implements these functions by using two security protocols: Authentication Header (AH) protocol and Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP). Internet Key Exchange (IKE) provides the automatic key negotiation, SA establishment, and SA maintenance functions to simplify IPSec use and management. The AR supports IPSec VPN and provides high reliability transmission tunnels for users. In addition, the AR uses Generic Routing Encapsulation (GRE) and Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol
(L2TP) to support the following VPN services:
l GRE VPN l IPSec VPN l BGP/MPLS IP VPN l SSL VPN l L2TP VPN l DSVPN l GRE over IPSec VPN l L2TP VPN over IPSec VPN For details about VPN features, see Feature Description - VPN. 3.2.4 Security ACL Firewall An access control list (ACL) defines a series of filtering rules based on certain policy, the ACL permits or forbids the passage of data packets. The ARs can use ACL rules to filter packets. l ACL-based packet filtering ACL-based packet filtering is used to analyze the information of the packets to be forwarded, including source/destination IP addresses, source/destination port numbers, and IP protocol numbers. The ARs compare the packet information with the ACL rules and determine whether to forward or discard the packets. In addition, the ARs can filter the fragmented IP packets to prevent the non-initial fragment attack. l ASPF Application Specific Packet Filter (ASPF) filters packets of the application layer based on packet status. ASPF, used for security policies, detects the session information of the application layer protocol packets, which attempt to pass the AR and prevent the unsatisfied packets. l Attack defense With the attack defense feature, the ARs can detect various network attacks and protect the internal network against attacks. Network attacks are classified into three types: DoS attacks, scanning and snooping attacks, and malformed packet attacks. Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 25 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description DoS attack 3 Product Characteristics The DoS attack is an attack to a system by using a large number of data packets. This prevents the system from receiving requests from authorized users or suspends the host. DoS attacks include SYN Flood attacks and Fraggle attacks. DoS attacks are different from other attacks because DoS attackers do not search for the ingress of a network, but prevent authorized users from accessing resources or routers. Scanning and snooping attack The scanning and snooping attack is to identify the existing systems on a network by using ping scanning (including ICMP and TCP scanning), and then find out potential targets. By using TCP scanning, attackers can identify the operating system and the monitored services. By scanning and snooping, an attacker can know the service type and security vulnerability of the system and prepare for further intrusion to the system. Malformed packet attack The malformed packet attack is to send malformed packets to the system. If such an attack occurs, the system breaks down when processing the malformed IP packets. Malformed packet attacks include Ping of Death and Teardrop. ARP Security There are various ARP attacks on networks, including attacks targeting hosts and gateways, address spoofing attacks and violent attacks, virus attacks, and malicious software attacks. The ARs ensure ARP security by discarding untrusted ARP packets, suppressing ARP packets by using timestamps, discarding invalid ARP packets, and performing dynamic CAR on the packets sent to the CPU. In addition to preventing ARP protocol attacks, the ARs also prevent ARP-based network scanning attacks. IP Source Guard Some attacks on networks aim at source IP addresses by accessing and using network resources through spoofing IP addresses, stealing users' information or blocking authorized users from accessing networks. l The AR2200 and AR3200 series routers support IP source guard. IPSG prevents source address spoof attacks, so attackers cannot access network resources and authorized users'
rights are protected. l Unicast Reverse Path Forwarding (URPF) blocks packets sent from bogus source addresses. Local Attack Defense The Internet technology and size develop quickly and various network applications emerge. Many enterprises try to boost their own development by using their networks. They are concerned about how to protect confidential data and resources in an open network environment. Some unconscious operations may attack network devices and degrade device performance or even cause device failure. A large number of packets including valid packets and malicious attack packets on a network must be processed by devices' CPUs. The malicious attack packets affect services and may even cause a system breakdown. In addition, excessive normal packets can also lead to high CPU usage, which degrades the CPUs' performance and interrupts services. Therefore, protecting the CPU is a necessary and important factor for processing services and system response. Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 26 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 3 Product Characteristics The local attack defense and source tracing functions protect the ARs against attacks. When an attack occurs, these functions ensure non-stop service transmission and minimize the impact of the attack on network services. PKI AAA The public key infrastructure (PKI) is a system that generates public keys and digital certificates, and verifies identities of certificate subjects to ensure information security. PKI issues digital certificates that bind public keys to respective user identities by means of a certificate authority
(CA). The ARs support Authentication, Authorization, and Accounting (AAA). l Authentication Verifies users' identities. l Authorization Grants different rights for different users to restrict the services that can be used by users. l Accounting Records information about network service usage of users, including service type, start time, and traffic volume. For details about security features, see Feature Description - Security. 3.2.5 QoS Traffic Policing Traffic policing discards excess traffic to limit the traffic within a specified range and to protect network resources as well as the carriers' interests. The ARs use committed access rate (CAR) to perform traffic policing. They support dual-rate-
three-color markers and precise bandwidth management. Traffic Shaping When the rate of an interface on a downstream device is slower than that of an interface on an upstream device or burst traffic occurs, traffic congestion may occur on the downstream device interface. Traffic shaping can be configured on the interface of an upstream device so that outgoing traffic is sent at even rates and congestion is avoided. The AR supportstraffic shaping adaptation and level-3 traffic shaping. Three-level shapers include the flow queue shaper, subscriber queue shaper, and port queue shaper. Congestion Management If a network transmitting both delay-sensitive and delay-insensitive services is congested intermittently, congestion management is required. However, if a network is always congested, bandwidth needs to be increased. Congestion management sends packet flows by using queuing and scheduling. An interface on AR has four or eight default queues for outgoing packets. A fixed FE interface on AR1220 has four default queues and each of other interfaces has eight. LAN-side interfaces Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 27 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 3 Product Characteristics support the scheduling modes of priority queuing (PQ), deficit round robin (DRR), weighted round robin (WRR), PQ+DRR, and PQ+WRR. The AR150&200&1200 series routers do not support the DRR mode. WAN-side interfaces support the scheduling modes of PQ, WFQ, PQ
+WFQ, and class-based WFQ (CBQ). Each scheduling algorithm schedules specific types of traffic, and affects bandwidth allocation, delay, and jitter. Congestion Avoidance Congestion avoidance is a flow control mechanism. A system configured with congestion avoidance monitors network resource usage such as queues and memory buffers. When congestion occurs or aggravates, the system discards packets. The ARs support tail drop and WRED. l Tail drop When the queue length reaches the upper limit, the excess packets (buffered at the queue tail) are discarded. l WRED WRED sets the upper and lower drop thresholds and the maximum drop probability for each queue. When the queue length is smaller than the lower threshold, no packets are discarded. When the length of the queue exceeds the upper threshold, all packets are discarded. When the queue length is between the lower threshold and the upper threshold, incoming packets are discarded randomly. The drop probability cannot be greater than the maximum drop probability. The ARs use the WRED based on queue profiles or traffic policies. For details about QoS features, see Feature Description - QoS. 3.2.6 WLAN NOTE Only AR1220W and AR1220VW support WLAN. A wireless local area network (WLAN) connects two or more computers or devices and enables the devices to communicate by using the wireless telecommunication technology. WLAN uses the wireless technology to implement fast Ethernet access. The primary advantage of WLAN is that terminals, such as computers, can access a network through a wireless medium rather than a physical cable. This facilitates network construction and allows users to move around without interrupting communication. WLAN is more flexible than traditional wired access. WLAN is widely used in public areas such as on campuses, business centers, and airports. The WLAN uses cables at the backbone layer, and users access the WLAN through one or more wireless access points (WAPs) using radio waves. The transmission distance of a WAP is tens of meters. IEEE 802.11 is widely used by WLANs. The AR functions as fat APs to provide the following WLAN functions:
l WLAN user management Dot1X access authentication MAC address authentication Pre-share-key (PSK) authentication EAPOL-Key negotiation Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 28 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 3 Product Characteristics User access control AAA for WLAN users l Radio frequency (RF) management Country code RF type Setting radio transmission rate Setting radio transmission power Setting radio working channels Monitoring and eliminating radio interference Configurable wireless MAC layer parameters Configuring and querying radio attributes Collecting and querying performance statistics of radio frequency interfaces l WLAN security WEP Open-System link authentication and encryption WEP Share-Key link authentication and encryption WPA PSK authentication and encryption WPA Dot1X authentication and encryption WPA2 PSK authentication and encryption WPA2 Dot1X authentication and encryption WAPI authentication and encryption TKIP/CCMP encryption HMAC-MD5 algorithm User blacklist and whitelist l WLAN QoS WMM (802.11e) Mapping wireless-side priority to the wired-side priority Bandwidth limit based on users Bandwidth limit based on SSIDs For details about WLAN features, see Feature Description - WLAN. 3.2.7 IPv6 The AR1200 provides the IPv6 host function, which maximizes customers' return on investment
(ROI) and prevents repeated investment during network upgrade. The AR supports the following IPv6 functions:
l IPv6 ND l IPv6 PMTU l TCP6, UDP6, RawIP6, Ping IPv6, and Tracert IPv6 l ICMP6 and Socket6 l IPv6 unicast routing protocols: RIPng, OSPFv3, IS-IS, BGP, and IPv6 static route Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 29 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 3 Product Characteristics l TFTP IPv6 client, TFTP IPv6 server, FTP IPv6 client, FTP IPv6 server, Telnet IPv6 client, and Telnet IPv6 server l SNMP IPv6 For details about IPv6 functions, see Feature Description - IP Service and Feature Description
- IP Routing. Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 30 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 4 Device Structure of AR150 and AR200 Series 4 Device Structure of AR150 and AR200 Series The following figures show the front view and the rear view of AR150 and AR200 series. Front view and rear view of AR150 series Figure 4-1 AR151 front view Figure 4-2 AR157 front view Figure 4-3 AR151 rear view 8 8 1 7 2 3 4 5 6 Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 31 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 4 Device Structure of AR150 and AR200 Series Figure 4-4 AR157 rear view 1 7 2 3 4 5 6 1. CON/AUX interface 2. Fixed FE interfaces 3. RESET Button 4. Ground screw 5. AC jack 6. Access hole for the power cable 7. WAN-side uplink interface 8. USB interface NOTE l The AR150 provides four LAN-side FE interfaces. The FE0 interface can be configured as a WAN-
side Layer 3 interface. l On the AR151, FE interfaces are WAN-side interfaces. On the AR157, ADSL ANNEX A/M interfaces are WAN-side interfaces. Front view and rear view of AR200 series Figure 4-5 AR201 front view Figure 4-6 AR206 front view 8 8 Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 32 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 4 Device Structure of AR150 and AR200 Series Figure 4-7 AR207 front view Figure 4-8 AR207V front view Figure 4-9 AR207V-P front view Figure 4-10 AR207G-HSPA+7 front view Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8 8 8 8 33 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 4 Device Structure of AR150 and AR200 Series Figure 4-11 AR208E front view Figure 4-12 AR201 rear view 1 7 Figure 4-13 AR206 rear view 1 7 Figure 4-14 AR207 rear view 1 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 2 3 4 5 6 2 3 4 5 6 Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 34 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 4 Device Structure of AR150 and AR200 Series Figure 4-15 AR207V rear view 1 7 9 2 3 4 5 6 Figure 4-16 AR207V-P rear view 1 7 9 2 10 3 4 5 6 Figure 4-17 AR207G-HSPA+7 rear view 12 12 1 7 2 3 11 4 5 6 Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 35 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 4 Device Structure of AR150 and AR200 Series Figure 4-18 AR208E rear view 1 7 2 3 4 5 6 1. CON/AUX interface 2. Fixed FE interfaces 3. RESET Button 4. Ground screw 5. AC jack 9. 4FXO/1FXS interfaces 6. Access hole for the power cable 7. WAN-side uplink interface 8. USB interface 10. PoE port 11. SIM card slot 12. 3G antenna NOTE l The AR200 provides eight LAN-side FE interfaces. The FE0 interface can be configured as a WAN-
side Layer 3 interface. l On the AR201, FE interfaces are WAN-side interfaces. On the AR206, ADSL ANNEX B interfaces are WAN-side interfaces. On the AR207, AR207V, AR207V-P, and AR207G-HSPA+7, ADSL ANNEX A/M interfaces are WAN-side interfaces. On the AR208E, 4-channel G.SHDSL interfaces are WAN-side interfaces. Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 36 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 5 Device Structure of AR1200, AR2200 and AR3200 Series 5 Device Structure of AR1200, AR2200 and AR3200 Series Appearance Figure 5-1 and Figure 5-2 show the front view of AR1200 series. Figure 5-1 AR1220/AR1220V/AR1220L front view Figure 5-2 AR1220W/AR1220VW front view 18 19 18 20 Figure 5-3, Figure 5-4, Figure 5-5, Figure 5-6, and Figure 5-7 show rear views of AR1200 series. Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 37 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 5 Device Structure of AR1200, AR2200 and AR3200 Series Figure 5-3 AR1220 rear view 7 2 15 14 13 Figure 5-4 AR1220V rear view 7 2 1 1 12 10 4 3 4 3 15 14 13 12 11 10 Figure 5-5 AR1220W rear view 7 2 1 4 3 15 14 13 12 11 10 Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 38 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 5 Device Structure of AR1200, AR2200 and AR3200 Series Figure 5-6 AR1220VW rear view 7 2 1 4 3 15 14 13 12 11 10 Figure 5-7 AR1220L rear view 7 2 1 4 3 15 14 13 10 1. Pluggable card 2. ESD jack 3. Ground screw 4. AC jack 7. Security lock 10. AC power switch 11. PoE port 13. Two Fixed GE interfaces on the panel 14. Mini USB interface 15. CON/AUX interface 19. Antenna 20. WLAN switch button Figure 5-8 and Figure 5-9 show front views of AR2200 series. 12. Fixed 8FE interface on the panel 18. USB interface Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 39 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 5 Device Structure of AR1200, AR2200 and AR3200 Series Figure 5-8 AR2220 front view 10 4 Figure 5-9 AR2240 front view 16 17 13 18 14 15 6 10 4 9 6 10 4 2 8 Figure 5-10 and Figure 5-11 show rear views of AR2200 series. Figure 5-10 AR2220 rear view 23 Figure 5-11 AR2240 rear view 2 3 1 1 Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 40 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 5 Device Structure of AR1200, AR2200 and AR3200 Series 1. Pluggable card 2. ESD jack 3. Ground screw 4. AC jack 6. Pluggable AC power supply unit 8. Pluggable fan module 9. SRU 10. AC power switch 13. Two Fixed GE interfaces on the panel 14. Mini USB interface 15. CON/AUX interface 16. Micro SD card interface 17. GE optical/
electrical Combo interface 18. USB interfaces Figure 5-12 shows the front view of AR3260. Figure 5-12 AR3260 front view 6 10 4 9 6 10 4 2 8 NOTE The AR3260 supports only one SRU, which can be installed in slot 15. It will support double SRUs in later versions. Figure 5-13 shows the rear view of AR. Figure 5-13 AR3260 rear view 2 3 1 Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 41 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 5 Device Structure of AR1200, AR2200 and AR3200 Series 1. Pluggable card 2. ESD jack 3. Ground screw 4. AC jack 6. Pluggable AC power supply unit 8. Pluggable fan module 9. SRU 10. AC power switch Slot distribution Figure 5-14, Figure 5-15 and Figure 5-16 show slot distribution on AR. NOTE l After two slots are combined into one, the slot ID is the larger one between the original two slots. Figure 5-14 Slot distribution on AR1200 Device Model Front view AR1200 Slot Distribution Slot Combination NA NA Rear view 2(SIC) 1(SIC) 0(SRU) Two SIC slots are combined into one WSIC slot 2(WSIC) 0(SRU) Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 42 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 5 Device Structure of AR1200, AR2200 and AR3200 Series Figure 5-15 Slot distribution on AR2200 Device Model Front view AR2220 Rear view Slot Distribution Slot Combination 7(Power) 0(SRU) NA 4(SIC) 3(SIC) 6(WSIC) 2(SIC) 1(SIC) 5(WSIC) Two SIC slots are combined into one WSIC slot 4(WSIC) 6(WSIC) 2(WSIC) 5(WSIC) Two WSIC slots are combined into one XSIC slot 6(XSIC) 5(XSIC) Front view AR2240 10(Power) 9(Power) 11(SRU) F A N NA Two SIC slots are combined into one WSIC slot 4(WSIC) 6(WSIC) 8(XSIC) 2(WSIC) 5(WSIC) 7(XSIC) 4(SIC) 3(SIC) 6(WSIC) 8(XSIC) 2(SIC) 1(SIC) 5(WSIC) 7(XSIC) Two WSIC slots are combined into one XSIC slot 6(XSIC) 5(XSIC) 8(XSIC) 7(XSIC) Two XSIC slots are combined into one EXSIC slot 6(XSIC) 5(XSIC) 8(EXSIC) Rear view Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 43 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 5 Device Structure of AR1200, AR2200 and AR3200 Series Figure 5-16 Slot distribution on AR3200 Device Model Slot Distribution AR3260 Front view 12(Power) 11(Power) 14(MFS) 13(MFS) 15(SRU) F A N Slot Combination Insert the SRU into slot 15. Two SIC slots are combined into one WSIC slot 4(WSIC) 6(WSIC) 8(XSIC) 2(WSIC) 5(WSIC) 7(XSIC) 10(XSIC) 9(XSIC) 4(SIC) 3(SIC) 6(WSIC) 8(XSIC) Rear view 2(SIC) 1(SIC) 5(WSIC) 7(XSIC) Two WSIC slots are combined into one XSIC slot 6(XSIC) 5(XSIC) 10(XSIC) 9(XSIC) 8(XSIC) 10(XSIC) 7(XSIC) 9(XSIC) Two XSIC slots are combined into one EXSIC slot 6(XSIC) 5(XSIC) 8(EXSIC) 10(EXSIC) As shown in Figure 5-14, Figure 5-15 and Figure 5-16, the slots of AR can be combined. l AR1200 Series Slot 1 and slot 2 are combined into new slot 2. l AR2220 Slot 1 and slot 2 are combined into new slot 2. Slot 3 and slot 4 are combined into new slot 4. New slot 2 and slot 5 are combined into new slot 5. New slot 4 and slot 6 are combined into new slot 6. l AR2240 Slot 1 and slot 2 are combined into new slot 2. Slot 3 and slot 4 are combined into new slot 4. New slot 2 and slot 5 are combined into new slot 5. Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 44 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 5 Device Structure of AR1200, AR2200 and AR3200 Series New slot 4 and slot 6 are combined into new slot 6. Slot 7 and slot 8 are combined into new slot 8. l AR3260 Slot 1 and slot 2 are combined into new slot 2. Slot 3 and slot 4 are combined into new slot 4. New slot 2 and slot 5 are combined into new slot 5. New slot 4 and slot 6 are combined into new slot 6. Slot 7 and slot 8 are combined into new slot 8. Slot 9 and slot 10 are combined into new slot 10. Slots 13 and 14 are multiple function slots. They can be combined into new slot 14, which is reserved for the slave main control board. Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 45 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 6 Maintenance and Management 6 Maintenance and Management About This Chapter 6.1 Various Maintenance Methods 6.2 Fault Location Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 46 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 6 Maintenance and Management 6.1 Various Maintenance Methods The ARs support various local and remote maintenance methods:
l Local maintenance using the console interface l Local or remote maintenance using Telnet l Secure shell (SSH) maintenance: guarantees security and provides authentication for login users on an insecure network, and defends against various attacks, including IP address spoofing, plain text password interception, and denial of service (DoS). 6.1.1 Web-based Network Management System The ARs support the web-based network management system, which provides GUI for device configuration and management. Users can use the web-based system to manage network devices on the GUI. A junior engineer can use the GUI easily. 6.1.2 CWMP The CPE WAN Management Protocol (CWMP) is drafted by the Digital Subscriber's Line (DSL) forum. It is also called TR-069 standard. CWMP standardizes the communication between customer premises equipment (CPE) and auto-configuration server (ACS). There are a lot of user devices separated on the access network. They are difficult to manage and maintain. The ARs are the CPE deployed at the user network side. The ACS uses CWMP to remotely manage the CPE. This reduces maintenance cost and improves troubleshooting efficiency. 6.1.3 Remote Deployment and Maintenance Using USB As the network expands, more and more network devices are used and software commissioning costs increase. USB-based deployment does not require software commissioning, which reduces deployment costs. Before using a USB flash drive to configure an AR, store software package and configuration files on the USB flash drive. Software engineers do not need to commission devices onsite. After installing the AR, hardware engineers will insert the USB flash drive into the USB interface on the AR and power on the AR. After being started, the AR automatically loads and upgrades the software. 6.1.4 SNMP-based Maintenance The ARs support the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) v1/v2c/v3 and the Client/
Server model. The ARs can be managed by the network management system (NMS), such as iManager U2000. 6.2 Fault Location Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 47 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 6.2.1 Device Fault Location 6 Maintenance and Management The ARs support the following functions to locate device faults:
l Log After detecting a service error or recovery event, the AR logs the event and sends the information to the background server. l Fast information collection A system administrator can use display diagnostic-information to collect device fault information. l Device monitoring The AR can monitor all the key indexes and components such as voltage, temperature, fan, and power supply unit. In addition, the AR can send a trap if an error occurs. 6.2.2 Service Fault Location The ARs support the following functions to locate service faults:
l Locating Ethernet interface faults The ARs support interface status display, line tests, and loopback tests on interfaces. The ARs test packet sending and receiving on interfaces and collect packet statistics, assisting administrators to locate network faults and Ethernet interface connection faults. l Network-side interface faults The ARs support WAN interface tests, which collect traffic statistics and event statistics on WAN interfaces and perform tests such as ATM, OAM, and interface loopback. l Port mirroring and traffic mirroring The ARs support packet mirroring on Ethernet interfaces, mirroring of packets from a network-side interface to a user-side Ethernet interface, and mirroring of protocol packets sent to the CPU. l Connection fault The ARs test connections and display connection status on network-side interfaces, and collect connection statistics. l Voice signal fault The ARs record the entire signal interaction process and test signal online. In addition, the ARs test the quality of VoIP services and locate dialing and service faults. Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 48 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 7 System Parameters 7 System Parameters About This Chapter 7.1 System Configuration 7.2 Physical Specifications Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 49 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 7 System Parameters 7.1 System Configuration Table 7-1 System configuration Model Processor AR151 AR157 AR201 AR206 AR207 AR207V AR207V-P AR207G-
HSPA+7 AR208 AR1220 AR1220V AR1220W Dual-core, 533 MHz Dual-core, 533 MHz Dual-core, 533 MHz Dual-core, 533 MHz Dual-core, 533 MHz Dual-core, 533 MHz Dual-core, 533 MHz Dual-core, 500 MHz Dual-core, 533 MHz Dual-core, 500 MHz Dual-core, 500 MHz Dual-core, 500 MHz AR1220VW Dual-core, 500 MHz Memory 512 MB 512 MB 512 MB 512 MB 512 MB 512 MB 512 MB 512M 512 MB 512 MB 512 MB 512 MB 512 MB AR1220L AR2220 AR2240 AR3260 Dual-core, 500 MHz 512M 4-core 600 MHz 2 GB 8-core 600 MHz 2 GB 12-core 750 MHz 2 GB Flash Memory 512 MB Micro SD Card
(built-in) 0 512 MB 512 MB 512 MB 512 MB 512 MB 512 MB 512M 512 MB 256 MB 256 MB 256 MB 256 MB 256M 16 MB 16 MB 16 MB 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 GB 2 GB 2 GB Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 50 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 7 System Parameters 7.2 Physical Specifications Table 7-2 Physical specifications Item Dimensions (H x W x D) Description l Without rack-mounting ear AR150 series: 44 mm x 300 mm x 216.4 mm (1.73in. x 11.81in. x 8.52in.) AR200 series: 44 mm x 300 mm x 216.4 mm (1.73in. x 11.81in. x 8.52in.) AR1200 series: 44.5mm x 390.0 mm x 220.0 mm
(1.75in. x 15.35in. x 8.66in.) AR2220: 44.5mm x 442.0 mm x 420.0 mm (1.75 in. x 17.4 in. x 16.54 in.) AR2240: 88.1 mm x 442.0 mm x 470.0 mm (3.47 in. x 17.4 in. x 18.5 in.) AR3260: 130.5 mm x 442.0 mm x 470.0 mm (5.14 in. x 17.4 in. x 18.5 in.) l With rack-mounting ear AR150 series: 44 mm x 482.6 mm x 216.4 mm
(1.73in. x 19in. x 8.52in.) AR200 series: (1.73in. x 19in. x 8.52in.) AR1200 series: 44.5 mm x 482.6 mm x 220.0 mm
(1.75 in. x 19 in. x 8.66 in.) AR2220: 44.5 mm x 482.6 mm x 420.0 mm (1.75 in. x 19 in. x 16.54 in.) AR2240: 88.1 mm x 482.6 mm x 470.0 mm (3.47 in. x 19 in. x 18.5 in.) AR3260: 130.5 mm x 482.6 mm x 470.0 mm (5.14 in. x 19 in. x 18.5 in.) Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 51 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 7 System Parameters Item Maximum power consumption
(empty chassis) Weight Full configuration Description l AR151: 11.4W l AR157: 14.5W l AR201: 12.5W l AR206: 14.6W l AR207: 15.6W l AR207V: 22.3W l AR207V-P: 22.3W l AR208E: 14.2W l AR207G-HSPA+7: 17.1W l AR1200 series: 33.3 W l AR2220: 65.1W l AR2240: 114.9W l AR3260: 163.2W l AR150 and AR200 series: 2.20kg l AR1200 series: 3.60 kg (7.94 lb) l AR2220: 8.45 kg (18.63 lb) l AR2240: 19.30 kg (42.56 lb) l AR3260: 25.65 kg (56.56 lb) Empty chassis l AR150 and AR200 series: 2.20kg l AR1200 series: 2.90 kg (6.39 lb) l AR2220: 4.95 kg (10.91 lb) l AR2240: 8.85 kg (19.51 lb) l AR3260: 11.00 kg (24.26 lb) Rated voltage
-48 V DC to -60 V DC Voltage range
-38.4 V DC to -72 V DC Rated voltage 12V DC Rated voltage 100 V AC to 240 V AC Voltage range AR1200/AR2200/AR3200 series: 85 V AC to 264 V AC AR150/AR200 Series: 90 V AC to 264 V AC DC input voltage
(AR2200 and AR3200 Series) DC input voltage
(AR150 and AR200 Series) AC input voltage Operating temperature 0 C to 40 C (0 F to 104 F) Relative humidity 5% RH to 90% RH Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 52 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 7 System Parameters Item Altitude Long-term altitude Storage altitude Description l AR1200/AR2200/AR3200 series: Lower than 4000 m
(13123.2 ft.) l AR150/AR200 series: Lower than 3000 m (9842.4 ft.) Lower than 4000 m (13123.2 ft.) Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 53 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 8 Component Selection Guide 8 Component Selection Guide About This Chapter 8.1 Router Purchase List 8.2 Board Purchase List Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 54 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 8 Component Selection Guide 8.1 Router Purchase List Table 8-1 Purchase list of AR150 series Component Typical Configuration AR151 Basic configuration of the AR151, including the AR201 assembly chassis, and basic software package Remarks Mandatory AR157 Basic configuration of the AR157, including the AR207 assembly chassis, and basic software package Mandatory Table 8-2 Purchase list of AR200 series Component Typical Configuration AR201 Basic configuration of the AR201, including the AR201 assembly chassis, and basic software package Remarks Mandatory AR206 AR207 AR207V AR207V-P AR208E AR207G-
HSPA+7 Basic configuration of the AR206, including the AR206 assembly chassis, and basic software package Mandatory Basic configuration of the AR207, including the AR207 assembly chassis, and basic software package Mandatory Basic configuration of the AR207V, including the AR207L assembly chassis, and basic software package Mandatory Basic configuration of the AR207V-P, including the AR207V-P assembly chassis, 100 W PoE power supply adapter module, and basic software package Mandatory Basic configuration of the AR208E, including the AR208E assembly chassis, and basic software package Mandatory Basic configuration of the AR207G-HSPA+7, including the AR207G-HSPA+7 assembly chassis, and basic software package Mandatory 3G extended antenna Omni antenna Optional NOTE Only the AR207G-HSPA
+7 can be configured with the Omni antenna. Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 55 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 8 Component Selection Guide Table 8-3 Purchase list of AR1200 series Component Typical Configuration AR1220 Basic configuration of AR1220, including AR1220 assembly chassis, and basic software package AR1220V AR1220W AR1220 with the voice function, including AR1220 assembly chassis, 32-channel digital signal processor
(DSP), and basic software package AR1220 with the WLAN functions, including AR1220 assembly chassis, 802.11b/g/n AP, and basic software package AR1220VW AR1220 with the voice and WLAN functions, including AR1220 assembly chassis, 16-channel DSP, 802.11b/
g/n AP, and basic software package Remarks Mandatory Mandatory Mandatory Mandatory Basic configuration of AR1220L, including AR1220L assembly chassis and basic software package Mandatory 100 W PoE power supply adapter module AR1220L PoE power supply unit Table 8-4 Purchase list of AR2220 Component Typical Configuration AR2220 Basic configuration of AR2220 with AC power, including AR2220 assembly chassis, 150 W AC power supply, and basic software package Basic configuration of AR2220 with DC power, including AR2220 assembly chassis, 150 W DC power supply, and basic software package DSP module 16/32/64/128-channel voice DSP module Optional Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 56 Optional NOTE Only applied to AR1220V, AR1220VW, and AR1220W. Remarks Mandatory Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 8 Component Selection Guide Table 8-5 Purchase list of AR2240 Component Typical Configuration AR2240 l Basic configuration of AR2240 with standard main control board and AC power supply, including AR2240 assembly chassis, 350 W AC power supply, standard main control board, and basic software package l Basic configuration of AR2240 with standard main control board and DC power supply, including AR2240 assembly chassis, 350 W DC power supply, standard main control board, and basic software package l Basic configuration of AR2240 with enhanced main control board and AC power supply, including AR2240 assembly chassis, 350 W AC power supply, enhanced main control board, and basic software package l Basic configuration of AR2240 with enhanced main control board and DC power supply, including AR2240 assembly chassis, 350 W DC power supply, standard main control board, and basic software package Fan AR2240 Fan module AC power supply unit 350 W AC power supply unit DC power supply unit 350 W DC power supply unit Remarks Mandatory Mandatory Optional. By default, a router has one AC power supply unit. To perform load balancing, two AC power supply units can be installed. Optional. By default, a DC router has one DC power supply unit. To perform load balancing, two DC power supply units can be installed. DSP module 16/32/64/128-channel voice DSP module Optional Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 57 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 8 Component Selection Guide Table 8-6 Purchase list of AR3260 Component Typical Configuration AR3260 l Basic configuration of AR3260 with enhanced main control board and AC power supply, including AR3260 assembly chassis, 350 W AC power supply, enhanced main control board, and basic software package l Basic configuration of AR3260 with standard main control board and AC power supply, including AR3260 assembly chassis, 350 W AC power supply, standard main control board, and basic software package l Basic configuration of AR3260 with standard main control board and DC power supply, including AR3260 assembly chassis, 350 W DC power supply, standard main control board, and basic software package l Basic configuration of AR3260 with enhanced main control board and DC power supply, including AR3260 assembly chassis, 350 W DC power supply, enhanced main control board, and basic software package Fan AR3260 fan module AC power supply unit 350 W AC power supply unit DC power supply unit 350 W DC power supply unit Remarks Mandatory Mandatory Optional. By default, an AC router has one AC power supply unit. To perform load balancing, two AC power supply units can be installed. Optional. By default, a DC router has one DC power supply unit. To perform load balancing, two DC power supply units can be installed. DSP module 16/32/64/128-channel voice DSP module Optional Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 58 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 8 Component Selection Guide 8.2 Board Purchase List NOTE An AR150 router or AR200 router has no slot; therefore, you do not need to purchase the following boards for the AR200. Table 8-7 Board purchase list Silkscreen 8FE1GE 24GE 1GEC 2FE 4GEW-T 4GEW-S 1E1/T1-M 1E1/T1-F 2E1/T1-F 2E1/T1-M 1SA 2SA 1BST 2BST 4FXS1FXO 1ADSL-A/M 1ADSL-B VDSL 4G.SHDSL 1CPOS-155M Description 9-port 8FE/1GE L2/L3 Ethernet interface card 24-port GE L2/L3 Ethernet interface card 1-port GE combo WAN interface card 2-port FE WAN interface card 4-port GE optical port WAN interface card 4-port GE electrical port WAN interface card 1-port channelized E1/PRI/VE1; MFT: Multiflex Trunk 1-port unchannelized E1/unstructure E1/fractional E1,120 ohm WAN interface card 2-port unchannelized E1/unstructure E1/fractional E1,120 ohm WAN interface card 2-port channelized E1/PRI/VE1; MFT: Multiflex Trunk, including SIC and WSIC 1-port sync/async serial WAN interface card 2-port sync/async serial WAN interface card 1-port ISDN S/T WAN interface card 2-port ISDN S/T voice interface card, including SIC and WSIC 5-port 4FXS/1FXO voice interface card 1-port ADSL2+ annex A/M WAN interface card 1-port ADSL2+ annex B WAN interface card 1-port VDSL2 over POTS WAN interface card 4-pair G.SHDSL WAN interface card 1-Port Channelized Packet over SDH/Sonet interface card NOTE The AR1200 does not support 1CPOS-155M. 1PON 1-port-xPON WAN interface card Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 59 Huawei AR G3 Series Enterprise Routers Product Description 8 Component Selection Guide Silkscreen 3G-HSPA+7
-
Description 3G WAN interface card 16/32/64/128-channel DSP module Issue 02 (2012-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 60
1 2 3 4 | Users Manual 1 | Users Manual | 526.24 KiB |
IdeaPad S205 User Guide User Guide V1.0 Read the safety notices and important tips in the included manuals before using your computer. Notes Before using the product, be sure to read Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide first. Some instructions in this guide may assume that you are using Windows 7. If you are using other Windows operating system, some operations may be slightly different. If you are using other operating systems, some operations may not apply to you. The features described in this guide are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer and/or your computer may include features that are not described in this user guide. The illustrations in this manual may differ from the actual product. Please refer to the actual product. First Edition (December 2010) Copyright Lenovo 2010. LENOVO products, data, computer software, and services have been developed exclusively at private expense and are sold to governmental entities as commercial items as defined by 48 C.F.R. 2.101 with limited and restricted rights to use, reproduction and disclosure. LIMITED AND RESTRICTED RIGHTS NOTICE: If products, data, computer software, or services are delivered pursuant a General Services Administration GSA contract, use, reproduction, or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in Contract No. GS-35F-05925. Appendix A. CRU instructions.............................30 Replacing the battery .................. 30 Replacing the hard disk drive.... 31 Replacing memory....................... 35 Index........................................40 Contents Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer...................................1 Top view..........................................1 Left-side view .................................3 Right-side view...............................4 Bottom view ....................................5 Chapter 2. Learning the basics........................................7 First use............................................7 Using AC adapter and battery .....9 Using the touchpad......................11 Using the keyboard......................12 Connecting external devices.......14 Special keys and buttons.............17 System status indicators..............18 Securing your computer..............19 Chapter 3. Connecting to the Internet....................................21 Wired connection .........................21 Wireless connection .....................23 Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system.....................................28 OneKey Rescue system ...............28 i Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Top view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
3 2 3 4 8 6 5 5 7 Note: The illustrations in this manual may differ from the actual product. Please refer to the actual product.
Attention:
Do NOT open the display panel beyond 130 degrees. When closing the display panel, be a b c careful NOT to leave pens or any other objects in between the display panel and the keyboard. Otherwise, the display panel may be damaged. Integrated camera Built-in microphone Use the camera for video communication. The built-in microphone (with noise reduction) can be used for video conferencing, voice narration, or simple audio recordings. The built-in antennas ensure optimal reception of wireless radio. Wireless module antennas (Select models only) 1 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Computer display The LCD display with LED backlight provides brilliant visual output. For details, see System status indicators on page 18. System status indicators Power button OneKey Rescue system button Press this button to turn on the computer. Press this button to open OneKey Rescue system (If OneKey Rescue system has been preinstalled) when the computer is powered off. Note: For details, see OneKey Rescue system on page 28. Touchpad Note: For details, see Using the touchpad on page 11. The touchpad functions as a conventional mouse. d e f g h 2 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Left-side view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
a b c d 1 2 3 4 5 AC power adapter jack Note: For details, see Using AC adapter and battery on page 9. Connect the AC adapter here. VGA port USB port Connects to external display devices. Connect to USB devices. Note: For details, see Connecting a universal serial bus (USB) device on page 15. Fan louvers Note: Make sure that none of the fan louvers are blocked or else overheating of the Dissipate internal heat. computer may occur. e Memory card slot Insert memory cards (not supplied) here. Note: For details, see Using memory cards (not supplied) on page 14. 3 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Right-side view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 a Headphone jack Connects to external headphones.
Attention:
Listening to music at high volume over extended periods of time may damage your hearing. Microphone jack Connects to external microphones. Integrated wireless device switch (Select models only) HDMI port USB port Use this switch to turn on/off the wireless radio of all wireless devices on your computer. Connects to devices with HDMI input such as a TV or a display. Connects to USB devices. Note: For details, see Connecting a universal serial bus (USB) device on page 15. Kensington slot Attach a security lock (not supplied) here. Note: For details, see Attaching a security lock (not supplied) on page 19. RJ-45 port This port connects the computer to an Ethernet network. Note: For details, see Wired connection on page 21. b c d e f g 4 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Bottom view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
1 2 3 4 5 5 5 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Battery latch -
spring loaded Battery pack The spring-loaded battery latch keeps the battery pack secured in place. For details, see Using AC adapter and battery on page 9. The manual battery latch is used to keep the battery pack secured in place. Insert a SIM card (not supplied) for using Mobile Broadband. Battery latch -
manual SIM card slot
(Select models only) Notes:
In order to be able to insert a SIM card into this slot, you must first disconnect the AC adapter and remove the battery pack. For details, see Using Mobile Broadband (Select models only) on page 25. Speakers The stereo speakers provide rich and powerful sound. a b c d e 6 Chapter 2. Learning the basics First use - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Reading the manuals Read the supplied manuals before using your computer. Connecting to the power The supplied battery pack is not fully charged at purchase. To charge the battery and begin using your computer, insert the battery pack and connect the computer to an electrical outlet. The battery is automatically charged while the computer is running on AC power. Installing the battery pack Refer to the supplied Setup Poster to install the battery pack. Connecting the computer to an electrical outlet 1 Connect the power cord to the AC adapter. 2 Connect the AC adapter to the AC power adapter jack of the computer firmly. 3 Plug the power cord into an electrical outlet. Turning on the computer Press the power button to turn on the computer. Configuring the operating system You may need to configure the operating system when it is first used. The configuration process may include the procedures below. Accepting the end user license agreement Configuring the Internet connection Registering the operating system Creating a user account 7 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Putting your computer into sleep state or shutting it down When you finish working with your computer, you can put it into sleep state or shut it down. Putting your computer into sleep state If you will be away from your computer for only a short time, put the computer into sleep state. When the computer is in sleep state, you can quickly wake it to resume use, and bypass the startup process. To put the computer into sleep state, do one of the following. Click Press Fn + F1. Note: Wait until the power indicator light starts blinking (indicating that the computer is in sleep state) before you move your computer. Moving your computer while the hard disk is spinning can damage the hard disk, causing loss of data. and select Sleep from the Start menu. To wake the computer, do one of the following. Press the power button. Press any key on the keyboard. Shutting down your computer If you are not going to use your computer for a day or two, shut it down. To shut down your computer, click menu. and select Shut down from the Start 8 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Using AC adapter and battery - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Checking battery status You can determine the percentage of battery power remaining by checking the battery icon in the notification area. Note: As each computer user has different habits and needs, it is difficult to predict how long a battery charge will last. There are two main factors:
The amount of energy stored in the battery when you commence work. The way you use your computer: for example, how often you access the hard disk drive and how bright you make the computer display. Charging the battery When you find that the battery power is low, you need to charge the battery or replace it with a fully charged one. You need to charge the battery in any of the following situations:
When you purchase a new battery If the battery status indicator starts blinking If the battery has not been used for a long time Notes:
You are advised to insert the battery pack when using your computer to prevent small particles from entering the inside of your computer. To increase the life of the battery pack, the computer does not start recharging the battery immediately after it drops from fully charged. Charge the battery at a temperature between 50 F and 86 F (10 C-30 C). Full charge or discharge is not required. 9 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Removing the battery pack If you are not going to use the computer for an extended period of time, or if you need to send your computer to Lenovo for service, etc. remove the battery pack from the computer. Before removing the battery pack, make sure the computer has been shut down. Handling the battery If the rechargeable battery pack is replaced with an incorrect type, there may be danger of an explosion. The battery pack contains a small amount of harmful substances. To avoid possible injury and detriment to the environment, pay attention to the following points:
Replace only with a battery of the type recommended by Lenovo. Keep the battery pack away from fire. Do not expose the battery pack to water or rain. Do not attempt to disassemble the battery pack. Do not short-circuit the battery pack. Keep the battery pack away from children. Do not put the battery pack in trash that is disposed of in landfills. When disposing of the battery, comply with local ordinances or regulations and your companys safety standards. 10 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Using the touchpad - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
1 2 3 a Touchpad b c Left click button Right click button To move the cursor on the screen, slide your fingertip over the pad in the direction in which you want the cursor to move. The function corresponds to that of the left mouse button on a conventional mouse. The function corresponds to that of the right mouse button on a conventional mouse. Note: You can enable/disable the touchpad using Fn+F6. 11 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Using the keyboard - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Your computer has function keys incorporated in its standard keyboard. Function key combinations Through the use of the function keys, you can change operational features instantly. To use this function, press and hold Fn
; then press one of the function keys a
. b 2 1 2 12 The following describes the features of each function key. Fn + Esc:
Fn + F1:
Fn + F2:
Fn + F3:
Fn + F5:
Fn + F6:
Fn + F7:
Fn + F8:
Fn + F9:
Fn + F10:
Fn + F11:
Fn + PrtSc:
Fn + Pause:
Fn + Delete:
Fn + n/ p:
Fn + o/ m:
Chapter 2. Learning the basics Turn on/off the integrated camera. Enter sleep mode. Turn on/off the backlight of the LCD screen. Open the interface for the display device switch to select this notebook or an external display. Open the interface for integrated wireless devices settings (on/off). Enable/Disable the touchpad. Start/Pause playback of Windows Media Player. Stop playback of Windows Media Player. Skip to the previous track. Skip to the next track. Activate the F12 function.
* You can press Fn+F11 during computer startup to open the boot selection menu. Activate the system request. Activate the break function. Enable/Disable the scroll lock. Increase/Decrease display brightness. Increase/Decrease sound volume. 13 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Connecting external devices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Your computer has a wide range of built-in features and connection capabilities. Using memory cards (not supplied) Your computer supports the following types of memory cards:
Secure Digital (SD) card Secure Digital PRO (SD PRO) MultiMediaCard (MMC) Memory Stick (MS) Memory Stick PRO (MS PRO) xD-Picture (xD) card Notes:
This card reader does not support SDIO devices (e.g., SDIO Bluetooth, etc.). Insert ONLY one card in the slot at a time. Inserting a memory card 1 Push the dummy card until you hear a click. Gently pull the dummy card out of the memory card slot. Note: The dummy card is used for preventing dust and small particles from entering the inside of your computer when the memory card slot is not in use. Retain the dummy card for future use. 2 Slide the memory card in until it clicks into place. Removing a memory card 1 Push the memory card until you hear a click. 2 Gently pull the memory card out of the memory card slot. Note: Before removing the memory card, disable it via Windows safely remove hardware and eject media utility to avoid data corruption. 14 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Connecting a universal serial bus (USB) device Your computer comes with three USB ports compatible with USB devices. Note: When using a high power consumption USB device such as USB ODD, use the external devices power adapter. Otherwise, the device may not be recognized, and system shut down may result. Connecting an ExpressCard device (Select models only) Your computer comes with an ExpressCard/34 slot used for connecting ExpressCard devices. Note: Only use the ExpressCard/34 devices. Inserting an ExpressCard/34 device 1 Push the dummy card until you hear a click. Gently pull the dummy card out of the ExpressCard slot. Note: The dummy card is used for preventing dust and small particles from entering the inside of your computer when the ExpressCard slot is not in use. Retain the dummy card for future use. 2 Slide the ExpressCard device in with the front label facing upward until it clicks into place. Removing an ExpressCard/34 device 1 Push the ExpressCard device until you hear a click. 2 Gently pull the ExpressCard device out of the ExpressCard slot. Note: Before removing the ExpressCard/34 device, unable it by Windows safely remove hardware and eject media utility. 15 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Connecting a Bluetooth device (Select models only) If your computer has an integrated Bluetooth adapter card, it can connect to and transfer data wirelessly to other Bluetooth enabled devices, such as notebook computers, PDAs and cell phones. You can transfer data between these devices without cables and up to 10 meters range in open space. Note: The actual maximum range may vary due to interference and transmission barriers. To get the best possible connection speed, place the device as near your computer as possible. Enabling Bluetooth communications on your computer 1 Slide the integrated wireless device switch from
. 2 Press Fn + F5 to make configuration. to Notes:
When you do not need to use the Bluetooth function, turn it off to save battery power. You need to pair the Bluetooth enabled device with your computer before you can transfer data between them. Read the documentation supplied with the Bluetooth enabled device for details on how to pair the device with your computer. 16 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Special keys and buttons - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
1 OneKey Rescue system button a When the computer is powered-off, press this button to enter the OneKey Rescue system if Lenovo OneKey Rescue system has been preinstalled. In Windows operating system, press this button to start Lenovo OneKey Recovery. Note: For details, see OneKey Rescue system on page 28. 17 Chapter 2. Learning the basics System status indicators - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
These indicators inform you of the computer status. 5 1 2 3 4 a b c d e Power status indicator Battery status indicator Wireless communication indicator Hard disk drive indicator Touchpad indicator 18 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Securing your computer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
This section provides information about how to help protect your computer from theft and unauthorized use. Attaching a security lock (not supplied) You can attach a security lock to your computer to help prevent it from being removed without your permission. For details on installing the security lock, please refer to the instructions shipped with the security lock that you have purchased. Refer to the Right-side view on page 4 for the location of the Kensington slot. Notes:
Before purchasing any security product, verify that it is compatible with this type of security keyhole. You are responsible for evaluating, selecting, and implementing the locking devices and security features. Lenovo offers no comment judgement or warranty regarding the function, quality or performance of locking devices and security features. Using VeriFace VeriFace is a face recognition software which takes a digital snapshot, extracts key features of your face, and creates a digital map that becomes the systems password. If you want to activate VeriFace for the first time, click the VeriFace icon on the desktop to register your facial image. Notes:
The face registration and verification works best in an environment with steady and even light. You can determine whether to use this function when you log on the system. For more details on VeriFace, see the software help. 19 Chapter 2. Learning the basics Using passwords Using passwords helps prevent your computer from being used by others. Once you set a password and enable it, a prompt appears on the screen each time you power on the computer. Enter your password at the prompt. The computer cannot be used unless you enter the correct password. Note: This password can be from one to seven alphanumeric characters in any combination. For details about how to set the password, see the Help to the right of the screen in BIOS setup utility. Note: To enter BIOS setup utility, press F2 when the Lenovo logo appears on the screen while the computer is starting up. 20 Chapter 3. Connecting to the Internet As a global network, the Internet connects computers worldwide, providing services such as e-mailing, information searching, electronic commerce, Web browsing and entertainment. You can connect the computer to the Internet in the following ways:
Wired connection: use physical wiring to connect. Wireless network technology: connect without wiring. Wired connection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Wired connections are a reliable and safe way to connect the computer to the Internet. Cable Cable Internet services use a cable modem connected to the residential cable TV line. DSL is a family of related technologies that bring high-
speed network access to homes and small businesses over ordinary telephone lines. DSL 21 Chapter 3. Connecting to the Internet Hardware connection:
Cable DSL TV cable Telephone line Splitter *
*
Splitter *
*
Cable modem *
DSL modem *
*
*
* Not supplied. Note: The above diagrams are for reference only. Actual connection method may vary. Software configuration Consult your Internet Service Provider (ISP) for details on how to configure your computer. 22 Chapter 3. Connecting to the Internet Wireless connection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Wireless connections provide mobile access to the Internet, allowing you to stay online anywhere the wireless signal covers. Divided by the signal scales, wireless connection to the Internet can be built based on the following standards. Wi-Fi WiMAX Mobile Broadband Wi-Fi networks cover a small physical area, like a home, office, or small group of buildings. An access point is necessary for the connection. WiMAX networks connect several Wireless LAN systems to cover a metropolitan area, providing high-
speed broadband access without the need for cables. The Mobile Broadband network provides Internet access to computers, cell phones and other devices over a large geographic area. Mobile networks are used for data transmission, and access is usually provided by a mobile network operator. A Mobile Broadband SIM card is necessary for the connection. Note: Your computer may not support all wireless connection methods. 23 Chapter 3. Connecting to the Internet Using Wi-Fi/WiMAX (Select models only) Enabling wireless connection To enable wireless communications, do the following:
1 Slide the integrated wireless device switch from 2 Press Fn + F5 to make configuration. Hardware connection to
. Wi-Fi/WiMAX network Access point *
* Not supplied Software configuration Consult your Internet Service Provider (ISP) and search Windows Help and Support Center for details on how to configure your computer. 24 Chapter 3. Connecting to the Internet Using Mobile Broadband (Select models only) Before getting started with Mobile Broadband, you first need to choose a mobile network operator and make sure you are in the coverage area of the network. After that, you also need:
To activate the Mobile Broadband service through your local mobile network operator. You will get a Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) card after activation. For instructions on inserting the SIM card, refer to Inserting the SIM card on page 26. Notes:
Various standards are in use by mobile operators to provide Mobile Broadband services. The Lenovo Mobile Broadband module may support one or more of the following standards:
GSM (Global System for Mobile Communications) TD-SCDMA (Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access) EV-DO (Evolution Data Optimized) HSPA (High Speed Packet Access) SCDMA (Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access) Mobile Broadband is a subscription service. Refer to your local mobile network operator for availability, cost and other information. A SIM card is a type of smart card used by mobile network operators to identify their service subscribers on the mobile network. You will get the SIM card from your mobile network operator after you have activated the Mobile Broadband service. A connection management utility to connect/disconnect to your Mobile Broadband network. Note: In general, your mobile service provider provides this utility. 25 Chapter 3. Connecting to the Internet Inserting the SIM card To insert the SIM card:
1 Turn off the computer; then disconnect the AC adapter and all cables from the computer. 2 Close the computer display and turn it over. 3 Remove the battery. 4 Insert the SIM card in the card slot until it clicks into place as shown in the illustration. Note: Inserting the SIM card in the wrong direction may damage the SIM card slot. Notched Corner 5 Put the battery back in place. Turn the computer over and reconnect the cables. 26 Chapter 3. Connecting to the Internet Removing the SIM card To remove the SIM card:
1 Turn off the computer, then disconnect the AC adapter and all cables from the computer. 2 Close the computer display and turn it over. 3 Remove the battery. 4 Push the SIM card in until you hear a click, and then pull the SIM card out. 5 Put the battery back in place. Turn the computer over and reconnect the cables. Note: Never insert or remove the SIM card while the computer is on. Doing so may cause permanent damage to the SIM card as well as the SIM card reader. 27 Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system OneKey Rescue system - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Introduction The Lenovo OneKey Rescue system is an easy-to-use application that can be used to back up the data on your system partition (C drive) for easy restore when required. You can run Lenovo OneKey Recovery under the Windows operating system, and the OneKey Rescue system without starting the Windows operating system. Attention:
In order to utilize the features of the OneKey Rescue system, your hard disk already includes a hidden partition by default to store the system image file and OneKey Rescue system program files. This default partition is hidden for security reasons and is the reason the available disk space is less than it claims. The exact available hard disk space depends on the file size of the mirror image file (based on the size of operating system and preinstalled software). Using Lenovo OneKey Recovery (within Windows operating system) In Windows operating system, double click the OneKey Recovery system Icon on the desktop to launch Lenovo OneKey Recovery. Within the program, you can back up the system partition on the hard disk drive, other storage devices, or by creating recovery discs. Notes:
The backup process and creation of recovery discs may take some time, connect the AC adapter and battery pack to your computer. After the recovery discs are burned, please number them so that you can use them in the correct order. Computers without an integrated optical drive support the creation of recovery discs;
however an appropriate external optical drive is needed to physically create the recovery discs. For more instructions, see the Help file of Lenovo OneKey Recovery. 28 Chapter 4. OneKey Rescue system Using Lenovo OneKey Rescue system (without Windows operating system) In the event that the operating system cannot be loaded, follow the steps below to access OneKey Rescue system. Shut down your computer. Press the key to launch OneKey Rescue system. Within the program, you can choose to restore your system partition to the original factory status, or to a previously generated backup. Note: The recovery process is irreversible. Make sure to back up any critical data before using the recovery feature. 29 Appendix A. CRU instructions Replacing the battery - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Note: Use only the battery provided by Lenovo. Any other battery could ignite or explode. To replace the battery, do the following:
1 Turn off the computer, or enter hibernation mode. Disconnect the AC adapter and all cables from the computer. Note: If you are using an ExpressCard device, the computer might not be able to enter hibernation mode. If this happens, turn off the computer. 2 Close the computer display, and turn the computer over. 3 Unlock the manual battery latch b
. Holding the spring-loaded battery a
, remove the battery pack in the direc-
latch in the unlocked position tion shown by the arrow
. c 2 3 1 4 Install a fully charged battery. 5 Slide the manual battery latch to the locked position. 6 Turn the computer over again. Connect the AC adapter and the cables to the computer again. 30 Appendix A. CRU instructions Replacing the hard disk drive - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
You can increase the storage capacity of your computer by replacing the hard disk drive with one of greater capacity. You can purchase a new hard disk drive from your reseller or Lenovo marketing representative. Notes:
Replace the hard disk drive only if you upgrade it or have it repaired. The connectors and bay of the hard disk drive were not designed for frequent changes, or drive swapping. The preinstalled softwares are not included on an optional hard disk drive. Handling a hard disk drive Do not drop the drive or subject it to physical shocks. Put the drive on a material, such as soft cloth, that absorbs the physical shock. Do not apply pressure to the cover of the drive. Do not touch the connector. The drive is very sensitive. Incorrect handling can cause damage and perma-
nent loss of data on the hard disk. Before removing the hard disk drive, make a backup copy of all the information on the hard disk, and then turn the com-
puter off. Never remove the drive while the system is operating, in sleep mode, or in hibernation mode. 31
1 2 3 4 | Users Manual 2 | Users Manual | 2.85 MiB |
Appendix A. CRU instructions To replace the hard disk drive, do the following:
1 Turn off the computer; then disconnect the AC adapter and all cables from the computer. 2 Close the computer display, and then turn the computer over. 3 Remove the battery pack. 4 Remove the keyboard. a.Remove the screws under the battery pack that secure the keyboard a
. 1 1 1 b.Remove the keyboard b
. 2 32 Appendix A. CRU instructions 5 Remove the base cover. a.Remove the screws that secure the base cover c
. 3 3 3 b.Remove the base cover d
. 3 3 3 3 4 3 3 3 3 33 Appendix A. CRU instructions 6 Remove the frame fixing screws. 5 5 7 Release the cables from the cable guides of the hard disk drive frame and pull the tab in the direction shown by arrow g
. 7 6 6 8 Take out the hard disk drive secured in the hard disk drive bay. 9 Remove the screws and detach the metal frame from the hard disk drive. 0 Attach the metal frame to a new hard disk drive; then tighten the screws. A Put the hard disk drive gently into the hard disk drive bay with the tab facing upwards and the connectors facing each other; then push it firmly into space. B Reinstall the frame fixing screws. C Reinstall the base cover and the keyboard. D Reinstall the battery pack. E Turn the computer over again. Connect the AC adapter and the cables to the computer again. 34 Appendix A. CRU instructions Replacing memory - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
You can increase the amount of memory in your computer by installing a double-data-rate three synchronous dynamic random access memory (DDR3 SDRAM)-available as an option-in the memory slot of your computer. DDR3 SDRAMs are available in various capacities. Note: Use only the memory types supported by your computer. If you incorrectly install optional memory, or install an unsupported memory type, a warning beep will sound when you try to start the computer. To install a DDR3 SDRAM, do the following:
1 Touch a metal table or a grounded metal object to reduce any static elec-
tricity in your body, which could damage the DDR3 SDRAM. Do not touch the contact edge of the DDR3 SDRAM. 2 Turn off the computer. Disconnect the AC adapter and all cables from the computer. 3 Close the computer display, and turn the computer over. 4 Remove the battery again. 5 Remove the keyboard. a.Remove the screws under the battery pack that secure the keyboard a
. 1 1 1 35 Appendix A. CRU instructions b.Remove the keyboard b
. 2 6 Remove the base cover. a.Remove the screws that secure the base cover c
. 3 3 3 36 Appendix A. CRU instructions b.Remove the base cover d
. 3 3 3 3 4 3 3 3 3 7 If two SO-DIMMs are already installed in the memory slot, remove one of them to make room for the new one by pressing out on the latches on both edges of the socket at the same time. Be sure to save the old SO-DIMM for future use. 1 1 2 2 1 1 37 Appendix A. CRU instructions 8 Insert the notched end of the DIMM into the socket. Press the DIMM firmly, and pivot it until it snaps into place. Make sure that it is firmly fixed in the slot and does not move easily. 9 Reinstall the base cover and the keyboard. 0 Reinstall the battery. A Turn the computer over, and reconnect the AC adapter and the cables to the computer. To make sure that the SO-DIMM is installed correctly, do as follows:
1 Turn the computer on. 2 Hold F2 during startup. The BIOS Setup Utility screen opens. The Total Memory item shows the total amount of memory installed in your computer. 38 Appendix A. CRU instructions The following table provides a list of CRUs (Customer Replaceable Units) for your computer, and informs you of where to find replacement instructions. Setup Poster User Guide AC adapter Power cord for AC adapter Battery Bottom access doors Hard disk drive Memory Optical drive O O O O O O O O 39 Index A O AC adapter Using........................................................... 9 B Battery Bluetooth Charging.................................................... 9 Connecting..............................................16 OneKey Rescue System button.....28 P Password Using ........................................................20 S C Security .........................................................19 SIM card .......................................................26 Camera .....................................................1, 13 T E Touchpad ....................................................11 ExpressCard/34 slot ...........................15 U F USB port.................................................. 3, 15 Function key combinations............12 V VeriFace Using ........................................................19 K Keyboard Using.........................................................12 M Meomory card reader ........................14 Microphone Built-in ....................................................... 1 40 User Guide V1.0 New World. New Thinking.TM www.lenovo.com 2 0 1 0 L e n o v o C h n a i Lenovo Ideapad S205 Regulatory Notice V1.0 Lenovo regulatory notice for wireless modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Read first regulatory information Please read this document before you use the Lenovo computer. Lenovo computer complies with the radio frequency and safety standards of any country or region in which it has been approved for wireless use. You must install and use your computer in strict accordance with the instructions as described hereafter. You are prohibited to replace or remove the preinstalled Wireless LAN Mini PCI Express Card and the Bluetooth module in your computer, it is not a Customer Replaceable Unit
(CRU). If one of your cards requires replacement or repair, Lenovo will request you to send your computer with the preinstalled card(s) to Lenovo so that Lenovo will repair it. Veuillez lire ce document avant dutiliser lordinateur Lenovo. Lordinateur Lenovo est conforme aux normes de scurit et de radiofrquence du pays ou de la rgion o son utilisation sans fil est agre. Vous devez installer et utiliser votre ordinateur en respectant scrupuleusement les instructions dcrites ci-aprs. Vous tes interdit de remplacer la carte de rseau local sans fil Express mini-PCI et le module Bluetooth qui sont prinstalles dans votre ordinateur, ce ne sont pas des Units remplaables par lutilisateur(CRU). Si lune de votre carte a besoin dtre remplace ou repare, Lenovo va vous demander de lui envoyer votre ordinateur avec des cartes prinstallees, pour quil puisse le rparer. USA Federal Communications Commission (FCC) I. Factory preinstalled Wireless LAN/WiMAX module FCC ID: PPD-AR5B95 (Model: AR5B95) FCC ID: VQF-RT3090-1T1R (Model: RT3090) Wireless LAN Mini PCI Express Cards marketed in the USA and Canada do not support nor function in the extended channels (12ch, 13ch). i) The FCC RF Exposure compliance:
The radiated energy from the auxiliary antenna connected to models AR5B95 and RT3090 conforms to the FCC limit of the SAR (specific absorption rate) requirement regarding 47 CFR Part 2 section 1093. ii) FCC ID of wireless module:
On the bottom side of your Lenovo computer, you will find an indicator label of the format Contains Transmitter Module: FCC ID XXXX, where XXXX represents the FCC ID that corresponds to your preinstalled Wireless LAN/WiMax module. 1 iii) Radio Frequency interference requirements:
The devices have been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to FCC Part 15 Subpart B. Refer to Electronic emission notices on page 5. The models AR5B95 and RT3090 underwent the certification process with each respective FCC ID number listed in I. Factory preinstalled Wireless LAN/WiMAX module on page 1. Each device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. FCC requires these products to be used indoors for the frequency range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radar are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. II. Preinstalled integrated Bluetooth module FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1043 (Model: BCM92070MD_REF) i) FCC ID and installation of the module:
If you find an indication Contains Transmitter Module: FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1043 on the label at the bottom side of your computer, your computer contains the Bluetooth transmitter module (Model: BCM92070MD_REF). The Bluetooth module is preinstalled by Lenovo, and is not removable by users. ii) The FCC RF safety requirement:
The radiated output power of the Bluetooth module is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Therefore, a 20 cm of separation between the Bluetooth antenna and human body is not required. iii) Radio Frequency interference requirements:
The device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for both a Class B digital device regarding FCC Part 15 Subpart B and an intentional radiator regarding FCC Part 15 Subpart C; then it underwent the certification processes for both rules. Thus the FCC ID:
QDS-BRCM1043 of this device includes both certifications of Part 15 Subpart B and C/E. III. Simultaneous use of RF transmitters Your Lenovo computer is approved for simultaneous use of the transmitters listed below:
Wireless LAN adapter (FCC ID: PPD-AR5B95, VQF-RT3090-1T1R). Bluetooth module FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1043 (Model: BCM92070MD_REF) Please make sure of the following conditions on use of these wireless features:
1. When you use any other RF option device, all other wireless features including the above integrated devices in your Lenovo computer are required to be turned off. 2. Users must follow the RF Safety instructions on wireless option devices that are included in the RF option devices users manual. 2 Canada Industry Canada (IC) IC Certification number I) Factory preinstalled Wireless LAN modules:
IC: 4104A-AR5B95 (Model: AR5B95) IC: 7542A-RT30901T1R (Model: RT3090) Wireless LAN Mini PCI Express Cards marketed in the USA and Canada do not support nor function in the extended channels (12ch, 13ch). There is no certification number of Industry Canada for Mini PCI Express Card shown on the enclosure of your Lenovo computer. Instead you will find an indicator label pointing to the location of the IC Certification number on the bottom side of your Lenovo computer. This label will be of the format Contains Transmitter Module: Canada IC: XXXX, where XXXX represents the IC ID that corresponds to your preinstalled WLAN module. II) Preinstalled integrated Bluetooth module:
IC: 4324A-BRCM1043 (Model: BCM92070MD_REF) If you find an indication Contains Transmitter Module: Canada IC:
4324A-BRCM1043 on the label at the bottom side of your computer, your computer integrates the Bluetooth transmitter module. The Bluetooth module is preinstalled by Lenovo, and is not removable by users. III) Low power license-exempt radiocommunication devices (RSS-210):
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and 2. this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. The transmitter devices have been designed to operate with the antennas integrated in Lenovo computer, and having a maximum gain of within 3 dBi. The maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the 5250-5350 MHz, 5470-5725 MHz, and 5725-5825 MHz bands complies with the e.i.r.p. limit in section A9.2 of RSS-210. IV) Exposure of humans to RF fields (RSS-102):
Lenovo computers employ low gain integral antennas that do not emit RF field in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health Canadas Web site at www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb The radiated energy from the antennas connected to the wireless adapters conforms to the IC limit of the RF exposure requirement regarding IC RSS-102, Issue 2 clause 4.2. 3 Numro dhomologation IC I) Modules de rseaux local sans fil pr-install lusine:
IC: 4104A-AR5B95 (Model: AR5B95) IC: 7542A-RT30901T1R (Model: RT3090) Les cartes de rseau local sans fil Express mini-PCI commercialises aux Etats-Unis et au Canada ne prennent pas en charge les canaux tendus (12ch, 13ch) et ne fonctionnent donc pas sur de tels canaux. Le botier de votre ordinateur Lenovo ne comporte pas de numro dhomologation IC (Industry Canada) pour la carte mini-PCI Express ; mais sous votre Lenovo, vous trouverez une tiquette indicatrice pointant vers lemplacement du numro dhomologation IC. Ltiquette se prsente sous la forme Contains Transmitter Module: Canada IC: XXXX o XXXX reprsente lID IC qui correspond au module WLAN prinstall. II) Module Bluetooth intgr prinstall:
IC: 4324A-BRCM1043 (Modle: BCM92070MD_REF) Si la mention Contains Transmitter Module: Canada IC:
4324A-BRCM1043 figure sur ltiquette situe au bas de votre ordinateur, cela signifie que ce dernier intgre le module de transmission Bluetooth. Le module Bluetooth est prinstall par Lenovo et ne peut pas tre retir par les utilisateurs. III) Remarque relative aux appareils de communication radio de faible puissance sans licence (CNR-210):
Le fonctionnement de ce type dappareil est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. Cet appareil ne doit pas perturber les communications radio, et 2. cet appareil doit supporter toute perturbation, y compris les perturbations qui pourraient provoquer son dysfonctionnement. Les priphriques dmission sont conus pour fonctionner avec des antennes intgres aux Lenovo et ayant un gain maximal de moins de 3 dBi. Le gain dantenne maximal pour les priphriques dans les bandes de frquence 5250-5350 MHz, 5470-5725 MHz, et 5725-5825 MHz est conforme la limite p.i.r.e nonce dans la section A9.2 de la CNR-210. IV) Exposition des tres humains aux champs radiolectriques (RF) (CNR-102):
Lordinateur Lenovo utilise des antennes intgrales faible gain qui nmettent pas un champ lectromagntique suprieur aux normes imposes par le Ministre de la sant canadien pour la population. Consultez le Safety Code 6 sur le site Web du Ministre de la sant canadien ladresse www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb. Lnergie mise par les antennes relies aux adaptateurs sans fil respecte la limite dexposition aux radiofrquences telle que dfinie par Industrie Canada dans la clause 4.2 du document CNR-102. 4 Electronic emission notices Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement Note: The compliance of the FCC Part 15 Subpart B for Models: AR5B95, RT3090 was proceeded by certification, thus the FCC ID: PPD-AR5B95, VQF-RT3090-1T1R respectively include both compliances of Part 15 Subpart B and C/E. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult an authorized dealer or service representative for help. Lenovo is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the users authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Responsible Party:
Lenovo (United States) Incorporated 1009 Think Place - Building One Morrisville, NC 27560 Telephone: 1-919-294-5900 Industry Canada Class B Emission Compliance Statement This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Avis de conformit la rglementation dIndustrie Canada Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada. 5 Europe EU Declaration of Conformity Products intended for sale within the European Union are marked with the Conformit Europenne (CE) Marking, which indicates compliance with the applicable Directives and European Norms, and amendments, identified below. For model: BCM92070MD_REF For model: AR5B95 For model: RT3090 English Hereby, Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd., declares that the modem and wireless equipment listed in this section are in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. EU Frequency band restriction for a wireless LAN Mini PCI Express Card This device is restricted to indoor use in the band 2454 to 2483.5 MHz in France. Usage of this device is limited to indoor in the band 5150 to 5350 MHz (channels 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Bulgarian 6 Czech Danish Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. erklrer hermed, at modem og trdlst udstyr, der er nvnt i dette afsnit, overholder de vsentlige krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i EU-direktiv 1999/5/EC. Restriktioner for frekvensbnd i EU for Mini PCI Express-kort til trdlst LAN I Frankrig m denne enhed kun bruges indendrs i frekvensbndet 2454 til 2483,5 MHz. Brug af denne enhed er begrnset til indendrs brug i frekvensbndet 5150 til 5350 MHz
(kanal 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). German Hiermit erklrt Lenovo (Singapur) Pte. Ltd., dass der Modem und die drahtlosen Gerte, die in diesem Abschnitt aufgefhrt sind, die Voraussetzungen und andere relevanten Richtlinien der Direktive 1999/5/EC erfllen. EU-Frequenzbandeinschrnkung fr eine Wireless LAN Mini-PCI-ExpressCard Dieses Gert ist in Frankreich fr die Verwendung im Innenbereich im Frequenzband von 2.454 bis 2.483,5 konzipiert. Die Verwendung dieses Gerts ist im Innenbereich auf das Frequenzband von 5.150 bis 5.350 MHz (Kanle 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64) beschrnkt. 7 Estonian Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. kinnitab selles jaotises nimetatud modemi ja traadita side seadmete vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/E phinuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele muudele asjakohastele stetele. EL-i sagedusvahemiku piirang raadiokohtvrgu mini-PCI-ekspresskaardi kohta Seade on Prantsusmaal lubatud kasutamiseks siseruumides sagedusalas 2454 2483,5 MHz. Seadet on lubatud kasutada siseruumides sagedusalas 51505350 MHz (kanalid 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Spanish En este documento, Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd., declara que el mdem y el equipo inalmbrico que aparecen en esta seccin cumplen los requisitos esenciales y otras exigencias relevantes de la Directiva 1999/5/EC. Restriccin de banda de frecuencia de la UE para una Tarjeta Express Mini PCI de LAN inalmbrica Este dispositivo est diseado para ser utilizado en interiores en la banda de 2454 a 2483,5 MHz en Francia. La utilizacin de este dispositivo est limitada a interiores en la banda de 5150 a 5350 MHz (canales 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Greek 8 French Par la prsente, Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. dclare que le modem et le matriel sans fil rpertoris dans cette section sont conformes aux exigences essentielles ainsi quaux autres dispositions applicables de la Directive 1999/5/
CE. Restriction lie la bande de frquence pour une carte mini-PCI Express pour rseau local sans fil au sein de lUnion Europenne En France, ce priphrique est destin tre utilis uniquement lintrieur, dans la bande de frquence de 2454 2483,5 MHz. Ce priphrique doit tre utilis exclusivement lintrieur, dans la bande de frquence de 5150 5350 MHz (canaux 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Icelandic Hr me lsir Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. v yfir a mtaldi og rlausi bnaurinn sem geti er essum hluta uppfylla allar krfur og nnnur vikomandi kvi tilskipunar 1999/5/EC. ESB Takmarkanir tnisvii rlauss LAN Mini PCI staarnetkorts Frakklandi er etta tki eingngu tla til notkunar innanhss tnisviinu 2454 til 2483,5 MHz. Notkun essa tkis er takmrku vi innanhssnotkun tnisviinu 5150 til 5350 MHz
(rsir 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Italian Hereby, Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd., dichiara che lequipaggiamento modem e wireless elencato in questa sezione conforme ai requisiti essenziali e ad altre disposizioni rilevanti della direttiva 1999/5/EC. Restrizioni UE sulla banda di frequenza per una scheda wireless LAN Mini PCI Express In Francia questo dispositivo destinato allutilizzo in ambienti chiusi nella banda di frequenza compresa tra 2454 e 2483,5 MHz. Lutilizzo di questo dispositivo limitato ad ambienti chiusi in banda compresa tra 5150 e 5350 MHz (canali 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). 9 Latvian Lithuanian Dutch Hierbij verklaart Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd., dat de modem en draadloze apparatuur die in dit gedeelte worden genoemd, voldoen aan de essentile vereisten en andere relevante bepalingen van Directive 1999/5/EC. EU-beperking van frequentieband voor een draadloze LAN Mini PCI Express Card Gebruik van dit apparaat is in Frankrijk beperkt tot binnenshuis gebruik in de band van 2454 tot 2483,5 MHz. Gebruik van dit apparaat is beperkt tot binnenshuis gebruik in de band van 5150 tot 5350 MHz (kanalen 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). 10 Norwegian Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. erklrer herved at modemet og det trdlse utstyret er i samsvar med de viktigste kravene og andre relevante bestemmelser i EU-direktiv 1999/5/EF. Begrensinger for frekvensbnd i EU for et Mini PCI Express-kort for trdlst lokalnett (LAN) Denne enheten er beregnet p innendrs bruk i frekvensbndet 2454 til 2483,5 MHz i Frankrike. Denne enheten er begrenset til innendrs bruk i frekvensbndet 5150 til 5350 MHz (kanal 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Hungarian Polish 11 Portuguese A Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd., declara por este meio que o modem e o equipamento sem fios listado nesta seco se encontram em conformidade com os requisitos essenciais e com outras provises relevantes da Directiva 1999/5/EC. Restrio de frequncia de bandas da EU para placas Mini PCI Express Card de rede local sem fios Na Frana, este dispositivo destina-se apenas a utilizao no interior na banda de 2454 a 2483,5 MHz. A utilizao deste dispositivo est limitada utilizao no interior, na banda de 5150 a 5350 MHz (canais 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). Romanian Slovenian 12 Slovakian Finnish Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. ilmoittaa tten, ett tss jaksossa mainittu modeemi ja langaton laitteisto ovat direktiivin 1999/5/EY pakollisten vaatimusten ja direktiivin muiden asiaankuuluvien mrysten mukaiset. Taajuusalueita koskeva Euroopan unionin asettama rajoitus Wireless LAN Mini PCI Express -kortille Ranskassa tm laite on tarkoitettu kytettvksi sistiloissa taajuusalueella 2454 -
2483,5 MHz. Tm laite on tarkoitettu kytettvksi sistiloissa taajuusalueella 5150 - 5320 MHz
(kanavat 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60 ja 64). Swedish Hrmed intygar Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd att det modem och den trdlsa utrustning som anges i detta avsnitt verensstmmer med vsentliga krav och andra relevanta bestmmelser i direktiv 1999/5/EG. Frekvensomrdesbegrnsning inom EU fr ett PCI Express-minikort fr radio-LAN I Frankrike r enheten avsedd fr inomhusbruk i frekvensomrdet 2454 till 2483,5 MHz. Enheten r avsedd fr inomhusbruk i frekvensomrdet 5150 till 5350 MHz (kanal 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64). 13 For model: BCM92070MD_REF 14 For model: AR5B95 Declaration of Conformity We, the undersigned, Company Address, City Country Phone number Fax number Atheros Communications, Inc. 5480 Great America Parkway, Santa Clara, CA 95054 U.S.A. 1-408-773-5200 1-408-773-9940 certify and declare under our sole responsibility that the following equipment:
Product description / Intended use EU / EFTA member states intended for use Member states with restrictive use Manufacturer Type 802.11n Wireless LAN PCIe Minicard All Member Countries See Enclosed User Instructions Regarding operation in 2.4GHz bands HON HAI Precision IND.CO.,LTD.. AR5B95 is tested to and conforms with the essential requirements for protection of health and the safety of the user and any other person and Electromagnetic Compatibility, as included in following standards:
Standard EN 301 489-17 EN 60950-1 EN 50385 Issue date Version 2.1.1 2006 + A11 : 2009 2002 and is tested to and conforms with the essential radio test suites so that it effectively uses the frequency spectrum allocated to terrestrial/space radio communication and orbital resources so to as to avoid harmful interference, as included in following standards:
Standard EN 300 328 Issue date Version 1.7.1 and therefore complies with the essential requirements and provisions of the Directive 1999/5/EC of the European Parliament and of the council of March 9, 1999 on Radio equipment and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity and with the provisions of Annex IV (Conformity Assessment procedure referred to in article 10). The device complies with the RF Exposure Requirement 1999/519/EC, COUNCIL RECOMMENDATION of 12 July 1999 on the limitation of exposure of the general public to electromagnetic fields (0 Hz to 300 GHz). The technical documentation as required by the Conformity Assessment procedure is kept at the following address:
Company Address, City Country Phone number Fax number Contact Email Atheros GmbH Braunschweiger Str. 8, 45886 Gelsenkirchen Germany
+49-209-1550955
+49 209 1550956 Peter Grabienski Peter.Grabienski@Atheros.com AR5B95 Technical File ref. nr. Drawn up in Santa Clara Date 8 Sep 2010 Name and position Michael Green, Manager Global Product Compliance Atheros Communications, Inc. 5480 Great America Parkway Santa Clara CA 95054 t 408 773 5200 f 408-773-9940 www.atheros.com 15 For model: RT3090 R&TTE Directive Declaration of Conformity Date: August 16, 2010 We, Ralink Technology Corporation, Hereby, declare that our product with detail below has fully fulfilled the requirement of European R&TTE directive 1999/5/EC. This device will be sold in the following countries:
Belgium, Denmark, Germany, Greece, Spain, France, Ireland, Italy, Luxemburg, Netherlands, Austria, Portugal, Finland, Sweden, UK, Switzerland, Norway, Iceland, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Estonia, Hungary, Latvia, Lithuania, Malta, Slovakia, Poland, Slovenia, Bulgaria, Romania. Product Name: 11b/g/n 1T1R WLAN Mini Card Brand Name: Ralink Model / Type Name: RT3090 The following European standards for essential requirements have been followed:
Spectrum : EN 300 328 V1.7.1 (2006-10) EMC : EN 301 489-1 V.1.6.1 (2005-09)/ EN 301 489-17 V.1.2.1 (2002-08) Safety (LVD) : EN 60950-1:2006 + A11:2009 Safety (EMF) : EN 50392: 2002 COUNCIL RECOMMENDATION Directive 1999/519/EC. Furthermore, the in-process quality control procedure as well as the manufacturing process has fulfilled the requirement defined in ISO. The technical document as well as the test reports will be kept for a period at least 10 years after the last product has been manufactured at the disposal of the relevant national authorities of any Member State for inspection. Detail contact information for this declaration has been listed below as the window of any issues relevant for this product. tcatnoC rerutcafunaM Signature :
tcatnoC retropmI Company : Ralink Technology Corporation Name/Title : Rex Huang Address : 5F., No.36, Taiyuan St., Jhubei City, Hsinchu County 302, Taiwan, R.O.C. Tel. No. : +886-3-5600868 Fax No. : +886-3-5600898 E-Mail : rex_huang@ralinktech.com.tw 16 Notice for users in Croatia For model: BCM92070MD_REF 17 For model: AR5B95 18 For model: RT3090 19
Notice for users in Taiwan For models: BCM92070MD_REF, AR5B95, RT3090 20
21 For models: BCM92070MD_REF, AR5B95, RT3090 22 L e n o v o C h n a i 2 0 1 0 New World. New Thinking. www.lenovo.com TM
1 2 3 4 | Class II permisive chage req. | Cover Letter(s) | 34.49 KiB | June 06 2012 / July 06 2012 |
Huawei Technologies Co.,Ltd Requesting Class II permissive change for HSPA+ Module with FCC ID:
Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia MD 21046 C.C.: Telefication B.V Dept. FCC TCB Subject:
QISEM820W To Whom It May Concern:
The purpose of this letter is to request a Class II Permissive change for FCC ID: QIS-
QISEM820W There is no hardware or electrical modification made to the applying transmitter itself. The major change filed under this application is :
Change #1: Add one new same type antenna with antenna gain of 1dBi@850MHz and 2dBi @1900MHz. to the original 3G modular Change #2: Alternate a mobile configuration Note 1The EUT is a HSPA+ Module (Model name: EM820W) which built in the Access Router(Model name: AR1220VW; AR1220W; AR1220W-S) with function of 802.11 b/g/n20/n40. And The access router also granted on10/26/2011 and bear the FCC ID: QIS-AR1220WIFI. Note 2: The original dipole antenna with gain is 4.28dBi@850MHz and 3dBi@1900MHz. of the 3G modular Please contact me if you have any questions or need further information regarding this application. Best Regards Zhang xinghai EMC Laboratory Manager Huawei Technologies Co.,Ltd 2012-06-05
1 2 3 4 | Confid. | Cover Letter(s) | 62.24 KiB | June 06 2012 / July 06 2012 |
FCC, Request for non-disclosure RF_501, Issue 5 Date: 10-Aug-09 Page 1 of 1 Company Name: Huawei Technologies Co.,Ltd Address:
City:
Country:
Bantian, Longgang District Shenzhen China To: Telefication B.V., Dept. FCC TCB Edisonstraat 12A 6902 PK ZEVENAAR The Netherlands Subject: Request for confidentiality FCC ID: QISEM820W Reference number: ######
Dear FCC TCB, 1. Long-Term Confidentiality Pursuant to 47 CFR Section 0.459(a) & (b), we hereby requests non-disclosure and confidential treatment of the following materials submitted in support of FCC certification application:
Bill(s) of Material Block Diagrams Operational Description Schematic Diagrams Tune-up Procedure Above materials contain secrets, proprietary and technical information, which would customarily be guarded from competitors under 47 CFR, section 0.457(d)(2). Disclosure or publication or any portion of this company confidential material to other parties could cause substantial competitive harm and provide unjustified benefits for competitors. 2. Short-Term Confidentiality (STC) Pursuant to Public Notice DA 04-1705 of the Commissions policy, in order to comply with the marketing regulations in 47 CFR 2.803 and the importation rules in 47 CFR 2.1204, applicant hereby requests Short-Term Confidential treatment of the following materials (note 1):
Internal Photos Users Manual Test Set-up Photos External Photos Justification: This document contains detailed system and equipment description is considered as proprietary information in operation of the equipment. The public disclosure of above documents might be harmful to our company and would give competitor unfair advantage in the market. Planned Release Date STC: 90 days (notes 2, 3, 4, 5) Date: 2012-06-05 Name and signature of applicant: Zhang Xinghai Notes:
1) A document or type of document can only have ONE type of confidentiality!
2) Short-Term confidentiality is in principle for 45 days from date of grant; it can be extended max 3 times (total time 180 days max.)!
3) FCC must be informed when marketing begins earlier. 4) Release takes place automatically thus extension must be requested in time. Telefication does not remind you of this!
5) Request for extension or for release must be received by Telefication at least 7 days before date of actual marketing or before expiration of the STC period
1 2 3 4 | Decl. of Auth | Cover Letter(s) | 21.08 KiB | June 06 2012 / July 06 2012 |
RF_160, Issue 03 Huawei Technologies Co.,Ltd Bantian, Longgang District Shenzhen China Declaration of Authorization We Name:
Address:
City:
Country:
Declare that:
Name Representative of agent: Cathy Wang Agent Company name: Neutron Engineering, Inc. Address: No.3 Jinshagang 1st Road, Shixia, Dalang Town City: Dong Guan Country: China is authorized to apply for Class II permissive change Certification of the following product(s):
Product description: HSPA+ Module Type designation: EM820W Trademark:
HUAWEI on our behalf. Date:
City:
Name:
Function:
Signature:
EMC Laboratory Manager Zhang Xinghai 2012-06-05 Shenzhen
1 2 3 4 | Model Dec. | Cover Letter(s) | 12.97 KiB | June 06 2012 / July 06 2012 |
Huawei Technologies Co.,Ltd Model Declaration Letter We, the undersigning company Company Name: Huawei Technologies Co.,Ltd Address: Bantian, Longgang District City: Shenzhen Hereby confirm that the following products:
Product description: Access Router Type designation: AR1220VW; AR1220W; AR1220W-S Brand: HUAWEI marketing purpose. Company Name: Huawei Technologies Co.,Ltd Address: Bantian, Longgang District, Shenzhen Telephone +86-755-2878-1879 Fax No.: +86-755-2878-1889 E-mail: hwzhangxh@huawei.com Signature: ________________________ Name: Zhang Xinghai 1. AR1220W-S and AR1220W are electrically equal and only differ in the packing of products because of marketing purpose. 2. AR1220VW and AR1220W differ in that AR1220VW added the speech function because of
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2012-06-07 | 1852.4 ~ 1907.6 | PCB - PCS Licensed Transmitter | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment |
2 | 2012-04-13 | 1852.4 ~ 1907.6 | PCB - PCS Licensed Transmitter | |
3 | 2011-08-29 | 1852.4 ~ 1907.6 | PCB - PCS Licensed Transmitter | |
4 | 2011-03-15 | 1852.4 ~ 1907.6 | PCB - PCS Licensed Transmitter |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 4 | Effective |
2012-06-07
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
2012-04-13
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
2011-08-29
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
2011-03-15
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Huawei Technologies Co.,Ltd
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0007419963
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Physical Address |
Administration Building, Headquarters of Huawei
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
Shenzhen
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
Shenzhen, N/A
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
China
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 2 3 4 | TCB Application Email Address |
c******@telefication.com
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
t******@babt.com
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
c******@ccsemc.com
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
T******@TIMCOENGR.COM
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 | TCB Scope |
B1: Commercial mobile radio services equipment in the following 47 CFR Parts 20, 22 (cellular), 24,25 (below 3 GHz) & 27
|
||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Grantee Code |
QIS
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Equipment Product Code |
EM820W
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Name |
Z****** X****
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Telephone Number |
+86-7********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Fax Number |
+86-7********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
z******@huawei.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Firm Name |
Neutron Engineering, Inc.
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Name |
S****** L********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Physical Address |
China
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
c******@btl.org.cn
|
|||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 4 | No | |||||
1 2 3 4 | If so, specify the short-term confidentiality release date (MM/DD/YYYY format) | 09/06/2012 | ||||
1 2 3 4 | 02/25/2012 | |||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Equipment Class | PCB - PCS Licensed Transmitter | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | HSPA+ Module | ||||
1 2 3 4 | HSPA+ MODULE | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Yes | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Single Modular Approval | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Purpose / Application is for | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Grant Comments | Output power listed is conducted. This device is to be used in mobile or fixed applications only. Antenna gain including cable loss must not exceed 4.28 dBi in the 850 MHz Cellular band and 3 dBi in the PCS 1900 MHz band, for the purpose of satisfying the requirements of 2.1043 and 2.1091, 22-H, 24-E. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any antenna or transmitter. The final product operating with this transmitter must include operating instructions and antenna installation instructions, for end-users and installers to satisfy RF exposure compliance requirements. Compliance of this device in all final product configurations is the responsibility of the Grantee. Installation of this device into specific final products may require the submission of a Class II permissive change application containing data pertinent to RF Exposure, spurious emissions, ERP/EIRP, and host/module authentication, or new application if appropriate. This device contains GSM functions that are not operational in the U.S. Territories. This filing is only applicable for U.S. operations. (Date: 06/06/2012) Class II Permissive Change: This Class II Permissive Change incorporates the module into a new host configuration of FCC ID: QIS-AR1220WIFI. | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Output power listed is conducted. This device is to be used in mobile or fixed applications only. Antenna gain including cable loss must not exceed 4.28 dBi in the 850 MHz Cellular band and 3 dBi in the PCS 1900 MHz band, for the purpose of satisfying the requirements of 2.1043 and 2.1091, 22-H, 24-E. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any antenna or transmitter. The final product operating with this transmitter must include operating instructions and antenna installation instructions, for end-users and installers to satisfy RF exposure compliance requirements. Compliance of this device in all final product configurations is the responsibility of the Grantee. Installation of this device into specific final products may require the submission of a Class II permissive change application containing data pertinent to RF Exposure, spurious emissions, ERP/EIRP, and host/module authentication, or new application if appropriate. This device contains GSM functions that are not operational in the U.S. Territories. This filing is only applicable for U.S. operations. (Date: 12/14/2010) Class II Permissive Change: This Class II Permissive Change incorporates the module into a new host configuration Novero laptop computer model NPPC-1. Maximum ERP Output Power Part 22H: is 0.275W. Maximum EIRP Output Power 24E: is 0.380W. The highest reported SAR value for this device is <0.1 W/kg. | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Class II Permissive Change to add specific portable host with collocation. Output power listed is conducted. Antenna gain including cable loss must not exceed 4.28 dBi in the 850 MHz Cellular band and 3 dBi in the PCS 1900 MHz band, for the purpose of satisfying the requirements of 2.1043 and 2.1091, 22-H, 24-E. For Mobile RF Exposure configurations, the antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20cm from all persons. The final product operating with this transmitter must include operating instructions and antenna installation instructions, for end-users and installers to satisfy RF exposure compliance requirements. Compliance of this device in all final product configurations is the responsibility of the Grantee. Installation of this device into specific final products may require the submission of a Class II permissive change application containing data pertinent to RF Exposure, spurious emissions, ERP/EIRP, and host/module authentication, or new application if appropriate. This device contains GSM functions that are not operational in the U.S. Territories. This filing is only applicable for U.S. operations. Highest reported SAR for this device is 1.34 W/kg. | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Output power listed is conducted. This device is to be used in mobile or fixed applications only. Antenna gain including cable loss must not exceed 4.28 dBi in the 850 MHz Cellular band and 3 dBi in the PCS 1900 MHz band, for the purpose of satisfying the requirements of 2.1043 and 2.1091, 22-H, 24-E. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any antenna or transmitter. The final product operating with this transmitter must include operating instructions and antenna installation instructions, for end-users and installers to satisfy RF exposure compliance requirements. Compliance of this device in all final product configurations is the responsibility of the Grantee. Installation of this device into specific final products may require the submission of a Class II permissive change application containing data pertinent to RF Exposure, spurious emissions, ERP/EIRP, and host/module authentication, or new application if appropriate. This device contains GSM functions that are not operational in the U.S. Territories. This filing is only applicable for U.S. operations. (Date: 12/14/2010) Class II Permissive Change: This Class II Permissive Change incorporates the module into a new host configuration Lenovo laptop computer model 1038. Maximum ERP Output Power Part 22H: is 0.433W. Maximum EIRP Output Power 24E: is 0.500W. The highest reported SAR for the device is 0.34 W/kg. | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Firm Name |
BTL Inc.
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
TUV SUD Certification and testing (China) Co., Ltd
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
SGS TAIWAN LTD.
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
Compliance Certification Services Inc.
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 | Name |
D**** D****
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
X******** L******
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
N****** B****
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
H****** L********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 | Telephone Number |
86769******** Extension:
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
86-51******** Extension:
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
886-2******** Extension:
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
886-2******** Extension:
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 | Fax Number |
+8676********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
86-51********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
886-2********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
886-2********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
d******@newbtl.org.cn
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
x******@tuv-sud.cn
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
n******@sgs.com
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
h******@sgs.com
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 22H | 824.2 | 848.8 | 1.8 | 5 ppm | 300KGXW | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 2 | 22H | 824.2 | 848.8 | 0.5 | 5 ppm | 300KG7W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 3 | 22H | 826.4 | 846.6 | 0.19 | 5 ppm | 4M20F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 4 | 24E | 1850.2 | 1909.8 | 0.79 | 3 ppm | 300KGXW | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 5 | 24E | 1850.2 | 1909.8 | 0.36 | 3 ppm | 300KG7W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 6 | 24E | 1852.4 | 1907.6 | 0.22 | 3 ppm | 4M20F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 22H | 824.2 | 848.8 | 1.8 | 0.05 ppm | 300KGXW | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 2 | 22H | 824.2 | 848.8 | 0.5 | 0.05 ppm | 300KG7W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 3 | 22H | 826.4 | 846.6 | 0.19 | 0.05 ppm | 4M20F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 4 | 24E | 1850.2 | 1909.8 | 0.79 | 0.03 ppm | 300KGXW | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 5 | 24E | 1850.2 | 1909.8 | 0.36 | 0.03 ppm | 300KG7W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 6 | 24E | 1852.4 | 1907.6 | 0.22 | 0.03 ppm | 4M20F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 1 | 22H | 824.2 | 848.8 | 1.8 | 0.05 ppm | 300KGXW | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 2 | 22H | 824.2 | 848.8 | 0.5 | 0.05 ppm | 300KG7W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 3 | 22H | 826.4 | 846.6 | 0.19 | 0.05 ppm | 4M20F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 4 | 24E | 1850.2 | 1909.8 | 0.79 | 0.03 ppm | 300KGXW | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 5 | 24E | 1850.2 | 1909.8 | 0.36 | 0.03 ppm | 300KG7W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 6 | 24E | 1852.4 | 1907.6 | 0.22 | 0.03 ppm | 4M20F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 1 | 22H | 824.2 | 848.8 | 1.8 | 0.05 ppm | 300KGXW | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 2 | 22H | 824.2 | 848.8 | 0.5 | 0.05 ppm | 300KG7W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 3 | 22H | 826.4 | 846.6 | 0.19 | 0.05 ppm | 4M20F9W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 4 | 24E | 1850.2 | 1909.8 | 0.79 | 0.03 ppm | 300KGXW | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 5 | 24E | 1850.2 | 1909.8 | 0.36 | 0.03 ppm | 300KG7W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 6 | 24E | 1852.4 | 1907.6 | 0.22 | 0.03 ppm | 4M20F9W |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC